Home

Owner`s Manual

Contents

1. 32238858 55 32 E x METER neun INPUT 4 32 See 520 INSERT METER NSER eve MERT er METER tion SOLO 4BAND OUTPUT PEAK Out Meter METER PAN on EQ 4 DELAY INSERT 1 0 m METER INSERT se Om 1 12 ea 4BAND Wen e iw mum STEREOR AD AD 1 12 H H Eo En 40 777 Same as stereo master L XK x t PAN NU Keyin i PEAK 12h Group 1 12 13 24 LFE Gain Reduction METER METER Out Meter SIGNAL AUX 18 Gain Reduction Out Meter x2 METER METER 2 x o vo PRE POST ON AUX ee D u Toro ceo 9 METER TO ae Ye o COMP io INSERT NSER INSERT GAIN e fomo oeo METER ON LEVEL 26 4 Keyin o o BUS 1 8 Self or S ATTH 4BAND OUTPUT 2 Es i elf or Stereo Link ag DIRECT OUT 4 32 EQ DELAY o 2TR IN uU CHI
2. CHANNEL9 High Mid Low High Mid Low 0 NO ASSIGN 59 NO ASSIGN 1 EQ G HIGH H INPUT1 60 NO ASSIGN 2 EQ G HIGH H INPUT2 61 NO ASSIGN 3 EQ G HIGH H INPUT3 62 NO ASSIGN 4 EQ G HIGH H INPUT4 63 NO ASSIGN 5 EQ G HIGH H INPUTS 64 F HIGH INPUT1 6 EQ G HIGH H INPUT6 65 EQ F HIGH INPUT2 7 EQ G HIGH H 66 EQ F HIGH INPUT3 8 EQ G HIGH H INPUT8 67 EQ F HIGH INPUT4 9 EQ G HIGH H INPUT9 68 EQ F HIGH INPUTS 10 EQ G HIGH H INPUT10 69 EQ F HIGH INPUT6 11 EQ G HIGH H INPUT11 70 EQ F HIGH 12 G HIGH H INPUT12 71 EQ F HIGH INPUT8 13 EQ G HIGH H INPUT13 72 EQ F HIGH INPUT9 14 EQ G HIGH H INPUT14 73 EQ F HIGH INPUT10 15 EQ G HIGH H INPUT15 74 EQ F HIGH INPUT11 16 EQ G HIGH H INPUT16 75 EQ F HIGH INPUT12 17 EQ G HIGH H INPUT17 76 EQ F HIGH INPUT13 18 EQ G HIGH H INPUT18 77 EQ F HIGH INPUT14 19 EQ G HIGH H INPUT19 78 EQ F HIGH INPUT15 20 EQ G HIGH H INPUT20 79 EQ F HIGH INPUT16 21 EQ G HIGH H INPUT21 80 EQ F HIGH INPUT17 22 EQ G HIGH H INPUT22 81 EQ F HIGH INPUT18 23 EQ G HIGH H INPUT23 82 EQ F HIGH INPUT19 24 EQ G HIGH H INPUT24
3. CHANNEL12 High Mid Low High Mid Low 0 NO ASSIGN 59 NO ASSIGN 1 ATT H INPUT25 60 NO ASSIGN 2 EQ ATT H INPUT26 61 NO ASSIGN 3 EQ ATTH INPUT27 62 NO ASSIGN 4 EQ ATT H INPUT28 63 NO ASSIGN 5 EQ ATTH INPUT29 64 EQ HPF ON INPUT25 6 EQ ATT H INPUT30 65 EQ HPF ON INPUT26 7 EQ ATT H INPUT31 66 EQ HPF ON INPUT27 8 EQ ATT H INPUT32 67 EQ HPF ON INPUT28 9 EQ ATTH ST INIL 68 EQ HPF ON INPUT29 10 EQ ATT H ST INTR 69 EQ HPF ON INPUT30 11 EQ ATT H ST IN2L 70 EQ HPF ON INPUT31 12 ATT H ST IN2R 71 EQ HPF ON INPUT32 13 EQ ATT H ST IN3L 72 EQ HPF ON ST IN1 14 EQ ATT H ST IN3R 73 EQ HPF ON ST IN2 15 EQ ATTH ST INAL 74 EQ HPF ON ST IN3 16 EQ ATTH ST IN4R 75 EQ HPFON ST IN4 17 NO ASSIGN 76 NO ASSIGN 18 NO ASSIGN 77 NO ASSIGN 19 NO ASSIGN 78 NO ASSIGN 20 NO ASSIGN 79 NO ASSIGN 21 NO ASSIGN 80 NO ASSIGN 22 NO ASSIGN 81 NO ASSIGN 23 NO ASSIGN 82 NO ASSIGN 24 NO ASSIGN 83 NO ASSIGN 25 NO ASSIGN 84 NO ASSIGN 26 NO ASSIGN 85 NO ASSIGN 27 NO ASSIGN 86 NO ASSIGN 28 NO ASSIGN 87 NO ASSIGN 29 NO ASSIGN 88 NO ASSIGN 30 NO ASSIGN 89 EQ LPF ON INPUT25 31 NO A
4. CHANNEL11 High Mid Low High Mid Low 0 NO ASSIGN 59 NO ASSIGN 1 EQ ATTH INPUT1 60 NO ASSIGN 2 EQ ATT H INPUT2 61 NO ASSIGN 3 EQ ATT H INPUT3 62 NO ASSIGN 4 EQ ATTH INPUT4 63 NO ASSIGN 5 EQ ATT H INPUTS 64 EQ HPF ON INPUT1 6 EQ ATT H INPUT6 65 EQ HPF ON INPUT2 7 EQ ATT H 66 EQ HPF ON INPUT3 8 EQ ATTH INPUT8 67 EQ HPF ON INPUT4 9 EQ ATT H INPUT9 68 EQ HPF ON INPUTS 10 EQ ATT H INPUT10 69 EQ HPF ON INPUT6 11 EQ ATT H INPUT11 70 EQ HPF ON 12 INPUT12 71 EQ HPF ON INPUT8 13 EQ ATT H INPUT13 72 EQ HPF ON INPUT9 14 EQ ATT H INPUT14 73 EQ HPF ON INPUT10 15 EQ ATT H INPUT15 74 EQ HPF ON INPUT11 16 EQ ATTH INPUT16 75 EQ HPF ON INPUT12 17 EQ ATT H INPUT17 76 EQ HPF ON INPUT13 18 EQ ATT H INPUT18 77 EQ HPF ON INPUT14 19 EQ ATT H INPUT19 78 EQ HPF ON INPUT15 20 EQ ATT H INPUT20 79 EQ HPF ON INPUT16 21 EQ ATT H INPUT21 80 EQ HPF ON INPUT17 22 EQ ATT H INPUT22 81 EQ HPF ON INPUT18 23 EQ ATT H INPUT23 82 EQ HPF ON INPUT19 24 EQ ATT H INPUT24 83 EQ HPF ON INPUT20 25 NO ASSIGN 84 EQ HPF ON INPUT21 26 NO ASSIGN 85 EQ HPF ON INPUT22 27 NO
5. CHANNEL14 High Mid Low High Mid Low 0 NO ASSIGN 59 NO ASSIGN 1 SURROUND LFEH INPUT25 60 NO ASSIGN 2 SURROUND LFEH INPUT26 61 NO ASSIGN 3 SURROUND LFEH INPUT27 62 NO ASSIGN 4 SURROUND INPUT28 63 NO ASSIGN 5 SURROUND LFEH INPUT29 64 SURROUND DIVF INPUT25 6 SURROUND LFEH INPUT30 65 SURROUND DIVF INPUT26 7 SURROUND LFEH INPUT31 66 SURROUND DIVF INPUT27 8 SURROUND LFEH INPUT32 67 SURROUND DIVF INPUT28 9 SURROUND LFEH ST INIL 68 SURROUND DIVF INPUT29 10 SURROUND LFEH ST INIR 69 SURROUND DIVF INPUT30 11 SURROUND LFEH ST IN2L 70 SURROUND DIVF INPUT31 12 SURROUND LFEH ST IN2R 71 SURROUND DIVF INPUT32 13 SURROUND LFEH ST IN3L 72 SURROUND DIVF ST INTL 14 SURROUND LFEH ST IN3R 73 SURROUND DIVF ST INTR 15 SURROUND LFEH ST INAL 74 SURROUND DIVF ST IN2L 16 SURROUND LFEH ST IN4R 75 SURROUND DIVF ST IN2R 17 NO ASSIGN 76 SURROUND DIVF ST IN3L 18 NO ASSIGN 77 SURROUND DIVF ST IN3R 19 NO ASSIGN 78 SURROUND DIVF ST INAL 20 NO ASSIGN 79 SURROUND DIVF ST INAR 21 NO ASSIGN 80 NO ASSIGN 22 NO ASSIGN 81 NO ASSIGN 23 NO ASSIGN 82 NO ASSIGN 24 NO ASSIG
6. OOO 5155 iu see ou connectors eee E HHE E E 3 E Bee ji INPUT connector PHONES jack In this system the 01V96 with an optional I O card MY8 AT MY16 AT MY8 AE etc installed in the slot is connected to a computer based DAW Digital Audio Workstation The 01V96 can provide audio input and output for the DAW If you connect the 01V96 and the computer via USB the 01V96 s Remote function enables you to control the DAW s locate and transport functions and change the parameters 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 40 Chapter 4 Connections and Setup Wordclock Connections and Settings About Wordclock Digital audio equipment must be synchronized when digital audio signals are transferred from one device to another Even if both devices use identical sampling rates digital signals may not transfer correctly or audible noise or unwanted clicks may occur if the digital audio processing circuits inside each digital audio device are not synchronized with each other Wor
7. CHANNEL15 High Mid Low High Mid Low 0 NO ASSIGN 59 NO ASSIGN 1 SURROUND LR INPUT1 60 NO ASSIGN 2 SURROUND LR INPUT2 61 NO ASSIGN 3 SURROUND LR INPUT3 62 NO ASSIGN 4 SURROUND LR INPUT4 63 NO ASSIGN 5 SURROUND LR INPUTS 64 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT1 6 SURROUND LR INPUT6 65 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT2 7 SURROUND LR 66 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT3 8 SURROUND LR INPUT8 67 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT4 9 SURROUND LR INPUT9 68 SURROUND WIDTH INPUTS 10 SURROUND LR INPUT10 69 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT6 11 SURROUND LR INPUT11 70 SURROUND WIDTH 12 SURROUND LR INPUT12 71 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT8 13 SURROUND LR INPUT13 72 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT9 14 SURROUND LR INPUT14 73 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT10 15 SURROUND LR INPUT15 74 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT11 16 SURROUND LR INPUT16 75 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT12 17 SURROUND LR INPUT17 76 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT13 18 SURROUND LR INPUT18 77 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT14 19 SURROUND LR INPUT19 78 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT15 20 SURROUND LR INPUT20 79 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT16 21 SURROUND LR INPUT21 80 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT17 22 SURROUND LR INPUT22 81 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT18 23 SURROUND LR INPUT23 82 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT19 24
8. DIGITAL 2TR OUT DIGITAL IN Master recorder connector connector eum ZTR IN DIGITAL DIGITAL gogo connector T isis 0 connector goog Qood 5 Oooo c EE ua Tip To monitor the master recorder s playback signals you can also connect the analog output of the master recorder to the 01 V96 2TR IN connector In this way you can quickly switch the monitoring signal using the Monitor Source selector in the MONITOR OUT section Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch In Patch page appears PRTCH Initial Data 5111 STI2 STIS STI4 _CHI CHi Q Iu Eu 9 9 INPUT PATCH INPUT 5 lt IN PATCH AA INPUT INS Tj 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 64 Chapter 5 Tutorial 3 Move the cursor to the 2L parameter box the STEREO INPUT section rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to select 2TD L then press ENTER In the same way move the cursor to the 2R parameter box in the
9. Monitoring system 2TR IN connector E 2TR OUT connector m B gag goog ef eg MONITOR OUT SSH 30E Sonate connectors I Guitar PHONES jack In this system the 01V96 with an optional AD card MY8 AD MY8 AD96 etc installed in the slot is used as a keyboard mixer or sound re enforcement mixer Up to 24 analog channels including Inputs 1 16 and slot channels are available for mixing Tip You can adjust the gain of the AD card channels by setting the DIP switches on the card For more information see your AD card documentation 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual dnjas pue suondauu0D ES 38 Chapter 4 Connections and Setup Configuring a recording system with a hard disk recorder Computer HDR Hard Disk Recorder MIDI OUT TO HOST USB port MIDI IN Effects processor 2TR IN connector OMNI OUT connector 2TR OUT connector Synthesizer poo ood ooo
10. CHANNEL6 High Mid Low High Mid Low 0 NO ASSIGN 59 NO ASSIGN 1 GLO MIDH INPUT25 60 NO ASSIGN 2 GLO MIDH INPUT26 61 NO ASSIGN 3 EQ GLO MIDH INPUT27 62 NO ASSIGN 4 EQ GLO MIDH INPUT28 63 NO ASSIGN 5 EQ GLO MIDH INPUT29 64 EQ F LO MID INPUT25 6 EQ GLO MIDH INPUT30 65 EQ F LO MID INPUT26 7 EQ GLO MIDH INPUT31 66 EQ F LO MID INPUT27 8 EQ GLO MIDH INPUT32 67 EQ F LO MID INPUT28 9 EQ GLO MIDH ST INT 68 EQ F LO MID INPUT29 10 EQ GLO MIDH ST IN2 69 EQ F LO MID INPUT30 11 EQ GLO MIDH ST IN3 70 EQ F LO MID INPUT31 12 GLO MIDH ST IN4 71 EQ F LO MID INPUT32 13 NO ASSIGN 72 EQ F LO MID ST IN1 14 NO ASSIGN 73 EQ F LO MID ST IN2 15 NO ASSIGN 74 EQ F LO MID ST IN3 16 NO ASSIGN 75 EQ F LO MID ST IN4 17 NO ASSIGN 76 NO ASSIGN 18 NO ASSIGN 77 NO ASSIGN 19 NO ASSIGN 78 NO ASSIGN 20 NO ASSIGN 79 NO ASSIGN 21 NO ASSIGN 80 NO ASSIGN 22 NO ASSIGN 81 NO ASSIGN 23 NO ASSIGN 82 NO ASSIGN 24 NO ASSIGN 83 NO ASSIGN 25 NO ASSIGN 84 NO ASSIGN 26 NO ASSIGN 85 NO ASSIGN 27 NO ASSIGN 86 NO ASSIGN 28 NO ASSIGN 87 NO ASSIGN 29 NO ASSIGN 88 NO ASSIGN 30 NO ASSIGN 89 EQ Q LO MID INPUT25 31 NO ASSIGN 90 EQ Q LO MID INPUT26
11. USER DEFINED KEYS Function Display 52 Input MUTE Group Enable IN Mute Group O Function Display 53 Input MUTE Group Enable P IN Mute Group P 0 No Assign No Assign 54 Output Fader Group Enable Q OutFader Group Q 1 Scene MEM Recall 1 Scene 1 Recall 55 Output Fader Group Enable R OutFader Group R 2 Scene MEM Recall 1 Scene 1 Recall 56 Output Fader Group Enable S OutFader Group S 3 Scene MEM Recall No XX Scene XX Recall 57 Output Fader Group Enable T OutFader Group T 4 Effect 1 Lib Recall 1 Fx1 Lib 1 Recall 58 Output MUTE Group Enable U Out Mute Group U 5 Effect 1 Lib Recall 1 Fx1 Lib 1 Recall 59 Output MUTE Group Enable V Out Mute Group V 6 Effect 1 Lib Recall No XX Fx1 LibXXX RCL 60 Output MUTE Group Enable W Out Mute Group W 7 Effect 2 Lib Recall 1 Fx2 Lib 1 Recall 61 Output MUTE Group Enable X Out Mute Group X 8 Effect 2 Lib Recall 1 Fx2 Lib 1 Recall 62 Input Fader Group Assign X IN Fader Assign X 9 Effect 2 Lib Recall No XX Fx2 LibXXX RCL 63 Input Mute Group Assign X IN Mute Assign X 10 Effect 3 Lib Recall 1 Fx3 Lib 1 Recall 64 Input EQ Group Assign X IN EQ Assign x 11 Effect 3 Lib Recall 1 Fx3 Lib 1 Recall 65 Input COMP Group Assign X IN COMP Assign x 12 Effect 3 Lib R
12. High Mid Low 59 NO ASSIGN 60 NO ASSIGN 61 NO ASSIGN 62 NO ASSIGN 63 NO ASSIGN 64 F HIGH INPUT25 65 EQ F HIGH INPUT26 66 EQ F HIGH INPUT27 67 EQ F HIGH INPUT28 68 EQ F HIGH INPUT29 69 EQ F HIGH INPUT30 70 EQ F HIGH INPUT31 71 EQ F HIGH INPUT32 72 EQ F HIGH ST IN1 73 EQ F HIGH ST IN2 74 EQ F HIGH ST IN3 75 EQ F HIGH ST IN4 76 NO ASSIGN 77 NO ASSIGN 78 NO ASSIGN 79 NO ASSIGN 80 NO ASSIGN 81 NO ASSIGN 82 NO ASSIGN 83 NO ASSIGN 84 NO ASSIGN 85 NO ASSIGN 86 NO ASSIGN 87 NO ASSIGN 88 NO ASSIGN 89 EQ Q HIGH INPUT25 90 Q HIGH INPUT26 91 EQ Q HIGH INPUT27 92 EQ Q HIGH INPUT28 93 EQ Q HIGH INPUT29 94 EQ Q HIGH INPUT3O 95 EQ Q HIGH INPUT31 102 EQ Q HIGH INPUT32 103 EQ Q HIGH ST IN1 104 EQ Q HIGH ST IN2 105 EQ Q HIGH ST IN3 106 EQ Q HIGH ST IN4 107 NO ASSIGN 108 NO ASSIGN 109 NO ASSIGN 110 NO ASSIGN 111 NO ASSIGN 112 NO ASSIGN 113 NO ASSIGN 114 NO ASSIGN 115 NO ASSIGN 116 NO ASSIGN 117 NO ASSIGN 118 NO ASSIGN 119 NO ASSIGN 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual gt 5 o 2 a x 300 Appendix C MIDI
13. High Mid Low 59 NO ASSIGN 60 NO ASSIGN 61 NO ASSIGN 62 NO ASSIGN 63 NO ASSIGN 64 F HI MID 25 65 F HI MID INPUT26 66 EQ F HI MID INPUT27 67 EQ F HI MID INPUT28 68 EQ F HI MID INPUT29 69 EQ F HI MID INPUT30 70 EQ F HI MID INPUT31 71 EQ F HI MID INPUT32 72 EQ F HI MID ST IN1 73 EQ F HI MID ST IN2 74 EQ F HI MID ST IN3 75 EQ F HI MID ST IN4 76 NO ASSIGN 77 NO ASSIGN 78 NO ASSIGN 79 NO ASSIGN 80 NO ASSIGN 81 NO ASSIGN 82 NO ASSIGN 83 NO ASSIGN 84 NO ASSIGN 85 NO ASSIGN 86 NO ASSIGN 87 NO ASSIGN 88 NO ASSIGN 89 EQ Q HI MID INPUT25 90 Q HI MID INPUT26 91 EQ Q HI MID INPUT27 92 EQ Q HI MID INPUT28 93 EQ Q HI MID INPUT29 94 EQ Q HI MID INPUT3O 95 EQ Q HI MID INPUT31 102 EQ Q HI MID INPUT32 103 EQ Q HI MID ST IN1 104 EQ Q HI MID ST IN2 105 EQ Q HI MID ST IN3 106 EQ Q HI MID ST IN4 107 NO ASSIGN 108 NO ASSIGN 109 NO ASSIGN 110 NO ASSIGN 111 NO ASSIGN 112 NO ASSIGN 113 NO ASSIGN 114 NO ASSIGN 115 NO ASSIGN 116 NO ASSIGN 117 NO ASSIGN 118 NO ASSIGN 119 NO ASSIGN 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual gt 5 o 2 a x 298 Appendix C MIDI
14. AD Input Section 14 SCENE MEMORY Section p 21 e c A DISPLAY ACCESS 5 Section p 18 H 9999999898988 1 5 1 LOO opo ran 7 Monitor Ou 4 Ing pm amp Head 2 y phones Sec 2 o prones tion p 15 mmm SOLO Section FADER MODE Oooog wS Fe er p 22 Section p Se ae DE O Ik Bu Display Section uum B ee IE ggg p 19 23 Lk Data Entry umi um s Section p 22 SE LAYER er SELECTED LAYER Section 7 E Poo O mJ Te CHANNEL p 19 ea STS SS eS eS SS Section p 20 nl d E d d d i d SME MEME MEME HEHEHE EE HEHE section i lo USER DEFINED p 1 7
15. CHANNEL High Mid Low 0 NO ASSIGN 1 EQ G HI MID H INPUT25 2 EQ G HI MID H INPUT26 3 EQ G HI MID H INPUT27 4 EQ G HI MID H INPUT28 5 EQ G HI MID H INPUT29 6 EQ G HI MID H INPUT30 7 EQ G HI MID INPUT31 8 EQ G HI MID H INPUT32 9 EQ G HI MID H ST IN1 10 EQ G HI MID H ST IN2 11 EQ G HI MID H ST IN3 12 EQ G HI MID H ST IN4 13 NO ASSIGN 14 NO ASSIGN 15 NO ASSIGN 16 NO ASSIGN 17 NO ASSIGN 18 NO ASSIGN 19 NO ASSIGN 20 NO ASSIGN 21 NO ASSIGN 22 NO ASSIGN 23 NO ASSIGN 24 NO ASSIGN 25 NO ASSIGN 26 NO ASSIGN 27 NO ASSIGN 28 NO ASSIGN 29 NO ASSIGN 30 NO ASSIGN 31 NO ASSIGN 32 NO ASSIGN 33 EQ G HI MID L INPUT25 34 EQ G HI MID L INPUT26 35 EQ G HI MID L INPUT27 36 EQ G HI MID L INPUT28 37 EQ G HI MID L INPUT29 38 EQ G HI MID L INPUT30 39 EQ G HI MID L INPUT31 40 EQ G HI MID L INPUT32 41 EQ G HI MID L ST IN1 42 EQ G HI MID L ST IN2 43 EQ G HI MID L ST IN3 44 EQ G HI MID L ST IN4 45 NO ASSIGN 46 NO ASSIGN 47 NO ASSIGN 48 NO ASSIGN 49 NO ASSIGN 50 NO ASSIGN 51 NO ASSIGN 52 NO ASSIGN 53 NO ASSIGN 54 NO ASSIGN 55 NO ASSIGN 56 NO ASSIGN 57 NO ASSIGN 58 NO ASSIGN Initial Parameter to Control Change Table 297
16. Las oss 48 Is Ls s H sH sH Lis s s ss s LB ia ee Ea e Halsa eib E SS REESE SS SEP E SES SES ESPERE F a In IE In Mn In Mn Mn An In Mn Mn In Mn in E E E E E E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 q jq 3 2 21 2 Ca 25 26 27 j 29 3 3 omm mm m m Hn Channel Strip Section p 16 STEREO Section p 16 USER DEFINED KEYS Section p 21 Note Screw holes for attaching a cover are located at both sides of the AD input section of the 01V96 Size M3 horizontal spacing 417 mm vertical spacing 36 mm You may wish to fab ricate your own cover and attach it to the front panel to prevent the controls from being oper ated inadvertently Yamaha does not sell such a cover If you fabricate and attach your own cover make sure that the mounting screws do not extend more than 10 mm into the front panel You will need to allow approximately 15 20 mm between the top panel and the cover in order to clear the control knobs and buttons 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 14 Chapter 2 Control Surface amp Rear Panel AD Input Section INSERT 2 80 0 1 O INSERTO INSERT VO INSERT 1 0 INSER
17. Parameter Title LOW L MID H MID HIGH PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF less 3 5dB 8 5 1 5 dB 3 0 dB 224Hz 600Hz 3 15 kHz 5 30 kHz 5 6 10 0 7 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 2 0dB 5 5dB 40 5 dB 2 5 dB 15 E G Clean 265 Hz 400 Hz 1 32 kHz 4 50 kHz 0 18 10 6 3 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING i EG 4 5dB 0 0dB 4 0dB 2 0 dB Crunch 1 140 Hz 1 00 kHz 1 90 kHz 5 60 kHz 8 4 5 0 63 9 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 2 5dB 1 5dB 2 5dB 0 0 dB Crunch 2 125Hz 450Hz 3 35 kHz 19 0 kHz 8 0 4 0 16 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 5 0dB 0 0dB 3 5dB O 0dB 18 E Dist 1 355 Hz 950 Hz 3 35 kHz 12 5 kHz 9 10 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 6 0 dB 8 5 4 5 dB 4 0 dB 19 E Dist 2 315 Hz 1 06 kHz 4 25 kHz 12 5 kHz 10 4 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 29 A G 2 0dB 0 0dB 1 0dB 4 0 dB Stroke 1 106 Hz 1 00 kHz 1 90 kHz 5 30 kHz 0 9 4 5 3 5 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 4 3 5 20dB 0 0dB 2 0 dB Stroke 2 300 Hz 750Hz 2 00 kHz 3 55 kHz 9 4 5 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 22 0 5dB 0 0dB 0 0dB 2 0 dB Arpeg 1 224 Hz 1 00 kHz 4 00 kHz 6 70 kHz 4 5 4 5 0 12 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H S
18. 2 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the DIO Setup MIDI Host page appears DIO SETUP Initial Data 5111 STI2 STI3 5 4 STIL uno e ec ec e SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Rx PORT StudioManager Tx PORT DAW REMOTE CASCADE LINK MACHINE CONTROL Ene TRANSMIT REQUEST PORT DEVICE ID Fa MIDI HOSTA MONITOR AA REMOTE A MACHINE Merja 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Machine Control Function 213 3 Movethe cursor to the PORT parameter box in the MACHINE CONTROL sec tion 1 then rotate the Parameter wheel to select the MMC destination The following ports and slot are available as the MMC destination MIDL eee MIDI port USB USB port s SETS I Renner Slot with an MY8 mLAN mLAN card installed If USB is selected move the cursor to the adjacent parameter box on the right and select one of eight ports Move the cursor to the DEVICE ID parameter box then rotate the Parameter wheel to set the 01V96 MMC Device ID to the same ID number as the exter nal device MMC commands are effective on devices that use the same Device ID Therefore the 01V96 s MMC Device ID needs to match the ID of the devices you wish to control To start remote control press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the DIO Setup Machine
19. CHANNEL3 High Mid Low High Mid Low 0 NO ASSIGN 59 NO ASSIGN 1 EQ G LOW H INPUTI 60 NO ASSIGN 2 EQ G LOW H INPUT2 61 NO ASSIGN 3 EQ G LOW H INPUT3 62 NO ASSIGN 4 G LOW H INPUT4 63 NO ASSIGN 5 EQ G LOW H INPUTS 64 EQ F LOW INPUT1 6 EQ GLOW H INPUT6 65 EQ F LOW INPUT2 7 EQ GLOW H 66 EQ FLOW INPUT3 8 EQ G LOW H INPUT8 67 EQ F LOW INPUT4 9 EQ G LOW H INPUT9 68 EQ F LOW INPUTS 10 EQ G LOW H INPUT10 69 EQ F LOW INPUT6 11 EQ G LOW H INPUT11 70 EQ FLOW 12 GLOWH INPUT12 71 EQ FLOW INPUT8 13 EQ G LOW H INPUT13 72 EQ FLOW INPUT9 14 EQ G LOW H INPUT14 73 EQ FLOW INPUT10 15 EQ G LOW H INPUT15 74 EQ FLOW INPUT11 16 EQ GLOW H INPUT16 75 EQ FLOW INPUT12 17 EQ GLOW H INPUT17 76 EQ FLOW INPUT13 18 EQ G LOW H INPUT18 77 EQ FLOW INPUT14 19 EQ GLOW H INPUT19 78 EQ FLOW INPUT15 20 EQ GLOWH INPUT20 79 EQ FLOW INPUT16 21 EQ G LOW H INPUT21 80 EQ F LOW INPUT17 22 EQ GLOW H INPUT22 81 EQ F LOW INPUT18 23 EQ GLOW H INPUT23 82 EQ F LOW INPUT19 24 EQ GLOW H INPUT24 83 EQ F LOW INPUT20 25 NO ASSIGN 84 EQ FLOW INPUT21 26 NO ASSIGN 85 EQ F LOW INPUT22 27 NO ASSIGN 86 EQ FLOW INPUT23 28 NO ASSIGN 87 EQ FLOW INPUT24 29 NO ASSIGN 88 NO ASSIGN 30 NO ASSIGN 89 EQ Q LOW INPUT1 31 NO ASSIGN 90 EQ Q LOW INPUT2 32 NO ASSIGN 91 EQ Q LOW INPUT3 33 EQ G
20. BANK A BANK B BANK C BANK D BANK E BANK F BANK G BANK H TITLE Scene Recall aoe DAW 1 DAW 2 Pa 22 Assign 1 Scene 1 Recall en UDEF BANK D UDEF BANK C ee MIDI PGM 1 Display Back No Assign eere Nt Jom Os uem wee 3 3 IN Fader paw gang DW AUTO Machine mipi pam 3 No Assign Group B READ Copy 4 Scene 4 Recall or DAW BANK CUT Machine REC MIDI PGM 4 22 Assign 5 Scene 5 Recall nn ne Tr al ee MIDI PGM 5 No Assign No Assign 6 Scene 6 Recall en DAW SCRUB T 4 MIDI PGM 6 Assign Assign 7 5 7 a DAW STOP 2d RUTO 5 MIDI PGM 7 Assign Assign 8 Scene 8 Recall DAW PLAY Machine MIDI PGM 8 Assign Assign Group L OFF Input Patch Parameters INPUT INSERT IN EFFECT IN CASCADE Port ID Description Port ID Description Port ID Description Port ID Description NONE NONE AD ADIN 1 ADAT1 ADAT1 IN AD2 AD IN 2 ADAT2 ADAT2 IN AD3 AD IN 3 ADAT3 ADAT3 IN AD4 AD IN 4 AUX4 ADAT4 IN ADS AD IN 5 AUXS 5 ADATS IN AD6 ADIN 6 AUX6 ADAT6 ADAT6 IN AD7 AD IN 7 AUX7 ADAT7 IN AD8 AD IN 8 AUX8 ADAT8 ADAT8 IN AD9 AD IN 9 InsertOut CH1 SL 01 Slot CH1 IN AD10 AD IN 10 InsertOut CH2 SL 02 Slot CH2 IN AD11 AD IN 11 InsertOut CH3 SL 03 Slot CH3 IN AD12 AD IN 12 InsertOut CH4 SL 04 Slot CH4 IN AD13 AD IN 13 InsertOut CH5 SL 05 Slot CH5 IN
21. No Preset Name Type Description 13 Chorus CHORUS Chorus 14 Flange FLANGE Flanger 15 Symphonic SYMPHONIC Proprietary Yamaha effect that produces a richer and more complex modulation than normal chorus 16 Phaser PHASER 16 stage stereo phase shifter 17 Auto Pan AUTO PAN Auto panner 18 TREMOLO TREMOLO Tremolo Mono pitch shifter producing stable results Available HQ Pitch 2 19 Q HQ PITCH for internal effects 1 and 2 20 Dual Pitch DUAL PITCH Stereo pitch shifter 21 Rotary ROTARY Rotary speaker simulation 22 Ring Mod RING MOD Ring modulator 23 Mod Filter MOD FILTER Modulated filter Guitar Effects No Preset Name Type Description 24 Distortion DISTORTION Distortion 25 Amp Simulate AMP SIMULATE Guitar amp simulation Dynamic Effects Preset Name Type Description Dyna Filter DYNA FILTER Dynamically controlled filter Dyna Flange DYNA FLANGE Dynamically controlled flanger Dyna Phaser DYNA PHASER Dynamically controlled phase shifter 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual E 9 n 182 Chapter 16 Libraries e Combination Effects No Preset Name Type Description 29 Rev Chorus REV CHORUS Reverb and chorus in parallel 30 Rev gt Chorus REV gt CHORUS Reverb and chorus in series 31 Rev Flange REV F
22. 10 ELE i om MONITOR OUT connectors j INPUT connector pgti E Monitoring system INPUT connector PHONES jack In this system the 01V96 is one component in a system that includes a digital MTR such as a hard disk recorder that is connected to the 01V96 via the ADAT IN and OUT connec tors on the rear panel and via an optional I O card MY8 AT MY16 AT MY8 TD etc installed in the slot This system will support track recording overdubbing track bouncing and mixdown You can also control the hard disk recorder s transport section by sending MMC commands from the 01V96 to the recorder 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Connections 39 Configuring a recording system that uses a DAW Digital Audio Workstation Computer MIDI interface dnjas pue suondauu0D ES Master recorder TO HOST USB port ADAT IN Effects processor 2TR IN connector 2TR OUT connector
23. x sjauueyD Buldno4y 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 156 Chapter 13 Grouping Channels amp Linking Parameters 3 Press the SEL button for a channel you wish to add to the EQ or Compressor link The selected channel is marked with and the channel is added to the link Example Input Channels 1 4 7 8 12 and 14 have been added to EQ link b er PUT resting 142 1 12 19 20 21222324 29262728 29502122 4 Eos Bons Ge ehr a Tip f you add one channel from a pair to a link the pair partner is automatically added to the link You can also select a channel on another layer by switching layers 4 In the same way press the SEL button for other channels you wish to add to the link The EQ or compressor settings for the first channel added to the link are applied to all sub sequently added channels 5 After all desired channels are added to the link edit the EQ or compressor parameters for one of the linked channels The edits for the EQ or compressor parameters are applied to the rest of the linked channels 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Internal Effects 157 14 Internal Effects This chapter describes how to use the 01V96 s internal effects processors About the Internal Effects The 01V96 features four internal multi effects processors These effects processors offer numerous types of effects including reverbs d
24. Immediately before Input Channel fader POST FADER Immediately after Input Channel fader 2 Move the cursor to a patch parameter 1 32 you want to change then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to select the destination If necessary specify the signal source position using the DIRECT OUT parameter Press ENTER to confirm the change Note If you select a destination that is already used by an Output Patch setting and turn on the Direct Out the Output Patch setting will be disabled To restore the Output Patch setting select another Direct Out destination or turn off the Direct Out Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PAN ROUTING button repeatedly until one of the following pages containing the channels you want to patch to the Direct Out appears e Routl 16 page This page enables you to change the Input Channel 1 16 rout ings This page enables you to change the Input Channels 17 32 and e Rout17 STI page ST IN Channel 1 4 routings Tip Refer to page 86 for more information on these pages 5 Move the cursor to the D button for the channel you want to patch to the Direct Out then press ENTER The Direct Out patching is now effective and the signals are routed to the assigned outputs ADAT OUT channels or slot output channels 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Insert Patching Insert Patching
25. 8 SEL Tip You can still select one of the paired channels for control by pressing the corresponding SEL button When you select the channel the SEL button indicator lights up and the SEL button for the paired partner flashes You can also determine how to copy the parameter settings to the paired partner by using a special window see page 230 You can create or cancel pairs on the Pair Grup pages see page 93 You can also group the faders ON buttons EQs or compressors of multiple channels see page 149 mE u 2 To cancel pair press and hold the SEL button for one of the paired chan nels and press the SEL button for the other channel Note Ifyou want to operate the faders of paired channels make sure you operate only one fader for the pair If you try to operate the faders for both channels in the pair an excessive load will be applied to the fader motor causing malfunction Routing Signals To record the 01V96 input signals to an external digital multitrack recorder you must spec ify the destination of the signals for each Input Channel This process is called routing There are two routing methods e Using Bus Outs 1 8 Input Channel signals are first routed to Buses 1 8 then through Bus Outs 1 8 to the out put connectors or channels Use this method to mix multiple Input Channel signals and record them to the MTR s tracks If you desire
26. Y rererereroer 59 9699999 1 CODO E Rasen Synthesizer or rhythm machine 2 oe BL J Q BS go Ec Bb god TE 595 5 i comes INPUT connector IE mm 2 Monitoring system T INPUT connector 3252 PHONES jack Microphone 2 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the DIO Setup Word Clock page appears On this page specify the wordclock source The best wordclock source depends on the system and environment In the following example a hard disk recorder operating at a sampling frequency of 44 1 2 is used as the wordclock master The wordclock source is derived from the signal input at the ADAT IN Channels 1 and 2 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Jeuoin 48 Chapter 5 Tutorial DI0 SETUP Initial Data BEL 5112 5113 5114 cien oO Qo WORD CLOCK SELECT SEE In our ve ove s s eren e OO OO S WORD CLOCKAR FORMAT 4 PREFERI JA PREFERZ 2 l3 Tip See page 40 for more information on wordclock See page 75 for more information on 01V 96s running at higher sampling frequencies 88 2 kHz or 96 kHz Note You can select the 01V96 internal clock as the wordclock source In this case you must set the hard disk recorder so that it will synchronize to an external clock Ifthe 01V96 and a connected device
27. 2 Pressthe FADER MODE buttons to select a Fader FABER mode fel fel fe The button indicators identify the following Fader modes AU ara aa ARE When the HOME button indicator lights up S You can use channel faders to control Input Channels AES MINE ar LUKE and ST IN Channel levels or Output Channels Aux Out 1 8 Bus Out 1 8 master levels HOME METER When one of the AUX1 AUX8 button indicators light up You can use channel faders to control the correspond ing Aux Send level The following table shows the channel fader functions for each Layer and Fader mode LAYER buttons 1 16 button Fader Mode HOME button Channel Strip Fader 1 8 9 16 Input Channel 1 16 level AUX1 AUX8 buttons Input Channel 1 16 Aux Send level 17 32 button HOME button Input Channel 17 32 level AUX1 AUX8 buttons Input Channel 17 32 Aux Send level REMOTE button HOME button AUX1 AUX8 buttons Operation depends on the selected target see page 189 MASTER button HOME button Aux Send master 1 8 Bus Out master1 8 output level output level AUX1 AUX8 buttons No operation Note You cannot select the AUX1 AUX8 buttons while the Master layer is selected If you switch to the Master layer while one of the AUX1 AUX8 button indicators is lit the indi cator automat
28. 01 96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Using Fader Groups and Mute Groups 151 2 Press the up A or down Y button to select a group INPUT FADER GROUP d INPUT FADER MASTER 12 567 4 8 9101112 12141516 1 2 ENABLE MASTER i 3 Press the SEL button for a channel you wish to add to the group The selected channel is marked with and the channel is added to the group Example Input Channels 1 4 7 8 and 15 16 have been added to Fader group C INPUT FADER GROUP d INPUT FADER MASTER 1234 56725 9101112 13 14 15 16 1 2 ENABLE MASTER 255222222 H p f p f 1 p Ifyou add channel from a pair to a group pair partner is automatically added to the group You can also select a channel on another layer by switching layers 4 Inthe same way press the SEL button for other channels you wish to add to the group The relative level of the faders for the grouped channels is determined by the position of the faders when the channels were added to the group The On Off status of the grouped channels is determined by the ON button status when the channels were added to the group 5 To turn a group on or off move the corresponding button in the ENABLE column then press ENTER When the group Enable button is turned off the corresponding group is temporarily can celled 6 To use a fader gr
29. 1 8 buttons You can assign any of the 167 functions to these User Defined buttons 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 8 DLNS gt IN 22 Chapter 2 Control Surface amp Rear Panel Data Entry Section D Parameter wheel This control adjusts the parameter values shown on the display Turning it clockwise increases the value turning it counterclockwise decreases the value This wheel also enables you to scroll a displayed list and select a character for entry see page 30 ENTER button This button activates a selected highlighted button on the display and confirms the edited parameter values 8 DEC amp INC buttons These buttons increment or decrement a parameter value by one Pressing the INC but ton increments the value pressing the DEC button decrements the value Holding down either key increments or decrements the value continuously 4 Left Right Up Down gt A cursor buttons These buttons move the cursor around the display pages or select parameters and options Holding down a cursor button moves the cursor continuously in the corresponding direc tion SOLO Section Tl SOLO CLEAR CD SOLO indicator This indicator flashes when single or multiple channels are soloed CLEAR button This button unsolos all so
30. Parameter value Description assignment AD1 AD16 INPUT connectors 1 16 1 8 IN Input Channels 1 8 SL 01 SL 16 Slot Channels 1 16 FX1 1 amp FX1 2 Outputs 1 amp 2 of Internal Effects Processor 1 FX2 1 amp FX2 2 Outputs 1 amp 2 of Internal Effects Processor 2 FX3 1 amp FX3 2 Outputs 1 amp 2 of Internal Effects Processor 3 FX4 1 amp FX4 2 Outputs 1 amp 2 of Internal Effects Processor 4 2TD L amp 2TD R 2TR DIGITAL IN L R 2 Move the cursor to an input patch parameter you wish to change then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to modify the patching The long name of the currently selected channel is indicated in the upper right corner of the screen 1 Below the channel name is the long name of the selected input channel 2 See page 94 and 229 for information on changing channel names LIE A REN BG 1N 1 M 4 2 3 Press ENTER to confirm the change Tip You can patch an input signal to multiple Input Channels You can store the Input Patch settings to the Input Patch library Refer to Chapter 16 for more information 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Output Patching 123 Output Patching The 01V96 s Stereo Out Bus Out 1 8 Aux Out 1 8 signals can be patched to any outputs ADAT OUT output channels and slot output channels Patch example
31. BUA MIDI HOST MONITOR R MACHINE E FT 6 Select ProTools as the target device for the Target parameter 1 located in the upper right corner of the page By default the Remote layer target is set to ProTools If another target has been selected rotate the Parameter wheel to select ProTools 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Pro Tools Remote Layer 193 7 Press the LAYER REMOTE button The Remote Layer is now available for control enabling you to remotely control Pro Tools DIO SETUP In itia Data BSL 5112 STI3 5114 STIL 1100 um mame THERES coDE FEET P UHEEL amp ers OOO 1000 INSERT RSSIGN EDIT ASSIGN COMPARE BYPASS INSERT fincas IE lt ito assign edit an insert Du um Co ENTER ENTER CHANNEL METER Note When the Pro Tools Remote layer is selected the 01V96 s top panel faders and other channel buttons are available for remote control To control the 01V96 you need to select an Input Channel Layer or the Master Layer Display While the Pro Tools layer is selected you can use the F2 F4 buttons as well as the left and right Tab Scroll buttons to select display modes You can select the follow ing display modes using these buttons Insert Display mode F2 button Press the F2 button to select Insert Display mode In this mode you can assign and edit plug ins DI
32. 47 Mute groups 2 44 4442 149 150 M itihg zie RENTE 200 N Naming eee 94 107 Nominal Pan preference 231 N uendo ertet 189 Nuendo Cubase SX 206 OMNI OUT connectors 24 44 70 OMS 191 ON buttons 16 17 Operating basics essen 27 About the display 27 AUXI AUXGS button indicators 33 D ttons ee eerte 29 Channel name 28 Confirmation messages 30 HOME button indicator Metering 34 Page area 28 Page tabs 2 28 Page title 2 28 Parameter boxes 2 29 Rotary controls amp faders 29 Sampling rate indicator 28 Selecting channels 32 Selecting display pages 28 Selecting fader modes 33 Selecting layers 12222222 31 Tab scroll arrows 222922 28 Title edit window 30 OPERATION LOCK 237 Operation lock sss Optional card sss Installing ott ODptlofis tremor VQ Card ett 2er Oscillator oett Other functions sees Preferences aan Output patch see Initial settings 2 2222 Parameters Output patch library Output section vcs P Package contents esses 6
33. Input Channels 1 16 INPUT connectors 1 16 Input Channels 17 24 ADAT IN Channels 1 8 Input Channels 25 32 Slot Channels 1 8 ST IN Channels 1 4 Internal Effects Processor 1 4 Outputs 1 amp 2 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Using Libraries 179 Output Patch Library The Output Patch library enables you to store and recall all Output Patch settings The library contains one preset memory and 32 user readable amp writable memories To access the Output Patch library press the DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch Out LIB page appears For details on storing and recalling memories see General Library Operation on page 175 PATCH Initial Data a SH 571257135714 chi eur 1O 0 oO OUTPUT PATCH LIBRARY LIBRARY TITLE The Output Patch preset memory 0 contains the following settings Slot output channels 1 8 Bus Outs 1 8 Slot output channels 9 16 Bus Outs 1 8 ADAT OUT channels 1 8 Bus Outs 1 8 OMNI OUT connectors 1 4 Aux Outs 1 4 Effects Library The Effects library enables you to store and recall Effects processor 1 4 programs The library contains 53 preset programs including Add On Effects and 75 user readable amp writable programs Note The Effects library is shared by Effects processors 1 4 However only Effects processors 1 and 2 enable the recall of Effect 19 HQ Pitch and Effect 42 Freeze To store and recall set
34. Variable mode 115 118 VERTICAL iet rente 93 View Fader page 88 102 112 View Library page 177 View Parameter page 87 102 112 VIEW 18 W WEIN Ee he A 42 Web site iuc oni 72 Website E 6 Welcome 11 Window Changing the surround mode 138 Channel Pairing 92 Copy operation 120 Password eese 237 Set Password 238 User Define Select 236 WORD CLOCK IN connector 24 WORD CLOCK OUT connector 24 Wordclock tertie teo 40 About wordclock 40 Connections 2 40 Daisy chain distribution 240 SOULCE aS 42 Specifying source 2 41 Star distribution 2 40 WEIN Aussen 42 Y NDOK x sds V 163 Yamaha web site 72 Yamaha website 6 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual YAMAHA Digital Mixing Console Internal Parameters Model 01 96 MIDI Implementation Chart Date 26 Aug 2002 Version 1 0 Function Transmitted Recognized Remarks Basic Default 1 16 1 16 see Channel Changed 1 16 1 16 Default X OMNI off OMNI on Mode Messages X X Memorized Altered ACkckck ck ck ck k k k kkk X Note T Voi X 0 127 Number rue KKKKKK
35. es RONE EY 163 15 Scene 165 About Scene Memories 165 What is Stored a Scene 165 About Scene Numbers 166 Storing and Recalling Scenes 167 Auto Scene Memory Update 169 Fading Scenes tar a nl sees dot m Ua 170 Recalling Scenes Safely 7 172 Sorting SCENES ass as earth Bed ie 173 Copying and Pasting a Scene Global Paste 173 16 Libraries cis 9 res 179 About the Libraries ios e eee ede ni De 175 General Library Operation 175 Using Libraries 5 pb RS PR ia Aad hea 177 17 Remote 189 About Remote Function 189 Pro Tools Remote Layer 190 Nuendo Cubase SX Remote 206 Other DAW Remote Layer 2 206 MIDI Remote Layer aaa een 207 Machine Control 212 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 10 Contents 18
36. 96 kHz 96 kHz Tip The FS box on the Word Clock page displays the sampling frequency at which the 01V96 778 GFF kHz 01V 96 the buttons in the SRC sections are disabled Note The sampling rate converter is available only on the Yamaha MY8 AE96S Digital I O card If you have installed another type of I O card in the slot or if no card is installed in the 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Monitoring Digital Input Channel Status 73 2 Usethe cursor buttons to move the cursor to any two channel button in the SRC sections then press ENTER The sampling rate converter for the selected 2 channel input turns on or off When on the sampling rate of the received digital audio is converted to the 01V96 s current sampling rate Monitoring Digital Input Channel Status You can view and monitor the Channel Status sampling rate emphasis etc of digital audio signals connected to the 2TR Digital Inputs and Slot Inputs as follows 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS UTILITY button then press the F2 button The Utility CH Status page appears UTILITY Initial Data E cin ci 10 mamo 0 0 1 am amp ton ZTR IN D mE 9 Unlock 221 EMPHAS sl 2s 5 zu 6 copy 5 4 2 4 m o jebiq a CILLATORFA CH STATUS fi BATTERY fi USER DEF bjj
37. J ON END 3E e em ree e RMO2 XGO2 XG CH02 VOL amp PAN FADER 43 10 lac los lo los Ir leno J ON Tele tere Te dmm Dum eme RMO3 XGO3 XG CH03 VOL amp PAN FADER 43 10 lac los 02 los 7 leno ON END Te dE eem eee RM04 04 04 VOL amp PAN FADER 43 10 lac los 03 los 7 END ON END 05 Poo a ee i ee 05 05 05 VOL amp PAN FADER 43 10 lac los 04 los 7 leno J RM06 XG CH06 VOL amp PAN 10 los 05 7 leno RM07 XG CH07 VOL amp PAN _ ff ff Ha 10 los 06 7 leno 1 RMO8 XG CH08 VOL amp PAN 10 los 07 7 leno RMO9 XG CH09 VOL amp PAN 10 los los 7 leno RM10 XG CH10 VOL amp PAN BE BE EN RE N U KR BE 10 ac los 09 7 leno RM11 XG CH11 VOL amp PAN DE BE EEE N U BE 10 lac los Joa 7 leno ON e p Sen ea eral Se TR t RM12 XG12 XG CH12 VOL amp PAN FADER 43 10 lac los joe los 7 leno J ON END co pea Se Enn dee emo Toms is RM13 XG13 XG CH13 VOL amp PAN FADER 43 10 lac 08 loc los
38. 2 2 262 Appendix A Parameter Lists ECHO FLANGE Two input two output stereo delay with crossed Two input two output flange effect feedback loop Parameter Range Description Parameter Range Description FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DELAYL 0 0 1350 0 ms Left channel delay time DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth DELAYR 0 0 1350 0 ms Right channel delay time MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time FB DLY L 0 0 1350 0 ms Left channel feedback delay time AE values Tor FB DLYR 0 0 1350 0 ms Right channel feedback delay FB GAIN 99 to 99 eso SH DA minus Left channel feedback gain plus WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform FB G L _99 to 99 values for normal phase feed back minus values for LSH 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency reverse phase feedback LSHG 12 0 to 12 0 dB Low shelving filter gain Right channel feedback gain EQF 100 Hz 8 00 kHz EQ peaking type frequency FB GR 99 to 49996 ea ae EQG 12 0 to 12 0 dB EQ peaking type gain reverse phase feedback EQQ 10 0 0 10 EQ peaking type bandwidth Left to right channel feedback HSH 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz High shelving filter frequency L gt RFBG 99 to 49996 gain ee 5 HSHG 12 0 to 12 0 dB High shelving filter gain ues
39. 15 5112 STIS 5114 OO m adimi u MIDI SETUP Tx Rx OMNI ECHO Op ewe D O Se 7 33 CONTROL OFF E PARANE TER OFF OFF ww 8 F DI Fader Resolution Select MIDI channels for transmission and reception in the CHANNEL row and turn the transmission and reception of each MIDI message on or off using the buttons in the param eter rows from PROGRAM CHANGE to OTHER COMMANDS D CHANNEL This parameter row enables you to specify MIDI Channels for MIDI message transmis sion and reception The following parameters are available in this row This parameter specifies Transmit Channel This parameter box specifies a MIDI Receive Channel 2 PROGRAM CHANGE This parameter row enables or disables transmission and reception of Program Changes Tx ON OFF Transmission of Program Change messages is enabled or dis abled Rx Reception of Program Change messages is enabled or disabled OMNI ON OFE When this button is turned on Program Changes on all MIDI Channels are received regardless of the CHANNEL row set tings ECHO ON OFF This button determines whether Program Change messages received at the MIDI IN port are echoed through to the MIDI OUT port 3 CONTROL CHANGE This parameter row enables or
40. 3 ID SHORT LONG CH CCH gt CH gt CH gt CHE CHG gt CH6 gt lt gt CHS CCHS gt lt CHS gt lt CHS gt CH4 CH4 gt gt CH4 gt CH3 CH3 gt gt lt CH3 gt CH2 2 gt gt lt CH2 gt gt 5 INITIALIZE AT LIE Aou fAGUTPUT INS You can specify Short names in the center column 1 and Long full names in the right column 2 When the Name Input Auto Copy check box 3 is on the first four characters of a newly entered Long name are automatically copied to the Short name On the other hand a newly entered Short name is automatically added to the beginning of the Long name You can reset all channel names to their default names by moving the cursor to the INI TIALIZE button then pressing ENTER 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Naming Input Channels 95 2 Move the cursor to a name you wish to change then press ENTER The Title Edit window appears enabling you to enter a name TITLE EDIT PRESS STORE 3 Edit the name move the cursor to the OK button then press ENTER The new name is now effective Tip The edited name is stored in the Input Patch library Sjouueu ndu N 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 96 Chapter 7 Input Channels 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Bus Outs 97 8 Bus Outs This chapter describes
41. MIXSOLO In Mix Solo mode any number of channels can be soloed simultaneously LAST SOLO In Last Solo mode only one channel can be soloed at a time by pressing the SOLO button The Solo function that was previ ously enabled for channels is automatically cancelled 4 LISTEN This parameter determines the source of the Input Channel Solo signal Pre Fader or Post Pan When Pre Fader is selected turning on the PAN button below the Pre Fader option will solo the channel with the pan position specified by the Pan setting even if the source precedes the fader This parameter is effective only in Recording Solo mode 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Using the Monitor 133 5 SOLO TRIM This parameter enables you to trim the level of the Solo signal in the range of 96 dB to 12 dB 6 FADER SOLO RELEASE If this check box is checked you can unsolo the channels by raising the channel faders that were at the level of when the Solo function was turned on If the faders were set to higher than the channels cannot be soloed This setting is not effective Mix down Solo mode and for Output Channels Note When you check the FADER SOLO RELEASE check box the Solo setting is tem porarily cancelled 7 SOLO SAFE CHANNEL For Mixdown Solo mode Input Channels can be configured individually so that they are not muted when other Input Channels are soloed Solo Safe function
42. nance gt Input Level Time Series Analysis Input Signal Input Level Output Signal HOLD ATTACK DECAY put Level THRESHOLD l 1j Ei Out T T Fx Time 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual gt 5 o 2 2 x 276 Appendix A Parameter Lists DUCKING Ducking is commonly used for voice over applications in which the background music level is reduced automatically when an announcer speaks When the KEY IN source signal level exceeds the specified THRESHOLD the output level is attenuated by a specified amount RANGE Parameter Range Description THRESHOLD dB 54 0 to 0 0 541 points ee signal KEY IN RANGE dB 70 to 0 71 points en of attenuation when ATTACK ms 0 120 121 points This determines how soon the signal is ducked once the ducker has been triggered 44 1kHz 0 02 ms 2 13 sec 48 2 0 02 ms 1 96 This determines how long ducking remains active HOLD ms 88 2kHz 0 01 ms 1 06 sec once the trigger signal has fallen below the 96kHz 0 01 ms 981 ms THRESHOLD level 160 points 44 1kHz 6 ms 46 0 sec This determines how soon the ducker returns to its gentle SZ ee normal gain once the trigger signal level drops DECAY ms 88 2kHz 3 ms 23 0 sec 9 99er sig below the threshold value is expressed as the 26 2 3 ER duration requ
43. 5 You can remotely control Digidesign Pro Tools Nuendo You can remotely control Steinberg Nuendo Cubase You can remotely control Steinberg Cubase SX General DAW You can remotely control DAW software that supports the pro tocol used by Pro Tools User Defined You can also assign MIDI messages to the faders or ON but tons to remotely control a connected MIDI device such as a synthesizer User Assignable Layer You can combine the 01V96 channels to create a custom layer See page 233 for more information on this function B Machine Control By using MIDI Machine Control commands and the DIO Setup Machine page you can control an external recording machine that is connected to the 01V96 MIDI port USB port or optional MY8 mLAN card installed in the slot Tip To control external devices from the 01V96 you can also use the User Defined buttons Refer to 19 Other Functions for more information 0430u0 0U1OY 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 190 Chapter 17 Remote Control Pro Tools Remote Layer The 01V96 features Remote Layer target especially designed for controlling Pro Tools Connections and Configuring Pro Tools Follow the steps below to connect the 01V96 to your computer via the USB port so that you can control Pro Tools from the 01V96 Note You cannot control Pro Tools via MID
44. 7 leno J ON END co n s ipm eS Ree PS os Tutos ins RM14 XG14 XG CH14 VOL amp PAN FADER 43 10 lac los los 7 np J ON END c e e dp n So tree RM15 XG15 XG CH15 VOL amp PAN FADER 43 10 lac los joe 7 leno J ON END lt bre pei es fe RM16 16 XG CH16 VOL amp PAN FADER 43 10 lac los jor los 7 leno 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Bank 4 Nuendo VST Mixer User Defined Remote Layer Initial Bank Settings 259 Name Data Format ID Controller Short Long 1 21314 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 ON BO 40 SW END EN a 2 RMO1 CH1 VST MIXER CH1 FADER BO 07 FAD END E ON B1 40 SW ES RMO2 CH2 VST MIXER CH2 FADER B1 07 FAD END ES ON B2 40 SW END RMO3 CH3 5 MIXER CH3 FADER B2 07 FAD END ET ON B3 40 SW END 25 gt RMO4 CH4 5 MIXER CH4 FADER B3 07 FAD END ON B4 40 SW JEND m RMO5 5 5 MIXER 5 FADER B4 07 FAD END E 25 ON B5 40 SW END E er I RMO6 6 5 MIXER CH6 FADER B5 07 FAD END 25 ON B6 40 SW END
45. eh eu ese RM14 GM14 GM CH14 VOL amp PAN FADER BD o lenp I I I I ON END ll A RM15 GM15 GM CH15 VOL amp PAN FADER BE 07 lenp I I I I ON END Ire x pep ek ees RM16 GM16 GM CH16 VOL amp PAN FADER BF 07 lenp I I I I I 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Bank 2 GM Vol amp Effect 1 User Defined Remote Layer Initial Bank Settings 257 Name Data Format ID Controller Short Long 1 2 3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 ON END d 2 RM01 01 GM CHO1 VOL amp EFF1 FADER BO 07 FAD END E ON END ES RMO2 02 GM CHO2 VOL amp EFF1 FADER B1 07 FAD END ES ON END E RMO3 03 GM CH03 VOL amp EFF1 FADER B2 07 FAD END ET ON END E E gt zx gt RM04 04 GM CH04 VOL amp EFF1 FADER B3 07 FAD END ON END 2 m RMO5 05 GM CHO05 VOL amp EFF1 FADER B4 07 FAD END E 25 ON END E ef I RMO6 06 GM CH06 VOL amp EFF1 FADER B5 07 FAD END 25 ON END ix RM07 GM07 GM CH07 VOL amp EFF1 FADER B6 07 FAD END 25 ON END m R
46. sess 40 Program changes s 215 219 Sampling rate indicator 28 STEREO DELAY 261 PROTECT button 1 0222 168 STEREO fader u 16 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Index 323 Stereo MEETS a u eee 19 Stered OUt inerte edi ten 97 Attenuating 222 99 Compressing 2 2222 eee 100 D lig eres 99 FQ Ig 100 EQ ing and Balancing 104 107 Pairing e epe 105 Setting from the control surface SEA UN EIER TEE 104 Setting from the display 99 Setting the levels 104 Viewing the settings 102 STEREO OUT connectors STEREO section 2 16 STORE button 2421 Store Confirmation preference 231 Storing and Recalling Surround eer me pn BUSI BUSS DIV ete ES 105 FIR iet eee 143 FAST na ertet 142 139 een 143 LINK 143 142 PAN SURR LINK 137 Panning eerte 142 PATTERN ettet 143 Setting up and Selecting 136 ST EINK 143 SURROUND MODE 87 137 Surround mode indicator 27 Trajectory patterns 2142 SURROUND MODE 137 Surround mode indicator 27 Surround modes 135
47. 14 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT14 71 ON CHANNEL INPUT8 15 FADERH CHANNEL INPUT15 72 ON CHANNEL INPUT9 16 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT16 73 ON CHANNEL INPUT10 17 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT17 74 ON CHANNEL INPUT11 18 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT18 75 ON CHANNEL INPUT12 19 FADERH CHANNEL INPUT19 76 ON CHANNEL INPUT13 20 FADERH CHANNEL INPUT2O 77 ON CHANNEL INPUT14 21 FADERH CHANNEL INPUT21 78 ON CHANNEL INPUT15 22 FADERH CHANNEL INPUT22 79 ON CHANNEL INPUT16 23 FADERH CHANNEL INPUT23 80 ON CHANNEL INPUT17 24 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT24 81 ON CHANNEL INPUT18 25 NO ASSIGN 82 ON CHANNEL INPUT19 26 NO ASSIGN 83 ON CHANNEL INPUT20 27 NO ASSIGN 84 ON CHANNEL INPUT21 28 NO ASSIGN 85 ON CHANNEL INPUT22 29 NO ASSIGN 86 ON CHANNEL INPUT23 30 FADER H MASTER STEREO 87 ON CHANNEL INPUT24 31 NO ASSIGN 88 NO ASSIGN 32 NO ASSIGN 89 PAN CHANNEL INPUT1 33 FADERL CHANNEL INPUT1 90 PAN CHANNEL INPUT2 34 FADERL CHANNEL INPUT2 91 PAN CHANNEL INPUT3 35 FADERL CHANNEL INPUT3 92 PAN CHANNEL INPUT4 36 FADERL CHANNEL INPUT4 93 PAN CHANNEL INPUTS 37 FADERL CHANNEL INPUTS 94 PAN CHANNEL INPUT6 38 FADERL CHANNEL INPUT6 95 PAN CHANNEL 39 FADERL CHANNEL INPUT 102 PAN CHANNEL INPUT8 40 FADERL CHANNEL INPUT8 103 PAN CHANNEL INPUT9 41 FADERL CHANNEL INPUT9 104 PAN CHANNEL INPUT10 42 FADERL CHANNEL INPUT10 105 PAN CHANNEL INPUT11 43 FADERL CHANNEL INPUT11 106 PAN CHANNEL INPUT12
48. 3 3 I Ho Data 1 2 INITIALIZE SETUP fA ASGN fi CTL ASGN fi BULK 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 220 Chapter 18 MIDI 4 Move the cursor to a parameter box in the PGM CHG column and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to select the Program Change numbers to which you want to assign Scenes 5 Press the cursor button gt to move the cursor to a parameter box in the SCENE NO TITLE column then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to select Scenes Tip If you assign a Scene to multiple Program Changes the Program Change with the lowest number becomes effective Youcan initialize the Scene to Program Change assignment table by moving the cursor to the INITIALIZE button then pressing ENTER 6 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS MIDI button then press the F1 button to dis play the MIDI Setup page then specify the MIDI Transmit and Receive Channels 7 Turn on the PROGRAM CHANGE Tx ON OFF and Rx ON OFF buttons Now when the 01V96 receives the Program Changes on the specified MIDI Channels the corresponding Scenes are recalled Also when you switch Scenes on the 01V96 the 01V96 transmits the Program Changes on the specified MIDI Channels Assigning Parameters to Control Changes for Real time Control You can assign 01V96 parameters to MIDI Control Changes for real time control When the 01V96 receives a Control Change the assig
49. 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual CHANNEL10 High Mid Low 0 NO ASSIGN 1 EQ G HIGH H INPUT25 2 EQ G HIGH H INPUT26 3 EQ G HIGH H INPUT27 4 EQ G HIGH H INPUT28 5 EQ G HIGH H INPUT29 6 EQ G HIGH H INPUT30 7 EQ G HIGH H INPUT31 8 EQ G HIGH H INPUT32 9 EQ G HIGH H ST IN1 10 EQ G HIGH H ST IN2 11 EQ G HIGH H ST IN3 12 EQ G HIGH H ST IN4 13 NO ASSIGN 14 NO ASSIGN 15 NO ASSIGN 16 NO ASSIGN 17 NO ASSIGN 18 NO ASSIGN 19 NO ASSIGN 20 NO ASSIGN 21 NO ASSIGN 22 NO ASSIGN 23 NO ASSIGN 24 NO ASSIGN 25 NO ASSIGN 26 NO ASSIGN 27 NO ASSIGN 28 NO ASSIGN 29 NO ASSIGN 30 NO ASSIGN 31 NO ASSIGN 32 NO ASSIGN 33 EQ G HIGH L INPUT25 34 EQ G HIGH L INPUT26 35 EQ G HIGH L INPUT27 36 EQ G HIGH L INPUT28 37 EQ G HIGH L INPUT29 38 EQ G HIGH L INPUT30 39 EQ G HIGH L INPUT31 40 EQ G HIGH L INPUT32 41 EQ G HIGH L ST IN1 42 EQ G HIGH L ST IN2 43 EQ G HIGH L ST IN3 44 EQ G HIGH L ST IN4 45 NO ASSIGN 46 NO ASSIGN 47 NO ASSIGN 48 NO ASSIGN 49 NO ASSIGN 50 NO ASSIGN 51 NO ASSIGN 52 NO ASSIGN 53 NO ASSIGN 54 NO ASSIGN 55 NO ASSIGN 56 NO ASSIGN 57 NO ASSIGN 58 NO ASSIGN Initial Parameter to Control Change Table 299
50. 215 Transmission and Reception 218 USB Porta 215 MIDI Bulk page 226 MIDI Ctl Asgn page 220 MIDI Asgn page 219 MIDI Setup page 218 MIDI button 18 MIDI IN THRU OUT ports 13525 MIDI interface 191 MIDI machine control MIDI remote 207 Banks 207 LATCH 211 LEARN button 210 MIDI messages 209 TARGET parameter 208 UNLA TCE ee 211 MIDI Warning preference 231 MIDI Control Section 25 mini YGDAI I O cards 71 MIX SOLO 20 2 132 MIXDOWN nennen 132 aterert 47 MLAN T O card sss 72 212 215 DELAY tete 261 MOD FILTER eerte 264 MONITOR LEVEL control 15 Monitor out amp Headphones section NEGERI reb nee 15 MONITOR OUT connectors 23 70 Monitor Source selector Monitoring eere Digital input channel status 73 LAST SOLQ Eine 132 MIX 132 MIXDOWN eere 132 MON Q gg 133 RECORDING ee 132 Solo function 2222 134 Solo safe function 133 Solo setup 132 MONG ests nette 133 MONO DELAY 260 MULTI FILTER 268 Multitrack recording
51. Channel Strip Section SEL buttons These buttons enable you to select desired channels The SEL button indicator for the cur rently selected channel lights up The channel selected by each SEL button depends on the layer selected in the LAYER section see page 19 These buttons also allow you to create or cancel channel pairs and add channels to or remove them from Fader Mute EQ and Compressor groups SOLO buttons These buttons solo the selected channels The SOLO button indicator of the cur rently soloed channel lights up 9 ON buttons These buttons turn the selected channels on or off The ON button indicators for On channels light up 4 Channel faders Depending on the button selected in the FADER MODE section see page 17 these faders adjust the selected channel input levels or the Bus Out or Aux Out levels STEREO Section CD SEL button SEL Selects the Stereo Out ON button Turns the Stereo Out on or off 3 STEREO fader This 100mm motorized fader adjusts the final output level of the Stereo Out STEREO 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Control Surface 17 ST IN Section D aes arm SEL SEL c c SOLO SOLO 0 12 12 ON ON ST IN 1 EISTIN2 A CD ST IN button This button selects an ST IN channel pair ST IN
52. INSERT DELAY button once then press the SEL button to select the Stereo Out or Bus Out 1 8 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 100 Chapter 8 Bus Outs Compressing the Stereo Out and Bus Outs To set the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1 8 compressors press the DYNAMICS button then the F3 button to display the Dynamics Comp Edit page and use the SEL buttons to select the Stereo Out or Bus Out 1 8 DYNRHICS ID Initial Data BUS1 BUS1 EN res gt vme THRESHOLD RATIO i ATTACK 8 8dB 2 58 RELEASE OUT GAIN KNEE 229ms i D 0 098 e 2 AGATE EDIT f GATE LIE f COMP EDIT COMP LIE The parameters on this page and the procedure for setting them are the same as for Input Channels see page 82 EQ ing the Stereo Out and Bus Outs To set the EQ for the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1 8 EQ press the DISPLAY ACCESS EQ button then press the F1 button to display the EQ EQ Edit page and use the SEL but tons to select the Stereo Out or Bus Out 1 8 E Initial Data 2111 5712 STI3 5714 G00 BUS1 EQUALIZER EDIT LIBRARY IN ATT OUT ATT 2 The parameters on this page and the procedure for setting them are the same as for Input Channels see page 84 Note that the Stereo Out does not feature the STEREO LINK parameter 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1 8 from
53. OFF Tempo parameter sync on off Used in conjunction with NOTER 1 TEMPO to determine right chan NOTEL 1 Used in conjunction with nel DELAY TEMPO to determine DELAY L Used in conjunction with 1 95 ETP PRD MP Ded de dd den NOTES TEMPO to determine DELAY C Maximum value depends on the tempo setting NOTER 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY R MOD DELAY Used in conjunction with 2 TEMPO to determine DLY One input two output basic repeat delay with mod ulation 1 FFF BS B0 202444 4 oe Maximum value depends on the tempo setting Parameter Range Description DELAY 0 0 2725 0 ms Delay time Feedback gain plus values for FB GAIN _99 to 99 normal phase feedback minus 1 values for reverse phase feed back HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform THRU 1 1 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz LPF THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Used in conjunction with 1 DEY NOTE TEMPO to determine DELAY Used in conjunction with 2 MOD NOTE TEMPO to determine FREQ 1 HU HS R0 0 2 2 4 4 d oe Maximum value depends on the tempo setting 2 d RJ Bh II 4 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual gt 5
54. Output Patching Aux Out 1 OMNI Out connector 1 Aux Out 2 OMNI Out connector 2 Aux Out 3 OMNI Out connector 3 Aux Out 4 OMNI Out connector 4 Aux Out 5 OMNI Out connector 1 Aux Out 6 OMNI Out connector 2 Aux Out 7 OMNI Out connector 3 Aux Out 8 OMNI Out connector 4 By default the following signal paths are patched to outputs ADAT OUT output channels and slot output channels Output connectors and slot channels Signal flow i ADAT OUT output channels 1 8 Bus Outs 1 8 Slot Channels 1 8 Bus Outs 1 8 S Slot Channels 9 16 Bus Outs 1 8 8 OMNI OUT connectors 1 4 Aux Outs 1 4 a 2TR OUT DIGITAL L Stereo Out L 24 2TR OUT DIGITAL R Stereo Out R a Tip You can patch a signal to multiple outputs Youcan store the Output Patch settings to the Output Patch library Refer to Chapter 16 for more information You can change these patches if you desire The procedure for patching signals to output varies depending on the output connectors and slots 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Chapter 10 Input amp Output Patching Changing the Signal Path to the ADAT OUT Connector Slot or OMNI OUT connectors Follow the steps below to change the signal path patched to the ADAT OUT connector the optional mini YGDAI card installed in the slot or the OMNI OUT connectors Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch Out Patch page appears Each parameter box displ
55. To view the Input Channels Insert Ins press the PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch Input Ins page appears This page displays Input Channels 1 32 Insert In Patches PATCH Initial Dat chi cHT U Qoo IN PATCH INPUT INS A EFFECT JACASCADE INE I3 rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to modify the Move the cursor to a channel patch parameter box you wish to change then 10 patching Press ENTER to confirm the change To view the Output Channels Insert Ins press the PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch Output Ins page appears PATCH Initial Data CH1 CH1 OO iam k INdINO indul r 5TERE0 ESI IN NAME IN LIB OUT PATCH A OUTPUT INS I3 Move the cursor to a channel patch parameter box you wish to change then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to modify the patching Press ENTER to confirm the change 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 130 Chapter 10 Input amp Output Patching 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Monitoring 131 11 Monitoring This chapter explains how to set up monitoring and use the Solo function on the 01V96 Monitor The 01V96 features the stereo signal path to feed the monitors The monitoring signal source is patched to MONITOR OUT connectors L amp R and the PHONES connector The following diagram illustrates the monit
56. WC OUT BNC Device A Device B Device C Wordclock slave Wordclock slave Wordclock slave e Star Distribution In this example a dedicated wordclock distribution box is used to supply wordclock signals from the wordclock master to each wordclock slave individually Wordclock Wordclock master distribution box WC IN BNO WC IN BNC WC IN BNO WC IN BNC Device A Device B Device C Device D Wordclock slave Wordclock slave Wordclock slave Wordclock slave 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Wordclock Connections and Settings 41 If the external devices do not have wordclock in and out connectors you can use the clock information included in the digital audio signals In this case digital audio signals and wordclock signals are transferred via the 2TR OUT DIGITAL and 2TR IN DIGITAL jacks or via the digital I O card installed in the rear panel slot Digital audio signal Digital 1 card Wordclock signal External device dnjas pue suondauu0D ES DEO yf i 1 RO oy In nj oot Specifying the Wordclock Source To digitally connect the 01V96 to external devices you must specify the wordclock so
57. 1 1 HU HS EI R05 0 2 42 4 4 4 on Maximum value depends on the tempo setting 2 I RIDI h d P 22 24 4 lt lt MULTI FILTER Two input two output 3 band multi filter 24 dB octave Parameter Range Description TYPE 1 HPF LPF BPF Filter 1 type high pass low pass band pass TYPE 2 HPF LPF BPF Filter 2 type high pass low pass band pass TYPE 3 HPF LPF BPF Filter 3 type high pass low pass band pass FREQ 1 28 0 Hz 16 0 kHz Filter 1 frequency FREQ 2 28 0 Hz 16 0 kHz Filter 2 frequency FREQ 3 28 0 Hz 16 0 kHz Filter 3 frequency LEVEL 1 0 100 Filter 1 level LEVEL 2 0 100 Filter 2 level LEVEL 3 0 100 Filter 3 level RESO 1 0 20 Filter 1 resonance RESO 2 0 20 Filter 2 resonance RESO 3 0 20 Filter 3 resonance 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual FREEZE One input one output basic sampler Available for internal effects 1 and 2 Parameter Range REC MODE MANUAL INPUT Description In MANUAL mode recording is started by pressing the REC and PLAY buttons In INPUT mode Record Ready mode is engaged by pressing the REC button and actual recording is triggered by Effects Parameters 269 M BAND DYNA Two input two output 3 band dynamics processor with individual solo and gain reduction metering for Parameter Range Description THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency
58. 19 MIDI the 01V 96 aa ses ee ea ine 215 MIDI Port Setup 1 11r ee er a sexe vite ded wee 216 Assigning Scenes to Program Changes for Remote Recall 219 Assigning Parameters to Control Changes for Real time Control 220 Controlling Parameters by Using Parameter Changes 225 Transmitting Parameter Settings via MIDI Bulk Dump 226 Other 5 229 Changing the Input and Output Channel Names 229 Setting Preferences unless 230 Creating a Custom Layer by Combining Channels User Assignable Layer 233 Using the Oscillator 22 xe pede rte ae ae 234 Using the User Defined 1 235 Using Operations Lock ar In ERM EE IS 237 Cascading Consoles i iui cru eL tek ee ae 238 Checking the Battery and the System Version 242 Initializing the 01V965 4 Uter UEM E eire 243 Calibrating the Faders var sa ana u sin Diss 244 Appendix A Parameter Lists 247 USER DEFINED KEYS nne ee en 247 USER DEFINED KEYS Initial 249 Input Patch Parameters 222 249 Initial Input Patch Settings ae Ds hs 251 Output Patch Parametets cec bei rel
59. 282 e e ms S GG Gr ud O Fi FRDER fA LIBRARY 1 16 AUX f The following parameters are available sections marked with an asterisk are unavailable for the ST IN Channels 1 GATE section This section enables you to turn the gate type dynamics processor on or off and set the parameters See page 81 for more information 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Sjouueu ndu N 88 Chapter 7 Input Channels 2 COMP section This section enables you to turn the compressor type dynamics processor on or off and set the parameters See page 82 for more information 3 INSERT section This section enables you to turn the Insert on or off and patch the Insert In and Out See page 127 for more information 4 EQ section This section enables you to set various EQ parameters See page 84 for more informa tion 5 Meters These meters indicate the signal levels of the currently selected Input Channel and its available pair partner 6 Phase section You can reverse the signal phase of the currently selected Input Channel See page 79 for more information 7 DELAY section This section enables you to set the currently selected channel s Delay function See page 80 for more information PAIR section This section indicates whether or not channels are paired The heart icon Wf is in one piece when channels are paired The heart icon is broken
60. 30 73 73 116 31 74 74 117 32 75 75 118 33 76 76 119 34 77 77 120 35 78 78 121 36 79 79 122 37 80 80 123 38 81 81 124 39 82 82 125 40 83 83 126 41 84 84 127 42 85 85 128 43 86 86 gt 5 o 2 a x 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 290 Appendix C MIDI Initial Parameter to Control Change Table CHANNEL High Mid Low High Mid Low 0 NO ASSIGN 57 NO ASSIGN 1 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT1 58 NO ASSIGN 2 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT2 59 NO ASSIGN 3 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT3 60 NO ASSIGN 4 FADERH CHANNEL INPUT4 61 NO ASSIGN 5 FADER H CHANNEL INPUTS 62 FADERL MASTER STEREO 6 FADERH CHANNEL INPUT6 63 NO ASSIGN 7 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT 64 ON CHANNEL INPUT1 8 FADERH CHANNEL INPUT8 65 ON CHANNEL INPUT2 9 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT9 66 ON CHANNEL INPUT3 10 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT10 67 ON CHANNEL INPUT4 11 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT11 68 ON CHANNEL INPUTS 12 FADERH CHANNEL INPUT12 69 ON CHANNEL INPUT6 13 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT13 70 ON CHANNEL
61. Hum amp Noise 20 Hz 20 kHz Rs 150 Q 128 dB Equivalent Input Noise 86 dB residual output noise STEREO OUT STEREO OUT off Input Gain Max Input Pad 0 dB 86 dB 90 dB S N STEREO OUT STEREO fader at nominal level and all CH INPUT faders at minimum level Input Pad 0 dB Input Sensitivity 60 dB 64 dB 68 dB S N STEREO OUT STEREO fader at nominal level and one CH INPUT fader at nominal level Maximum Voltage Gain Crosstalk 1 kHz Input Gain Min 74 dB CH INPUT CH1 12 to STEREO OUT OMNI BUS OUT 40 dB CH INPUT CH13 16 to STEREO OUT 74 dB CH INPUT CH1 12 to OMNI AUX OUT via pre input fader 74 dB CH INPUT CH1 12 to MONITOR OUT via STEREO BUS 80 dB adjacent input channels 1 12 80 dB adjacent input channels CH13 16 80 dB input to output AD Input 1 12 Phantom switch 48 V DC each Ach Pad switch 0 20 dB attenuation Gain control 44 dB 60 to 16 detented Peak indicator LED red turns on when post HA level reaches 3 dB below clipping at dig ital domain Signal indicator AD converter LED green turns on when post HA level reaches 20 dB below nominal at digital domain 24 bit linear 128 times oversampling fs 44 1 48 kHz 64 times over sampling fs 88 2 96 kHz AD Input 13 16 Gain control 30 dB 26 to 4 detented Peak indicator LED red turns on when post HA leve
62. M 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000011 43 C 00111001 39 9 00110011 33 3 DATA NAME 01001111 4F O Ommmmmmm mh 0 32 Output patch Library no 0 32 Ommmmmmm ml 256 Current data BLOCK INFO Ottttttt tt total block number minimum number is 0 Obbbbbbb bb current block number 0 total block number DATA Oddddddd ds Output patch Library data of block bb Oddddddd de CHECK SUM ee ee Invert L de 1 amp 0x7F EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 2 8 2 28 Output patch library bulk dump request format The second and third bytes ofthe DATA NAME indicate the bank number See above STATUS 11110000 FO ID No 01000011 43 SUB STATUS 00 FORMAT No 0111 System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel Universal bulk dump Onnnn 2n 110 7E 01001100 4c 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000011 43 C 00111001 39 9 00110011 33 3 01001111 4F O Ommmmmmm mh 0 32 Output patch Library no 0 32 256 Current data End of exclusive DATA NAME Ommmmmmm ml EOX LALO FI 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 2 8 2 29 Plug in effect card bulk dump format The second byte ofthe DATA NAME indicates the slot number 0 SLOT 1 The data is not received if the Developer ID and Product ID are different than the card that is installed in the slot The data is not transm
63. Owner s Manual Initial Track Recording 59 DYNAMICS Initial Data BIST STI2 STIS STI4 CH8 CH8 EDIT 9 THRESHOLD 9 RATIO B RTTRCK 17 8dB 1 2 511 i Sms RELEASE OUT GAIN 11 i 3 5dB 2 comp LIE 2 ids u Tip The 01V96 features four types of dynamics processors COMP Compressor EXPAND Expander COMP S Compander Soft and COMP H Compander Hard These processors feature different parameters See page 272 for the parameters for each compres sor type You cannot change the compressor type on the Comp Edit page To change the compressor type recall a program that uses the desired compressor type from the Compressor library then adjust the parameters as desired 7 Press the ENTER button to turn on the ON OFF button located in the lower left corner of the page The ON OFF button turns the currently selected Input Channel s compressor on or off 8 While a musician plays the musical instrument adjust the compressor parameters To do so move the cursor to the desired parameter in the PARAMETER section on the page then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons Input Channels 1 32 feature a gate that can be used independently of the compressor To use the gate first press the DYNAMICS button then the F2 button to access the Gate library After you recall a gate program press the Dynamics button then the F1 bu
64. gt o E When SW is not assigned UNLATCH MIDI data transmission 1 Off Illuminated Off ox gt gt ox Tip In most situations select Unlatch if SW is not assigned 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 0430u0 JJow yY 212 Chapter 17 Remote Control 10 To change the channel name move the cursor to the ID LONG parameter box then press ENTER to display the Title Edit window Refer to page 30 for more information on editing names Tip Move the cursor to the INITIALIZE button then press ENTER A window is displayed that enables you to reset the parameter settings in the currently selected bank You can also assign MIDI messages to the parameter boxes manually without using the LEARN button Machine Control Function The 01V96 can control the transport functions and select tracks on external recording machines that support MMC by transmitting commands via the MIDI OUT port or USB port Note Controllable parameters vary depending on the connected devices Refer to the User s Manual for the external device for more information on controllable parameters 1 Refer to the diagram below for information on connecting the 01V96 to an external device MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI IN 2529 MMC supported machine
65. n TET Ce Poo EGG 01V96 Slave 01V96 Master 3 Onthe slave unit press the DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch Out Patch page appears 4 Assign the Bus signals to the channels that are used for the cascade connec tion The following signals are available Options Description CAS BUS1 BUS8 CAS AUX1 AUX8 CAS ST L CAS ST R Bus 1 8 Cascade Outs Aux Bus 1 8 Cascade Outs Stereo Bus L amp R Cascade Outs CASSOLOL CASSOLOR Solo Bus L amp R Cascade Outs 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual suono unj Jou1O 240 Chapter 19 Other Functions The following display page is an example of integrating Bus 1 8 Aux Send 1 4 Stereo Bus and Solo Bus signals via the IN and OUT connectors and two 8 channel digital I O cards such as MY8 AT PATCH Initial Dat OO Initial Data dl C SLOT OUTPUT PATCH 1 CAS BUS1 5 Tip Patching may vary depending on the type and number of buses used for the cascade con nection Note Sincethe number o
66. noue This parameter enables you to select the User Defined Key banks KEYS UDEF User Defined Remote Layer banks RMT UDEF or User Assignable Layer banks USR LAYER for bulk dump You can select one of these three types in the parameter box next to the button and select the banks in the parameter box on the right SETUPMEM This button selects the 01V96 setup data i e system settings TABLE This button selects the MIDI Pgm Asgn page settings CIL TABLE This button selects the MIDI Ctl Asgn page settings PLUG IN This button selects the settings of an optional Y56K card installed in the slot You can select Y56K card programs in the parameter box next to the button Note Data selected by the SETUPMEM button includes MIDI transmission and reception port settings and message settings After you store to an external device bulk dump data that has its reception disabled if the 01V96 later starts to receive this particular data 01V96 bulk dump reception will be turned off immediately and the 01V96 will be unable to receive sub sequent data Therefore before you store the data selected by the SETUPMEM button using Bulk Dump be sure to enable bulk data transmission and reception 5 If necessary move the cursor to the parameter box next to the selected but ton then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to select the desire
67. 01V96 Block 01V96 Level Diagram End of Manual End of Manual End of Manual 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Welcome 11 1 Welcome Thank you for choosing the Yamaha 01V96 Digital Mixing Console The compact 01V96 Digital Console features 24 bit 96 kHz digital audio processing with out compromise as well as 40 channel simultaneous mixing The 01V96 covers a broad range of needs and applications including multi track recording 2 channel mixdown and cutting edge surround sound production This integrated comprehensive audio system features remote control function for DAWs Digital Audio Workstations as popularized by the DM2000 and 02R96 Digital Mixing Consoles The 01V96 offers the following features TS Hardware Features 100 mm motorized faders x 17 Faders set levels for Input Channels Aux send levels and Bus Outs Four selectable software layers determine the function of channel faders 320x240 dot LCD display Buttons and controls in the SELECTED CHANNEL section enable direct editing of channel EQ parameters 8 USER DEFINED KEYS enable you to assign functions to control 01V96 internal parameters optical connectors Expansion slot for optional digital I O AD and DA cards Sonic Specifications Linear 24 bit 128 times oversampling A D converters Linear 24 bit 128 times oversampling D A conv
68. 136 Factory default 136 SYMPHONIC 262 SYNC parameter 241 System exclusive messages 215 System version sse 242 T Tab scroll arrows 20 28 Tab scroll buttons 20 Target parameter 192 Tascam I O card sss 72 Title edit window 22 30 TO HOST USB 25 Trajectory patterns 143 TREMOLO 263 Tutorial 2 47 Compressing 237 EQ P een 2456 Initial Track Recording 49 Internal Effects 266 Master Recorder 68 Mixdown eee 63 Monitoring Level 54 61 Overdubbing sss 60 50 Recording nennen 59 62 Routing 51 Setting the Input Levels 49 U UNEDATGE ertet 211 USB 225 OMS 191 USB port eret 215 User assignable layer 233 USER DEFINED KEYS 4 21 Initial assignments 249 User defined keys 235 Utility Battery page 242 Utility CH Status page 73 Utility Lock page 237 Utility Oscillator page 234 Utility User Def page 235 UTILITY button eee 18
69. 2 i STEREO msec 6 8 samr e 4 OUT OLY The parameters on this page and the procedure for setting them are the same as for Input Channels except that this page does not include the MIX FB GAIN parameters see page 80 Tip You can also display the Out Dly page if you select the desired Aux Out 1 8 by pressing the corresponding SEL button while the DLY related parameters are indicated on the page 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Setting Aux Out 1 8 from the Display 111 Comp settings To set the Aux Out 1 8 compressors press the DISPLAY ACCESS DYNAMICS button then press the F3 button to display the Dynamics Comp Edit page then select the desired Aux Out 1 8 by using the corresponding SEL buttons CH THRESHOLD Ors i ATTACK 58ms ae O OUT ico KNEE GATE EDIT M GATE LIE A E COMP LIS The parameters on this page and the procedure for setting them are the same as for Input Channels see page 82 EQ settings To set the EQ for Aux Out 1 8 press the DISPLAY ACCESS EQ button then press the F1 button to display the EQ EQ Edit page then use the SEL buttons to select Aux Out 1 8 Initial Data a STI1 STI2 STI3 STI4 ee toni GO RUX1 EQUALIZER EDIT AEG LIBRARY A IN ATT ZA OUT The parameters on this page and the procedure for setting them are the same as for In
70. 267 One input two output delay and early reflections effects in series Parameter Range Description Parameter Range Description DELAYL 0 0 1000 0 ms Left channel delay time DELAYL 0 0 1000 0 ms Left channel delay time DELAYR 0 0 1000 0 ms Right channel delay time DELAYR 0 0 1000 0 ms Right channel delay time FB DLY 0 0 1000 0 ms Feedback delay time FB DLY 0 0 1000 0 ms Feedback delay time Feedback gain plus values for Feedback gain plus values for 99 to 49996 normal phase feedback minus FB GAIN 99 to 49996 normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feed values for reverse phase feed back back HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio THRU THRU 4 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency HPF 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz LPF THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency LPF THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency Delay and early reflections bal Delay and early reflected delay DLY ER 0 100 ance 0 all delay 100 all DLY BAL 0 100 balance 0 all early reflected early reflections delay 100 all delay S Hall L Hall Ran of early reflection simula S Hall L Hall Ran roe of early reflection simula TYPE dom Revers Plate y 7 dom Revers Plate yp y J tion tion
71. 316 Appendix C MIDI Refer to the above table for the Functions and Numbers STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0011nnnn n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID 01111111 7F Universal ADDRESS 00010100 14 Function call 0000ffff attribute Ommmmmmm mh number High Ommmmmmm ml number Low EOX 11110111 F7 End ofexclusive 2 8 3 16 Parameter change Function call link Reception This is received if Parameter change RX is ON and the Rx CH matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS This is echoed if Parameter change ECHO is ON When this is received the patch link data of the specified scene will be modified Transmission In response to a request a Parameter Change message will be transmitted on the Rx CH If Parameter change ECHO is ON this message will be retransmitted without change STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL digital mixer MODEL ID 01111111 7F Universal ADDRESS 00010100 14 Function call 0010ffff 2f link Ommmmmmm mh number High Ommmmmmm ml number Low DATA Oiiiiiii ih inpatch Oriliirrs AL 00000000 oh Outpatch 00000000 ol EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive function number SCENE LIB LINK 0x20 0 99
72. 4 1 AUX4 4 2 NONE CASCADE IN PATCH BUS NONE BUS2 NONE BUS3 NONE BUS4 NONE BUS5 NONE BUS6 NONE BUS7 NONE BUS8 NONE AUX1 NONE AUX2 NONE AUX3 NONE AUX4 NONE AUXS NONE AUX6 NONE AUX7 NONE AUX8 NONE STL NONE STR NONE SOLO L NONE SOLO R NONE EFFECT TYPE EFFECT1 REVERB HALL EFFECT2 REVERB ROOM EFFECT3 REVERB STAGE EFFECT4 REVERB PLATE CHANNEL 1 AD1 2 AD2 3 AD3 4 AD4 5 AD5 6 AD6 7 AD7 8 AD8 9 AD9 10 AD10 11 AD11 12 AD12 13 AD13 14 AD14 15 AD15 16 AD16 17 ADAT1 18 ADAT2 19 ADAT3 20 ADAT4 21 ADAT5 22 ADAT6 23 ADAT7 24 ADAT8 25 S 1 26 5 2 27 5 3 28 5 4 29 5 5 30 5 6 31 5 7 32 5 8 STIIL FX1 1 STHR FX1 2 STI2L FX2 1 STI2R FX2 2 STI3L FX3 1 STI3R FX3 2 STI4L FX4 1 STI4R FX4 2 mono input 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 251 gt 5 2 2 x 252 Appendix A Parameter Lists CHANNEL NAME CHANNEL ID SHORT LONG CHI CHI CHI CHI CH2 CH2 CH2 CH2 CH3 CH3 CH3 CH3 CH4 CH4 CH4 CH4 CH5 CH5 CH5 CH5 CH6 CH6 CH6 CH6 CH7 CH7 CH7 CH7 CH8 CH8 CH8 CH8 CH9 CH9 CH9 CH9 CH10 CH10 CH10 CH10 CH11 CH11 CH11 CH11 CH12 CH12 CH12 CH12 CH13 CH13
73. 99 Nuendo Cubase 206 AES EBU VO 71 Setting the levels 104 Other te tet Re 206 AMP SIMULATE 264 Viewing the settings 102 Pro tools eere 190 Analog inputs amp outputs 69 051 058 139 Recording system 1 239 Assigne DBUttOns a ee tee 29 Remote 189 Control changes 220 DEC amp INC buttons 22 MIDI MESSAGES 209 C DEE button een 30 Program changes 219 Cascade COMM Link preference 232 Delay 80 99 110 Remote Layer nennen 189 Cascading consoles 238 DELAY SCALE enn 80 USER DEFINED KEYS 197 Cascade page 240 PB GAIN 80 Attenuator 83 99 110 SYNC parameter 241 DELAY LCR eee 261 Output signals 106 CATEGORY ote Aene 7 DELAY 5 4 444 80 Auto Channel Select preference 231 CHI 4 ON OFF switch 23 DELAYER 267 Auto Direct Out On preference 232 CH5 8 ON OFF switch 23 DELAY REV eee 268 Auto EQUALIZER Display preference CH9 12 ON OFF switch 23 DELAY gt ER nennen 267 is even ssp vesseseees vevoee sus
74. All channel routings Fader groups Mute groups Fader group Masters Mute group Masters EQ links and Compressor links All channel pair settings Effects parameters Effect programs recalled for Effects processors 1 4 and their parameter set tings Remote Layer Scene settings Fader and ON button status only when Remote Control Target is set to USER DEFINED Scene titles and Fade Time settings Input Patching Currently selected Input Patch library number Output Patching Currently selected Output Patch library number Note Scenes take a snapshot of Input and Output Patch library numbers that are in use at the time the Scene is stored but exclude current edited Input and Output patching If you do not store the edited Input and Output patching to the libraries recalling a Scene may change the current patching 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual SalJOUJ9 A SU9IS 166 Chapter 15 Scene Memories About Scene Numbers Scene memories are numbered with U or from 00 through 99 You can store Scenes in Scene memories 01 99 When you recall a Scene the Scene memory number appears at the top of the display page Scene memory 00 is a special read only memory that contains the default settings of all mix parameters To reset all mix parameters on the 01V96 to their initial or default values recall Scene memory 0 Also the Initial Data Nominal check box on th
75. DIO Setup Preferl page 230 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 320 index DIO Setup Prefer2 page 230 149 INDIVIDUAL ttn 85 DIO Setup Remote page 192 208 233 INIT 2 222820 139 DIO Setup Surr Bus page 39 F Initial Data Nominal preference 232 DIO Setup Word Clock page 41 72 gg s 143 Initial Track Recording 49 DIO SETUP button 18 _ 4 19 Initializing the 01V96 nenn 243 Direct Outs aethere 125 Fader gIOUps esses 149 150 Input channels 77 Display TEE EEE DIENT 19 FADER MODE section ann 17 Attenuating EN esce cesse ELLE 83 DISPLAY ACCESS section 18 Fading Compressing eene 82 Display Brightness preference 233 ALL CLEAR Delaying nacer ps 80 Display section eee 19 AUXI 8 EQ AERE 91 DIST gt DELAY nase 268 BUSI 8 een 84 DISTORTION eere 264 Global fade time 81 Dithering BEN we 74 INPUT CH1 32 Levels u sat 90 DIV 143 ST IN 1 4 Naming J o M 94 DOUBLE CHANNEL 8278 STEREO Den 92 DOUBLE SPEED S ERSTE ce On US Panning 85 90 DUAL PITCH 263 Fast Meter Fall Time preference IM 231 Routing A 86 DYNA FILTER 2268 BBI
76. Double click the button you selected in Step 1 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Display Interface 29 4 Press the cursor buttons to move the cursor a bold frame to a button parameter box rotary control or fader so that you can change the value Tip The 01V96 remembers the current page and parameter when you select a new page group If you return to the previous page group the 01V96 displays the correct page with the same parameter selected You can also select a page by using the controls or buttons on the top panel see page 230 Display Interface This section describes how to use the display interface Rotary Controls amp Faders PAN The rotary controls and faders enable you to adjust the contin uously variable parameter values including Input Channel lev Rei els and effects parameters Press the cursor buttons to move the cursor to a rotary control or fader you want to adjust then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to modify the value 8 85 Buttons The buttons enable you to turn certain functions on Ken enabled or off disabled Move the cursor to the appropri ad ate button then press the ENTER button to turn the func ma tion on highlighted or off The buttons also enable you to select one of two options or to execute certain functions Parameter Boxes The parameter boxes enable you to select one of multiple options Press the curs
77. G Stroke 1 Emphasizes the bright tones of acoustic guitars A G Stroke 2 A variation on preset 20 You can also use it with an acoustic electric nylon string guitar A G Arpeg 1 Ideal for arpeggio playing on acoustic guitars A G Arpeg 2 A variation on preset 22 Brass Sec Use with trumpets trombones or saxes When used with a single instru ment try adjusting the HIGH or HIGH MID frequency Male Vocal 1 An EQ template for male vocals Try adjusting the HIGH or HIGH MID parameters according to the voice quality Male Vocal 2 A variation on preset 25 An EQ template for female vocals Try adjusting the HIGH or HIGH MID 27 Female vat parameters according to the voice quality 28 Female Vo 2 A variation on preset 27 29 Chorus amp Harmo An EQ template for brightening choruses 30 Total EQ 1 Use on a stereo mix during mixdown Sounds even better when used with a compressor 31 Total EQ2 A variation on preset 30 32 Total EQ 3 c on preset 30 Can also be used with paired Input or Output 33 Bass Drum 3 A variation on preset 1 with low and mid range reduced 34 Snare Drum 3 A variation on preset 3 creating a thicker sound 35 Tom tom 2 A variation on preset 5 emphasizing the mid and high ranges 36 Piano 3 A variation on preset 13 37 Piano Low Emphasizes the low range of pianos recorded in stereo 38 Piano High Emphasizes the high range of pianos recorded in
78. ICS button then press the F4 button to display the Dynamics Comp Lib page and recall the desired compressor program see page 82 Press the DYNAMICS button then press the F3 button to display the Comp Edit page then edit the compressor parameters Gating the track signals Select the desired channel by pressing the corresponding SEL button press the DYNAM ICS button then press the F2 button to display the Dynamics Gate Lib page Then recall the desired gate program Press the DYNAMICS button then press the F1 button to dis play the Gate Edit page then edit the gate parameters 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 66 Chapter 5 Tutorial Using the Internal Effects The 01V96 features four internal multi effects processors that can be used via Aux Sends and Returns or by inserting them into specific channels This section describes how to use internal Effects processor 1 via Aux Send 1 and apply reverb to the track signals 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch Effect page appears PATCH Initial Data a SH1 571257135714 ci eur U 0 oO BD REVERB PLATE R This page enables you to patch the inputs and outputs of Effects processors 1 4 By default Aux Send 1 is patched to the input of Effects processor 1 and the output of Effects processor 1 is patched to ST IN Channel 1 L and R as shown in the diagram above Tip Ifthe patch for
79. INPUT CH1 32 ST IN 1 4 These parameters enable you to set the Fade Time for each Input Channel in the range of 00 0 through 30 0 seconds The Fade Time setting for one channel in a pair works in unison with its partner Tip If you operate a fader while fading channels the fader s Fade Time setting is temporarily ignored You copy the currently selected Input Channel Fade Time to all Input Channels by dou ble clicking the ENTER button to display a window for copying This is convenient when you wish to set the Fade Time for all channels simultaneously 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Fading Scenes 171 Fading Output Channels To set the Fade Time for the Output Channels Stereo Out Bus Outs 1 8 Aux Outs 1 8 press the DISPLAY ACCESS SCENE button repeatedly until the Scene Out Fade page appears The basic operation is the same as on the In Fade page SCENE Initial Dat 5112 STI3 5114 can 9 O O 4 5i 6i ri 8 88 0 800 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 ipi Ei Fi Gi H 88 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 SCENE JA IN FADE our FADE RCL SAFE E gt 1 BUS1 8 These parameters enable you to set the Fade Time for each Bus Out 1 8 in the range of 00 0 through 30 0 seconds 2 AUX1 8 These parameters enable you to set the Fade Time for Aux Outs 1 8 3 STEREO This parameter enables you to set the Fade Time for the Stereo Out 4 INPUT MASTER A H The
80. Input MUTE Group Enable J IN Mute Group J 100 Machine SHUTTLE Machine SHUTTLE 48 Input MUTE Group Enable K IN Mute Group K 101 Machine SCRUB Machine SCRUB 49 Input MUTE Group Enable L IN Mute Group L 102 Machine LOCATE X Machine LOCATE X 50 Input MUTE Group Enable M IN Mute Group M 103 Machine Set LOCATE X Machine Capture X 51 Input MUTE Group Enable N IN Mute Group N 104 Machine RTZ Machine RTZ 105 Machine Set RTZ Machine Set RTZ 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual gt o 2 2 x 248 Appendix A Parameter Lists Function Display Function Display 106 Track Arming 1 Track Arming 1 165 DAW SUSPEND GROUP DAW SUSPEND GRP 107 Track Arming 2 Track Arming 2 166 DAW WINDOW TRANSPORT DAW WIN TRANSPORT 108 Track Arming 3 Track Arming 3 167 DAW WINDOW INSERT DAW WIN INSERT 109 Track Arming 4 Track Arming 4 168 DAW WINDOW MIX EDIT DAW WIN MIX EDIT 110 Track Arming 5 Track Arming 5 169 DAW WINDOW MEM LOC DAW WIN MEM LOC 111 Track Arming 6 Track Arming 6 170 DAW WINDOW STATUS DAW WIN STATUS 112 Track Arming 7 Track Arming 7 171 DAW Shortcut UNDO DAW UNDO 113 Track Arming 8 Track Arming 8 172 DAW Shortcut SAVE DAW SAVE 114 Track Arming 9 Track Arming 9 1
81. NO ASSIGN 61 NO ASSIGN 62 NO ASSIGN 63 NO ASSIGN 64 EQ F HI MID INPUT1 65 EQ F HI MID INPUT2 66 EQ F HI MID INPUT3 67 EQ F HI MID INPUT4 68 EQ F HI MID INPUTS 69 EQ F HI MID INPUT6 70 EQ F HI MID 71 EQ F HI MID INPUT8 72 EQ F HI MID INPUT9 73 EQ F HI MID INPUT10 74 EQ F HI MID INPUT11 75 EQ F HI MID INPUT12 76 EQ F HI MID INPUT13 77 EQ F HI MID INPUT14 78 EQ F HI MID INPUT15 79 EQ F HI MID INPUT16 80 EQ F HI MID INPUT17 81 EQ F HI MID INPUT18 82 EQ F HI MID INPUT19 83 EQ F HI MID INPUT2O 84 EQ F HI MID INPUT21 85 EQ F HI MID INPUT22 86 EQ F HI MID INPUT23 87 EQ F HI MID INPUT24 88 NO ASSIGN 89 EQ Q HI MID INPUT1 90 EQ Q HI MID INPUT2 91 EQ Q HI MID INPUT3 92 EQ Q HI MID INPUT4 93 EQ Q HI MID INPUTS 94 EQ Q HI MID INPUT6 95 EQ Q HI MID 102 Q HI MID INPUT8 103 EQ Q HI MID INPUT9 104 EQ Q HI MID INPUT10 105 EQ Q HI MID INPUT11 106 EQ Q HI MID INPUT12 107 Q HI MID INPUT13 108 EQ Q HI MID INPUT14 109 EQ Q HI MID INPUT15 110 Q HI MID INPUT16 111 EQ Q HI MID INPUT17 112 EQ Q HI MID INPUT18 113 EQ Q HI MID INPUT19 114 EQ Q HI MID INPUT20 115 EQ Q HI MID INPUT21 116 EQ Q HI MID INPUT22 117 EQ Q HI MID INPUT23 118 EQ Q HI MID INPUT24 119 NO ASSIGN CHANNEL7 High Mid Low 0 NO ASSIGN 1 EQ G HI MID H INPUT1 2 EQ G HI MID INPUT2 3 EQ G HI MID H INPUT3 4
82. NO ASSIGN 59 NO ASSIGN 1 SURROUND LFE H INPUT1 60 NO ASSIGN 2 SURROUND LFE H INPUT2 61 NO ASSIGN 3 SURROUND LFE H INPUT3 62 NO ASSIGN 4 SURROUND LFE H INPUT4 63 NO ASSIGN 5 SURROUND LFE H INPUTS 64 SURROUND DIV F INPUT1 6 SURROUND LFE H INPUT6 65 SURROUND DIV F INPUT2 7 SURROUND LFE H INPUT 66 SURROUND DIV F INPUT3 8 SURROUND LFE H INPUT8 67 SURROUND DIV F INPUT4 9 SURROUND LFE H INPUT9 68 SURROUND DIV F INPUTS 10 SURROUND LFE H INPUT1O 69 SURROUND DIV F INPUT6 11 SURROUND LFE H INPUT11 70 SURROUND DIV F 12 SURROUND LFE H INPUT12 71 SURROUND DIV F INPUT8 13 SURROUND LFE H INPUT13 72 SURROUND DIV F INPUT9 14 SURROUND LFE H INPUT14 73 SURROUND DIV F INPUT10 15 SURROUND LFE H INPUT15 74 SURROUND DIV F INPUT11 16 SURROUND LFE H INPUT16 75 SURROUND DIV F INPUT12 17 SURROUND LFE H INPUT17 76 SURROUND DIV F INPUT13 18 SURROUND LFE H INPUT18 77 SURROUND DIV F INPUT14 19 SURROUND LFE H INPUT19 78 SURROUND DIV F INPUT15 20 SURROUND LFE H INPUT2O 79 SURROUND DIV F INPUT16 21 SURROUND LFE H INPUT21 80 SURROUND DIV F INPUT17 22 SURROUND LFE H INPUT22 81 SURROUND DIV F INPUT18 23 SURROUND LFE H INPUT23 82 SURROUND DIV F INPUT19 24 SURROUND LFE H INPUT24 83 SURROUND DIV F INPUT2O 25 NO ASSIGN 84 SURROUND DIV F INPUT21 26 NO ASSIGN 85 SURROUND DIV F INPUT22 27 NO ASSIGN 86 SURROUND DIV F INPUT23 28 NO ASSIGN 87 SURROUND DIV F INPUT24 29
83. Note Sinewave and pink noise create unusually high sound pressure Oscillator levels that are too high can damage the speakers When you use the Oscillator be sure to set the level to minimum then raise the level gradually 5 Movethe cursor to the OSCILLATOR ON OFF button then press the ENTER or INC DEC buttons to turn on the Oscillator The Oscillator signal is now routed to the channels selected in the ASSIGN section 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Using the User Defined Keys 235 6 Move the cursor to the parameter control in the LEVEL section then rotate the Parameter wheel to raise the Oscillator level You can view the current Oscillator level on the LEVEL meter Using the User Defined Keys PN USER DEFINED You can assign any of more than 160 functions to the USER DEFINED KEYS 1 8 buttons 1 z If you assign to one of the buttons or keys a function that is usually executed on the dis play pages you can use the assigned button as a shortcut 3 4 Function to User Defined Keys assignments are stored in banks Each bank accommo dates an assignment of all eight buttons See page 249 for more information on the initial nim a bank settings The 01V96 provides eight banks Banks A H Switching banks enables you to change the assignment quickly Follow the steps below to assign functions to the USER D
84. ST INAL 74 SURROUND WIDTH ST IN2L 16 SURROUND ST INAR 75 SURROUND WIDTH ST IN2R 17 NO ASSIGN 76 SURROUND WIDTH ST IN3L 18 NO ASSIGN 77 SURROUND WIDTH ST IN3R 19 NO ASSIGN 78 SURROUND WIDTH ST INAL 20 NO ASSIGN 79 SURROUND WIDTH ST INAR 21 NO ASSIGN 80 NO ASSIGN 22 NO ASSIGN 81 NO ASSIGN 23 NO ASSIGN 82 NO ASSIGN 24 NO ASSIGN 83 NO ASSIGN 25 NO ASSIGN 84 NO ASSIGN 26 NO ASSIGN 85 NO ASSIGN 27 NO ASSIGN 86 NO ASSIGN 28 NO ASSIGN 87 NO ASSIGN 29 NO ASSIGN 88 NO ASSIGN 30 NO ASSIGN 89 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT25 31 NO ASSIGN 90 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT26 32 NO ASSIGN 91 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT27 33 SURROUND FR INPUT25 92 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT28 34 SURROUND FR INPUT26 93 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT29 35 SURROUND FR INPUT27 94 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT30 36 SURROUND FR INPUT28 95 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT31 37 SURROUND INPUT29 102 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT32 38 SURROUND FR INPUT30 103 SURROUND DEPTH ST INTL 39 SURROUND FR INPUT31 104 SURROUND DEPTH ST INTR 40 SURROUND FR INPUT32 105 SURROUND DEPTH ST IN2L 41 SURROUND FR ST INTL 106 SURROUND DEPTH ST IN2R 42 SURROUND FR ST INTR 107 SURROUND DEPTH ST IN3L 43 SURROUND FR ST IN2L 108 SURROUND DEPTH ST IN3R 44 SURROUND FR ST IN2R 109 SURROUND DEPTH ST INAL 45 SURROUND FR ST IN3L 110 SURROUND DEPTH ST INAR 46 SURROUND FR ST IN3R 111 NO ASSIGN 47 S
85. SURROUND LR INPUT24 83 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT2O 25 NO ASSIGN 84 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT21 26 NO ASSIGN 85 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT22 27 NO ASSIGN 86 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT23 28 NO ASSIGN 87 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT24 29 NO ASSIGN 88 NO ASSIGN 30 NO ASSIGN 89 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT1 31 NO ASSIGN 90 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT2 32 NO ASSIGN 91 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT3 33 SURROUND FR INPUT1 92 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT4 34 SURROUND FR INPUT2 93 SURROUND DEPTH INPUTS 35 SURROUND FR INPUT3 94 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT6 36 SURROUND FR INPUT4 95 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT 37 SURROUND FR INPUTS 102 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT8 38 SURROUND FR INPUT6 103 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT9 39 SURROUND FR 104 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT10 40 SURROUND FR INPUT8 105 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT11 41 SURROUND FR INPUT9 106 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT12 42 SURROUND FR INPUT10 107 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT13 43 SURROUND FR INPUT11 108 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT14 44 SURROUND FR INPUT12 109 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT15 45 SURROUND FR INPUT13 110 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT16 46 SURROUND FR INPUT14 111 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT17 47 SURROUND FR INPUT15 112 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT18 48 SURROUND FR INPUT16 113 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT19 49 SURROUND FR INPUT17 114 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT20 50 SURROUND FR INPUT18 115 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT21 51 SURROUND FR INPUT19 116 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT22 52 SURROUND FR INPUT20 117 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT23 53 SURROUND FR INPUT21 11
86. Signals from Input Channels with the SOLO SAFE CHANNEL button turned on are always fed to the Stereo bus regardless of the channels Solo function status You can clear all Solo Safe settings by turning on the ALL CLEAR button Tip For example if you set the internal effects processor s return signal to Solo Safe you can monitor the soloed processed or wet signals MONITOR TRIM This parameter enables you to trim the level of the monitoring signal in the range of 96 dB to 12 dB 9 MONO This button switches the Monitor signal into mono Using the Monitor 1 Connect a monitoring system to the MONITOR OUT connectors To monitor the signal via headphones connect headphones to the PHONES jack 2 Pressthe Monitor Source selector in the MONITOR section to select the mon itoring signal source To monitor the 01V96 s internal signals turn off the selector the button should be raised To monitor the signals at the 2TR IN connectors turn on the selector the button should be pushed in MONITOR 2TR IN 3 Adjustthe monitoring level using the MONITOR MONITOR LEVEL control while playing the sound sources To adjust the level of the monitoring signal via headphones turn the PHONES LEVEL control 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 134 Chapter 11 Monitoring Using the Solo Function You can solo and monitor Input Channels Aux Out 1 8 and Bus Out 1 8 using the SOLO
87. This section describes how to route signals by combining the above two routing methods 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PAN ROUTING button repeatedly to display the Pan Route Rout1 16 page This page enables you to select a Bus Out as the signal destination for each channel PAN ROUTE CHi CHi ALL STEREO ALL BUS ALL CLEAR aa BO Bo Bo SURROUND MODE STEREO pouri 16 FROUTIT STIAALBUS TO ST E13 This page contains the following buttons D 1 8 buttons These buttons route Input Channel signals to Buses 1 8 You can select multiple but tons 2 S button This button routes Input Channel signals to the Stereo Bus 3 D button This button routes Input Channel signals to the specified output connectors and chan nels directly 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Initial Track Recording 53 Move the cursor to the S button for the Input Channel to which the musical instrument or microphone is connected then press ENTER to turn it off By default each Input Channel is routed to the Stereo Bus which enables you to monitor the signals from the MONITOR OUT connectors and the PHONES jack However during multitrack recording you may usually want to monitor the signals returned from the connected digital MTR rather than moni toring the Input Channel signals To do so you must turn off the S button so that the par ticular Input Channel signals will not be routed to
88. buttons on the top panel 1 Pressthe DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the DIO Setup Monitor page appears 2 Set the SOLO parameter to On Set other parameters on the page if necessary 3 Tosolo and monitor Input Channels press the corresponding LAYER button to select a Layer that contains the desired channels then press the channel SOLO buttons The channel SOLO button indicators and the SOLO SOLO indicator light up Only the soloed Input Channel signals are fed to the Monitor outputs Tip If the SEL MODE parameter is set to Mix Solo on the DIO Setup Monitor page you can solo multiple Channels simultaneously 4 To solo and monitor Output Channels press the LAYER MASTER button then press the channel SOLO buttons Input and Output Channels Aux Out 1 8 Bus Out 1 8 cannot be solo monitored simul taneously For example if you solo an Input Channel then solo an Output Channel the first solo channel is cancelled If you solo an Output Channel first then solo an Input Channel canceling the Input Chan nel s solo will activate the Output Channel s solo 5 You can unsolo all soloed channels by pressing all illuminated channel SOLO buttons The button indicators turn off You can also unsolo all soloed channels by pressing the SOLO CLEAR button 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Surround Pan 135 12 Surround Pan This chapter describes surround panning which determines how I
89. ch 128 cl 0 32 Input patch Library no 0 32 256 Current data total block number minimum number is 0 current block number 0 total block number Input patch Library data of block bb ee Invert L de 1 amp 0x7F End of exclusive 2 8 2 26 Input patch library bulk dump request format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number See above STATUS 11110000 FO ID No 01000011 43 SUB STATUS 00 FORMAT No 0111 System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel Universal bulk dump Onnnn 2n 110 7E 01001100 4c I 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 00100000 20 00 000 38 8 01000011 43 C 00 001 39 9 00110011 33 3 DATA NAME 01010010 52 R Ommmmmmm mh 0 32 Input patch Library no 0 32 Ommmmmmm ml 256 Current data EOX 11110111 rF7 End ofexclusive 2 8 2 27 Output patch library bulk dump format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number O Library no 0 32 Library no 32 256 current output patch data 8192 UNDO For reception by the 01V96 only the user area is valid 1 32 256 STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0000nnnn On n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump COUNT HIGH ch data count ch 128 cl COUNT LOW cl 01001100 4c U 01001101 4D
90. digital mixer 01V96 Backup data Element no If ee is 0 ee is expanded to two bytes Parameter no Channel no data End of exclusive Backup memory System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel MODEL ID digital mixer 01V96 Backup data Element no If ee is 0 ee is expanded to two bytes Parameter no Channel no End of exclusive 2 8 3 10 Parameter change Function call Library store recall Reception When this is received the specified memory library will be stored recalled If this is received from Studio Manager or Cascade Link the operation will be ex ecuted and then the result of execution will be transmitted as a Parameter Re sponse Transmission If Parameter change Tx is ON and you store or recall a memory library for which Program Change transmission is not valid this message will be transmit ted with the Device Number set to the Tx CH STATUS 11110000 FO ID No 01000011 43 SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n GROUP ID 00111110 3E MODEL ID 01111111 7F ADDRESS 00010000 10 OOffffff ff Ommmmmmm mh Ommmmmmm ml DATA ch cl EOX 11110111 F7 System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel MODEL ID digital mixer Universal Function call function number High number Low channel High channel Low End of exclusive 0
91. only the user area is valid xx 127 256 259 8192 xx varies with the firmware version STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0000nnnn On n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump COUNT HIGH ch data count ch 128 cl COUNT LOW cl 01001100 4C I 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000011 43 C 00111001 39 9 00110011 33 3 01000101 45 Ommmmmmm mh 0 127 Effect Library no 1 128 Ommmmmmm ml 256 259 Effect1 4 current DATA NAME BLOCK INFO Ottttttt tt totalblock number minimum number is 0 Obbbbbbb bb current block number 0 total block number DATA Oddddddd ds Effect Library data of block bb Oddddddd de CHECK SUM ee ee Invert L de 1 amp 0x7F EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 2 8 2 22 Effect library bulk dump request format The second and third bytes ofthe DATA NAME indicate the bank number See above STATUS ID No SUB STATUS FORMAT No 10000 FO System exclusive message 000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA Ol0nnnn 2n n20 15 Device number MIDI Channel 11110 7E Universal bulk dump 001100 4c U 001101 4D M 0100000 20 0100000 20 0111000 38 8 000011 43 11001 39 Y 10011 333 000101 45 mmmmmmm mh 0 127 Effect Library no 1 128 0 0 DATA NAME mmmmmm
92. s Manual Using Libraries 183 Gate Library The Gate library enables you to store and recall Input Channel gate settings The library contains four preset memories and 124 user readable amp writable memories Follow the steps below to use the Gate library 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DYNAMICS button then press the F2 button The Dynamics Gate Lib page appears DYNAMICS Initial Data peni 5112 STI3 5714 mmi OO init ameh DD Q2 CH LIBRARY CURRENT CURVE CURRENT TYPE D CURRENT TYPE This parameter displays the currently selected channel gate type Gate or Ducking 2 CURRENT CURVE This graph displays the current channel gate curve 3 GR meters These meters indicate the amount of gain reduction being applied by the gate and the post gate levels of the currently selected channel and its available pair partner 4 Type amp Curve section The type Gate or Ducking and curve of the currently selected memory is displayed here Tip If you selected an ST IN Channel 1 4 Aux Out 1 8 Bus Out 1 8 or Stereo Out that does not feature a gate the 01V 96 indicates XXX has no Gate in which XXX represents a channel name 2 Use the LAYER buttons to select layers then press the SEL buttons to select channels You can now store the selected channel gate settings or recall the gate library memories to S channels For details on storing and recalling memor
93. you can process the signals using the Bus Out 1 8 compressors and EQs In the following example Input Channel signals are routed through Bus Outs 1 and 2 to ADAT OUT connectors 1 and 2 ADAT OUT connector CH 1 INPUT connector 1 see gt Input Channels 1 gt Bus Out 1 CH 2 2 gt Input Channels 2 gt BusOut2 INPUT connector 3 E gt Input Channels 3 Bus Out 3 INPUT connector 4 e gt Input Channels 4 Bus Out 4 INPUT connector 5 Be gt Input Channels 5 Bus Out 5 5 Input 5 6 Patch 01 96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 52 Chapter 5 Tutorial e Using Direct Outs Each Input Channel signal is directly routed to and output from the specified output con nectors and channels Use this method to patch each Input Channel directly to each MTR track The following example illustrates the signals directly output from ADAT OUT channels 1 5 ADAT OUT connector CH 1 INPUT connector 1 v gt Input Channels 1 gt 2 INPUT connector 2 e gt Input Channels 2 gt CH 3 INPUT connector 3 x gt Input Channels 3 gt CH 4 INPUT connector 4 M gt Input Channels 4 gt 5 INPUT connector 5 gt Input Channels 5 gt Input 2 Patch
94. 0 kHz 3 LPF THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency GATE REVERB REVERSE GATE One input two output early reflections with gate and early reflections with reverse gate Parameter Range Description Type of early reflection simula HPF TYPE Type A Type B tion ROOMSIZE 0 1 20 0 Reflection spacing uveness ae INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins om Se DENSITY 0 100 Reflection density RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio ER NUM 1 19 Number of early reflections FB GAIN 99 to 49996 Feedback gain THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency One input two output basic repeat delay Parameter Range Description DELAY 0 0 2730 0 ms Delay time Feedback gain plus values for FB 99 to 49996 normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feed back HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio THRU 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz LPF THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Used in conjunction with NOTE TEMPO to determine DELAY 1 8 FP B0 2021 1 4 d oe Max value depends on tempo setting 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual STEREO DELAY Two input two outp
95. 01V96 s various libraries About the Libraries The 01V96 features seven libraries that enable you to store Channel Input Patch Output Patch Effects and other data You can also quickly recall this data from the libraries to restore previous parameter values The 01V96 offers the following libraries Channel Library Input Patch Library Output Patch Library Effects Library Gate Library Compressor Library EQ Library Tip You can store library data to a computer hard disk using the included Studio Manager soft ware Be sure to back up your important data You can also store library data to an external MIDI device such as a MIDI data filer by using MIDI Bulk Dump see page 226 General Library Operation Most library functions are the same for each library 1 Use the buttons on the top panel to locate the desired library pages The procedure for locating library pages varies depending on the library Refer to the latter part of this chapter for more information on how to display the desired library page The example below assumes you have located the Input Patch library page PATCH Initial Data 571257135714 O00 ii mamo 0 O INPUT PATCH LIBRARY D TITLE EDIT Ese sauelqn CO A C 4 Eis IN NAME fi IN LIB PATCH FAOUTPLT 1122 13 The library memory title list is displayed in the
96. 12 kHz 16 0 kHz Q 7 2 2 5 6 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF G 4 0dB 1 5dB 2 0dB 6 0 dB 31 Total EQ 2 F 95 Hz 750 Hz 1 80 kHz 18 0 kHz Q 7 2 8 5 6 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF G 1 5dB 0 5dB 2 0 dB 4 0 dB 32 Total EQ 3 F 67 Hz 850 Hz 1 90 kHz 15 0 kHz Q 0 28 0 7 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 33 Bass Drum 3 5dB 10 0dB 3 5dB 0 0 dB 3 F 118Hz 315Hz 4 25 kHz 20 0 kHz Q 2 10 0 4 0 4 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 34 Snare G 0 0dB 2 0dB 3 5dB 0 0 dB Drum 3 F 224Hz 560Hz 4 25 kHz 4 00 kHz Q 4 5 2 8 0 1 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF G 9 0dB 1 5 dB 2 0dB 0 0 dB 35 Tom tom 2 F 90Hz 212Hz 5 30 kHz 17 0 kHz Q 4 5 1 2 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 4 5 dB 13 0dB 4 5 dB 2 5 dB 36 Piano 3 F 100Hz 475Hz 2 36 kHz 10 0 kHz Q 8 10 9 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF G 5 5dB 1 5dB 6 0dB 0 0 dB 37 Piano Low F 190Hz 400Hz 6 70 kHz 12 5 kHz Q 10 6 3 2 2 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G 5 5dB 1 5dB 5 0dB 3 0 dB 38 Piano High 190Hz 400Hz 6 70 kHz 5 60 kHz Q 10 6 3 2 2 0 1 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF Fine EQ G 1 5dB 0 0dB 1 0dB 3 0 dB Cass F 75Hz 1 00 kHz 4 00 kHz 12 5 kHz Q 4 5 1 8 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF G 4 0dB 1 0dB 2 0dB 0 0 dB 40 Narrat
97. 2 6 Yamaha Pro Audio global website Yamaha Pro Audio global website http www yamahaproaudio com Package Contents 01V96 Digital Mixing Console CD ROM Power cord This manual Studio Manager Installation Guide Optional Extras RK1 Rack Mount Kit mini YGDAI I O cards About this Owner s Manual This Owner s Manual explains how to operate the 01V96 Digital Mixing Console The Table of Contents can help you to familiarize yourself with the manual s organization and to locate tasks and topics The index can help you locate specific information Before diving in it s recommend that you read the Operating Basics chapter starting on page 27 Each chapter in this manual discusses a specific section or function of the 01V96 The Input and Output Channels are explained in the following chapters Input Channels Bus Outs and Aux Outs Where possible these chapters have been organized in order of sig nal flow from input to output Conventions Used in this Manual The 01V96 features two types of buttons physical buttons that you can press e g ENTER and DISPLAY and buttons that appear on the display pages References to physical buttons are enclosed in square brackets for example press the ENTER button References to display page buttons are not emphasized for example move the cursor to the ON button You can select display pages by using the DISPLAY buttons or the Lef
98. 2 OMNI OUT connectors 1 4 Tip hot These balanced TRS phone type con Rin nectors output any Bus signals or 1 4 TRS phone plug cold channel Direct Out signals The nom inal signal level is 4 dB Sleeve ground 8 STEREO OUT connectors L R 2 hot These balanced XLR 3 32 type con AER lg 3 cold nectors output the Stereo Out signals e m JUS The nominal signal level is 4 dB 1 ground Digital I O Section WORD CLOCK OUT 2TR OUT 2TR IN DIGITAL DIGITAL jo 90 IN OUT T D WORD CLOCK OUT connector This BNC connector outputs a wordclock signal from the 01V96 to a connected external device WORD CLOCK IN connector This BNC connector inputs a wordclock signal from a connected external device to the 01V96 8 IN OUT connectors These optical TOSLINK connectors input and output ADAT digital audio signals 4 2TR OUT DIGITAL COAXIAL This RCA phono connector outputs consumer format IEC 60958 digital audio The con nector is typically used to connect the digital stereo input consumer format of a DAT recorder MD recorder or CD recorder 5 2TR IN DIGITAL COAXIAL This RCA phono connector accepts consumer format IEC 60958 digital audio The con nector is typically used to connect the digital stereo output consumer format of a DAT recorder MD recorder or CD recorder 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Rear Panel
99. 24 bit 44 1 48 88 2 96 kHz D sub 25 pin 9653 MY8 AT2 8 8 Optical x2 I O MY16 AT2 16 16 Optical x4 MY8 TD2 8 8 D sub 25 pin Tascam 24 bit 44 1 48 kHz BNC wordclock output MY16 TD2 16 16 D sub 25 pin MY8 mLAN 8 8 5 1 394 6 1394 2 MY16 mLAN 16 16 WAVES Y56K 24 bit 44 1 48 kHz ADAT 8 8 Optical x2 WAVES Y96K 24 bit 44 1 48 88 2 96 kHz 1 This card is a substitution for a 20 bit MY8 AD card 2 These cards support 24 bit 96 kHz in Double Channel mode Separate 96 kHz wordclock required 3 This card is identical to the MY8 AE96 except that it features a sampling rate converter See the Yamaha Professional Audio Web site at the following URL for up to date news on I O cards lt http www yamahaproaudio com gt Converting Sampling Rates of Signals Received at I O Card Inputs An optional MY8 AE96S Digital O card features sampling rate converters so you can eas ily convert the sampling frequency of digital inputs to the current 01V96 sampling rate 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the DIO Setup Format page appears Use the buttons in the SRC sections to turn the sampling rate converters on and off You can turn the sampling rate converters of the digital I O card on or off in pairs odd amp even chan nels in this order is currently operating DIOZSETUPIC Initial Data CH6 CH6 SRC 1 2
100. 25 MIDI Control Section TO HOST THRU OUT IN SB 090015 CD MIDI IN THRU OUT ports These standard MIDI IN OUT and THRU ports enable you to connect the 01V96 to other MIDI equipment 2 TO HOST USB port This USB port enables you to connect a computer equipped with a USB port Jeoy 8 DLNS IN SLOT Section SLOT CD SLOT You can insert optional mini YGDAI cards into this slot See page 26 for information on installing these cards Power Section POWER c t i Be 0 3 ACIN D POWER ON OFF switch This switch turns the power to the 01V96 on or off Note To prevent loud clicks and thumps in your speakers turn on your audio equipment in the following order reverse this order when turning the equipment off sound sources mul titrack and master recorders 01V96 monitoring power amplifiers AC IN connector This connector enables you to connect the 01V96 to an AC outlet via the supplied power cord 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 26 Chapter 2 Control Surface amp Rear Panel Installing an Optional Card Visit the following Yamaha Pro Audio web site to ensure that the card you are installing is supported by the 01V96 lt http www yamahaproaudio com gt Follow the steps below to install an optional mini YGDAI card 1 Make sure that the power to the 01V96 is turned off 2 Undo the two fixing screws and remove the
101. 3 Reuerb Plate No Data 1 Cie LIE A Fra 01 96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 68 Chapter 5 Tutorial Recording to the Master Recorder Follow the steps below to record the mixed stereo signal from the 01V96 to the connected master recorder 1 Start recording on the master recorder then start playing back on the digital MTR During recording observe the stereo meter on the right of the display and confirm that the stereo output level is not clipping 2 When the playback is finished stop the master recorder then stop the digital MTR 3 Turn on the ON button for ST IN Channel 2 in the ST IN section The button indicator lights up 4 Play back the recording on the master recorder The playback signal is input at the 01V96 s 2TR IN DIGITAL connector then routed through ST IN Channel 2 to the Stereo bus Note Most consumer type DAT recorders and MD recorders are unable to synchronize to external wordclock during playback that is they cannot be wordclock slaves If this type of master recorder is connected to the 01 V96 s 2TR IN DIGITAL connector access the DIO Setup Word Clock page and select 2TRD 2TR IN DIGITAL as the wordclock source When the master recorder finishes playing back turn off the ON button for ST IN Chan nel2 Tip If you desire you can store the current mix settings to memory as a Scene see page 165 01V96
102. 44 FADERL CHANNEL INPUT12 107 PAN CHANNEL INPUT13 45 FADERL CHANNEL INPUT13 108 PAN CHANNEL INPUT14 46 FADERL CHANNEL INPUT14 109 PAN CHANNEL INPUT15 47 FADERL CHANNEL INPUT15 110 PAN CHANNEL INPUT16 48 FADERL CHANNEL INPUT16 111 PAN CHANNEL INPUT17 49 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT17 112 PAN CHANNEL INPUT18 50 FADERL CHANNEL INPUT18 113 PAN CHANNEL INPUT19 51 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT19 114 PAN CHANNEL INPUT20 52 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT20 115 PAN CHANNEL INPUT21 53 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT21 116 PAN CHANNEL INPUT22 54 FADERL CHANNEL INPUT22 117 PAN CHANNEL INPUT23 55 FADERL CHANNEL INPUT23 118 PAN CHANNEL INPUT24 56 FADERL CHANNEL INPUT24 119 NO ASSIGN 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual CHANNEL2 High Mid Low 0 NO ASSIGN 1 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT25 2 FADERH CHANNEL INPUT26 3 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT27 4 FADERH CHANNEL INPUT28 5 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT29 6 FADERH CHANNEL INPUT30 7 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT31 8 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT32 9 FADER H CHANNEL ST IN1 10 FADER H CHANNEL ST IN2 11 FADER H CHANNEL ST IN3 12 FADER H CHANNEL ST IN4 13 FADER H MASTER BUS 14 FADER H MASTER BUS2 15 FADER H MASTER BUS3 16 FADER H MASTER BUS4 17 FADER H MASTER BUS5 18 FADERH MASTER BUS6 19 FADER H M
103. 5 ms fs 88 2 kHz 0 0 2729 2 ms fs 96 kHz HIGH d quency band will be output 2 0 131000 fs 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 0 262000 fs 88 2 kHz 96 kHz Two input two output stereo reverb Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0 3 99 0 s Reverb time Hall Room Stage REV TYPE Plate Reverb type INI DLY 0 0 100 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins RATIO 0 11 0 High frequency reverb time ratio LO RATIO 0 1 2 4 Low frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Reverb diffusion left right reverb spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density Balance of early reflections and E R BAL 0 100 reverb 0 all reverb 100 all early reflections 1 6 ms 46 0 s fs 44 1 kHz 5 ms 42 3 s fs 48 kHz 3 ms 23 0 s fs 88 2 Hz 3 ms 21 1 s fs 96 kHz Other preset effects COMP276 COMP276S COMP260 COMP260S EQUALIZER601 OPEN DECK REV X HALL REV X ROOM REV X PLATE are optional Add On Effects For more information on these effects refer to the Owner s Manual that came with the Add On Effects pack ages 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual gt 5 2 2 270 Appendix A Parameter Lists Effects and tempo synchronization Some of the 01V 96 s effects allow you to synchronize the effect with the tempo There are two such types of effect delay type effects and modulation type effects For delay type effects the delay time will change according to the
104. 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz gt LPF THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency the input signal each band Recording delay For plus values Parameter Range Description _1000 to 1000 recording starts after the trigger REC DLY Er is received For minus values LOW 96 0 to 12 0 dB Low band level recording starts before the trig MID GAIN 96 0 to 12 0 dB Mid band level ger is received GAIN 96 0 to 12 0 dB High band level Input trigger level i e the sig n TRG LVL 60 to 0 dB nal level required to trigger adicto Aa recording or playback the threshold of the low band is Once playback has been trig PRESENCE 10 to 10 increased For negative values 5 gered subsequent triggers the opposite will occur When TRG r0 T0900 ms ignored for the duration of the set to O all three bands are TRG MASK time affected the same In MOMENT mode the sample CMP THRE 24 0 to 0 0 dB Compressor threshold plays only while the that the PLAY button is pressed In CONT CMP RAT 1 1 to 20 1 Compressor ratio mode playback continues once 0 120 ms Compressor attack PLY MOMENT the PLAY button has been REL Compressor release time CONTI INPUT pressed The number of times CMP KNEE 05 C k the sample plays is set using the OMPIESSOE RNEE LOOP NUM parameter In
105. 5112 STI3 STI 4 CH6 CH6 0 EDIT Eum WORD CLOCK SELECT su WORD CLOCK FORMAT A PREFER MA PREFER Mji Tip Pressing and holding down the button selected in Step 2 resets the corresponding band gain Pressing the SELECTED CHANNEL HIGH and LOW buttons simultaneously resets the Q frequency and gain for each band 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 92 Chapter 7 Input Channels Pairing Input Channels On the 01V96 you can pair adjacent odd even Input Channels or counterpart channels on Layer 1 and Layer 2 that share the same physical fader Faders and most parameters of paired channels are linked for stereo operation Paired channels linked parameters and non linked parameters that are available for independent control are listed below SEL buttons Faders Linked parameters Non linked parameters Input patches Insert patches Channel on off Output patches Insert on off Comp insert position Solo on off Phase Solo Safe Delay on off Aux on off Delay time Aux Send level Delay feedback Aux Sends as Pre or Post Delay mix Gate Routing Comp settings Pan Follow Pan EQ settings Surround pan Fader group Aux Send pan Mute group Balance Fade time Attenuators Recall Safe DLY page You can set this parameter for each channel independent ly on the EQ ATT page b
106. 9 gt 01 96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 192 Chapter 17 Remote Control Configuring the 01V96 Follow the steps below to set up the 01V96 so that you can remotely control Pro Tools from the 01V96 Remote Layer 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the DIO Setup MIDI Host page appears DIO SETUP Initial Data 571257135144 curo SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Studio Manager DAW REMOTE LEmel TRansmiT L REQUEST noi Host MONITOR AR REMOTE RR NACH ING 2 Move the cursor to the first DAW parameter box in the SPECIAL FUNCTIONS section then rotate the Parameter wheel to select USB as the port Press ENTER to confirm the setting 4 Move the cursor to the adjacent parameter box on the right then rotate the Parameter wheel to spec ify the port ID REMOTE Note If you select an incorrect port you will be unable to use the Remote function Be sure to match the port ID with that specified in the Peripherals window in Pro Tools 5 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the DIO Setup Remote page appears DIO SETUP Initial Data TEE STI2 STI3 STI4 CH1 CH1 QO ax Protests 1 4 1 poem ELE CODE FEET mes OOO LiDDD re INSERT ASSIGN EDIT ASSIGN COMPARE BYPASS INSERT pess a channel sirik s USERT gwii it
107. Aux Out 1 8 parameters you can either move the cursor to the desired parameter on the screen and change the value or operate the desired button or control on the top panel This section explains how to set the parameters on the screen Tip Refer to Chapter 10 Input amp Output Patching on page 121 for more information on how to set inserts Attenuating Aux Outs To attenuate Aux Out 1 8 signals press the EQ button then press the F4 button to dis play the EQ Out Att page EG Initial Data STI2 5113 5714 OUTPUT ATTENUATOR AUXI Fi CHCHcHcHcHe dB GdB de Ad GdB de AUX 4 5 66 B dB dB GdB GdB GdB GdB de de STEREO de LEG EDIT fAEG LIBRARY IN ATT OUT f The parameters on this page and the procedure for setting them are the same as for Input Channels see page 83 Delaying Aux Outs To delay Aux Out 1 8 signals press the DISPLAY ACCESS INSERT DELAY button repeatedly until the INS DLY Out Dly page appears Init Initial Data 5 STI2 STIs ST 4 AUXI AUXI ao O OUTPUT DELAY AUX DELAY SCALE ENEE poo BUS 3 i gn oA af en oA m a msec samr e 3i d e AUX in a en Em on ap msec 9 0 0 9 0 0 8 Isamrie
108. Channels 1 amp 2 or 3 amp 4 which you can control using the buttons and controls in the ST IN section The indicators to the right of the button indicate the available ST IN channels SEL buttons These buttons select the ST IN channel you want to control 8 SOLO buttons These buttons solo the selected ST IN channels ON buttons These buttons turn the ST IN channels on or off Level controls These controls adjust the ST IN channel levels FADER MODE Section N FADER MODE oe e e e AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 c e e e AUX5 AUX6 AUX7 AUXB e HOME METER CD AUX 1 AUX 8 buttons These buttons enable you to select the Aux Send you wish to control Pressing one of these buttons switches the Fader mode see page 33 and displays the corresponding Aux page The selected button s indicator lights up You can now adjust the send level of signals routed from Input Channels to the correspond ing Aux buses by using the faders HOME button This button recalls Meter pages that display Input Channel levels or Output Channel Bus Out Aux Out Stereo Out levels see page 34 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 8 DLNS IN 18 Chapter 2 Control Surface amp Rear Panel DISPLAY ACCESS Section m ss 6 SCENE DIO SETUP MIDI UTILITY 7 5 S INSERT PANT PAIR PATCH 8 DELAY R
109. D OND MIX 2 VOCAL OFF MIR initial Data VOCAL OFF INTRO MIX PASTE SRC PASTE DST 4 2 Move the cursor to the SOURCE list 1 in the left column then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to select the Scene mem ory you wish to move 3 Move the cursor to the DESTINATION list 2 in the right column then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to select the position to which you want to move the source Scene memory 4 Press ENTER to move the source Scene memory to the specified destina tion The Scene memory numbers are updated accordingly Copying and Pasting a Scene Global Paste Any channel or parameter settings for the current scene can be copied and pasted into one or more scenes This function is useful when you want to apply edited parameter settings in the current scene to other scenes 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS SCENE button repeatedly until the Paste SRC page appears SalJOUJ9 A SU9IS SCENE EXTRA MIX STI1 STI2 STI3 STI4 OD 9 y GLOBAL PASTE SOURCE CH SELECT E ALL CLEAR GROUP MASTER rure i OTHERS COP GATE AUX a Dei BUX ON DELAY EREO Leese ROUTING 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 174 Chapter 15 Scene Memories Use the cursor buttons SEL buttons or Parameter wheel to select the chan nel category then use the ENTER button or the INC DEC b
110. DAW OPTION ALL trol and Alt Pressing one of the buttons to which these functions are DAW CTRL CLUCH assigned along with another button enables you to execute various com mands DAW ALT FINE DAW BANK Executes the Bank Swap operation Pressing the button to which this function DAW BANK is assigned switches the entire 16 channel bank DAW Channel Executes the Channel Scroll operation Pressing the buttons to which these DAW Channel functions are assigned enables you to scroll channels horizontally DAW REC RDY 1 DAW REC RDY 2 DAW REC RDY 3 DAW REC RDY 4 DAW REC RDY 5 DAW REC RDY 6 DAW REC RDY 7 DAW REC RDY 8 Pressing the buttons to which these functions are assigned places the corre sponding channel strips in Record Ready mode At this time the indicator of the button you pressed flashes It lights up when recording starts DAW REC RDY 9 DAW REC RDY 10 DAW REC RDY 11 DAW REC RDY 12 DAW REC RDY 13 DAW REC RDY 14 DAW REC RDY 15 DAW REC RDY 16 If no channel strips are in Record Enabled mode pressing the button to which this function is assigned places all channel strips in Record Enabled DAW REC RDY ALL mode The button indicator flashes if any channel strip in any bank is in Record Enabled mode Pressing the button while the button indicator is flash ing cancels Record Enabled mode for all channel strips Selecting Channels To select
111. DEC buttons to set the Send level then press the ENTER button to turn the currently selected Aux Send on or off One of the following indicators appears depending on the current Aux mode Aux Sends in Fixed mode A FIX indicator appears for On Aux Sends and a dot appears for Off Aux Sends mm INPUT 5 161112 Aux Sends in Variable mode The current Send levels are displayed by the bar graphs If the level is set to nominal 0 0 dB N appears in the bar The bars for Aux Sends that are turned off are highlighted INPUT 3 RARI 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Panning Aux Sends 119 Panning Aux Sends You can pair adjacent odd even in this order Aux Sends for stereo operation This enables you to pan signals from Input Channels to paired Aux Sends 1 Pairthe desired two Aux Sends See page 105 for more information on pair ing channels 2 Use the FADER MODE AUX 1 AUX 8 buttons to select one of the paired Aux Sends 3 Repeatedly press the button you pressed in Step 2 to display the Aux Pan page RUX1 Initial Data glsrit STI2 STI3 STI4 a ws iO D O RUX1 2 PAN 2 00E INPUT PAN LINK EFE 3 INPUT 5 IN z 3 4 5 5 7 5 1L 1R CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER 16 11 12 13 14 15 16 CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CE
112. DIO SETUP Initial Data 5 2 STI3 ST 4 _CHI CHI 10 Gau 5 42 G BUSi BUSZ BUSS BUSS BUS6 BUS BUSS adB 12 3 5 OFF OFF OFF GFF AUX RUXZ RUXS RUX4 AUXS AUXE AUX AUXS 4 4 dB GdB 6dB Ooh Hh I HI STEREO SOLO de OFF supe A cascape A 8 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP gt tugionanager button repeatedly to display the DIO Setup DAH MIDI Host page then set the Cascade Link REMOTE u R parameter to MIDI 3 CASCADE LINK 0 SYNC TRANSMIT REQUEST 9 Repeat Step 8 for the master unit After Steps 8 and 9 the slave unit will be able to transmit and receive MIDI messages 10 To match the parameters of both 01V96s Denuo rian ager locate the DIO Setup MIDI Host page on DRH B E the copy source unit REMOTE U A LAYER Move the cursor to the TRANSMIT button CASCADE LINK 2 for the SYNC parameter then press ENTER Parameters for cascade link page 238 willbe copied to the other 01V96 via the REMOTE connector If you select the REQUEST button instead of the TRANSMIT button for the SYNC parameter you can reverse the copy direction At this point Bus 1 8 Aux 1 4 and the Stereo Bus on both 01V96s are integrated and the data is output via Bus Outs 1 8 Aux Outs 1 4 and the Stereo Out on the master unit If you solo channels on
113. DISPLAY ACCESS PAIR GROUP button repeatedly until one ofthe following pages appears In EQ page This page enables you to set EQ links a d for Input Channels 1 32 and ST IN Chan nels 1 4 ee da Out EQ page This page enables you to set EQ links e h for Bus Outs 1 8 Aux Outs 1 8 and Ste reo Out PRIR GRUP 00 Initial Data a RUX1 RUS1 HI 10105 cen OUTPUT EQUALIZER LINK AU S STEREO 1 49 4 55 7 9071 2 2 4 OUT FADER A OUT MUTE A IN EG 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Linking EQ and Compressor Parameters 155 In Comp page This page enables you to set Compressor links i l for Input Channels 1 32 PAIR GRUP Initial Data STI2 5113 5714 CHI CHI 9 INPUT COMP LINK INPUT s 67 19 11 12 1214 15 16 1712 19 20 2122 2324 2526 2728 29 39 31 32 a w un EA iN COMP A OUT COMP 2 Out Comp page This page enables you to set Compressor links for Bus Outs 1 8 Aux Outs 1 8 and Stereo Out PAIR GRUP Initial Data GeL STI2 5113 ST 4 RUX1 RUX Uu OUTPUT COMP LINK re AU STEREO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 56 7 S ESI IN COMP our comp f 2 Pressthe up or down Y cursor button to select a link to which you want to add channels u Ting 1234 s6788 3 19 11 12 13 14 15 16 12 17 12 19 20 21222324 2622725 299053132 4
114. DISPLAY ACCESS PAN ROUTING button repeatedly until the Pan Route Rout17 STI page appears On this page make sure that the S buttons for Input Channels 17 32 are turned on and the 1 8 buttons are turned off 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Mixing Recorded Tracks into Stereo Mixdown 65 PAN ROUTE CHi CHi ALL STEREO ALL BUS ALL CLEAR 0 80 EDI EC BO 80 80 80 ROUND MODE u Input Channel 17 32 signals input from Tracks 1 16 of the digital MTR are now routed through the Stereo Bus to the STEREO OUT and 2TR OUT DIGITAL connectors 5 Use the PAN parameter controls for Input Channels 17 32 on the page to adjust the panpot for each track Tip Alternatively you can adjust the pan settings by selecting the Input Channels via the cor responding SEL button then rotating the SELECTED CHANNEL PAN control 6 Raise the STEREO fader to O dB 7 While playing back the recording on the digital MTR from the beginning operate faders 1 16 to adjust the mix balance among the tracks EQ ing the track signals Select the desired channel by pressing the corresponding SEL button press the EQ but ton then press the F1 button to display the EQ Edit page see page 84 Alternatively adjust the EQ parameters using the buttons and controls in the SELECTED CHANNEL sec tion Compressing the track signals Select the desired channel by pressing the corresponding SEL button press the DYNAM
115. Dynamics processors on all channels excluding ST IN channels Dynamics processor settings and EQ settings can be stored in libraries and recalled Effects Four high quality multi channel effects Apply effects via Aux Sends or Channel Inserts Effect library for storing and recalling effect settings Optional Add On Effects packages for adding effects that utilize a variety of new algo rithms Scene Memory Scene memories for storing and recalling mix settings as Scenes Surround Sound Supports 3 1 5 1 and 6 1 channel surround sound production Surround channel outputs can be assigned to suit connected devices Remote Control Control and manage your 01V96 from your Mac or PC using bundled Studio Manager software Remote Layer for remote control of Pro Tools Nuendo Cubase SX and other DAWs that support the Pro Tools protocol e Control an external recorder via MMC commands MIDI Equipped with MIDI ports and a USB port for computer connection Scene recall and mix parameter changes via MIDI 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Control Surface amp Rear Panel 13 2 Control Surface amp Rear Panel Control Surface
116. EQ F LO MID INPUTS 69 EQ F LO MID INPUT6 70 EQ F LO MID 71 EQ F LO MID INPUT8 72 EQ F LO MID INPUT9 73 EQ F LO MID INPUT10 74 EQ F LO MID INPUT11 75 EQ F LO MID INPUT12 76 EQ F LO MID INPUT13 77 EQ F LO MID INPUT14 78 EQ F LO MID INPUT15 79 EQ F LO MID INPUT16 80 EQ F LO MID INPUT17 81 EQ F LO MID INPUT18 82 EQ F LO MID INPUT19 83 EQ F LO MID INPUT20 84 EQ F LO MID INPUT21 85 EQ F LO MID INPUT22 86 EQ F LO MID INPUT23 87 EQ F LO MID INPUT24 88 NO ASSIGN 89 EQ Q LO MID INPUT1 90 EQ Q LO MID INPUT2 91 EQ Q LO MID INPUT3 92 EQ Q LO MID INPUT4 93 EQ Q LO MID INPUTS 94 EQ Q LO MID INPUT6 95 EQ Q LO MID 102 Q LO MID INPUT8 103 EQ Q LO MID INPUT9 104 EQ Q LO MID INPUT10 105 EQ Q LO MID INPUT11 106 EQ Q LO MID INPUT12 107 Q LO MID INPUT13 108 EQ Q LO MID INPUT14 109 EQ Q LO MID INPUT15 110 Q LO MID INPUT16 111 EQ Q LO MID INPUT17 112 EQ Q LO MID INPUT18 113 EQ Q LO MID INPUT19 114 EQ Q LO MID INPUT2O 115 EQ Q LO MID INPUT21 116 EQ Q LO MID INPUT22 117 EQ Q LO MID INPUT23 118 EQ Q LO MID INPUT24 119 NO ASSIGN CHANNELS High Mid Low 0 NO ASSIGN 1 EQ G LO MID H INPUT1 2 EQ G LO MID H INPUT2 3 EQ G LO MID H INPUT3 4 G LO MID H INPUT4 5 EQ G LO MID H INPUTS 6 EQ G LO MID H INPUT6 7 EQ G LO MID H INPUT 8 EQ G LO MID H INPUT8 9 EQ G LO MID H INPUT9 10 EQ G LO MID H
117. INPUT LOOKUP 0 0 100 0 ms Lookup delay is triggered CMP BYP OFF ON Compressor bypass e input signal P 9 L M XOVR 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Low mid crossover frequency START 1 Playback start point in millisec onds M H XOVR 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Mid high crossover frequency END Playback end point in millisec SLOPE 6 to 12 dB Filter slope onds CEILING 6 0 to 0 0 dB Specifies the maximum output LOOP 1 Loop start point in milliseconds OFF level LOOP Number of times the sample EXP THRE 54 0 to 24 0 dB Expander threshold NUM plays EXP RAT 1 1 to 00 1 Expander ratio ie Playback start point in samples EXP REL Expander release time END EXP BYP OFF ON Expander bypass SAMPLE Playback end point in samples LIM THRE 12 0 to 0 0 dB Limiter threshold LIM ATK 0 120 ms Limiter attack ERO Loop start point in samples SAMPLE psurtp LIM REL Limiter release time PITCH a 2 to 12 semi Playback pitch shift LIM BYP OFF ON Limiter bypass DES LIM KNEE 0 5 Limiter knee FINE 50 to 50 cents Playback pitch shift fine vem PLATE SOLO LOW OFF ON If this is on only the low fre utton can be triggered by quency band will be output MIDI TRG OFF C1 C6 ALL using MIDI Note on off mes F t If this is on only the mid fre 54465 SOLO MIDI OFE ON quency band will be output 1 0 0 2970 5 ms fs 44 1 kHz 0 0 2729 2 ms fs 48 kHz soLO OFF ON If this is on only the high fre 0 0 2970
118. INPUT1O 11 EQ G LO MID H INPUT11 12 EQ G LO MID H INPUT12 13 EQ G LO MID H INPUT13 14 EQ G LO MID H INPUT14 15 EQ G LO MID H INPUT15 16 EQ G LO MID H INPUT16 17 EQ G LO MID H INPUT17 18 EQ G LO MID H INPUT18 19 EQ G LO MID H INPUT19 20 EQ G LO MID H INPUT2O 21 EQ G LO MID H INPUT21 22 EQ G LO MID H INPUT22 23 EQ G LO MID H INPUT23 24 EQ G LO MID H INPUT24 25 NO ASSIGN 26 NO ASSIGN 27 NO ASSIGN 28 NO ASSIGN 29 NO ASSIGN 30 NO ASSIGN 31 NO ASSIGN 32 NO ASSIGN 33 EQ GLO MID L INPUT1 34 EQ GLO MID L INPUT2 35 EQ GLO MID L INPUT3 36 EQ GLO MID L INPUT4 37 EQ GLO MID L INPUTS 38 EQ GLO MID L INPUT6 39 GLO MID L INPUT 40 EQ GLO MID L INPUT8 41 EQ GLO MID L INPUT9 42 EQ GLO MID L INPUT1O 43 EQ G LO MID L INPUT11 44 EQ G LO MID L INPUT12 45 EQ G LO MID L INPUT13 46 EQ GLO MID L INPUT14 47 EQ GLO MID L INPUT15 48 EQ GLO MID L INPUT16 49 EQ GLO MID L INPUT17 50 EQ GLO MID L INPUT18 51 EQ G LO MID L INPUT19 52 EQ G LO MID L INPUT2O 53 EQ GLO MID L INPUT21 54 EQ GLO MID L INPUT22 55 EQ G LO MID L INPUT23 56 EQ G LO MID L INPUT24 57 NO ASSIGN 58 NO ASSIGN 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Initial Parameter to Control Change Table 295
119. Initial delay before reverb begins Parameter Range Description HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio REV TIME 0 3 99 0 s Reverb time DIFF 0 10 Spread INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DENSITY _ 0 100 Reverb density HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio HPF ER High pass filter cutoff frequency DIFF 0 10 Spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density LPF SON Low pass filter cutoff frequency HPF OS kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency Reverb and panned reverb bal REV BAL 0 100 ance 0 all panned reverb LPF e 6 0 kHz Low pass filter cutoff frequency 100 reverb FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed REV SYM 0 100 on 2 Bin s DEPTH SA Mod lationdepth symphonic DIR 1 Panning direction FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed WAVE Sine Tri Square Modulation waveform DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time NOTE 2 Used in conjunction with WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform TEMPO to determine FREQ SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off 1 L R L gt R L lt R Turn L Turn R NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with 2 S 25315 2 4 de d de TEMPO to determine FREQ F0 10 2 41 4 4 4 5 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual DELAY ER One input two output delay and early reflections effects in parallel Effects Parameters DELAY gt ER
120. InsertOut AUX3 INS AUX4 InsertOut AUX4 INS AUX4 InsertOut AUX4 INS AUX5 InsertOut AUX5 INS 5 InsertOut AUX5 INS AUX6 InsertOut AUX6 INS AUX6 InsertOut AUX6 INS AUX7 InsertOut AUX7 INS AUX7 InsertOut AUX7 INS AUX8 InsertOut AUX8 INS AUX8 InsertOut AUX8 INS ST L InsertOut STL INS ST L InsertOut ST L INS ST R InsertOut STR INS ST R InsertOut ST R CAS BUS1 Cascade Out Bus CAS BUS1 Cascade Out Bus1 CAS BUS2 Cascade Out Bus2 CAS BUS2 Cascade Out Bus2 CAS BUS3 Cascade Out Bus3 CAS BUS3 Cascade Out Bus3 CAS BUS4 Cascade Out 4 CAS 054 Cascade Out Bus4 CAS BUSS Cascade Out Bus5 CAS BUSS Cascade Out Bus5 CAS BUS6 Cascade Out Bus6 CAS BUS6 Cascade Out Bus6 CAS BUS7 Cascade Out Bus CAS BUS7 Cascade Out Bus CAS BUS8 Cascade Out Bus8 CAS 058 Cascade Out Bus8 CAS AUX1 Cascade Out Aux1 CAS AUX1 Cascade Out Aux1 CAS AUX2 Cascade Out Aux2 CAS AUX2 Cascade Out Aux2 CAS AUX3 Cascade Out Aux3 CAS AUX3 Cascade Out Aux3 CAS AUX4 Cascade Out Aux4 CAS AUX4 Cascade Out Aux4 CAS 5 Cascade Out Aux5 CAS 5 Cascade Out Aux5 CAS AUX6 Cascade Out Aux6 CAS AUX6 Cascade Out Aux6 CAS AUX7 Cascade Out Aux7 CAS AUX7 Cascade Out Aux7 CAS AUX8 Cascade Out Aux8 CAS AUX8 Cascade Out Aux8 CAS ST L Cascade STEREO L CAS ST L Cascade STEREO L CAS ST R Cascade STEREO R CAS ST R Casc
121. MIDI Control Section Dp Ruedas A dtes 232 Direct outs 125 Power Section 4 444 25 Scene memories 165 Input and Output 2 43 SLOT section sse 25 Auto update function 169 Input channels 43 RECALL button 4 444 21 Edit indicators 166 Input patching 121 122 Recall Confirmation preference 231 Fading 170 INSert iN TEM 129 Recall safe function nee 172 PROTECT button 168 Insert patching 1127 RECORDING eee 132 Recall safe function 172 OMNI OUT connector 194 Remote sions einer 189 Scene numbers 22166 44 FRAMES 214 Shadow memory 169 Output patching 123 Insert display mode 193 Sorting seen 173 PATCH button eee 43 LOCATE TIME section 213 Storing amp Recalling 167 PEAK indicators 15 70 Machine control 189 212 Using the Scene Memory Page 168 Peak level ttes 36 MACHINE CONTROL section What is stored 165 PHANTOM 48V sss 202000 oe 213 Scene memory 00 aussen 166 Phantom Power eee 69 MIDI messages 209 Scene memory 04 une 166 CH1 4 ON OFF switch 23 MIDI remote 207 SCENE MEMORY
122. NO ASSIGN 88 NO ASSIGN 30 NO ASSIGN 89 EQ ON INPUT1 31 NO ASSIGN 90 EQ ON INPUT2 32 NO ASSIGN 91 EQ ON INPUT3 33 SURROUND LFEL INPUT1 92 EQ ON INPUT4 34 SURROUND LFEL INPUT2 93 EQ INPUTS 35 SURROUND LFEL INPUT3 94 EQ ON INPUT6 36 SURROUND LFEL INPUT4 95 EQ ON 37 SURROUND LFEL INPUTS 102 EQ ON INPUT8 38 SURROUND LFEL INPUT6 103 EQ ON INPUT9 39 SURROUND LFEL INPUT 104 EQ ON INPUT10 40 SURROUND LFEL INPUT8 105 ON INPUT11 41 SURROUND LFEL INPUT9 106 EQ ON INPUT12 42 SURROUND LFEL INPUT10 107 ON INPUT13 43 SURROUND LFEL INPUT11 108 EQ ON INPUT14 44 SURROUND LFEL INPUT12 109 EQ ON INPUT15 45 SURROUND LFEL INPUT13 110 ON INPUT16 46 SURROUND LFEL INPUT14 111 EQ ON INPUT17 47 SURROUND LFEL INPUT15 112 EQ ON INPUT18 48 SURROUND LFEL INPUT16 113 EQ ON INPUT19 49 SURROUND LFEL INPUT17 114 EQ ON INPUT2O 50 SURROUND LFEL INPUT18 115 EQ ON INPUT21 51 SURROUND LFEL INPUT19 116 EQ ON INPUT22 52 SURROUND LFEL INPUT2O 117 EQ ON INPUT23 53 SURROUND LFEL INPUT21 118 EQ ON INPUT24 54 SURROUND LFEL INPUT22 119 NO ASSIGN 55 SURROUND LFEL INPUT23 56 SURROUND LFEL INPUT24 57 NO ASSIGN 58 NO ASSIGN 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Initial Parameter to Control Change Table 303
123. PAD switches 15 69 Pair Confirmation preference 231 PAIR GROUP button 18 Pair Grup In Comp page 155 Pair Grup In EQ page 154 Pair Grup In Fader page 150 Pair Grup In Mute page 150 Pair Grup Input page 93 Pair Grup Out Comp page 155 Pair Grup Out EQ page 154 Pair Grup Out Fader page 150 Pair Grup Out Mute page 150 Pair Grup Output page 105 P ring eee 92 105 HORIZONTAL 93 Using the display 93 Using the SEL buttons 92 VERTICAL 599 PAN control 2 20 Bus To St page 101 Pan Route Ch Edit page 142 Pan Route Pan page 90 Pan Route ROUTI 16 page 86 Pan Route ROUT17 ST1 page 86 Pan Route Surr ST IN page 146 Pan Route Surr1 16 page 146 Pan Route Surr17 32 page 146 PAN ROUTING button 18 Pan Surr Surr Mode page 136 PAN SURR LINK 137 PANNING tees 85 119 BS cunt Een 105 FOLLOW PAN 89 GANG nenne 85 INDIVIDUAL een 85 INV GANG zen 85 PAN buttons 86 Parameter boxes 242
124. PAN nennen 266 LASTSOLO 132 Channel levels nee 199 gt 5 1 14 266 LISTEN 132 Control surface operation 196 REVERB HALL nn 260 MIX SOLO 132 Explicit mute 1 200 REVERB PLATE 260 MIXDOWN 132 Flip mode u 201 REVERB ROOM 260 RECORDING 132 Implicit mute um 200 REVERB STAGE 260 SOLO uA S DIO CINA 132 Insert display mode 193 REVERSE GATE 260 Solo function 134 Meter display mode 195 RING 264 SOLO SAFE CHANNEL 133 MIDB A as 191 rack mount kit 318 Solo safe function 133 201 ROTARY 264 SOLO TRIM nennen 133 OMe nee 191 Rotary controls amp faders 29 SOLO buttons une 16 17 Panning cassia 200 201 Routing unse 86 SOLO indicator ss 22 Pl g ins reete 202 Routing ST Pair Link preference 232 SOLO section 22 Pre or Post unse 200 Specifications sess 280 Scrub amp Shuttle 204 S SRC sections sse 72 Selecting PEPEKE 199 Sampling ARETE TAE TN 72 73 ST IN button 17 Send levels 201 DOUBLE 75 STIN section eren 17 Soloing u cope 200 DOUBLE SPEED 75 Star distribution
125. PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch 2TR Out page appears PATCH Initial Data 5 STI2 5113 ST 4 CHi CHi Gau 9 ZTR OUT DIGITAL PATCH ZTR OUT Dis L STEREO t ZTR OUT DIGITAL ESIADIRECT OUTA 2TR OUT OUT NAME OUT LIE Signals assigned on the Out Patch page can also be assigned on this page 2 Move the cursor to a patch parameter you wish to change then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to modify the patching 3 Press ENTER to confirm the change Patching Direct Outs Input Channel 1 32 signals can be directly patched to any outputs or slot outputs as well as Bus Out 1 8 and Stereo Out This patching is convenient when you wish to record each Input Channel signal to an individual track on a connected recorder 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch Direct Out page appears PATCH Initial Data m SIl 5112 5713 5114 THI 0 HH amo DD 00 The parameters on this page are described below D 1 32 These boxes indicate the Direct Out destination outputs ADAT OUT output channels and slot output channels for Input Channels 1 32 2 DIRECT OUT Determines the Direct Out signal source position from the following three options 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 3nd3no indul 126 Chapter 10 Input amp Output Patching PREEQ 2eseeee Immediately before Input Channel EQ
126. REV TIME 0 3 99 0 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins REV HI 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Parameter Range Description Used in conjunction with NOTEL 1 TEMPO to determine left chan nel DELAY L Used in conjunction with NOTER TEMPO to determine right chan nel DELAY R A Used in conjunction with NOTERE TEMPO to determine FB DLY 1 ERBE RD UE 141 ded dee Maximum value depends on the tempo setting DIST gt DELAY One input two output distortion and delay effects in series Parameter Range Description DST1 DST2 m psrTYPE OVD1 2 Distortion type 057 5 CRUNCH 1 x DRIVE 0 100 Distortion drive MASTER 0 100 Master volume TONE 10 to 10 Tone control N GATE 0 20 Noise reduction DELAY 0 0 2725 0 ms Delay time Feedback gain plus values for FB GAIN 99 to 49996 normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feed back HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 10096 Modulation depth Distortion and delay balance DLY BAL 0 10096 0 all distortion 100 all delayed distortion SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Used in conjunction with 1 BERNOTE TEMPO to determine DELAY MOD NOT Used in conjunction with E TEMPO to determine FREQ
127. Rx This parameter specifies a port for general MIDI data recep tion In the left parameter box select MIDI USB or SLOT If you select USB or SLOT specify the port number 1 8 in the right parameter box s TX PORT 4 52 This parameter specifies a port for general MIDI data transmis sion The available ports are the same as for the Rx PORT parameter 2 MIDI THRU section These parameters enable you to route incoming MIDI data from one port or slot to another without changes Select a port for reception in the first parameter box and select a port for transmission in the next parameter box located to the right of the arrow If you select USB or SLOT specify the port number in the small parameter box adjacent to the port parameter box 3 MACHINE CONTROL section This section enables you to select a remote control method and a remote control port to control external devices that support MMC such as a hard disk recorder Select MIDI USB or SLOT for MMC command transfer If you select USB or SLOT specify the port number in the right parameter box 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual MIDI Port Setup 217 DEVICE ID Specify the 01V96 s MMC Device ID MMC Device IDs iden tify connected devices enabling recognition during MMC transmission and reception 4 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS section This section enables you to specify ports for various special functions Studio Mana
128. STEREO INPUT section then select 2TD The signals input atthe 2TRIN DIGITAL connector are now routed to STIN Channel2L and R PATCH 0 Initial Data CHi CHi 48k INPUT PATCH INPUT 5 1L 1R zL ZR SL 4L LC 2TO R F XS IN PATCH A INPUT INS AA EFFECT JACASCADE PJJ Use the ST IN ST IN button to select ST IN Channels 1 and 2 The ST IN ST IN button selects an ST IN channel pair ST Lights IN Channels 1 and 2 or 3 and 4 which you can control using the buttons and controls in the ST IN section The indicators to the right of the button indicate which ST IN channels are currently selected 6 Turn off the ON button for ST IN Channel 2 The button indicator turns off This ON button should be turned on only when you monitor the playback signal of the master recorder Adjusting the Track Mix Balance Follow the steps below to adjust the mix balance among Tracks 1 16 and process the signals using the EQ compressor and gate Make sure that Tracks 1 16 on the digital MTR are all disarmed and the recorder is in a mode that enables you to monitor the track playback signals Press the LAYER 1 16 button then turn off the ON buttons for Input Channels 1 16 Press the LAYER 17 32 button and make sure that the ON buttons for Input Channels 17 32 are turned on Press the
129. Spring Spring ROOMSIZE 0 1 20 0 Reflection spacing ROOMSIZE 0 1 20 0 Reflection spacing Early reflections decay character Early reflections decay character istics 0 dead 10 live istics 0 dead 10 live INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DIFF 0 10 Spread DIFF 0 10 Spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density ER NUM 1 19 Number of early reflections ER NUM 1 19 Number of early reflections SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Used in conjunction with Used in conjunction with NOTEL 1 TEMPO to determine left chan NOTEL 1 TEMPO to determine left chan nel DELAY L nel DELAY L Used in conjunction with Used in conjunction with NOTER 1 TEMPO to determine right chan NOTER 1 TEMPO to determine right chan nel DELAY R nel DELAY R Used in conjunction with Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB DLY TEMPO to determine FB DLY 1 1 fF FP RIS R05 0 2 2 1 4 4 5 1 HS RIS RAUF de do des Maximum value depends on the tempo setting Maximum value depends on the tempo setting 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual gt 5 2 2 268 Appendix A Parameter Lists DELAY REV One input two output delay and reverb effects in parallel Parameter Range Descript
130. Step 3 the ON OFF buttons turn each Input Channel on or off for the currently selected Aux Send Initial Data alSIIT STI2 5113 ST 4 zum 0 D AUXI SEND MODE 1 z 3 4 5 5 8 EN EX GE ED mu s 9 18 11 12 15 14 15 16 MST ING 17 15 19 20 21 22 23 24 1 z z5 26 27 25 29 30 31 32 3 4 sEND PAN A VIEWI 16 7 5 Note In Fixed mode the Aux On Off parameters for paired Input Channels are not linked to each other 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Chapter 9 Aux Outs 5 Ifyou switched to Variable mode in Step 3 the PRE POST buttons and Send level rotary controls enable you to adjust the signal source points and Send levels AUXI CHi CHi SEND You can turn each Input Channel on or off for the currently selected Aux Send even in Vari able mode To do this move the cursor to the desired Send level control then press ENTER The rotary controls for Off channels are grayed out Tip In Variable mode Aux Send levels Aux On Off and Pre Post parameters for paired Input Channels are linked to each other GLOBAL PRE POST buttons enable you to set all Input Channels simultaneously includ ing those not displayed on the current page to pre fader or post fader Note Do not raise the level of the Aux Sends patched to the effects processor on the effects return channels For
131. Version 2 Owner s Manual Analog I O amp Digital I O 69 6 Analog I O amp Digital I O This chapter describes the 01V96 s analog and digital input output connectors as well as the basic operations involving the digital I Os Analog Inputs amp Outputs Input Section The 01V96 s top panel features input connectors which enable you to connect microphone and line level sources INPUT connectors 1 12 These balanced TRS type phone connectors accept line level and 1 2 microphone signals The nominal input range 15 60 dB through 4 dB The phantom 48V switches on the rear panel turn on off the 48V phantom power feed to these inputs e INPUT connectors B 1 12 BAL emm These balanced TRS type connectors accept line level and micro phone signals The nominal input range is 60 dB through 4 dB You cannot use same numbered INPUT A and INPUT B connectors simultaneously For example you cannot use INPUT A 2 and INPUT B 2 at the same time If you connect cables to A and B con nectors of the same number only the signal from INPUT B is effec tive e g B 2 takes priority over A 2 INPUT connectors 13 16 13 15 These balanced TRS type phone connectors accept line level signals When the AD 15 16 source selector is turned on pushed in signals M from INPUT 15 and 16 are ignored Instead signals from the 2TR IN connector will be routed to AD Input Channels 15 and 16 Tip
132. YAMAHA gt DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE s Manual Owner Keep This Manual For Future Reference FCC INFORMATION U S A 1 IMPORTANT NOTICE DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT This product when installed as indicated in the instructions con tained in this manual meets FCC requirements Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority granted by the FCC to use the product 2 IMPORTANT When connecting this product to accessories and or another product use only high quality shielded cables Cable s supplied with this product MUST be used Follow all installation instructions Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA 3 NOTE This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations Part 15 for Class B digital devices Compliance with these requirements provides a reason able level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other elec tronic devices This equipment generates uses radio frequencies and if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations If this product is found to be the source of interference which can
133. You can store MIDI messages assigned to the channel controls in four banks When the 01V96 is shipped from the factory it includes MIDI settings in these banks which you can quickly recall to use the MIDI Remote function If necessary you can also assign other MIDI messages to the faders or ON buttons to remotely control the parameters of a connected MIDI device Using the MIDI Remote Function This section describes how to recall and use the factory preset MIDI Remote settings stored in the banks By default the 01V96 s four MIDI Remote banks Banks 1 4 contain the following MIDI messages Control Function Bank Usage ON buttons Faders 1 Panning and setting GM sound levels Volume 2 Setting GM sound effect send levels Effect Send 3 Setting XG sound levels Volume 4 Adjusting mute and levels for Cubase series mixer Mute Volume 1 Connect the 01V96 s MIDI OUT port to the MIDI IN port of the MIDI device MIDI OUT MIDI IN e 0000 08 0 299 99 e aia aapon A s ool Synthesizer a aaoo agang le aie el da paaga Fogg 0430u0 JJow yY 01V96 Versi
134. based DAWs See page 189 for more information on the Remote layer Tip The ST IN section is not affected by the layer settings Display Section YAMAHA boog 5 amp amp Cu um um uf um u um m eG uff nl un um CD Display This is a 320 x 240 dot LCD display with a backlight 2 Stereo meters These 12 segment level meters display the final output level of the Stereo Bus 3 Contrast control This control adjusts the display contrast 2 F1 F4 buttons These buttons select a page from a multi page screen Selecting a tab at the bottom of the screen using one of these buttons displays the corresponding page See page 28 for more information on displaying a page 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 8 DLNS IN 20 Chapter 2 Control Surface amp Rear Panel 5 Left Tab Scroll button Right Tab Scroll gt button If there are more pages available than the four whose tabs are currently displayed use these buttons to display the additional tabs These buttons are available only when the left or right Tab Scroll arrow appears ao m m m m m A MUTEI 32 2 4 8 OUT FADER A OUT MUTE amp Tab Scroll arrow SELECTED CHANNEL
135. be determined by turning the unit OFF and ON please try to elimi nate the problem by using one of the following measures Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference Utilize power outlets that are on different branch circuit breaker or fuse circuits or install AC line filter s In the case of radio or TV interference relocate reorient the antenna If the antenna lead in is 300 ohm ribbon lead change the lead in to co axial type cable If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product If you can not locate the appropriate retailer please con tact Yamaha Corporation of America Electronic Service Division 6600 Orangethorpe Ave Buena Park CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA class B ADVARSEL Lithiumbatteri Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig h ndtering Udskiftning m kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type Lev r det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren VARNING Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte Anv nd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren Kassera anv nt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion VAROITUS Paristo voi r j ht jos
136. be the same when an effect is recalled as when that effect was stored Here is an example Store the effect TEMPO 120 gt Change TEMPO to 60 Recall the effect TEMPO 60 Normally when you change the TEMPO the DELAY or FREQ will be re set accordingly However if the DELAY or FREQ were changed the effect would sound differently when recalled than when it was stored To prevent the effect from changing in this way between store and recall the 01V96 does not update the DELAY or FREQ value when an effect is recalled even if the TEMPO is no longer the same as when that effect was stored The NOTE parameter is calculated based on the following values 1 48 1 24 1 16 4113 1 12 F 3 32 J 1 8 ddd 1 6 J 3 16 d 1 4 d 3 8 d 1 2 da 3 4 a 1 1 au 2 1 01 96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Preset EQ Parameters 271 Preset EQ Parameters Title Bass Drum 1 Bass Drum 2 Snare Drum 1 Snare Drum 2 Tom tom 1 Cymbal High Hat Percussion E Bass 1 E Bass 2 Syn Bass 1 Syn Bass 2 Piano 1 Parameter LOW L MID H MID HIGH PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 3 5 dB 3 5 dB 0 0dB 4 0 dB 100 Hz 265 Hz 1 06 kHz 5 30 kHz 1 2 10 0 9 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING LPF 8 0 dB 7 0dB 6 0 dB ON 80 Hz 400 Hz 2 5
137. box and press the ENTER button The Patch Select window appears This window enables you to select the input source quickly 4 To patch a signal output from the effects processor move the cursor to the desired OUT parameter box select the signal destination from the following options then press ENTER ED ui RAE dette ese No assignment s CHT 32 25e Input Channels 1 32 STIN IL ST IN 4R ST IN Channels IL 4R INS 1 32 Input Channel Insert In INS BUSI 8 Bus 1 8 Insert In INS AUXI S Aux 1 8 Insert In INSST L amp INS ST R Stereo Bus Insert In To use the internal effects processors via Aux Sends select CH 1 32 or ST IN 1 4 in most cases The channels you assign here will become the effects return channels You can patch a different channel to the other output of a 1 in 2 out or 2 in 2 out effect program to create stereo effects Tip Ifyou select an ST IN Channel as the destination you can patch the L and R channel signals separately Youcan also use the Patch Select window to set the OUT parameter boxes as explained in Step 3 Thenumber of inputs available for each effect varies depending on the type of effect programs initially recalled Note You cannot select a channel as the destination of multiple effect signals If you select a channel that is already selected in another OUT parameter box that OUT parameter box s
138. channels inserts and Automation mode SOLO buttons These buttons solo Pro Tools channels The button indicators for the soloed channels light up ON buttons These buttons mute Pro Tools channels Faders The faders set Pro Tools channel levels including the audio tracks MIDI tracks master fader Aux Ins etc If 16 or fewer channels are displayed in Pro Tools faders are assigned starting from the left most channel FADER MODE Section AUX 1 AUX 5 buttons These buttons select Sends A E so that you can adjust the corresponding Pro Tools channel send level AUX 6 button Press and hold down this button and press the desired SEL button to reset the correspond ing channel fader level Move the cursor to the parameter control on the display then press and hold down this but ton and press ENTER to reset the corresponding channel panpot to center While you are holding down the AUX 6 button the SELECT ASSIGN parameter indicates DFLT AUX 7 button When this button is turned on you can adjust the selected channel panpot using the SELECTED CHANNEL PAN control If you turn on this button while a Channel Display mode page is selected you can adjust each channel panpot using parameter controls 1 16 To adjust the stereo channel panpots press this button repeatedly to toggle between L and R channels AUX 8 button Use this button along with the desired SEL button to assign a plug in to the correspon
139. data for transmission and reception 2 REQUEST Move the cursor to this button then press ENTER to transmit messages from the 01V96 that request a second 01V96 connected to the first 01V96 to transmit the data specified in the CATEGORY section This button is used primarily when two 01V96s are connected in cascade 3 TRANSMIT Move the cursor to this button then press ENTER to transmit data specified in the CATEGORY section to an external MIDI device 4 INTERVAL This parameter specifies the interval between data packets during bulk transmission in 50 millisecond steps If the external device drops part of the bulk data increase this parameter value 4 Inthe CATEGORY section move the cursor to the button of the data type you want to transmit then press ENTER 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Transmitting Parameter Settings via MIDI Bulk Dump 227 The following options are available t All sangen This button selects all data available for bulk dump When this button is turned on all other buttons in this section are turned off SCENEMEM This button selects Scene memories You can select Scenes you wish to transmit in the parameter box next to the button LIBRARY This button selects libraries You can select the type of library in the TYPE parameter box next to the button then specify the library number in the parameter box on the right BANK
140. desired channels Currently assigned MIDI messages appear in the ON and FADER sections Tip You can also choose the desired channels using the ID SHORT and LONG parameters 5 Movethe cursor to the LEARN button in the ON section then press ENTER MIDI messages received at the MIDI IN port of the 01V96 will be assigned to the DATA parameter boxes in the ON section 6 Press and hold down the MIDI keyboard foot switch The MIDI Hold On message is assigned in the DATA parameter box MIDI messages are described below MIDI messages are expressed hexadecimal END auctae This message indicates the end of MIDI messages Subsequent messages assigned in the DATA parameter boxes will be ignored E This message indicates that no messages are assigned to the DATA parameter boxes Tip When you click the LEARN button to assign MIDI messages the 01V96 automatically recognizes the end of the messages and assigns END and 7 While continuing to hold down the foot switch turn off the LEARN button 8 Move the cursor to the third parameter box 7F in this example then rotate the Parameter wheel to change the value to SW SW is a variable that changes depending on the ON button s on off status You can use the following variables in MIDI messages This variable is selectable only in DATA parameter boxes of the ON section When the ON buttons are turned on 7F 127 in dec
141. disables transmission and reception of Control Changes Tx ON OFF Transmission of Control Change messages is enabled or dis abled Rx Reception of Control Change messages is enabled or disabled ECHO ON OFF This button determines whether Control Change messages received at the MIDI IN port are echoed through to the MIDI OUT port 4 PARAMETER CHANGE This parameter row enables or disables transmission and reception of Parameter Changes 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Assigning Scenes to Program Changes for Remote Recall 219 Tx ON OFF Transmission of Parameter Change messages is enabled or dis abled Rx Reception of Parameter Change messages is enabled or disabled ECHO ON OFF This button determines whether Parameter Change messages received at the MIDI IN port are echoed through to the MIDI OUT port 5 BULK This parameter row enables or disables reception of Bulk Dump data RxON OEF Reception of Bulk Dump data is enabled or disabled 6 OTHER COMMANDS ECHO ON OFF This button determines whether other MIDI messages received at the MIDIIN port are echoed through to the MIDI OUT port 7 Fader Resolution This parameter specifies the resolution of the value output when you operate the 01V96 s faders To transfer fader value data between two cascaded 01V96s o
142. display 115711 5712 STI3 5714 GOO 4 Rotate the SELECTED CHANNEL control to adjust the setting The pan setting can be applied to either ST IN channel L or R To switch between channels Land R for the pan setting press the same SEL button repeatedly The channel currently being controlled is indicated in the upper left corner of the display mpm iNniulri 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Setting the Input Channels from the Control Surface 91 EQ ing Input Channels 1 Pressthe SEL button or move the fader for the channel you wish to control 2 To control EQ for the currently selected channel press one of the following buttons to select the band you wish to adjust HIGH button HIGH band H MID button HIGH MID band L MID button LOW MID band LOW button LOW band 3 Usethe SELECTED CHANNEL Q FREQUENCY and GAIN controls to adjust the Q frequency and gain of the band selected in Step 2 When the Auto EQUALIZER Display page 231 check box is on the 01V96 displays the EQ EQ Edit page Initial Dota a STI1 STI2 STI3 STI4 BUSI ane n BUS1 EQUALIZER EDIT Sjouueu N AEA LIBRARY ZA IN ATT ga OUT ATT If the check box is off the parameter value currently being adjusted pops up See page 84 for more information on EQ DIO SETUP Initial Data STI1
143. e c a e de GdB de Bde 16 11 12 13 gt e m m de de 18 19 29 21 w Move the cursor to the knob for the desired Input Channel then rotate the Parameter wheel to set the amount of attenuation in the range of 96 dB to 12 dB Tip You can also set the attenuation amount in dB for the currently selected channel on the EQ EQ Edit page 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Sjouueu ndu N 84 Chapter 7 Input Channels EQ ing Input Channels The 01V96 s Input Channels feature 4 band LOW LOW MID HIGH MID HIGH para metric EQ The LOW MID and HIGH MID bands are a peakingtype of EQ The LOW and HIGH bands can be set to shelving peaking or HPF and LPF respectively 1 Press the SEL button of the channel for which you want to adjust EQ 2 Press the DISPLAY ACCEESS EQ button then press the F1 button to dis play the EQ EQ Edit page EQ nitial Data gis STI2 STI3 STI4 CHI CHI OO ai 0 oO EQUALIZER ED T AEG LIBRARY ATT f amp OUT RTT The parameters on this page are described below D EQ ON The ON OFF button turns the currently selected Input Channel s EQ on or off You can press the ENTER button to turn the EQ on or off as long as the cursor is located on any parameter other than TYPE 2 TYPE Selects the type of EQ TYPE Lis the EQ t
144. en 186 Gate library e 183 General operation 175 Input patch library 178 Output patch library 179 specifications 2 2 285 et eed 149 222222 154 RES 154 LOW button u 20 LOW MID button eee 20 M M BAND DYNA eene 269 Machine control 20 212 MASTER button see 19 MASTER MODE eee 36 Meter CH1 32 page 34 Meter Effect page 35 Meter Master page 35 Meter Position page 34 Meter ST IN page 35 Meter Stereo page 36 Metering asso MERE CERTUS 34 Meters Stereo meters sss 19 eerte ns 191 215 Bulk dump 226 Bulk dump messages 215 Control changes 220 Data format 306 FADER H D 42 02 28 224 Initial parameter to control change table ace p 290 MIDI IN THRU OUT ports 25 215 MIDI indicator es 27 MIDI note on off 215 Parameter changes 225 Parameters 2 221 Program changes 219 Scene memory to program change 289 Setup eee ce Re AR 216 SEOT TEN 216 System exclusive messages
145. example by default Aux 1 is routed to the input of the internal Effects processor 1 and Land R of ST IN Channel 1 are patched to the processor s output Under these conditions if you raise the level of the send signals from ST IN Channel 1 to Aux 1 the signals are returned to ST IN Channel 1 creating a signal loop and possibly damaging your speakers 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Viewing Aux Send Settings for Multiple Channels 117 Viewing Aux Send Settings for Multiple Channels You can view and set parameters for all Aux Send 1 8 including setting levels and Pre Post parameters This is convenient when you wish to visually check all Aux Send settings or simultaneously adjust the levels of certain channels routed to Aux 1 8 1 Press one of the FADER MODE AUX 1 AUX 8 buttons repeatedly until the page listed below that contains the desired channels appears Viewl 16 page This page displays the Aux Send levels of Input Channels 1 16 View17 STI page This page displays the Aux Send levels of Input Channels 17 32 and STIN Channels 1 4 These pages display the source Input channels and the corresponding Aux Sends in a matrix The parameters on these two pages and the procedure for setting them are the same RUX iti SLL 5112 5113 5114 DISPLAY EBEN 1 2 x c a LEVEL co dB 3 A PAN A v eut 6 ARUTEHTT STT D
146. input signal level is 3 dB below clipping Q peak ooo e 2TRIN connectors These unbalanced RCA phono connectors accept line level signals from master recorders When the AD 15 16 source selector is turned on pushed in signals input at these conductors are routed to AD Inputs 15 and 16 When the Monitor source selector is turned on pushed in you can mon itor these signals from the MONITOR OUT connectors 2TR 10dBV UNBAL Output Section The 01V96 top and rear panels feature output connectors that enable you to connect a mon itoring system master recorder effects processors and other line level devices MONITOR OUT connectors L R MONITOR OUT These balanced TRS type phone connectors output monitoring sig nals or input signals routed from the 2TR IN connectors The nom inal output level is 4 dB Use the Monitor source selector in the AD Input section to select the signal output from these connectors OMNI OUT connectors 1 4 These balanced TRS type phone connectors output any Bus Outs or Input Channel Direct Outs The nominal out U 9 9 put level is 4 dB 4 3 2 1 OMNI OUT 4dB BAL Tip Any signal path can be patched to the OMNI OUT connectors See page 124 for more information on patching signals to the OMNI OUT connectors e STEREO OUT connectors L R STEREQSUT These balanced XLR 3 32 type connectors output the Stereo Out signals The nominal output level
147. is 4 dB O O R L 2TR OUT connectors These unbalanced RCA phono connectors output line level signals to a connected master recorder or other external device These connectors always output the Stereo Out signals L 10dBV UNBAL 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Digital Inputs amp Outputs 71 Digital Inputs amp Outputs The 01V96 rear panel features digital input and output connectors that enable you to con nect external digital devices Any signal path can be patched to these digital inputs and out puts You can also add analog and digital I Os by installing an optional I O card in the slot Digital Connectors 2TRIN DIGITAL connector 2TR_IN DIGITAL COAXIAL 2TRIN DIGITAL is an RCA phono connector and accepts consumer format IEC 60958 digital audio You can patch digital signals input at this connector to any Input Channel page 121 2TR OUT DIGITAL connector This RCA phono connector outputs consumer format IEC 60958 digital audio You can patch any Bus outs or Input channel Direct Outs to this output page 125 2TR OUT DIGITAL COAXIAL ADAT IN connector This TOSLINK connector accepts 8 channel ADAT optical format signals which can be patched to any Input Channel page 121 ADAT OUT connector This TOSLINK connector outputs an 8 channel ADAT optical format signal You can patch any Bus Outs or Input Channel Direct outs to this output p
148. levels Tip If you set the POSITION parameter to PRE EQ the pre EQ input levels are metered If you set the parameter to PRE FADER the post EQ and pre fader input levels are metered Make sure that ON button indicators 1 12 are lit then raise faders 1 12 to OdB While the musicians play the musical instruments check the input channel levels using the level meters on the display Tip If the meters reach the OVER level make sure that the faders are set to then lower the corresponding GAIN controls Pairing Channels On the 01V96 you can pair adjacent odd even channels for stereo operation Faders and most mix parameters of paired channels excluding the Input Patch phase routing and pan parameters are linked Pairing Input Channels is useful when you are connecting ste reo sources such as a rhythm machine or synthesizer To pair adjacent odd even Input Channels press and hold the SEL button for one of the channels you wish to pair and press the SEL button for the adjacent channel The corresponding two channels are paired and the settings such as faders channel on off etc of the first channel are copied to the second channel Subsequently adjusting the linked parameters of one of the paired channels will adjust the parameters of its partner in the same way 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Initial Track Recording 51 Parameters are copied
149. levels that are too low 4 BAND EQ 4 band equalizer This parametric EQ features four bands high high mid low mid and low INPUT DELAY Input delay This section enables you to delay input signals You can use this delay to fine tune the timing between channels or as a delay effect with feedback 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 78 Chapter 7 Input Channels ON On Off This section enables you to turn the channel on or off The channel is muted with the Off setting e LEVEL This section enables you to adjust the input level of the Input Channel signal e PAN This section enables you to adjust the pan setting of the signals routed from the Input Chan nels to the Stereo Bus You can also apply the pan setting to a pair of Bus channels e AUX Aux Send level This section enables you to adjust the level of signals routed to Aux Sends 1 8 The signals can be routed to Aux Sends from either the pre fader or post fader position e INSERT This section enables you to patch input signals to external devices via the on board I O con nectors or I O card or insert the internal effect processors You can patch any inputs out puts or I O card channels Note that this is different from the INSERT I O connectors in the AD Input section METER This section enables you to switch the metering position of the signal levels that are dis played in the Meter page See page 34 for more information on selecting th
150. machines PLAY 22 en This button starts playback on external machines REG ae This button is used in conjunction with the PLAY button to start recording on external machines 4 FRAMES This parameter selects the timecode frame rate from 24 25 30D drop frame and 30 To control the transport functions move the cursor to the desired button in the TRANSPORT section then press ENTER If you desire move the cursor to the buttons and parameters in the LOCATE TIME section and the TRACK ARMING section then press the ENTER button or rotate the Parameter wheel to control the transport func tions on external machines Tip You can also use the programmed User Defined buttons to control Machine Control func tions See page 235 for information on assigning functions to the User Defined buttons 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 215 18 MIDI This chapter describes the 01V96 s MIDI related functions MIDI amp the 01V96 Using Control Changes Program Changes and other MIDI messages enables you to recall Scenes and edit parameters on the 01V96 and store 01V96 internal data on external MIDI devices The 01V96 supports the following MIDI messages Each of these MIDI messages can be individually turned on or off for transmission and reception Program Changes If you assign the 01V96 s Scenes to Program Change numbers the 01V96 transmits Pro gram Changes when it recalls Scenes Also th
151. middle of the page The message No Data appears in the title column of empty library memories icon is displayed next to the name of read only preset memories You cannot store clear or edit the titles of these memories Memories 0 and U are special read only memories Recall memory 0 to reset the param eter settings to their initial values Recall U to undo memory recall and store operations 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 176 Chapter 16 Libraries 2 Rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to select the desired memory The selected memory appears inside the dotted box Move the cursor to one of the following function buttons then press ENTER D TITLE EDIT This button displays the Title Edit window which enables you to edit the title of the selected memory Move the cursor to the OK button then press ENTER to confirm the edited title Refer to page 30 for more information on entering characters 2 RECALL This button recalls the contents of the selected library memory If you turn on the Recall Confirmation parameter on the DIO Setup Prefer1 page the 01V96 displays a memory recall confirmation window 8 STORE This button stores the settings to the selected memory Before you store the settings you can enter or edit the title using the Title Edit window Refer to page 30 for more infor mation on entering characters You can disable the Title Edit window by turning
152. mixer MODEL ID 01111111 7F Universal ADDRESS Ottttttt tt Data type ee Element no If ee is 0 ee is expanded to two bytes Oppppppp pp Parameter no cc Channel EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual gt 5 2 amp x 314 Appendix C MIDI 2 8 3 1 5 Parameter Address Consult your dealer for parameter address details 2 8 3 2 Parameter change STATUS ID No SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS DATA EOX 2 8 3 3 Parameter request STATUS ID No SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS EOX 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 01111111 00000001 0eeeeeee Oddddddd 1 0111 28 0000 01000011 0011nnnn 00111110 0 1111 00000001 11110111 FO 43 in 3E 01 PP cc dd E7 FO 43 3n 3E 01 PP ec F7 2 8 3 4 Parameter change STATUS ID No SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS DATA EOX 2 8 3 5 Parameter request STATUS ID No SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS EOX 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00001101 00000010 0eeeeeee Oddddddd 11110111 11110000 01000011 0011nnnn 00111110 00001101 00000010 11110111 FO 43
153. normal phase minus values for reverse phase PAN 2 L63 to R63 Channel 2 pan DELAY 2 0 0 1000 0 ms Channel 2 delay time Channel 2 feedback gain plus FB G2 299 to 49996 values for normal phase feed back minus values for reverse phase feedback MODE 1 10 Pitch shift precision SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Used in conjunction with NOTE 1 1 TEMPO to determine Channel 1 delay Used in conjunction with NOTE 2 1 TEMPO to determine Channel 2 delay 1 FFP FP RAUF de do 4 5 Maximum value depends on the tempo setting 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual gt 5 2 2 264 Appendix A Parameter Lists ROTARY AMP SIMULATE One input two output rotary speaker simulator One input two output guitar amp simulator Parameter Range Description Parameter Range Description ROTATE STOP START Rotation stop start AMP TYPE Guitar amp simulation type SPEED SLOW FAST ee DST TYPE euni p Distortion type DST distor SLOW 0 05 10 00Hz SLOW rotation speed CRUNCH tion OVD igverdrive FAST 0 05 10 00 Hz FAST rotation speed DRIVE 0 100 Distortion drive DRIVE 0 100 Overdrive level MASTER 0 100 Master volume ACCEL 0 10 Acceleration at speed changes BASS 0 100 Bass tone control LOW 0 100 Low frequency filter MIDDLE 0 100 Middle tone control HIGH 0 100 High frequency filter TREBLE 0 100 High tone control Ri NC MOD CAB
154. off the Store Confirmation parameter on the DIO Setup Prefer1 page If you bypass the Edit Title window the name New Data will be used as a title for the Scene memory 4 CLEAR This button deletes the contents of the selected memory After you press ENTER the 01V96 displays a confirmation window To execute the delete operation move the cur sor to the YES button in the confirmation window then press ENTER Note If you select a memory that already contains settings and execute the delete operation the settings will be lost Make sure that you do not accidentally delete important settings 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Using Libraries 177 Using Libraries Channel Library Channel library enables you to store and recall Input Channel and Output Channel param eter settings The library contains two preset memories and 127 user readable amp writable memories You can recall only the settings for the currently selected channels from the Channel library For example you cannot recall Input Channel 1 32 settings to ST IN Channels 1 4 Bus Outs 1 8 Aux Outs 1 8 or Stereo Out with the exception that memories 0 and 1 can be recalled to any channels Follow the steps below to use the Channel library 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS VIEW button repeatedly until the View Library page appears VIEH Initial Data ey EY tan aao 0 O CHANNEL LIBRARY SURROUND
155. on page 150 use the cursor buttons to select the INPUT MUTE MASTER check box or OUTPUT MUTE MASTER check box then press ENTER to turn on the Mute Group Master function PRIR GRUPIOy Initial Data 815717 5112 5113 5114 CH4 CH4 INPUT MUTE GROUP E INPUT MU 567 12 EN 088 iei D zu m n in 24 m n 21 14 im ekek fea fea fea C mjimjim z m z 4 m m 1718 19 20 2122 2324 2526 2728 235021522 254 peal fea fea fea I 212 FS E EI EIE S mim SJE elle i ie ozzxrxc nozzrxc MU NEBEEEEE INPUT A OUTPUT IN FADER IN MUTE s 3j9weseg 8 sjauueyD 2 When the Mute Master check box is checked use the group MASTER MUTE buttons to mute or unmute the groups If channels are muted via the Mute Master function the channel ON button indicators flash It is useful if you assign the MASTER MUTE buttons to USER DEFINED KEYS but tons 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 154 Chapter 13 Grouping Channels amp Linking Parameters Linking EQ and Compressor Parameters Follow the steps below to link EQ or compressor parameters for Input Channels or Output Channels This function enables you to set EQ or compressor parameters for multiple chan nels to the same values simultaneously 1 Press the
156. page appears iti STI2 5113 5114 wim Ga i G3 G3 61 G1 C7 2 n a a n ga 211 5 TIME CODE 00 00 00 00 This page contains the following parameters 0 LOCATE TIME section This section enables you to set the locate points LOCATE 1 8 These buttons locate the positions specified by the TIME val ues on external machines This Return To Zero button locates the zero timecode position on external machines TIME sone Locate points are specified in hour minute second frame for mat CAPTURE These buttons capture the current position on external machines and import the information into the TIME column 2 TRACK ARMING section This section controls the tracks on external machines 1 24 buttons These buttons turn external tracks 1 24 on or off and set or cancel their Record Ready mode ALL CLEAR Turning on this button switches all buttons 1 24 simulta neously 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 0430u0 214 Chapter 17 Remote Control 3 TRANSPORT section This section enables you to control the transport functions on external machines REW ariane inunan This button starts rewind on external machines This button starts fast forward on external machines STOP eee This button stops external
157. parameter settings originally stored in the memory do not match those for the destina tion channel However if the channel type of the memory and that of the destination channel match you can recall the settings even with the alarm indicators displayed For unmatched parameter settings the 01V96 will use the settings in the memory that is to be recalled The following preset memories are available for the Channel library No Preset Name Description This preset memory resets all parameters of the currently selected channel Reset dB 3 to their initial values and sets the channel fader level to dB This preset memory resets all parameters of the currently selected channel Reset 0 dB 1 to their initial values and sets the channel fader level to 0 dB i e nominal Input Patch Library The Input Patch library enables you to store and recall all Input Patch settings The library contains one preset memory and 32 user readable amp writable memories To access the Input Patch library press the DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch IN LIB page appears For details on storing and recalling memories see General Library Operation on page 175 PATCH Initial Data m H SH2 5714 cii cen 0 Qo INPUT PATCH LIBRARY LIBRARY TITLE B 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 Input Patch preset memory 0 contains the following settings
158. patch signals to the desired output connectors see page 121 DYNAMICS button This button displays a Dynamics page enabling you to control channel gates and compres sors see page 81 EQ button This button displays an EQ page enabling you to set the equalizer and attenuator of the selected channel see page 84 AD EFFECT button This button displays an Effect page enabling you to edit the internal effects processors and use optional plug in cards see page 161 42 VIEW button This button displays a View page enabling you to view and set mix parameters for a specific channel see page 87 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Control Surface 19 LAYER Section LAYER ol fo oo 1 16 17 32 buttons These buttons select an Input Channel layer as the layer controlled in the Channel Strip sec tion When the 1 16 button is turned on you can control Channels 1 16 When the 17 32 button is turned on you can control Channels 17 32 See page 31 for more infor mation on the Input Channel layers MASTER button This button selects the Master Layer as the layer controlled in the Channel Strip section You can use this layer to control Bus Outs and AUX Sends See page 31 for more information on the Master layer 8 REMOTE button This button selects the Remote Layer as the layer controlled in the Channel Strip section You can use this layer to control external MIDI devices or computer
159. section 21 CH5 8 ON OFF switch 23 Nuendo 189 Scene numbers anne 166 CH9 12 ON OFF switch 23 ProTools 189 Scene up down buttons ann 21 Phase 79 REMOTE 189 SEL buttons t 16 17 PHASER nati 263 Target parameter 192 SELECTED CHANNEL section 20 PHONES jack ss 15 131 TRACK ARMING section 213 Selecting channels sss 32 PHONES LEVEL control 15 TRANSPORT section 214 Selecting display pages an 28 PLUG IN Are 227 REMOTE button nn 19 189 Selecting fader 33 Plugins ss 202 Remote Layer Setting levels ss 113 163 Nuendo Cubase SX 206 37 POWER ON OFF switch 25 Pro tools tees 190 Shadow memory 169 Power section 25 RESET BOTH e 93 SHIFT LOCK button 30 Prefer page 230 REV CHORUS 020442444020 265 SIGNAL indicators 15 70 Prefer2 page 232 REV FLANGE eee 265 SINGLE 76 Preferences 230 REV SYMPHO eese 266 SLOT 25 42 71 216 Pro tools es 189 190 200 REV gt CHORUS 265 SLOT section einen 25 Automation 205 REV gt FLANGE ee 266 Solo web LIED 132 Channel display mode 195 REV gt
160. slot cover as shown below Keep the cover and fixing screws in a safe place for future use 3 Insert the card between the guide rails and slide it all the way into the slot as shown below You may have to push firmly to fully insert the card into the internal connector 4 Secure the card using the attached thumbscrews Tighten the screws firmly to secure the card Otherwise the card may not be grounded cor rectly 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Operating Basics 27 3 Operating Basics This chapter describes basic operations on the 01V 96 including how to use the display and operate the controls on the top panel About the Display The top panel display indicates various parameters that you must set before you can operate the 01V96 The display indicates the following items DEDIT indicator indicator amp surround mode indicator Current Scene sampling rate indicator DISPLAY 8 ST IN channel PRN ROUTE 00 In tial tita re levels 4 Selected Selected channel 9 title INPUT 4 5 Page area 2 Page tabs Scroll arrows 1 Selected DISPLAY This section indicates the currently selected display page group 2 Selected channel This section indicates the Input or Output Channel currently selected by its correspond ing SEL button The first four characters are the Channel ID e g CH1 CH32 BU
161. steps below to use the Oscillator 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS UTILITY button repeatedly until the Utility Oscillator page appears UTILITY Initial Data 5111 571251135714 CHi CHI 0 oO ur ASSIGN eus 1 2 GB L3 G1 5 OE o 1 2 51 41 515171 stereo W El BURST HOISE SCILLATOR CH STATUS BATTERY JA USER DEF amp 13 This page contains the following parameters D OSCILLATOR ON This parameter button turns the Oscillator on or off 2 WAVEFORM These parameter buttons select the Oscillator waveforms 3 LEVEL section The parameter control in this section sets the Oscillator output level 4 ASSIGN section The buttons in this section select the Oscillator output 2 Move the cursor to the button for the Oscillator output channel in the ASSIGN section then press ENTER you can select multiple channels 3 Move the cursor to one of the WAVEFORM parameter buttons then press ENTER You can select the following waveforms SINE 100Hz 100 Hz sinewave SINE IKHz 1 kHz sinewave SINE 10KHz 10 kHz sinewave PINK NOISE Pink noise BURST NOISE Burst noise 200 msec pink noise pulses at four second inter vals 4 Move the cursor to the parameter control in the LEVEL section then rotate the Parameter wheel to set the Oscillator level to minimum
162. stereo 39 Fine EQ Cass Add clarity when recording to or from cassette tape 40 Narrator Ideal for recording narration 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 188 Chapter 16 Libraries 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Remote Control 189 17 Remote Control This chapter describes the Remote function which enables you to control external equip ment directly from the 01V96 top panel About Remote Function The 01V96 s Remote function enables you to control external DAW Digital Audio Work station equipment MIDI devices recorders etc There are two types of Remote functions Remote and Machine Control REMOTE Remote Layer To use these types of Remote functions you must connect the 01V96 to a target device via USB or an optional MY8 mLAN card installed in the slot and operate the faders and ON buttons on the top panel to control the external device remotely You can specify a target device and parameter values on the DIO Setup Remote page This layer is enabled when you turn on the LAYER REMOTE button During Remote opera tion the controls on the top panel enable you to control the external device You cannot adjust the 01V96 s parameters unless you select a different layer You can assign functions of a target device to the controls on the top panel ofthe 01V96 by using Remote layer The following targets are available for remote control
163. tempo For modulation type effects the frequency of the modulation signal will change according to the tempo Parameters related to tempo synchronization The following five parameters are related to tempo synchronization 1 SYNC 2 3 4 DELAY 5 FREQ SY NG This is the on off switch for tempo synchronization NOTE and TEMPO These are the basic parameters for tempo synchronization DELAY and FREQ DELAY is the delay time and FREQ is the frequency of the modulation signal These directly affect the way in which the effect sound will change DELAY is relevant only for delay type effects and FREQ is relevant only for modulation type effects How the parameters are related Tempo synchronization uses TEMPO and NOTE to calculate a value that will be the basis for the tempo and continues making adjustments so that this tempo basis stays essentially the same as the DELAY or FREQ This means that when TEMPO NOTE and DELAY or FREQ are synchronized and you change any of these values the other parameters will be re set in order to maintain the correct relationship The parameters that are re set and the calculation method a used are as follows If you turn SYNC on NOTE will be set If you edit DELAY or FREQ NOTE will be set In this case the NOTE value is calculated as follows NOTE DELAY or FREQ 4 x 60 TEMPO If you edit NOTE DELAY or FREQ will be set In t
164. the DIO Setup Word Clock page appears automatically if the cur rently selected external wordclock source fails Auto Channel Select If this check box is on you can select a channel by moving the corresponding fader or by turning on the corresponding channel SOLO or ON button Store Confirmation If this check box is on the Title Edit window to input a Scene or library memory name appears when you store a Scene or library memory Recall Confirmation If this check box is on a confirmation window appears when you recall a Scene or library memory Patch Confirmation If this check box is on a confirmation message appears when you edit the Input and Output Patches Pair Confirmation If this check box is on a confirmation message appears when you create or cancel a pair Nominal Pan If this check box is checked and when Input Channel signals are panned hard left or hard right the signals on the left odd channels and right even channels will be at the nominal level If this check box is not checked these signals will be boosted by 3 dB When the sig nals are panned to center they will be at the nominal level In Surround mode the same thing applies when any Surroound pan channel is panned hard left or right Fast Meter Fall Time If this check box is on the level meters fall more quickly DIO Warning If this check box is on a warning message appears when any errors are detected in digital audio signals receive
165. the Display 101 Routing Bus Out 1 8 Signals to the Stereo Bus You can patch Bus Out 1 8 signals to Outputs and Slots 1 2 as well as to the Stereo Bus You can adjust the level and pan settings of the signals routed to the Stereo Bus for each bus This is convenient when you wish to use Bus Outs 1 8 as a Group Bus To patch the Bus Out 1 8 signals to the Stereo Bus press the DISPLAY ACCESS PAN ROUTING button repeatedly to display the Pan Route Bus to St page PAN ROUTE Initial Data a SU1 5112 S13 STI4 BUST BUS1 Oo BUS1 BUSZ BUSS BUS4 BUSS BUS6 BUS BUSS PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN o 0 m CENTER CENTER wa er ca LRBOUT1 16 fiROUTIT STIfA BUS TO ST Move the cursor to the desired parameter you wish to change then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to modify the setting 0 TO ST PAN These controls pan the Bus Out 1 8 signals between the left and right Stereo Out buses 2 TO ST ON OFF These buttons turn on and off the Bus Out 1 8 to the Stereo Bus routing 3 TO ST Faders These faders set the Bus Out 1 8 to Stereo Bus levels sno sng 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 102 Chapter 8 Bus Outs Viewing the Stereo Out and Bus Out Settings You can view and adjust parameter settings for the currently selected Stereo Out or Bus Out on the View Parameter and Fader pages Viewing the Comp
166. the PAN SURR LINK button then press ENTER When the PAN SURR LINK button is turned on adjusting the Input Channel pan settings will also change the stereo surround panning accordingly and vice versa 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Setting Up and Selecting Surround Pan Modes 139 6 To change the Surround Channel to Bus Out assignment move the cursor to the SURR BUS SETUP button then press ENTER The DIO Setup Surr Bus page appears STI1 STI2 STI3 STI4 DIO SETUP OO Initial Data CHI CHI Ex SURROUND BUS SETUP SURROUND BUS SETUP BUS1 BUSZ BUSS BUS4 BUSS BUS6 BUS BUSS D BUS1 BUS8 These parameters select channels to be assigned to the Bus Outs in 3 1 5 1 and 6 1 Sur round modes 2 INIT These buttons reset the channel assignment to the default setting 8 Surround LR to Stereo When this check box is on the left and right front signals of the surround channels are out put from the STEREO L amp R connectors 7 To change the assignment move the cursor to the desired Bus parameter rotate the Parameter wheel to select a channel then press ENTER The channels are swapped between the selected Bus and the Bus to which the channel assigned to the selected Bus was assigned previously Tip Pressing the DISPLAY ACCESS SETUP button repeatedly also displays the Surr Bus page Available Bus Outs vary depending on the Surround mode For example in 3 1 Surroun
167. the Stereo Bus CHI 16_RC To route Input Channel signals to the connected digital MTR via Buses 1 8 use the 1 8 buttons to specify a Bus Out as the destination for each of the Input Channels to which the musical instruments and microphone are con nected u In this example Input Channels 1 4 are assigned to Buses 1 and 2 and Input Channels 5 8 are assigned to Buses 3 and 4 aa 55 3a 98 E 56 Ge Ble Sie Qe Qe a 60 00 Ao Ao IT ao da aa B EONS fi FF 4 12 14 12 19 En Press the PAN ROUTING button repeatedly to display the Pan Route Pan page This page enables you to set the panpots for signals routed from the Input Channels to the Stereo Bus and for signals routed from the Input Channels to the odd even buses Move the cursor to the PAN parameter controls for the Input Channels that are assigned to the odd even buses then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to set the pan CHI Sa en D 1 2 3 4 5 6 D D e 3 I carr ante L31 RID PAN parameter 12 13 14 15 16 control You can also use the SEL buttons to select Input Channels and the SELECTED CHAN NEL PAN control to adjust the pan setting To route Input Channel signals to Direct Outs press the DISPLAY ACCES
168. the attack created by the beater Bass Drum 2 Snare Drum 1 Creates a peak around 80 Hz producing a tight stiff sound Emphasizes snappy and rimshot sounds Snare Drum 2 Emphasizes various ranges for that classic rock snare drum sound Tom tom 1 Emphasizes the attack of tom toms and creates a long leathery decay Cymbal Emphasizes the attack of crash cymbals extending the sparkling decay High Hat Use on a tight high hat emphasizing the mid to high range Percussion Emphasizes attack and adds clarity to the high range of instruments such as shakers cabasas and congas E Bass 1 Produces a tight electric bass sound by cutting very low frequencies E Bass 2 Unlike preset 9 this preset emphasizes the low range of an electric bass Syn Bass 1 Use on a synth bass with emphasized low range Syn Bass 2 Emphasizes the attack that is peculiar to synth bass Piano 1 Makes pianos sound brighter Piano 2 Used in conjunction with a compressor this preset emphasizes the attack and low range of pianos E G Clean Use for line level recording of an electric or semi acoustic guitar to get a slightly harder sound E G Crunch 1 Adjusts the tonal quality of a slightly distorted guitar sound E G Crunch 2 A variation on preset 16 E G Dist 1 Makes a heavily distorted guitar sound clearer E G Dist 2 A variation on preset 18 A
169. the clock signal the unit will automatically switch to an internal clock INT 44 1k INT 48k INT 88 2k INT 96k that is closest to the interrupted clock 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Input and Output Patching 43 Input and Output Patching The 01V96 is designed to enable you to patch assign signals to Inputs and Outputs This section explains how to view the signals patched to Inputs and Outputs and change the assignment Tip Ifthe data from a connected instrument fails to be input or ifyou are unable to monitor the signal at the desired output check the I O patching as explained below Patching Input Channels By default the Input Channels are patched as follows INPUT connectors 1 16 Input Channels 1 16 ADAT IN channels 1 8 Input Channels 17 24 Slot channels 1 8 Input Channels 25 32 Outputs 1 2 of Internal Effects Processor 1 4 ST IN Channels 1 4 Follow the steps below to view or change the patching 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the following page appears PATCH Initial Data CHi CHI 00 INPUT PATCH INPUT RD IN 1 t Inputs and Slot channels that are currently assigned to Input Channels are shown in the parameter boxes 1 beneath the channel numbers The parameter indicators are explained below LE No a
170. the connected devices doing so may cause feedback and may damage the speakers Do not expose the device to excessive dust or vibrations or extreme cold or heat such as in direct sunlight near a heater or in a car during the day to prevent he possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components Do not place the device in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over Do not block the vents This device has ventilation holes at the top front rear sides to prevent the internal temperature from rising too high In particular do not place the device on its side or upside down or place it in any poorly ventilated location such as a bookcase or closet Do not use the device in the vicinity of a TV radio stereo equipment mobile phone or other electric devices Otherwise the device TV or radio may generate noise e Before connecting the device to other devices turn off the power for all devices Before turning the power on or off for all devices set all volume levels to minimum Be sure to connect to a properly grounded power source A ground screw terminal is provided on the rear panel for safely grounding the device and preventing electrical shock 5 1 1 2 Handling caution Do not insert your fingers or hand in any gaps or openings on the device vents etc e Avoid inserting or dropping foreign objects paper plastic metal etc into any gaps or openi
171. to select the Aux 2 Make sure that the 01V96 displays the Aux Send page This page enables you to adjust the level of the signals routed from each Input Channel to the Aux selected in Step 1 If the Send page is not displayed repeatedly press the button that you pressed in Step 1 until the Send page appears Initial Dat OU oe Mr VIEWI 16 fAUIEHTT ST e Aux Send rotary controls These controls adjust the Aux Send level of the Input Channels The current numeric levels appear below the rotary controls e PRE POST These buttons enable you to specify the Aux signal source points The PRE buttons send pre fader signals and the POST buttons send post fader signals 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual i ui g 114 Chapter 9 Aux Outs MODE Aux Sends have two operating modes that determine how signals are sent Fixed Aux Send levels are fixed and Variable Aux Send levels are variable GLOBAL The GLOBAL PRE and POST buttons enable you to set all Input Channels for the selected Aux to pre fader or post fader simultaneously PRE POINT The PRE POINT PRE ON and POST ON buttons enable you to set the pre fader channels to pre on before the ON button or post on after the ON button Note In Fixed mode Aux Send ON OFF buttons appear instead of the Aux Send rotary con trols PRE POST buttons GLOBAL PRE POST buttons and PRE POINT PRE ON POST ON These ON OFF buttons turn on or off ea
172. to their new positions when a Scene is recalled This is called Fade Time and it can be set for each channel in the range of 00 0 through 30 0 seconds in 0 1 second steps You can set the Fade Time for each Scene individually or for all Scenes globally Fading Input Channels To set the Fade Time for Input Channels 1 32 and ST IN Channels 1 4 press the DISPLAY ACCESS SCENE button repeatedly until the Scene In Fade page appears Move the cur sor to the desired channel parameter box then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to modify the Fade Time setting 5111 STIZ STIS STI4 SCENE Initial Ung CH1 CH1 00 Epi mu 000000 Global Fade Time 0 1 2 3 4i 5 6 7 i BB ns 00 0 0 88 8 100 0 00 0 00 0 P 11 i 44 i 15 16 INPUT 00 0 88 8 9046 8i 88 0 09 0 00 0 90 0 sec 17 MER aa og T 88 8 i i 00 0 60 0 09 0 9 25 ze 27 3 32 88 8 88 0 G0 100 0 00 0 i 00 0 2 i ST IN 1 i 40 0 00 0 SCENE 3 OUT FADE fi RCL SAFE 2913 1 Global Fade Time When this check box is checked a Scene is recalled using the currently specified Fade Time The Fade Time setting stored in the recalled Scene is temporarily ignored This check box setting works in unison with the Out Fade page 2 ALL INPUT CLEAR This button resets all channel Fade Times on the page to 00 0 second 3
173. used STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0000nnnn On n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump COUNT HIGH ch data count ch 128 cl COUNT LOW cl 01001100 4c U 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000011 43 00111001 39 9 00110011 33 3 DATA NAME 01001100 4C U 00000000 00 Obbbbbbb bb b 0 3 bank no 1 4 BLOCK INFO Ottttttt tt total block number minimum number is 0 Obbbbbbb bb current block number 0 total block number DATA Oddddddd ds User define layer data of block bb Oddddddd de CHECK SUM ee ee Invert L de 1 amp 0x7F EOX 11110111 rF7 End of exclusive 2 8 2 6 User Defined MIDI Remote bulk dump request format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump 01001100 4C U 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000011 43 C 00111001 39 9 00110011 33 3 DATA NAME 01001100 ac 1 00000000 00 Obbbbbbb bb b 0 3 bank no 1 4 EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 2 8 2 7 User Defined Keys bulk dump format The second and third bytes of the DATA NA
174. you to control the level of all grouped channels using the Group Master level while maintaining the relative level balance between channels Mute group Input Channel or Output Channel ON buttons can be grouped There are eight Input Channel mute groups and four Output Channel mute groups When channel ON buttons are grouped pressing any one of them turns the ON buttons for all the grouped channels on or off A mute group can include On channels and Off channels at the same time which turn off or on respectively when you press any one of the grouped ON buttons Also the 01V96 features a Mute Group Master function that enables you to mute grouped channels using the Master Mute buttons EQ Link Input or Output Channel EQ parameters can be linked There are four EQ links for Input Channels and Output Channels respectively All channels in an EQ link share the same EQ parameter settings When you change an EQ parameter value for one of the linked channels the change is applied to all other linked channels Compressor Link Input or Output Channel compressor parameters can be linked There are four compressor links for Input Channels and Output Channels respectively All channels in a compressor link share the same compressor parameter settings When you change a compressor parameter value for one of the linked channels the change is applied to all other linked channels Tip Compressor Link is not available for the ST IN Channe
175. 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed AM DEPTH 0 100 Amplitude modulation depth PM DEPTH 0 100 Pitch modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform LSH F 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G 12 0 to 12 0 dB Low shelving filter gain EQF 100 Hz 8 00 kHz EQ peaking type frequency EQ G 12 0 to 12 0 dB EQ peaking type gain EQQ 10 0 0 10 EQ peaking type bandwidth HSH F 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G 12 0 to 12 0 dB High shelving filter gain SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off wove ee 044 4 4 8 m 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Two input two output 16 stage phaser Parameter Range Description FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth Feedback gain plus values for 99 to 99 normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feed back OFFSET 0 100 Lowest phase shifted frequency offset PHASE ee Left and right modulation phase egrees balance STAGE s d 8 10 12 Number of phase shift stages LSH 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G 12 0 to 12 0 dB Low shelving filter gain HSH 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSHG 12 0 to 12 0 dB High shelving filter gain SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Used in conjunction with 1 NOTE TEMPO to determine
176. 0 kHz 12 5 kHz 1 4 4 5 2 2 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 0 5 dB 0 0dB 3 0 dB 4 5 dB 132Hz 1 00 kHz 3 15 kHz 5 00 kHz 1 2 4 5 0 11 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 1 5 8 5dB 2 5dB 4 0 dB 180 Hz 335 Hz 2 36 kHz 4 00 kHz 10 0 7 0 1 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 2 0 dB 7 5dB 2 0dB 1 0 dB 212Hz 670 Hz 4 50 kHz 6 30 kHz 1 4 10 1 2 0 28 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 2 0 dB 0 0 dB 0 0dB 3 0 dB 106Hz 425Hz 1 06 kHz 13 2 kHz 8 0 9 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 4 0dB 2 5dB 1 0 dB 0 5 dB 95 Hz 425 Hz 2 80 kHz 7 50 kHz 0 5 1 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 4 5 dB 0 0dB 2 0 dB 0 0 dB 100Hz 400Hz 2 80 kHz 17 0 kHz 4 5 0 56 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 7 5 dB 4 5 dB 2 5 dB 0 0 dB 35 5Hz 112Hz 2 00 kHz 4 00 kHz 5 4 5 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 3 0 0 0dB 2 5 dB 0 5 dB 112Hz 112Hz 2 24 kHz 4 00 kHz 0 1 5 6 3 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 3 5 dB 48 5 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 85 Hz 950 Hz 4 00 kHz 12 5 kHz 0 1 8 4 5 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 2 5 dB 0 0dB 1 5 dB 0 0 dB 125 Hz 180Hz 1 12 kHz 12 5 kHz 1 6 8 2 2 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 6 0 dB 0 0dB 2 0 dB 4 0 dB 95 Hz 950 Hz 3 15 kHz 7 50 kHz 8 0 9
177. 0 response only 2 8 3 17 Parameter request Function call link Reception This is received if Parameter change RX is ON and the Rx CH matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS This is echoed if Parameter change ECHO is ON When this is received a Parameter Change message will be transmitted on the Rx CH Refer to the above table for the Functions and Numbers STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0011nnnn n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID 01111111 7F Universal ADDRESS 00010100 14 Function call 0010ffff 2f link Ommmmmmm mh number High Ommmmmmm ml number Low EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 2 8 3 18 Parameter change Function call pair copy Reception This is received if Parameter change RX is ON and the Rx CH matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS This is echoed if Parameter change ECHO is ON When this is received pairing will be enabled disabled for the specified channel STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 3E MODELID digital mixer MODEL ID 01111111 7F Universal ADDRESS 00010001 11 Function call Pair O000ffff Of function 05555555 sh Source channel H 05555555 sl Source channel L DATA Oddddddd dh D
178. 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n20 15 Device number MIDI Channel FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump 01001100 4c U 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 00100000 20 00 000 38 01000011 43 00 001 39 9 00110011 33 3 DATA NAME 01010001 51 Q Ommmmmmm mh 0 199 EQ Library no 1 200 Ommmmmmm ml 256 Channel current data EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 2 8 2 17 Compressor library bulk dump format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number O Library no 1 127 Library no 128 256 CH 1 287 CH32 384 BUS1 391 BUS8 512 AUX1 519 AUX8 768 STE REO 8192 UNDO 256 and following are data for the corresponding channel of the edit buffer For reception by the 01V96 only the user area is valid 36 127 256 STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0000nnnn On n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump COUNT HIGH ch data count ch 128 cl COUNT LOW cL 01001100 4C 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000011 43 C 00111001 39 9 00110011 33 3 DATA NAME 01011001 59 Y Ommmmmmm mh 0 127 COMP Library no 1 128 Ommmmmmm ml 256 Channel current data BLOCK INFO Ottttttt tt total block number minimum number is 0 Obbbbbbb bb current block number 0
179. 1 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000011 43 C 00111001 39 9 00110011 33 3 01000111 47 Ommmmmmm mh 0 127 Library no 1 128 Ommmmmmm ml 256 351 Channel current data DATA NAME BLOCK INFO Ottttttt tt total block number minimum number is 0 Obbbbbbb bb current block number 0 total block number DATA Oddddddd ds GATE Library data of block bb Oddddddd de CHECK SUM Oeeeeeee ee ee Invert L 4 de 1 amp Ox7F EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 2 8 2 20 Gate library bulk dump request format The second and third bytes ofthe DATA NAME indicate the bank number See above STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump 01001100 4c 1 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000011 43 00111001 39 9 00110011 33 3 DATA NAME 01000111 47 G Ommmmmmm mh 0 127 Library no 1 128 Ommmmmmm ml 256 351 Channel current data EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive MIDI Data Format 31 1 2 8 2 21 Effect library bulk dump format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number O Library no 1 127 Library no 128 256 EFFECT 1 259 EFFECT4 8192 UN DO 256 259 are the data for the corresponding area of the edit buffer For reception by the 01V96
180. 1 DATA 00100110 26 LSB of data entry Ovvvvvvv vv LSB of parameter data 1 The second and subsequent STATUS need not be added during transmission Reception must be implemented so that reception oc curs whether or not STATUS is present 2 4 PROGRAM CHANGE Cn Reception If Program Change ECHO is ON these messages are echoed from MIDI OUT If Program Change RX is ON and the Rx CH matches these messages will be received However if OMNI is ON they will be received regardless of the channel When a message is received a Scene Memory will be recalled according to the settings of the Program Change Table Transmission If Program Change TX is ON this message is transmitted according to the set tings of the Program Change Table on the Tx CH channel when a scene memory is recalled If the recalled scene has been assigned to more than one program number the lowest numbered program number will be transmitted Transmission to Studio Manager using Program Change messages will not be performed since there is no guarantee that the contents of the tables will match Parameter Changes will always be used STATUS 1100nnnn Cn Program change DATA Onnnnnnn nn Program number 0 127 2 5 TIMING CLOCK F8 Reception It is used to control effects This message is transmitted 24 times per quarter note STATUS 11111000 F8 Timing clock 2 6 ACTIVE SENSING FE Reception Once this message has been received the failur
181. 1 2 Hz 20 0 kHz 1 12 oct step 18 dB 18 dB G 0 1 dB step 3 0 1 dB step HPF on off LPF on off 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual gt 2 2 x 284 Appendix B Specifications Gate Parameters Threshold 54 dB O dB 0 1 dB step Range 70 0 dB 1 dB step Attack 0 ms 120 ms 1 ms step 0 02 ms 1 96 s 216 points 48 kHz 0 02 ms 2 13 s 216 points 9 44 1 kHz Gate Hold 7 0 01 ms 981 ms 216 points 96 kHz 0 01 ms 1 06 s 216 points 88 2 kHz 5 ms 42 3 s 160 points 48 kHz 6 ms 46 0 s 160 points 44 1 kHz Decay 3 ms 21 1 s 160 points 96 kHz 3 ms 23 0 s 160 points 88 2 kHz Threshold 54 0 dB 0 1 dB step Range 70 0 dB 1 dB step Attack 0 ms 120 ms 1 ms step 0 02 ms 1 96 s 216 points 48 kHz 0 02 ms 2 13 s 216 points 9 44 1 kHz Ducking Hold Aaroa eeann a aa 0 01 ms 981 ms 216 points 96 kHz 0 01 ms 1 06 s 216 points 88 2 kHz 5 5 42 3 s 160 points 48 kHz Decay 6 ms 46 0 s 160 points 44 1 kHz 3 ms 21 1 s 160 points 96 kHz 3 ms 23 0 s 160 points 88 2 kHz Comp Parameters Threshold 54 dB O dB 0 1 dB step Ratio x 1 x 1 1 1 1 3 1 5 1 7 2 2 5 3 3 5 4 5 6 8 10 20 16 points Out gain O dB to 18 dB 0 1 dB step Knee Hard 1 2 3 4 5 6 st
182. 127 The 01V96 s Input Channels and Output Channels Stereo Out Bus Out 1 8 Aux Out 1 8 feature independent Insert Ins and Outs Inputs outputs ADAT connector channels slot channels and internal effects processor inputs and outputs can be patched to the Output Channel Insert Ins and Outs In this way you can send the signals to external effects proces sors for processing or insert internal effects Individual Insert Patching You can patch the 01V96 s inputs outputs ADAT connector channels slot channels and effects processor inputs and outputs to the Insert Ins and Outs The same procedure applies to both Input Channels and Output Channels Effects Output Output connector 6 Input connector A Q Q ome Channel 1 Press the SEL button of an Input Channel or Output Channel for Insert patching 2 Pressthe INSERT DELAY button repeatedly until the INS DLY Insert page appears 7 INS DLY Initial Data Sil cy STI2 STI3 STI4 en um im Gau mG DD 9 Hi POST ON FADER FADER Ccompg 5 ON OFF ON OFF OLY 1 16 fA DLviv S2 291 This page contains the following parameters D POSITION This parameter determines the insert position of the Insert patch or compressor The insert position is indicated by highlighted COMP or INSERT buttons 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 3nd3no nduj 12
183. 1V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual function number channel 1 tx rx SCENE RECALL 0x00 0 99 8192 256 tx rx EQ LIB RECALL 0x01 1 200 8192 0 513 tx rx GATE LIB RECALL 0x02 1 128 8192 0 95 tx rx COMP LIB RECALL 0x03 1 128 8192 0 513 tx rx EFF LIB RECALL 0x04 1 128 8192 0 3 tx rx CHANNEL LIB RECALL 0x06 0 128 8192 0 513 tx rx INPATCH LIB RECALL 0x07 0 32 8192 256 tx rx OUTPATCH LIB RECALL 0x08 0 32 8192 256 tx rx SCENE STORE 0x20 1 99 256 16383 tx rx EQ LIB STORE 0x21 41 200 0 513 16383 tx rx GATE LIB STORE 0x22 5 128 0 31 16383 tx rx COMP LIB STORE 0x23 37 128 0 513 16383 tx rx EFF LIB STORE 0x24 xx 2 128 0 3 16383 tx rx CHANNEL LIB STORE 0x26 1 128 0 513 16383 tx rx INPATCH LIB STORE 0x27 1 32 256 16383 tx rx OUTPATCH LIB STORE 0x28 1 32 256 16383 tx rx 1 0 CH1 31 CH32 32 ST IN1L 39 ST IN4R 128 BUS1 135 BUS8 256 AUX1 263 AUX8 512 STEREO Use 256 if the recall destination or store source is a single data item Effect is O Effect 1 3 Effect 4 If the store destination is 16383 Ox3FFF this indicates that the li brary data has been changed by a external cause such as bulk re ception only transmitted by the 01V96 2 Varies with the firmware version 2 8 3 11 Parameter change Function call title Reception When this is received the title of the specified memory library will be changed If this is received from Studio Manager or Cascade Link the operation will be ex
184. 3 8dB ON gno Q H MIDZF MIDZ SH 1 12 308 4 4dB ON 103 8 H MIDS F nios i grips SH 1 58 2 58kHz 3 8dB ON MID4 G H MID4 i MID4 i MID4 SW ge 1 58 5 58kHz 3 Q ON 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual About Plug Ins 163 About Plug Ins If you installed a mini YGDAI card that supports the Effects function into Slot you can use plug in effects in addition to the internal effects processors You can patch Bus signals or channel insert outs to the plug in input The plug in output can be patched to Input Channels or channel insert ins To use the plug in effects press the EFFECT button repeatedly until the Effect P In Edit page appears For details on using plug ins refer to the owner s manual that came with the plug in card Software Version Re Hardware Revision 3 WWW waves As of July 2004 the 01V96 supports the following plug in cards Visit the Yamaha web site http www yamahaproaudio com for the latest information on compatible plug in cards The Y56K card setting is stored in memory in the card when you store scenes and is recalled at the time of scene recall The setting is not stored in a scene memory on the 01V96 There fore the setting does not support the scene memory s Global Paste Sort and Auto Update functions Note The Y56K card supports scenes 1 96 If you store or recall a scene 97 or subsequent scenes the Y56K card setti
185. 32 NO ASSIGN 91 EQ Q LO MID INPUT27 33 EQ GLO MIDL INPUT25 92 EQ Q LO MID INPUT28 34 EQ GLO MIDL INPUT26 93 EQ Q LO MID INPUT29 35 EQ GLO MIDL INPUT27 94 EQ Q LO MID INPUT30 36 EQ GLO MIDL INPUT28 95 EQ QLO MID INPUT31 37 EQ GLO MIDL INPUT29 102 EQ Q LO MID INPUT32 38 EQ GLO MIDL INPUT30 103 EQ QLO MID ST IN1 39 EQ GLO MIDL INPUT31 104 EQ Q LO MID ST IN2 40 EQ GLO MIDL INPUT32 105 EQ Q LO MID ST IN3 41 EQ GLO MIDL ST IN1 106 EQ Q LO MID ST IN4 42 EQ GLO MIDL ST IN2 107 NO ASSIGN 43 EQ GLO MIDL ST IN3 108 NO ASSIGN 44 EQ GLO MIDL ST IN4 109 NO ASSIGN 45 NO ASSIGN 110 NO ASSIGN 46 NO ASSIGN 111 NO ASSIGN 47 NO ASSIGN 112 NO ASSIGN 48 NO ASSIGN 113 NO ASSIGN 49 NO ASSIGN 114 NO ASSIGN 50 NO ASSIGN 115 NO ASSIGN 51 NO ASSIGN 116 NO ASSIGN 52 NO ASSIGN 117 NO ASSIGN 53 NO ASSIGN 118 NO ASSIGN 54 NO ASSIGN 119 NO ASSIGN gt 55 NO ASSIGN 56 NO ASSIGN 2 57 NO ASSIGN 3 58 NO ASSIGN 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 296 Appendix C MIDI High Mid Low 59 NO ASSIGN 60
186. 33 DATA 01001110 4E Ommmmmmm mh m 0 SLOT 1 Ommmmmmm ml EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 2 8 3 PARAMETER CHANGE 2 8 3 1 Basic behavior Reception If Parameter change ECHO is ON these messages are echoed If Parameter change RX is ON and the Rx CH matches the Device Number included in the SUB STATUS these messages are received A specific parameter is controlled when a Parameter Change is received When a Parameter Request is received the current value of the specified parameter will be transmitted as a Parameter Change with the Device Number set to Rx CH MIDI Data Format 313 Transmission If Parameter change TX is ON and you operate a parameter for which Control Change transmission is not enabled a parameter change will be transmitted with Tx CH as the Device Number As a response to a Parameter Request a parameter change will be transmitted with Rx CH as the Device Number 2 8 3 1 1 Parameter change basic format STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001 1n n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID 00001101 OD 01 96 ADDRESS Ottttttt tt Datatype ee Element If ee is 0 ee is expanded to two bytes Oppppppp pp Parameter no cc Channel no DATA Oddddddd dd data EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive Fo
187. 4 Busi BUs VO GIO E Name Inr 4t Auto Cory 3 ID SHORT LONG BUS BUS gt BUS BUS gt BUS6 BUS6 gt BUS6 lt BUSB gt BUSS BUSS gt lt BUSS gt lt BUSS gt BUS4 054 gt BUS4 lt BUS4 gt BUS3 BUS3 2 lt BUS3 gt lt BUS3 gt BUS2 BUS2 gt BUS2 gt BUS1 51 gt 8051 5 AUXS CAUXS gt lt AUXS gt AUX CAUX gt RUX AUXG CAUXG gt lt AUXG gt AUXS CAUXS gt RUXS RUX4 RUX4 gt RUX4 RUX3 CAUXS gt RUX3 ESTROTEECT OUT A sno sng You can specify Short names in the center column 1 and Long full names in the right column 2 When the Name Input Auto Copy check box 3 is on the first four characters of a newly entered Long name are automatically copied to the Short name On the other hand a newly entered Short name is automatically added to the beginning of the Long name You can reset all bus names to their default names by moving the cursor to the INITIALIZE button then pressing ENTER 2 Move the cursor to a name you wish to change then press ENTER The Title Edit window appears which enables you to edit the name 3 Edit the name move the cursor to the OK button then press ENTER The new name is now effective Tip The edited name is stored in the Output Patch library 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 108 Chapter 8 Bus Outs 01V96 Version 2
188. 4000 ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S P A Combo Division Viale Italia 88 20020 Lainate Milano Italy Tel 02 935 771 SPAIN PORTUGAL Yamaha Hazen M sica S A Ctra de la Coruna km 17 200 28230 Las Rozas Madrid Spain Tel 91 639 8888 SWEDEN Yamaha Scandinavia AB J A Wettergrens Gata 1 Box 30053 S 400 43 G teborg Sweden Tel 031 89 34 00 DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 6A DK 2730 Herlev Denmark Tel 44 92 49 00 NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Neringspark 1 N 1345 ster s Norway Tel 67 16 77 70 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstra e 22 34 25462 Rellingen Germany Tel 49 4101 3030 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation Asia Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa cho 10 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 81 53 460 2313 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY CYPRUS Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstra e 22 34 25462 Rellingen Germany Tel 04101 3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LB21 128 Jebel Ali Freezone P O Box 17328 Dubai U A E Tel 971 4 881 5868 ASIA THE PEOPLE S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Music amp Electronics China Co Ltd 25 F United Plaza 1468 Nanjing Road West Jingan Shanghai China Tel 021 6247 2211 INDONESIA PT Yamaha Music Indonesia Distributor PT Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center Jalan Jend Gatot Subroto Kav 4 Jakarta 12930 Indonesia Tel 21 520 2577 KO
189. 5 6 SIGNAL ON LEVEL I2TR IN STIN14 k PAN 8 d BUS to STEREO NE gt 3 AD 15 METER SoLo PAN 4 2TR BIN PERK 220 wj SIGNAL s Deo N m AUX1 8 gt RCA ABAND o ie above INPUT vo AD AD 16 EQ e x 16 EO cod PAN Stereo Configuration hH J L GAIN x 2TR IN 26 4 LFE 2 SOLO TRIM RCA 2 N SOLOL 2 Qa SLOT SLOT 7 sat PRE POST ON AUX order MONITOR 1 o o MONITOR TRIM o o OUTPUT SOLO p4 DA 8 T 22222 2 3 gt gt MONITOR OUT ADAT IN o ADAT 1 8 9 AUX1 8 24 BUT Em dus gh E zi t 4 PHONES 2TR IN DIGITAL 9 gt ZTRD LR A COAXIAL PHONES METER METER OSCILLATOR EFFECT SINE100Hz 8 p SERAIS SINE1kHz LEVEL ON OMNI 1 AUX1 8 4 2 FX1 Return L R 2 3 4 4 kd STEREO 39 1 5 BURST NOISE 83 amp INSERT OUT PATCH for PUSH I cascade AUX1 8 8 T T gt BUS1 BUS OMNI3 OMNI OUT METER METER i DIRECT OUT 1 32 4 EFFECT p BUS8 BUS z dior EU l gt STEREO L BUS INSERT OUT 9 9 amp 5 Return L R CASCADE SELECT TRIM ON e gt STEREO R BUS x INSERTILI td FX2 2 d 4 gt SOLO L BUS 5 d 1 Lr SOLO R BUS E SLOT 16 f SEND 1 gt AUXI BUS 3 7 1 _DITHER SLO SLOT OUT 2 4 e i METER METER c8 BURG BUS ADAT 9 OTHER
190. 5 in Using Fader Groups and Mute Groups on page 150 use the cursor buttons to select the INPUT FADER MASTER check box or the OUTPUT FADER MASTER check box then press ENTER to turn on the Fader Group Master function PAIR GRUP OO tam Initial Data Hm CH28 EDIT 12238 567 e EL M B ES 9 9 D EN E 17 12 19 9 21222324 3723 29 39 31 32 3 4 ENABLE Mi ABB 4 e ee te tee a aa ERN f B 5 c D EB E Le F H EN 2 When the Fader Master check box is checked you can set channel levels of the Fader groups in the Master column When the Master column is selected repeatedly pressing the ENTER button turns the Fader group on and off You can also make these settings in the In Master page or Out Master page as shown below 3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS GROUP button repeatedly until the Group In Master or Group Out Master page appears Gis 04200 Initial Dota CH28 CH28 EDIT 4 Use the cursor buttons to select parameters then use the Parameter wheel INC DEC buttons or ENTER button to set the parameters INPUT OUTPUT FADER MASTER When this check box is checked you can set the master levels for the Fader groups The result ant Channel level equals the corresponding Channel fader level plus the Group Master level 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Using Mute Group Master 153 ALLNOMINAL Th
191. 73 DAW Shortcut EDIT MODE DAW EDIT MODE 115 Track Arming 10 Track Arming 10 174 DAW Shortcut EDIT TOOL DAW EDIT TOOL 116 Track Arming 11 Track Arming 11 175 DAW Shortcut SHIFT ADD DAW SHIFT ADD 117 Track Arming 12 Track Arming 12 176 DAW Shortcut OPTION ALL DAW OPTION ALL 118 Track Arming 13 Track Arming 13 177 DAW Shortcut CTRL CLUCH DAW CTRL CLUCH 119 Track Arming 14 Track Arming 14 178 DAW Shortcut ALT FINE DAW ALT FINE 120 Track Arming 15 Track Arming 15 179 DAW BANK DAW BANK 121 Track Arming 16 Track Arming 16 180 DAW BANK DAW BANK 122 Track Arming 17 Track Arming 17 181 DAW Channel DAW Channel 123 Track Arming 18 Track Arming 18 182 DAW Channel DAW Channel 124 Track Arming 19 Track Arming 19 183 DAW REC RDY X DAW REC RDY X 125 Track Arming 20 Track Arming 20 184 DAW REC RDY ALL DAW REC RDY ALL 126 Track Arming 21 Track Arming 21 185 Studio Manager Window Control SM CTRL Close 127 Track Arming 22 Track Arming 22 Close 128 Track Arming 23 Track Arming 23 186 Ec Manager Window Contr SM CTRL Close All 129 Track Arming 24 Track Arming 24 t Studio Manager Window Control cm 130 Track Arming All Clear Track Arming CLR Selected Channel el Ch 131 DAW REC DAW REC 188 Studio Manager Window Control SM CTRL Library 132 DAW PLAY DAW PLAY Library 133 DAW STOP DAW STOP 189 Window Control SM CTRL Patch 134 DAW FF DAW FF 135 DAW REW DAW REW 190 nn Window Contro
192. 8 Chapter 10 Input amp Output Patching 2 INSERT section e ON OEB This button turns the Insert on or off SHOUT eden This parameter enables you to select outputs ADAT OUT channels slot output channels or internal effects inputs as the Insert Out destination ENG eie s This parameter enables you to select inputs ADAT IN chan nels slot input channels or internal effects outputs as the Insert In source This button turns the compressor on or off This parameter determines the order of Insert patch and com pressor when they are inserted at the same signal path point With the COMP gt INS setting signals pass through the compressor first then the Insert With the INS gt COMP set ting signals pass through the Insert first then the compressor Move the cursor to the OUT parameter box then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to select the desired outputs slot channels or internal effects inputs to be patched to Insert Out The parameter indicators are explained below Parameter values Description No assignment ADAT 1 ADAT 8 ADAT OUT Output Channels 1 8 SL 01 SL 16 Slot Channels 1 16 OMNI1 OMNI4 OMNI OUT connectors 1 4 2TD L 2TD R 2TR OUT DIGITAL L R FX1 1 FX1 2 Inputs 1 amp 2 of Internal Effects Processor 1 FX2 1 FX2 2 Inputs 1 amp 2 of Internal Effects
193. 8 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT24 54 SURROUND FR INPUT22 119 NO ASSIGN 55 SURROUND FR INPUT23 56 SURROUND FR INPUT24 57 NO ASSIGN 58 NO ASSIGN 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Initial Parameter to Control Change Table 305 CHANNEL16 High Mid Low High Mid Low 0 NO ASSIGN 59 NO ASSIGN 1 SURROUND LR INPUT25 60 NO ASSIGN 2 SURROUND LR INPUT26 61 NO ASSIGN 3 SURROUND LR INPUT27 62 NO ASSIGN 4 SURROUND INPUT28 63 NO ASSIGN 5 SURROUND LR INPUT29 64 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT25 6 SURROUND LR INPUT30 65 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT26 7 SURROUND LR INPUT31 66 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT27 8 SURROUND INPUT32 67 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT28 9 SURROUND LR ST INIL 68 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT29 10 SURROUND ST INIR 69 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT30 11 SURROUND LR ST IN2L 70 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT31 12 SURROUND LR ST IN2R 71 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT32 13 SURROUND ST IN3L 72 SURROUND WIDTH ST INIL 14 SURROUND LR ST IN3R 73 SURROUND WIDTH ST INTR 15 SURROUND
194. 8 8 In R 8 8 188 MixR 188 MFTFD 1 mmm 5 Usethe Tab Scroll buttons to display the parameter value you wish to change Most plug ins feature five or more parameters To edit the fifth or subsequent parameters use the Tab Scroll buttons to display the desired parameters and their values in the INSERT ASSIGN EDIT section The current page number and the plug in name appear for a moment immediately after you press the Tab Scroll buttons 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 0430u0 204 Chapter 17 Remote Control 6 Move the cursor to a parameter control then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the ENTER button to adjust the value One or two parameters are assigned to a single parameter control To turn the parameter setting on or off press ENTER To modify the parameter variable rotate the Parameter wheel INSERT ASSIGN EDIT Pe SYPASS PARAM InvL On InvR Off In L 14 9 In 8 8 188 MixR 188 of 9 ENTER ENTER ENTER a TUAHHEI Meren 0 mew 7 When you finish adjusting the parameters move the cursor to the INSERT PARAM button then press ENTER to switch it to INSERT Bypassing Plug ins You can bypass plug ins assigned to Pro Tools channels Before bypassing plug ins you must press the corresponding SEL button to select a chan nel to which the plug ins have been assigned then press the F2 button to select Insert
195. 8 ports If you connect a computer to the USB port you must install the appropriate driver software on the computer See the Studio Manager Installation Guide for more information on install ing drivers lt 9 Note Ifthe computer is turned but the USB MIDI application has not been launched 01V96 performance may be slow In this case cancel the assignment of the USB port as the MIDI message transmission port 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 216 Chapter 18 MIDI e SLOT If an optional MY8 mLAN I O card is installed in the slot MIDI data transfer to and from an external MIDI device is available via the MY8 mLAN card MIDI Port Setup Selecting a Port for MIDI Message Transfer To configure MIDI ports for MIDI message transfer press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the DIO Setup MIDI Host page appears This page enables you to set MIDI message input and output DIO SETUP Initial Data BI LL 5112 5113 STI4 cien aoe MIDI TO HOST SETUP Rx PORT StudioManager Tx PORT DAW REMOTE ProTools CASCADE LINK E REQUEST Ei MONITOR REMOTE MACHINE 271g E MJA MIDI HOST The following parameters are available on this page D GENERAL section This section enables you to select ports that transmit and receive MIDI messages such as Program Changes and Control Changes
196. 83 EQ F HIGH INPUT20 25 NO ASSIGN 84 EQ F HIGH INPUT21 26 NO ASSIGN 85 EQ F HIGH INPUT22 27 NO ASSIGN 86 EQ F HIGH INPUT23 28 NO ASSIGN 87 EQ F HIGH INPUT24 29 NO ASSIGN 88 NO ASSIGN 30 NO ASSIGN 89 EQ Q HIGH INPUT1 31 NO ASSIGN 90 EQ Q HIGH INPUT2 32 NO ASSIGN 91 EQ Q HIGH INPUT3 33 EQ GHIGHL INPUT1 92 EQ Q HIGH INPUT4 34 EQ G HIGH L INPUT2 93 EQ Q HIGH INPUTS 35 EQ G HIGH L INPUT3 94 EQ Q HIGH INPUT6 36 EQ G HIGH L INPUT4 95 EQ Q HIGH 37 GHIGHL INPUTS 102 EQ Q HIGH INPUT8 38 EQ G HIGH L INPUT6 103 EQ Q HIGH INPUT9 39 EQ G HIGH L 104 Q HIGH INPUT10 40 EQ G HIGH L INPUT8 105 EQ Q HIGH INPUT11 41 EQ G HIGH L INPUT9 106 EQ Q HIGH INPUT12 42 EQ G HIGH L INPUT10 107 EQ Q HIGH INPUT13 43 EQ G HIGH L INPUT11 108 EQ Q HIGH INPUT14 44 EQ G HIGH L INPUT12 109 EQ Q HIGH INPUT15 45 EQ G HIGH L INPUT13 110 EQ Q HIGH INPUT16 46 EQ GHIGHL INPUT14 111 EQ Q HIGH INPUT17 47 EQ G HIGH L INPUT15 112 EQ Q HIGH INPUT18 48 EQ GHIGHL INPUT16 113 EQ Q HIGH INPUT19 49 EQ G HIGH L INPUT17 114 EQ Q HIGH INPUT20 50 EQ G HIGH L INPUT18 115 EQ Q HIGH INPUT21 51 EQ G HIGH L INPUT19 116 EQ Q HIGH INPUT22 52 EQ G HIGH L INPUT20 117 EQ Q HIGH INPUT23 53 EQ G HIGH L INPUT21 118 EQ Q HIGH INPUT24 54 EQ G HIGH L INPUT22 119 NO ASSIGN 55 EQ G HIGH L INPUT23 56 EQ G HIGH L INPUT24 57 NO ASSIGN 58 NO ASSIGN
197. 9 Parameter changes Parameter lists 247 Parameter wheel 22 Patch 2TR Out page 2125 Patch Cascade In page 240 Patch Direct Out page 125 Patch Effect page 66 158 Patch IN LIB page 178 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 322 Index Patch IN Name page 94 Q Setting the higher sampling rates Patch In Name page 229 l 75 Patch In Patch page 43 122 n pou aie Teg y SNG EAE A 76 Patch Insert In page 129 Pape ne SRG SECHONS ai 72 Patch Out LIB page 179 R Scene In Fade page 170 Patch Out Name page 107 230 Scene Out Fade page 171 Patch Out Patch page 44 124 239 Rear Panel Scene Safe page 172 PATCH button ss 18 122 PHANTOM 48V 23 Scene Scene page un 168 Patch Confirmation preference 231 Rear panel sse 23 Scene Sort page ss 173 Patching 121 AD output section 23 SCENE button anne 18 2TR digital outputs 125 Digital I O section 24 Scene MEM Auto Update preference OUT connector 124
198. 96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 10 Calibrating the Faders 245 When the calibration operation is complete the 01V96 displays a window in which you can select faders for position adjustment If you selected 2 FADER MOVE ONLY in Step 3 the fader adjustment is complete The 01V96 starts in normal mode 81096 FADER CALIBRATION Select FADER by Usins SEL Keys and Press ENTER to Start Calibration Use the channel SEL buttons to select faders for which you wish to calibrate the position then press ENTER The selected channel SEL button indicators flash When you press ENTER they light up steadily At the beginning all SEL buttons are flashing However if an error occurs and the unit is trying calibration again only the SEL button indicator of a problematic fader flashes Follow the instruction in the window to set the position of the selected faders to then press ENTER Set the position of the selected faders to the level instructed in the window then press ENTER Set faders 1 16 to 15 and Stereo fader to 30 Set the position of the selected faders to the level instructed in the window then press ENTER Set faders 1 16 to 0 and Stereo fader to any position Set the position of the selected faders to the level instructed in the window then press ENTER Set faders 1 16 to 10 and Stereo fader to 0 If there is no problem with the calibration result this concludes the cali
199. 96 will transmit corresponding Control Changes Note Before controlling parameters using Control Changes make sure that both Tx and Rx ON OFF buttons in the PARAMETER CHANGE row on the MIDI Setup page are turned off 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Controlling Parameters by Using Parameter Changes 225 Controlling Parameters by Using Parameter Changes You can control 01V96 parameters in real time by using Parameter Change messages that are System Exclusive messages instead of using MIDI Control Changes See MIDI Data Format at the end of this Manual for detailed information on available Parameter Changes 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the DIO Setup MIDI Host page appears then specify ports for transmission and reception of MIDI messages see page 216 2 Make connections using the ports selected in Step 1 so that the 01V96 can transmit and receive MIDI messages to and from the external device 3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS MIDI button then press the F1 button to dis play the MIDI Setup page then turn off the Tx and Rx ON OFF buttons in the PARAMETER CHANGE row The 01V96 will now set certain parameter values when it receives corresponding Parameter Changes Also when you adjust certain parameters on the 01V96 it transmits correspond ing Parameter Changes Note Before controlling parameters using Parameter Changes make sure that both Tx and Rx
200. AD14 AD IN 14 InsertOut CH6 SL 06 Slot CH6 IN AD15 AD IN 15 InsertOut CH7 SL 07 Slot CH7 IN AD16 AD IN 16 InsertOut CH8 SL 08 Slot CH8 IN ADAT1 ADAT1 IN ADAT1 IN InsertOut CH9 SL 09 Slot CH9 IN ADAT2 ADAT2 IN ADAT2 IN InsertOut CH10 SL 10 Slot CH10 IN ADAT3 ADAT3 IN ADAT3 IN InsertOut CH11 SL 11 Slot CH11 IN ADAT4 IN ADAT4 IN InsertOut CH12 SL 12 Slot CH12 IN 5 ADATS IN 5 InsertOut CH13 SL 13 Slot CH13 IN ADAT6 ADAT6 IN ADAT6 IN InsertOut CH14 SL 14 Slot CH14 IN ADAT7 ADAT7 IN ADAT7 IN InsertOut CH15 SL 15 Slot CH15 IN ADAT8 ADATS IN IN InsertOut CH16 SL 16 Slot CH16 IN SL 01 Slot CH1 IN Slot CH1 IN InsertOut CH17 AD1 AD IN 1 SL 02 Slot CH2 IN Slot CH2 IN InsertOut CH18 AD2 AD IN 2 SL 03 Slot CH3 IN Slot CH3 IN InsertOut CH19 ADIN 3 51 04 Slot CH4 IN Slot CH4 IN InsertOut CH20 AD4 AD IN 4 SL 05 Slot CH5 IN SL 05 Slot CH5 IN INS CH21 InsertOut CH21 ADS AD IN 5 SL 06 Slot CH6 IN SL 06 Slot CH6 IN INS CH22 InsertOut CH22 6 AD IN 6 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 250 Appendix A Parameter Lists INPUT INSERT IN EFFECT IN CASCADE Port ID Description Port ID Description Port ID Description Port ID Description SL 07 Slot CH7 IN Slot CH7 IN InsertOut CH23 AD7 AD IN 7 SL 08 Slot CH8 IN Slot CH8 IN InsertOut CH24 AD8 AD IN 8 SL 09 Slot CH9 IN Slot CH9 IN InsertOut CH25 9 AD IN 9 SL 10 Slot CH10 IN Slot CH10
201. ADAT OUT 4 EFFECT 2 s _ EX3 SEND 1 2 for cascade en on li STEREO BUS 4 4 gARDIGTAL 2 OTER Q 1278 OUT DIGITAL Insert PARA oh HH 4 BUS1 8 BUS 8 COAXIAL SEND 2 2 AUX1 8 BUS SOLO BUS L METER METER 2 os 4 0dBv 2 OUT AUX1 8 E 5 iii FX4 Return L RI 2 2 7 STEREOL STEREOL DA L FX4 INSERT o STEREO OUT SEND STEREOR STEREOR ox DA R mo SURROUND L When 96kHz FX3 4 cannot be used SURROUND R 01V96 Level Diagram Analog Digital dBu dBFS Bit 24 0 0 20 1 4 0 pel 10 27 4 1 2 37 20 4 1 30 5 10 6 40 20 50 85 30 9 60 104 22 s 77 80 4 60 14 90 15 70 16 100 80 17 aio 197 90 19 120 20 100 21 _ 130 110 140 4 120 24 150 25 130 26 160 140 aa 170 28 150 29 180 30 160 31 190 170 180 34 210 35 190 36 DdBu 0 775Vrms Analog Digital Digital INPUT Analog PATCH DA BUS MASTER MASTER Adder ON LEVEL OUTPUT PAD GAIN INSERT AD PHASE GATE INSERT ATT EQ INSERT COMP DELAY ON LEVEL INSERT PAN INSERT ATT EQ INSERT COMP INSERT BAL DELAY PATCH Max Output CASCADE IN 24dBu CASCADE OUT Max Input 24dBu uil EE T Eus Du MEN C Dig
202. ASSIGN 86 EQ HPF ON INPUT23 28 NO ASSIGN 87 EQ HPF ON INPUT24 29 NO ASSIGN 88 NO ASSIGN 30 NO ASSIGN 89 EQ LPF ON INPUT1 31 NO ASSIGN 90 EQ LPF ON INPUT2 32 NO ASSIGN 91 EQ LPF ON INPUT3 33 EQ ATTL INPUT1 92 EQ LPF ON INPUT4 34 EQ INPUT2 93 EQ LPFON INPUTS 35 EQ INPUT3 94 EQ LPFON INPUT6 36 EQ ATTL INPUT4 95 EQ LPF ON 37 ATTL INPUTS 102 EQ LPF ON INPUT8 38 EQ INPUT6 103 EQ LPFON INPUT9 39 EQ ATTL 104 LPF INPUT10 40 EQ INPUT8 105 EQ LPF ON INPUT11 41 EQ INPUT9 106 EQ LPF ON INPUT12 42 EQ INPUT10 107 LPF INPUT13 43 EQ ATTL INPUT11 108 EQ LPFON INPUT14 44 EQ INPUT12 109 EQ LPF ON INPUT15 45 EQ INPUT13 110 LPF ON INPUT16 46 EQ ATTL INPUT14 111 EQ LPFON INPUT17 47 EQ INPUT15 112 EQ LPFON INPUT18 48 EQ ATTL INPUT16 113 EQ LPFON INPUT19 49 EQ INPUT17 114 EQ LPFON INPUT2O 50 EQ ATTL INPUT18 115 EQ LPFON INPUT21 51 EQ ATTL INPUT19 116 EQ LPFON INPUT22 52 EQ ATTL INPUT20 117 EQ LPF ON INPUT23 53 EQ ATTL INPUT21 118 EQ LPFON INPUT24 54 EQ ATTL INPUT22 119 NO ASSIGN 55 EQ ATTL INPUT23 56 EQ ATTL INPUT24 57 NO ASSIGN 58 NO ASSIGN 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Initial Parameter to Control Change Table 301
203. ASTER BUS7 20 FADERH MASTER BUS8 21 FADERH MASTER AUX1 22 FADERH MASTER AUX2 23 FADERH MASTER AUX3 24 FADERH MASTER AUX4 25 FADER H MASTER AUXS 26 FADERH MASTER AUX6 27 FADERH MASTER AUX7 28 FADERH MASTER AUX8 29 NO ASSIGN 30 ON MASTER STEREO 31 NO ASSIGN 32 NO ASSIGN 33 FADERL CHANNEL INPUT25 34 FADERL CHANNEL INPUT26 35 FADERL CHANNEL INPUT27 36 FADERL CHANNEL INPUT28 37 FADERL CHANNEL INPUT29 38 FADERL CHANNEL INPUT30 39 FADERL CHANNEL INPUT31 40 FADERL CHANNEL INPUT32 41 FADERL CHANNEL ST IN1 42 FADERL CHANNEL ST IN2 43 FADERL CHANNEL ST IN3 44 FADERL CHANNEL ST IN4 45 FADER L MASTER BUS1 46 FADERL MASTER BUS2 47 FADERL MASTER BUS3 48 FADERL MASTER BUS4 49 FADERL MASTER BUS5 50 FADER L MASTER BUS6 51 FADER L MASTER BUS7 52 FADER L MASTER BUS8 53 FADER L MASTER AUX1 54 FADERL MASTER AUX2 55 FADERL MASTER AUX3 56 FADER L MASTER AUX4 57 FADERL MASTER AUX5 58 FADER L MASTER AUX6 Initial Parameter to Control Change Table 291 High Mid Low 59 FADER L MASTER AUX7 60 FADER L MASTER AUX8 61 NO ASSIGN 62 BALANCE MASTER STEREO 63 NO ASSIGN 64 ON CHANNEL INPUT25 65 ON CHANNEL INPUT26 66 ON CHANNEL INP
204. AT IN connector 2TR IN DIGITAL connec tors and Slot I O card are patched to Input Channels for use Patch example Input Patching INPUT connector 1 Input Channel 1 INPUT connector 2 Input Channel 2 INPUT connector 3 Input Channel 3 INPUT connector 4 Input Channel 4 INPUT connector 5 Input Channel 5 INPUT connector 6 Input Channel 6 INPUT connector 7 Input Channel 7 INPUT connector 8 Input Channel 8 I o 5 go By default the Input Channels are patched as follows E Input Channels Input connectors and Slot channels 5 1 16 INPUT connectors 1 16 a 17 24 ADAT IN Input Channels 1 8 25 32 Slot Channels 1 8 ST IN Channels 1 4 Internal Effects Processor 1 4 Outputs 1 2 You can change these patches if you desire 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 122 Chapter 10 Input amp Output Patching Input Patching Follow the steps below to change the Input Patch 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch In Patch page appears INPUT PATCH 5 1L 1R zL 2 SL SR 4L IN PATCH fi INPUT INS fi EFFECT ACASCADE IN gt 3 Inputs IN channels and slot channels that are currently assigned to Input Channels are shown in the parameter boxes 1 below the channel numbers The parameter indica tors are explained below
205. Appendix A Parameter Lists User Defined Remote Layer Initial Bank Settings Bank 1 GM Vol amp Pan Name Data Format Controller Short Long 112131415 16 7 9 101 ON END 2 mE Rd fete fis RM01 01 GM CHO1 VOL amp PAN FADER lo enn RMO2 GM CH02 VOL amp PAN _ _ END RMO3 GM CH03 VOL amp PAN j _f ff ff END RM04 GM CH04 VOL amp PAN S END RMOS GM CH05 VOL amp PAN END RM06 GM CH06 VOL amp PAN END RM07 GM CH07 VOL amp PAN END RMO8 GM CH08 VOL amp PAN END 09 09 VOL amp PAN END RM10 GM CH10 VOL amp PAN _ _ END RM11 GM CH11 VOL amp PAN _ EEE EEE EEE EN _ FAD END I RM12 GM CH12 VOL amp PAN _ EEE END RM13 GM CH13 VOL amp PAN _ 1 1 END I I I ON END
206. CH13 CH13 CH14 CH14 CH14 CH14 CH15 CH15 CH15 CH15 CH16 CH16 CH16 CH16 CH17 CH17 CH17 CH17 CH18 CH18 CH18 CH18 CH19 CH19 CH19 CH19 CH20 CH20 CH20 CH20 CH21 CH21 CH21 CH21 CH22 CH22 CH22 CH22 CH23 CH23 CH23 CH23 CH24 CH24 CH24 CH24 CH25 CH25 CH25 CH25 CH26 CH26 CH26 CH26 CH27 CH27 CH27 CH27 CH28 CH28 CH28 CH28 CH29 CH29 CH29 CH29 CH30 CH30 CH30 CH30 CH31 CH31 CH31 CH31 CH32 CH32 CH32 CH32 ST INT STI STH STEREO IN1 ST IN2 STI2 STI2 STEREO IN2 ST IN3 STI3 STI3 STEREO IN3 ST INA STI4 STI4 STEREO IN4 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Output Patch Parameters 253 Output Patch Parameters SLOT ADAT OMNI INSERT IN DIRECT OUT 2TR OUT Digital Source Description Source Description Source Description Source Description NONE NONE NONE 051 051 ADAT1 OUT BUS1 BUS2 BUS2 ADAT2 OUT BUS2 BUS3 BUS3 ADAT3 OUT BUS3 BUS4 BUS4 ADAT4 OUT BUS4 BUS5 BUS5 5 OUT BUS5 BUS6 BUS6 ADAT6 OUT BUS6 BUS7 BUS7 ADAT7 OUT BUS7 BUS8 BUS8 ADAT8 OUT BUS8 AUX1 AUX1 Slot CH1 IN AUX2 AUX2 AD IN 10 Slot CH2 IN AUX3 AUX3 ADIN 11 Slot CH3 IN AUX4 AUX4 AD IN 12 Slot CH4 IN AUXS AUXS AD IN 13 Slot CH5 IN AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 AUX4 AUX5 AUX6 AUX6 AD IN 14 Slot CH6 IN AUX6 AUX7 AUX7 AD IN 15 Slot CH7 IN AUX7 AUX8 AUX8 AD IN 16 Slot CH8 IN AUX8 STL STEREO L ADAT1 IN Slot CH9 IN STEREO L STR STEREO ADAT2 IN Slot CH10 IN STEREO R NS CH1 Ins
207. Channel E channel 10 1 Channel Short Name 2 channe Cors Parameter ALL FADER SURR AUX om 9 bisetas Brishtness EH WORD CLOCKfA FORMAT PREFER A PREFERZ This page contains the following parameters D Channel ID Channel This parameter selects a style for the displayed channel If the Channel ID check box is selected the Channel ID appears e g CH16 AUX1 If the Channel Short Name check box is on the Channel Short name appears see page 229 2 Channel Copy Parameter This parameter selects the channel parameters to be copied when you assign the Chan nel Copy function to one of the User Defined buttons see page 235 You can select multiple options WALL This button selects allparameters that can be copied When you turn on this button all other options are cancelled Copies the fader values v NON asiento Copies the on off status of the ON buttons PAN ooo Copies the pan settings 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Creating a Custom Layer by Combining Channels User Assignable Layer 3 Display Brightness Copies the surround pan settings Copies the Aux Send levels 233 Copies the on off status of the Channel to Aux signals Copies the EQ parameter values This parameter sets the brightness of the LED indicators in the range of 1 through 4 Creating a Custom Layer by Combining Channels User Assignabl
208. Channels you want to route to Direct Outs then specify the output connectors or channels In this example Input Channel 1 and 2 signals are patched to Slot output channels 1 and 2 PATCH Initial Data 571257135714 CH2 CH2 0 UO oO DIRECT OUT DESTINATION Slot CH2 OUT 4 u DIRECT OUT PRE EG PRE FADER 432 _ ZTR OUT OUT NAME OUT LIB 3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PAN ROUTING button repeatedly until the Pan Route Rout1 16 page appears 4 Move the cursor to the D buttons for Input Channels 1 and 2 then press ENTER Turn off the S buttons and 1 8 buttons The Input Channel 1 and 2 signals are now routed to Slot output channels 1 and 2 then output to Tracks 9 and 10 on the digital MTR Adjusting the Monitoring Level Follow the steps below to place the digital MTR in record ready mode and monitor the sig nals that are sent from Tracks 9 and 10 of the digital MTR back to the 01V96 s Input Chan nels 25 and 26 through the MONITOR OUT connectors and the PHONES jack 1 Arm the connected digital MTR s Tracks 9 and 10 At this time set the monitor mode on the digital MTR accordingly so that you can monitor the input signals on the armed tracks and monitor playback signals from the other tracks Refer to the owner s manual for the digital MTR for more information 2 Press the LAYER 17 32 button Input Channel Layer 17 32 is now available for con
209. DEP 0 100 cabinet simulation j 1008 00 kHz Parametric equalizer frequency Two input two output ring modulator EQG 12 0 to 412 0 dB Parametric equalizer gain Parameter Range Description EQQ 10 0 0 10 Parametric equalizer bandwidth Modulation source oscillator or N GATE 0 20 Noise reduction SOURCE OSC SELF 2 input signal OSC FREQ 0 0 5000 0 Hz Oscillator frequency Oscillator frequency modulation FM FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz speed FM DEPTH 0 100 Oscillator frequency modulation depth SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FM FREQ R05 07 24 4 4 4 8 m NOTEFM 1 STK M1 STK M2 THRASH MIDBST CMB PG CMB VR CMB DX CMB TW MINI FLAT DYNA FILTER Two input two output dynamically controlled filter Parameter Range Description Control source input signal or MIDI Note On velocity SENSE 0 100 Sensitivity Upward or downward fre SOURCE INPUT MIDI DIR UP DOWN MOD FILTER quency change Two input two output modulation filter DECAY 1 en change decay Parameter Range Description TYPE LPF HPF BPF Filter type FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed OFFSET 0 100 Filter frequency offset DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth RESO 0 20 Filter resonance 0 00 354 38 Left channel modulation and LEVEL 0 100 Output Level PHASE SEE right c
210. DISPLAY Use the following buttons to display the desired parameters Select the LEVEL button to display Send level bar graphs for Input Channels routed to Aux 1 8 PRE POST Select the PRE POST button to display signal source points for Input Channels routed to Aux 1 8 2 FIX VARI These buttons indicate the Aux mode Fixed or Variable for Aux Out 1 8 and are only for display purposes 3 LEVEL This field displays in dB the level of the Aux Send currently selected by the cursor 2 Move the cursor to either the DISPLAY LEVEL or PRE POST button then press ENTER to display the Level or Pre Post parameters 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 118 Chapter 9 Aux Outs 3 Ifyou selected the PRE POST button in Step 2 move the cursor to the desired Input Channel and Aux intersection then press the ENTER button to change the signal source point INPUT 125456 7 8 9 1611121514151 en en DA DA DA Note You can switch between Pre and Post only for Aux Sends that are set to Variable mode The FIX indication appears for Aux Sends that are set to Fixed mode and you cannot switch Pre Post 4 If you selected the LEVEL button in Step 2 move the cursor to the desired Input Channel and Aux intersection then edit the Send level or turn the cur rently selected AUX Send on or off Rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC
211. Dis play mode To bypass plug ins display the parameters of the plug in you wish to bypass in the INSERT ASSIGN EDIT section then turn on the BYPASS button SERT ASSIGN EDIT ASSIGN COMPARE PARAM InvL Off InvR Of i In L 8 8 In R 8 8 MixL 188 NMixR 168 1 MFTFD l mmm Scrub amp Shuttle By assigning the DAW SCRUB parameter to one of the User Defined buttons 1 8 you can scrub Pro Tools tracks back and forth by turning the Parameter wheel By assigning the DAW SHUTTLE parameter to one of the User Defined buttons 1 8 you can shuttle back and forth by turning the Parameter wheel 1 Assign the DAW SCRUB or DAW SHUTTLE parameter to one of the User Defined buttons 1 8 Before assigning parameters to these buttons you must switch layers to cancel the Remote function See page 235 for more information on assigning the parameters to the User Defined buttons 2 Press the LAYER REMOTE button to enable remote control of Pro Tools Make sure that Pro Tools is stopped 4 Press the User Defined button to which you assigned the DAW SCRUB or DAW SHUTTLE parameter in Step 1 You can now use the Scrub or Shuttle function 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 5 Rotate the Parameter wheel Rotate the Parameter wheel clockwise to scrub or shuttle forwards Turn it counterclock wise to scrub or shuttle backwards Pro Tools Remote Layer 205 The minimum scrub playback step v
212. EFINED KEYS 1 Pressthe USER ACCESS UTILITY button to locate the Utility User Def page UTILITY iti CHI CHI 00 dai Ex ex G 3 J TITLE 8 This page contains the following parameters CD INITIALIZE This button resets the contents of all banks to their initial settings 2 BANK These buttons select the desired banks 3 TITILE This parameter displays the name of the bank selected by the BANK parameter button Move the cursor to the TITLE parameter box then press ENTER The Title Edit win dow appears enabling you to enter a name 4 1 8 These parameter boxes enable you to assign functions to USER DEFINED KEYS 2 Move the cursor to the desired BANK parameter button then press ENTER The corresponding bank is selected and the functions assigned to the User Defined buttons in that bank are displayed in the 1 12 parameter boxes Tip When you select a function that is executed based on specified numbers for example a function that recalls a specific Scene or library memory or transmits MIDI messages an extra parameter box appears on the right in which you must specify the number suo oun Jou1O 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 236 Chapter 19 Other Functions 3 Move the cursor to one of the 1 8 parameter boxes then press ENTER The 01V96 displays the User Define Select window which enables you to assign functions to the selected
213. EQ G HI MID H INPUT4 5 EQ G HI MID H INPUTS 6 EQ G HI MID H INPUT6 7 EQ G HI MID H INPUT 8 EQ G HI MID H INPUT8 9 EQ G HI MID H INPUT9 10 EQ G HI MID H INPUT1O 11 EQ G HI MID H INPUT11 12 EQ G HI MID H INPUT12 13 EQ G HI MID H INPUT13 14 EQ G HI MID H INPUT14 15 EQ G HI MID H INPUT15 16 EQ G HI MID H INPUT16 17 EQ G HI MID H INPUT17 18 EQ G HI MID H INPUT18 19 EQ G HI MID INPUT19 20 EQ G HI MID INPUT2O 21 EQ G HI MID H INPUT21 22 EQ G HI MID H INPUT22 23 EQ G HI MID H INPUT23 24 EQ G HI MID H INPUT24 25 NO ASSIGN 26 NO ASSIGN 27 NO ASSIGN 28 NO ASSIGN 29 NO ASSIGN 30 NO ASSIGN 31 NO ASSIGN 32 NO ASSIGN 33 EQ G HI MID L INPUT1 34 EQ G HI MID L INPUT2 35 EQ G HI MID L INPUT3 36 EQ G HI MID L INPUT4 37 EQ G HI MID L INPUTS 38 EQ G HI MID L INPUT6 39 EQ G HI MID L INPUT 40 EQ G HI MID L INPUT8 41 EQ G HI MID L INPUT9 42 EQ G HI MID L INPUT10 43 EQ G HI MID L INPUT11 44 EQ G HI MID L INPUT12 45 EQ G HI MID L INPUT13 46 EQ G HI MID L INPUT14 47 EQ G HI MID L INPUT15 48 EQ G HI MID L INPUT16 49 EQ G HI MID L INPUT17 50 EQ G HI MID L INPUT18 51 EQ G HI MID L INPUT19 52 EQ G HI MID L INPUT20 53 EQ G HI MID L INPUT21 54 EQ G HI MID L INPUT22 55 EQ G HI MID L INPUT23 56 EQ G HI MID L INPUT24 57 NO ASSIGN 58 NO ASSIGN 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual
214. ESET BOTH Resets both channel parameters to the default settings same as when Channel memory 01 is recalled Move the cursor to the desired button then press ENTER to confirm the pair Tip Pressing and holding down the first SEL button of the paired channels and pressing the second SEL button cancels the pair Pairing Input Channels Using the Display Press the PAIR GROUP button repeatedly until the Pair Grup Input page appears 4 5 1 STI2 STIS STI4 Peet OO um are INPUT PAIR PAIR MODE ME 4 1 1492 2 sus 7498 2 Fa a 2 11 12 15 89 14 15 t9 16 17 15 19 t9 20 21 922 258924 CMEA CMEA MEA 258926 27 t 928 29 30 31 4952 HONOx2 MONO x2 HONOx2 2 L OUTPUT IN FADER MUTE The parameters on this page are described below 1 PAIR MODE Determines how channels are paired 2 STEREO MONO x2 buttons These buttons turn pairs on or off Move the cursor to the PAIR MODE parameter field 1 then select the HORIZONTAL or VERTICAL button The function of each mode is described below HORIZONTAL This button pairs adjacent odd even channels default VERTICAL This button pairs counterpart channels on Layer 1 and Layer 2 that share the same physical fader e g CH1 amp CH17 CH16 amp CH32 etc This mode is useful when you wish to use one fade
215. FREQ 1 FPR MTF F0 10 2 1 de 4 4 8 AUTO PAN Two input two output autopanner Parameter Range Description FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 10096 Modulation depth DIR 1 Panning direction WAVE Sine Tri Square Modulation waveform LSH 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G 12 0 to 12 0 dB Low shelving filter gain EQF 100 Hz 8 00 kHz EQ peaking type frequency EQ G 12 0 to 12 0 dB EQ peaking type gain EQQ 10 0 0 10 EQ peaking type bandwidth HSH 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH 12 0 to 12 0 dB High shelving filter gain SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off NOTE 2 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ 1 L lt gt R L 5R L lt R Turn L Turn R 2 P FTF Fe DY UNE 21 1 de 4 de oo TREMOLO Two input two output tremolo effect Parameter Range Description FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth WAVE Sine Tri Square Modulation waveform LSH F 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G 12 0 to 12 0 dB Low shelving filter gain EQF 100 Hz 8 00 kHz EQ peaking type frequency EQG 12 0 to 12 0 dB EQ peaking type gain EQ Q 10 0 0 10 EQ peaking type bandwidth HSHF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH 12 0 to 12 0 dB High shelving filter gain SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync
216. GAIN ee 80 Setting from the control surface 90 DYNA FLANGE ROA Features ss el Ne 11 Setting from the display 79 DYNA PHASER 265 Channel configuration 12 Switching the signal phase 79 Dynamics Comp Edit page sen 12 Viewing the settings 87 82 100 111 Hardware 250 241 INPUT connectors 14 69 Dynamics Comp Lib page 184 Inputs and Outputs 12 2 11 Inputpatch nennen 121 Dynamics Gate Edit page 8 octane centre 12 Initial settings 251 Dynamics Gate Lib page 183 Remote control see 12 Parameters secet 249 DYNAMICS button ees 18 Scene memory 2 Input patch library une 178 Sonic specifications 11 Input section ee 69 E Surround sound 12 Input sensitivity EARLY REF see 260 Fixed mode une 114 118 GAIN controls nee 15 ECHO ec INS ae 30 EDIT indicator INSERT VO connectors 14 69 Effect FX1 Edit page Insert in ee 129 Effect Lib page Insert patching sss 127 Effect FX2 Edit page G Installing a card sss 26 Effect FX2 Lib page GAIN controls nee N Effect FX3 Edit page pueri MGR CT A 42 Effect FX3 Lib page GANG n
217. HELF A G 0 0dB 5 5dB 0 0dB 4 0 dB Arpeg 2 180 Hz 355 Hz 4 00 kHz 4 25 kHz 7 4 5 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 20dB 1 0dB 1 5dB 3 0 dB 24 Brass Sec 90 Hz 850 Hz 2 12 kHz 4 50 kHz 2 8 2 0 7 7 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING gs Male Vocal 0 5dB 0 0dB 2 0dB 3 5 dB 1 190 Hz 1 00 kHz 2 00 kHz 6 70 kHz 0 11 4 5 0 56 0 11 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF gg Male Vocal 2 0dB 5 0dB 2 5 dB 4 0 dB 2 170Hz 236Hz 2 65 kHz 6 70 kHz 0 11 10 5 6 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual gt 5 o 2 2 x 272 Appendix A Parameter Lists Parameter Title LOW L MID H MID HIGH PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 37 Female Vo G 1 0dB 1 0dB 1 5 dB 2 0 dB 1 118Hz 400Hz 2 65 kHz 6 00 kHz Q 0 18 0 45 0 56 0 14 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF gg Female Vo G 7 0dB 1 5dB 1 5 dB 2 5 dB 2 112Hz 335 Hz 2 00 kHz 6 70 kHz Q 0 16 0 2 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 39 Chorus amp G 2 0dB 1 0dB 1 5 dB 3 0 dB Harmo F 90Hz 850 Hz 2 12 kHz 4 50 kHz Q 2 8 2 0 7 7 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF G 0 5dB 0 0dB 3 0dB 6 5 dB 30 Total EQ 1 95Hz 950Hz 2
218. I connections Be sure to connect your computer via the USB or an optional MY8 mLAN card installed in the 01V96 slot Configuring Windows Computers 1 Connect the 01V96 TO HOST USB port to a USB port on your PC using a USB cable TO HOST USB port Y Computer 2 Install the necessary USB drivers included on the 01V96 CD ROM See the Studio Manager Installation Guide for more information on installing the drivers Configuring Macintosh Computers 1 Connect the 01V96 TO HOST USB port to a USB port on your Mac using a USB cable 2 Install the required USB driver included on the 01V96 CD ROM See the Studio Manager Installation Guide for more information on installing the driver 3 If you are using Mac OS versions 8 6 through 9 2 2 install OMS The 01V96 communicates with Pro Tools via OMS Open Music System software If you have not installed OMS on your Mac use the OMS installer included on the 01V96 CD ROM to install OMS 4 Launch Pro Tools 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Pro Tools Remote Layer 191 5 Ifyouare using Mac OS versions 8 6 through 9 2 2 choose OMS Studio Setup from the Setups menu and configure OMS as necessary Refer to the documentation 5 my Studi
219. IME CODE FEET a eats OOO 1 1000 INSERT CHANNEL METER 7 Press ENTER to confirm the assignment Repeat Steps 6 and 7 to assign more plug ins to other insert positions in the channel strip 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Pro Tools Remote Layer 203 8 In the same way assign plug ins to other channels 9 When you finish assigning plug ins press the AUX 8 button The button indicator turns off Editing Plug ins You can edit plug ins inserted in the channel strips as follows 1 Press the F2 button to select Insert Display mode 2 Pressthe corresponding SEL button to select the channel that was assigned the plug in you want to edit 3 Inthe INSERT ASSIGN EDIT section move the cursor to the parameter con trol Insert 1 4 that was assigned the parameter you want to edit Note To adjust a plug in assigned to insert 5 press the Tab Scroll button We to change the parameter indication in the INSERT ASSIGN EDIT section then select a parameter con trol NSERT RSSIGN EDIT InvL Off InvR Off B iin L 8 8 In R 8 8 HixL 188 MixR 188 Ps MFTFD 1 mmm 4 Press ENTER to display the parameters IntheINSERT ASSIGN EDIT section the PARAM button is automatically selected and the Information box indicates the selected plug in parameters You can now use parameter controls 1 4 and the ENTER button to adjust the parameters NSERT BSSIGN EDIT InvL Off InvR Off iln L
220. IN InsertOut CH26 AD10 AD IN 10 SL 11 Slot CH11 IN Slot CH11 IN InsertOut CH27 AD11 AD IN 11 SL 12 Slot CH12 IN Slot CH12 IN InsertOut CH28 AD12 AD IN 12 SL 13 Slot CH13 IN Slot CH13 IN InsertOut CH29 AD13 AD IN 13 SL 14 Slot CH14 IN Slot CH14 IN InsertOut CH30 AD14 AD IN 14 SL 15 Slot CH15 IN Slot CH15 IN InsertOut CH31 AD15 AD IN 15 SL 16 Slot CH16 IN Slot CH16 IN InsertOut CH32 AD16 AD IN 16 FX1 1 Effect OUT 1 Effect OUT 1 InsertOut BUS1 2TD L 2TR IN Dig L FX1 2 Effect OUT 2 Effect OUT 2 InsertOut BUS2 2TD R 2TR IN Dig R FX2 1 Effect2 OUT 1 Effect2 OUT 1 InsertOut BUS3 FX2 2 Effect2 OUT 2 Effect2 OUT 2 InsertOut BUS4 FX3 1 Effect3 OUT 1 Effect3 OUT 1 InsertOut BUS5 FX3 2 Effect3 OUT 2 Effect3 OUT 2 InsertOut BUS6 FX4 1 Effect4 OUT 1 Effect4 OUT 1 InsertOut BUS7 FX4 2 Effect4 OUT 2 Effect4 OUT 2 InsertOut BUS8 2TD L 2TR IN Dig L 2TD L 2TR IN Dig L INS AUX1 InsertOut AUX1 2TD R 2TR IN Dig R 2TD R 2TR IN Dig R INS AUX2 InsertOut AUX2 NS AUX3 InsertOut AUX3 NS AUX4 InsertOut AUX4 NS AUXS InsertOut AUX5 NS AUX6 InsertOut AUX6 NS AUX7 InsertOut AUX7 NS AUX8 InsertOut AUX8 NS ST L InsertOut ST L NS ST R InsertOut ST R 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Initial Input Patch Settings Initial Input Patch Settings EFFECT IN PATCH 1 1 AUX1 1 2 NONE 2 1 AUX2 2 2 NONE 3 1 AUX3 3 2 NONE
221. INT88 2k or INT96k as the wordclock source Note When the 01V 96 operates at a high sampling rate 88 2 kHz or 96 kHz only two inter nal effects processors are available 3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the DIO Setup Format page appears O I jeub a 8 a D10 SETUP Initial Data 815717 5112 5113 STI4 CHI CHI 0 oO HIGHER SAMPLE RF TE DATA TRANSFER FORMAT __ 4 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to an IN OUT parameter field CD then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to set the data transfer format The IN OUT parameters are used to set one of the following data transfer formats for each slot input and output 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 76 Chapter 6 Analog I O amp Digital I O DOUBLE CHANNEL In Double Channel mode digital audio data is received and transmitted as mono signals at a sampling rate that is exactly half 44 1 48 kHz the current higher sampling rate Data is handled by two channels This is useful when you wish to transfer data between the 01V96 running at a higher sampling rate and legacy 44 1 48 kHz digital MTRs or HDRs Note Double Channel mode reduces the total number of inputs or outputs on the correspond ing slot The even numbered channels are disabled DOUBLE SPEED In Double Speed mode digital audio data is received and transmitted at the current high sampling rate i
222. IR FYR I IR I IR 5 Move the cursor to the RECALL button located to the left of the list then EZ press ENTER Effect program Reverb Room is loaded into Effects processor 1 ET 5 2 edit the effect parameters press the EFFECT button repeatedly until the Effect FX1 Edit page appears see page 161 4 3 6 Press the LAYER 17 32 button one ri Input Channel Layer 17 32 is selected for control from the channel strip section 7 Press the FADER MODE AUX1 button The button indicator lights up While the AUX 1 AUX 8 button indicators are lit faders 1 16 control the Aux 1 8 send levels In this example the faders control the send level of the signals routed from Input Channels 17 32 to Aux 1 Effects processor 1 input Tip To reset the fader 1 16 function to normal mode press the FADER MODE HOME button 8 While playing back the recording on the digital MTR from the beginning operate faders 1 16 to adjust the send level of the signals routed from Input Channels to Effects processor 1 9 To adjust the effect return level use the rotary level control located on the left side of the ST IN section on the top panel You can view the current level in the upper right corner of the display EFFECT Initial Data ASLI STI2 STIS STI4 cn car 1o marO O G 5 0 LIBRARY TITLE 6 Gate Reverb 5 Early Ref EFFECT TYPE
223. KKKKKKKK X Note On X 1 E elocity Note off X ffect Control Key s x X Af Ch s X X Pitch Bend X X Control 102 11 0 95 10 9 Assignable Prog 0 127 0 127 Change Trued ACkckck ck ck ck k 0 99 Assignable System Exclusive xT E P X Svstem Song Pos X Song Sel X X Common Tune X X System Clock X O Real Time Commands X X Local ON OFF X X Aux All Notes OFF X X Messages Active Sense X Reset X quarter frame message is recognized Notes 1 Bulk Dump Request Parameter Change Request and MMC For MIDI Remote ALL messages can be transmitted Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO O Yes Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO X No 01V96 Block Diagram Gain Reduction METER METER Out Meter o OFF 48V x 12 each 4ch INPUT PATCH 5 A _
224. LANGE Reverb and flanger in parallel 32 Rev gt Flange REV gt FLANGE Reverb and flanger in series 33 Rev Sympho REV SYMPHO Reverb and symphonic in parallel 34 Rev gt Sympho REV gt SYMPHO Reverb and symphonic in series 35 Rev gt Pan REV gt PAN Reverb and auto pan in series 36 Delay ER DELAY ER Delay and early reflections in parallel 37 Delay gt ER DELAY gt ER Delay and early reflections in series 38 Delay Rev DELAY REV Delay and reverb in parallel 39 Delay gt Rev DELAY gt REV Delay and reverb in series 40 Dist gt Delay DIST gt DELAY Distortion and delay in series Others No Preset Name Type Description 41 Multi Filter MULTI FILTER 3 band parallel filter 24 dB octave 42 Freeze FREEZE Simple sampler Available for internal effects 1 and 2 43 Stereo Reverb ST REVERB Stereo reverb 44 M Band Dyna M BAND DYNA 3 band dynamics processor Add On Effects No Preset Name Type Description 451 Comp276 COMP276 46 Comp276S COMP276S 47 Comp260 COMP260 48 Comp260S COMP260S 49 Equalizer601 EQUALIZER601 50 OpenDeck OPENDECK 51 REV X Hall REV X HALL 521 REV X Room REV X ROOM 531 REV X Plate REV X PLATE 1 These preset programs are dedicated to Add On Effects The numbers of effects programs that do not have Add On Effects installed are grayed out and cannot be used For more information on Add On Effects refer to About Add On Effects on page 162 01V96 Version 2 Owner
225. LOWL INPUT1 92 EQ Q LOW INPUT4 34 EQ GLOWL INPUT2 93 EQ Q LOW INPUTS 35 EQ GLOWL INPUT3 94 EQ Q LOW INPUT6 36 EQ GLOWL INPUT4 95 EQ Q LOW 37 GLOWL INPUTS 102 EQ Q LOW INPUT8 38 EQ GLOWL INPUT6 103 EQ Q LOW INPUT9 39 GLOWL 104 QLOW INPUT10 40 EQ GLOWL INPUT8 105 Q LOW INPUT11 41 EQ GLOWL INPUT9 106 EQ Q LOW INPUT12 42 EQ GLOWL INPUT10 107 QLOW INPUT13 43 EQ GLOWL INPUT11 108 EQ Q LOW INPUT14 44 EQ GLOWL INPUT12 109 EQ Q LOW INPUT15 45 EQ GLOWL INPUT13 110 Q LOW INPUT16 46 EQ GLOWL INPUT14 111 EQ Q LOW INPUT17 47 EQ GLOWL INPUT15 112 EQ QLOW INPUT18 48 EQ GLOWL INPUT16 113 EQ Q LOW INPUT19 49 EQ GLOWL INPUT17 114 EQ QLOW INPUT2O 50 EQ GLOWL INPUT18 115 EQ QLOW INPUT21 51 EQ GLOWL INPUT19 116 EQ Q LOW INPUT22 52 EQ GLOWL INPUT2O 117 EQ QLOW INPUT23 53 EQ GLOWL INPUT21 118 EQ QLOW INPUT24 54 EQ GLOWL INPUT22 119 NO ASSIGN 55 EQ GLOWL INPUT23 56 EQ GLOWL INPUT24 57 NO ASSIGN 58 NO ASSIGN 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual CHANNEL4 High Mid Low 0 NO ASSIGN 1 EQ GLOW H INPUT25 2 EQ GLOW H INPUT26 3 EQ GLOW H INPUT27 4 EQ G LOW H INPUT28 5 EQ G LOW H INPUT29 6 EQ G LOW H INPUT30 7 EQ GLOW H INP
226. M RMO7 CH7 VST MIXER CH7 FADER B6 07 FAD END 25 ON B7 40 SW END be RMO8 CH8 VST MIXER CH8 FADER B7 07 FAD END 25 ON B8 40 SW END gt 25 RMO9 CH9 5 MIXER CH9 FADER B8 07 FAD END ON B9 40 SW END RM10 CH10 VST MIXER 10 FADER B9 07 FAD END ON BA 40 SW END E RM11 CH11 VST MIXER 11 FADER BA 07 FAD END BB 40 SW END E E RM12 CH12 VST MIXER CH12 FADER BB 07 FAD END 25 E ON BC 40 SW END ES a RM13 CH13 VST MIXER CH13 FADER BC 07 FAD END 2 ON BD 40 SW END a RM14 CH14 VST MIXER CH14 FADER BD 07 FAD END 2 ON BE 40 SW END E 25 RM15 CH15 VST MIXER 15 FADER BE 07 FAD END m ON BF 40 SW END zZ RM16 CH16 VST MIXER CH16 FADER BF 07 FAD END ES 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual gt 5 2 2 x 260 Appendix A Parameter Lists Effects Parameters REVERB HALL REVERB ROOM REVERB STAGE REVERB PLATE One input two output hall room stage and plate reverb simulations all with gates Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0 3 99 0 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
227. ME indicate the bank number Be aware that the state of the transmission destination will in some cases change if the same bank is being used STATUS ID No SUB STATUS FORMAT No 11110000 FO System exclusive message 0 0 0 COUNT HIGH ch data count ch 128 cl 0 0 0 0 000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA 000nnnn On n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel 111110 7E Universal bulk dump COUNT LOW ecccece 001100 4c l 001101 4D M 0100000 20 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual MIDI Data Format 309 00100000 20 2 8 2 10 User Assignable Layer bulk dump request format 00111000 38 8 amp The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number 01000011 43 C STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message 00111001 39 9 ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA 00110011 33 3 SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel DATA NAME 01010110 56 FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump 00000000 00 01001100 4c V Obbbbbbb bb b 0 7 bank no A H 01001101 4D M BLOCK INFO Ottttttt tt totalblock number minimum number is 0 00100000 20 Obbbbbbb bb current block number 0 total block number 00100000 20 DATA Oddddddd ds User define key data of block bb 00 000 38 8 01000011 43 Oddddddd de 00 001 39 9 CHECK SUM ee ece Invert L de 1 amp 0x7F 00110011 33 3 EOX 11110111 F7 End of
228. MIT ENABLE DISABLE This button switches the MIDI Remote function between enable and disable 2 INITIALIZE This button resets the settings stored in the bank selected by the BANK parameter their default settings 3 BANK This parameter enables you to select one of four banks 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual MIDI Remote Layer 209 4 ID SHORT LONG These parameters display the channel names The ID parameter displays the channel ID RM01 RM16 for the currently controlled MIDI device 5 ON section This section displays the type of MIDI messages in hexadecimal or alphabet assigned to the ON buttons for the currently selected channels RMOI RM16 LATCH UNLATCH This button toggles between Latch and Unlatch for ON but ton operation LEARN eerie When you turn on this button MIDI messages received at the MIDIIN port are assigned to the DATA parameter boxes DATA parameter boxes These boxes display the type of MIDI messages in hexadecimal or alphabets assigned to the ON button 6 FADER section This section displays the type of MIDI messages in hexadecimal or alphabet assigned to the faders for the currently selected channels RM01 RM16 6 Movethe cursor to the desired bank button BANK parameter buttons 1 4 then press ENTER 7 Press the LAYER REMOTE button to select Remote layer You can now use the MIDI Remote function 8 Use the faders and ON butto
229. MO8 08 GM CH08 VOL amp EFF1 FADER B7 07 FAD END 25 ON END 09 GM09 GM CH09 VOL amp EFF1 FADER B8 07 FAD END ON END RM10 10 GM CH10 VOL amp EFF1 FADER B9 07 FAD END ON END 2 E RM11 GM11 GM CH11 VOL amp EFF1 FADER BA 07 FAD END END e E RM12 12 GM CH12 VOL amp EFF1 FADER BB 07 FAD END 25 E ON END 25 3 RM13 13 GM CH13 VOL amp EFF1 FADER BC 07 FAD END 2 ON END 25 3 RM14 14 GM CH14 VOL amp EFF1 FADER BD 07 FAD END 2 ON END 25 25 RM15 GM15 GM CH15 VOL amp EFF1 FADER BE 07 FAD END m ON END E RM16 GM16 GM CH16 VOL amp EFF1 FADER BF 07 FAD END ES 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual gt 5 2 2 x 258 Appendix A Parameter Lists Bank 3 XG Vol amp Pan Name Data Format ID Controller Short Long 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 ON eS e e ee n e ee SS RMO1 XGO1 XG CHO1 VOL amp PAN FADER 43 10 lac los joo los 7 leno
230. MODE AUX CONFIG 1 2 2 STEREO 1 3 4 MONOxZ 5 6 2 7 5 MONOxZ E 1 16 AUX fld D SEL CH This parameter indicates the currently selected channel 2 CURRENT CONFIGURATION section If the currently selected channel is an Input Channel 1 32 or ST IN Channels 1 4 its Surround mode and Aux configuration information is displayed here 3 Level meters These meters indicate the levels of the currently selected channel and the available part ner 4 STORED FROM This parameter indicates the channel for which the settings were originally stored in the selected library memory If the currently selected library memory contains Input Chan nel 1 32 and ST IN Channels 1 4 settings its Surround mode and Aux pairing infor mation are also displayed below this parameter sauelqn 2 Use the LAYER buttons to select layers then press the SEL buttons to select channels For details on the Store and Recall functions see General Library Operation on page 175 If the selected memory s channel type does not match the type of the destination channel an alarm mark and the word CONFLICT appear next to the STORED FROM parameter These alarms indicate that you tried to recall unrecallable channel settings to the currently selected channel 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 178 Chapter 16 Libraries The alarm indicators also appear when the Surround mode Aux pair and other non chan nel
231. Manual Setting Up and Selecting Surround Pan Modes 137 D SURROUND MODE This parameter enables you to select a Surround mode by using the following buttons The button that is turned on highlighted indicates the currently selected Surround mode The 01V96 uses normal stereo mode default e Soluces eene Selects 3 1 Surround mode x b c Selects 5 1 Surround mode Selects 6 1 Surround mode 2 PAN SURR LINK When this button is turned on Input Channel panpots and stereo surround panning are linked 3 Press this button to display the Surr Bus Setup page which enables you to change Surround Channel to Bus Out assignment 2 Move the cursor to the Surround mode button you want to use When you move the cursor to one of these buttons speaker icons appear indicating a typ ical listening position and the Surround Channel to Bus Out configuration e 3 1 Surround e 5 1 Surround ued punong Fy e 6 1 Surround Bus 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 138 Chapter 12 Surround Pan 3 Press the ENTER button The confirmation window for changing the Surround mode appears CONF RMRT ION Chanse Surround Mode 4 Move the cursor to the YES button then press ENTER The 01V96 enters the selected Surround mode 5 To link the Input Channel Pan setting with the stereo surround panning move the cursor to
232. Move the cursor to the MODE parameter s TABLE button 1 then press ENTER The MODE parameter determines which MIDI messages are transmitted when 01V96 parameters are adjusted The following options are available for the MODE parameter amp TABLE ete MIDI Control Change messages are transmitted in accordance with the assignments on this page NRPN ccs doses The assignments on the Ctl Asgn page are ignored and pre defined NRPNs Non Registered Parameter Numbers are transmitted for remote control NRPNs are special MIDI messages that combine three different Control Changes They enable you to control many parameters on a single MIDI Channel 5 If you turned on the TABLE button in Step 4 move the cursor to a parameter box in the No CH column then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to select the MIDI channels and Control Changes to which you want to assign parameters You can assign parameters to up to 16 channel Control Changes on the Ctl Asgn page regardless of the MIDI Channels currently selected for transmission and reception Skip Steps 5 and 6 if you turned on the NRPN button in Step 4 6 Select parameters in the parameter boxes in the three PARAMETER columns Select a parameter group in the parameter box in the first PARAMETER column and spec ify the desired values in the parameter boxes in the second and third PARAMETER col umns The following parameters an
233. N 83 NO ASSIGN 25 NO ASSIGN 84 NO ASSIGN 26 NO ASSIGN 85 NO ASSIGN 27 NO ASSIGN 86 NO ASSIGN 28 NO ASSIGN 87 NO ASSIGN 29 NO ASSIGN 88 NO ASSIGN 30 NO ASSIGN 89 EQ ON INPUT25 31 NO ASSIGN 90 EQ ON INPUT26 32 NO ASSIGN 91 EQ ON INPUT27 33 SURROUND LFEL INPUT25 92 EQ ON INPUT28 34 SURROUND LFEL INPUT26 93 EQ ON INPUT29 35 SURROUND LFEL INPUT27 94 EQ ON INPUT30 36 SURROUND LFEL INPUT28 95 EQ ON INPUT31 37 SURROUND LFEL INPUT29 102 EQ ON INPUT32 38 SURROUND LFEL INPUT30 103 EQ ON ST IN1 39 SURROUND LFEL INPUT31 104 EQ ON ST IN2 40 SURROUND LFEL INPUT32 105 EQ ON ST IN3 41 SURROUND LFEL ST INTL 106 EQ ON ST IN4 42 SURROUND LFEL ST INIR 107 NO ASSIGN 43 SURROUND LFEL ST IN2L 108 NO ASSIGN 44 SURROUND LFEL ST IN2R 109 NO ASSIGN 45 SURROUND LFEL ST IN3L 110 NO ASSIGN 46 SURROUND LFEL ST IN3R 111 NO ASSIGN 47 SURROUND LFEL ST INAL 112 NO ASSIGN 48 SURROUND LFEL ST INAR 113 NO ASSIGN 49 NO ASSIGN 114 NO ASSIGN 50 NO ASSIGN 115 NO ASSIGN 51 NO ASSIGN 116 NO ASSIGN 52 NO ASSIGN 117 NO ASSIGN 53 NO ASSIGN 118 NO ASSIGN 54 NO ASSIGN 119 NO ASSIGN gt 55 NO ASSIGN 56 NO ASSIGN 2 57 NO ASSIGN 3 58 NO ASSIGN 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 304 Appendix C MIDI
234. NEL section on the top panel to directly control certain parameters for the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1 8 Setting the Levels Move the STEREO fader to adjust the Stereo Out levels Press the ON button in the STE REO section to turn the Stereo Out on or off To set Bus Out 1 8 levels press the MASTER button in the LAYER section to select the Master layer then move faders 9 16 At this time you can turn Bus Out 1 8 on or off using the ON 9 16 buttons EQ ing and Balancing the Stereo Out and Bus Outs 1 Press the SEL button of the bus to which you want to apply EQ or set the level balance 2 To adjust the EQ of the currently selected bus select the desired band by pressing one of the following buttons in the SELECTED CHANNEL section HIGH button HIGH band H MID button HIGH MID band L MID button LOW MID band LOW button LOW band 3 Usethe Q FREQUENCY and GAIN controls to adjust the Q frequency and gain of the band selected in Step 2 See page 84 for more information on EQ 4 To adjust the Stereo Out Balance parameter use the PAN control in the SELECTED CHANNEL section Note If you select Aux Out 1 8 or Bus Out 1 8 the PAN control is disabled 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 105 Pairing Buses or Aux Sends Pairing Buses or Aux Sends You can pair adjacent odd even in this order buses or Aux Sends for stereo operati
235. NTER CENTER 17 15 19 za 21 22 23 24 SL 3R OOO yy CY QU CO CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER D Aux pan controls These controls adjust the pan setting of signals routed from Input Channels to paired Aux buses 2 MODE The MODE parameter determines how paired Input Channels are panned 3 INPUT PAN LINK When this parameter is turned on Aux Sends follow the Input Channel Pan 4 Move the cursor to the Aux pan control of the desired Input Channel the rotate the Parameter wheel to set the pan value 5 If necessary move the cursor to the MODE parameter box then rotate the Parameter wheel to select INDIVIDUAL GANG or INV GANG then press ENTER If the INPUT PAN LINK ON OFF button is turned off this Mode setting is independent of the Mode parameter on the Pan page See page 85 for more information on Mode options 6 To link the Input Channel Pan setting with the Aux Send Pan setting move the cursor to the INPUT PAN LINK ON OFF button then press ENTER The pan positions on the Pan page are copied to the Aux pan setting and the pan controls on both pages are linked Tip If paired Aux Sends are in Variable mode the Aux Send levels Aux On Off and Pre Post parameters for paired Input Channels are linked to each other If paired Aux Sends are in Fixed mode the Aux On Off parameters for paired Input Chan nels are not linked to each other 01V96 Ver
236. O SETUP Initial Data STI2 STI3 5714 sts c ec c DE I 2 SELECT ASSIGN TIME CODE Pan ci O FEET 855 Dno Lun INSERT ASSIGN EDIT ASSIGN ComPARE BYPASS INSERT Press a channel strip s INSERT switch ito assign edit an insert OO uot Co Co ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER CHANNEL METER 1 TARGET This parameter enables you to select the remote control target device 2 COUNTER This counter indicates the current position This counter works in unison with the time code counter on Pro Tools The display format of the counter is specified in Pro Tools The following three check boxes in the COUNTER section indicate the cur rently selected format TIME CODE Pro Tools timecode format is set to Time Code Iuvenes Pro Tools timecode format is set to Feet Frames BEATS Pro Tools timecode format is set to Bars Beats 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual E o 3u05 e1ouj8y J 194 Chapter 17 Remote Control If no check boxes are selected Pro Tools timecode format is set to Min utes Seconds or Samples 8 SELECT ASSIGN This parameter indicates the current parameter which can be adjusted via the parame ter controls on the page For example Pan PanR SndA SndB SndC SndD or SndE see page 196 4 WHEEL MODE This parameter indicates the function currently assigned to the Para
237. OMPAND H Out gain dB 1 5 Width dB 7 Release ms 192 Threshold dB 17 Ratio 1 2 5 Attack ms 8 7 A Dr SN COMP Out gain dB 3 5 Knee 2 Release ms 12 Threshold dB 23 Ratio 1 2 Attack ms 0 8 A Dr SN EXPAND Out gain dB 0 5 Knee 2 Release ms 151 Threshold dB 8 Ratio 1 1 7 Attack ms 11 9 A Dr SN COMPAND S Out gain dB 0 0 Width dB 10 Release ms 128 Threshold dB 20 Ratio 1 2 Attack 2 10 A Dr Tom EXPAND ac ms Out gain dB 5 0 Knee 2 Release ms 749 273 20 Title A Dr OverTop E B Finger E B Slap Syn Bass Piano1 Piano2 E Guitar A Guitar Strings1 Strings2 Type COMPAND S COMP COMP COMP COMP COMP COMP COMP COMP COMP 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Parameter Value Threshold dB 24 Ratio 1 2 Attack ms 38 Out gain dB 3 5 Width dB 54 Release ms 842 Threshold dB 12 Ratio 1 2 Attack ms 15 Out gain dB 4 5 Knee 2 Release ms 470 Threshold dB 12 Ratio 1 1 7 Attack ms 6 Out gain dB 4 0 Knee hard Release ms 133 Threshold dB 10 Ratio 1 3 5 Attack ms 9 Out gain dB 3 0 Knee h
238. ON OFF buttons in the CONTROL CHANGE row are turned off 9 01 96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 226 Chapter 18 MIDI Transmitting Parameter Settings via MIDI Bulk Dump You can back up data stored in the 01V96 such as libraries and Scenes to an external MIDI device by using MIDI Bulk Dump In this way you can later restore previous 01V96 settings by transmitting this MIDI data back to the 01V96 Note Some of the data transmitted from the 01V 96 to the sequence software may occasionally drop out during Bulk Dump transmission To avoid this we recommend that you use the included Studio Manager software to store 01V96 data to an external device 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the DIO Setup MIDI Host page appears then specify ports for transmission and reception of MIDI messages see page 216 2 Make connections using the ports selected in Step 1 so that the 01V96 can transmit and receive MIDI messages to and from the external device 3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS MIDI button then press the F4 button The MIDI Bulk page appears MIDI Initial Data glsrit STI2 STI3 STI4 auccm VO Kan DD DD BULK DUMP REQUEST 2 p oa INTERVAL SETUPMEM TABLE TABLE PLUG IN ca ns 4 SETUP 4 PGM ASGN JA CTL ASGN The page includes the following parameters 1 CATEGORY section This section enables you to select
239. OST USB USB 0 V 3 3 V B type USB connector IN MIDI DIN Connector 5P MIDI OUT MIDI DIN Connector 5P THRU MIDI DIN Connector 5P IN TTL 75 Q BNC Connector WORD CLOCK OUT TTL 75 Q BNC Connector 1 MIDI IN can use as TIME CODE IN MTC Dimensions HO AIR IA IR TA TR IR TA TR IR TA A IH EH 150 Id 101 350 540 i 548 Sn em I Bosses 430 Not included Screw Heads 436 Included Screw Heads MT m m DSSSSSSSS TSS SSS 555555 350 L Unit mm Specifications and
240. OUTING GROUP DYNAMICS EQ EFFECT VIEW SCENE button This button displays a Scene page enabling you to store and recall Scenes see page 165 DIO SETUP button This button displays a DIO Setup page enabling you to set up the 01V96 including digital input and output setup and remote control setup see pgaes 72 192 3 MIDI button This button displays a MIDI page enabling you to make MIDI settings see page 219 4 UTILITY button This button displays a Utility page enabling you to use the internal oscillators and view information about installed optional cards INSERT DELAY button This button displays INS DLY page enabling you to switch the signal phase set the signal to be inserted or set the delay parameters see pages 79 127 6 PAN ROUTING button This button displays a Pan Route page enabling you to select a Bus to which the selected channel signal is routed adjust the selected channel pan settings adjust the level of signals routed from Buses 1 8 to the Stereo Bus and adjust the stereo or surround pan settings see pages 85 135 PAIR GROUP button This button displays a Pair Grup page enabling you to create or cancel channel pairs and group multiple channel faders or ON buttons see pages 93 149 PATCH button This button displays a Patch page enabling you to patch input signals and Bus Out signals to Input channels or
241. On Off LEVEL OUTPUT DELAY Output delay METER The parameters and sections listed above are identical to those for the Stereo Out For more information refer to the explanation of the Stereo Out see page 97 Bus to Stereo Bus Out 1 8 signals are also routed to the Stereo Bus In addition to the ON LEVEL and other parameters you can also set the Send Level On Off Pan and other parameters Tip You can also pair adjacent odd even buses for stereo operation see page 105 By default Slot channels 1 8 and 9 16 and ADAT OUT channels 1 8 are patched to the Bus Out 1 8 outputs However you can change this patching on the Patch Out Patch page see page 123 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1 8 from the Display 99 Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1 8 from the Display To set the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1 8 parameters you can either move the cursor to the desired parameter on the display and change the value or operate the desired button or control on the top panel This section explains how to set the parameters on the display Tip Refer to Chapter 10 Input amp Output Patching on page 121 for more information on how to set inserts Attenuating the Stereo Out and Bus Out To attenuate the Stereo Out and Bus Out signals press the DISPLAY ACCESS EQ button then press the F4 button to display the EQ Out Att page On this page you can a
242. On this page use the following buttons to select a slot or connector for which you want to view the channel status CD 2TR IN This button enables you to view the Channel Status of input signals connected to the 2TR Digital Inputs 2 SLOT These buttons enable you to view the Channel Status of each two adjacent odd and even in this order channel signals connected to the digital I O card installed in the slot 2 Move the cursor to the desired input or slot button then press ENTER Channel Status information for the selected input is displayed However if a mini YGDAI I O card other than AES EBU format is installed Channel Status information will be grayed out Channel Status information includes the following items 3 FS Indicates the sampling rate If no signal is being input or if the incoming wordclock is not synching to the internal clock Unlock appears 4 EMPHASIS Indicates the Emphasis on off status 5 CATEGORY Indicates the status of Category Code Bit included in the IEC958 Part 2 S PDIF Con sumer format This parameter can display the following values Parameter value Description General Temporarily used Laser Optical Laser optical device D D Conv Digital Digital converter and signal processing device 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 74 Chapter 6 Analog I O amp Digital I O Parameter value Magnetic Description Magnetic tape device and magnetic disk devi
243. Owner s Manual Aux Outs 109 9 Aux Outs This chapter describes how to control Aux Out 1 8 Aux Out 1 8 The Aux Out 1 8 section mixes signals routed from the Input Channels to the correspond ing Aux Sends processes them using on board EQ compressor etc then routes them to the specified internal effects processors output connectors or I O card connectors The 01V96 features eight Aux Sends which can be used to send signals to the internal and external effects processors and monitors The following diagram illustrates the Aux Out 1 8 signal flow Gain Reduction Out Meter METER METER sy INSERT METER INSERT INSERT 84 METER ON LE VEL ll on ll OUTPUT AUX 1 8 DELAY OUTPUT PATCH n y g INSERT e ATT Attenuator 4 BAND EQ 4 band equalizer e COMP Compressor ON On Off e LEVEL OUTPUT DELAY Output delay e METER These parameters are the same as the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1 8 see page 97 Tip You can also pair adjacent odd even Aux Sends in this order for stereo Aux operation Note With the default setting Aux Out 1 4 are patched to OMNI OUT connectors 1 4 and to internal Effects processors 1 4 However you can change this patching on the Patch Output page 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 110 Chapter 9 Aux Outs Setting Aux Out 1 8 from the Display To set
244. PE column displays the names of any installed I O card The IN and OUT columns indicate the number of input and output channels available for each installed I O card 2 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to a source then press ENTER The following are possible wordclock sources e These buttons select the inputs from the digital I O card installed in the slot as the wordclock source Inputs are selected in pairs odd and even numbers in this order The SLOT TYPE column displays the names of any installed I O card The num ber of pairs depends on the type of I O card installed 7 cte These buttons select the inputs from the IN connector on the rear panel Inputs are selected in pairs odd and even numbers in this order WEIN This button selects the wordclock signal input at the WORD CLOCK IN connector on the rear panel ST2TRD eene This button selects the 2TR IN DIGITAL input as the word clock source INT 44 1k INT 48k INT 88 2k INT 96k These buttons select the internal clock generator as the word clock source The 01V96 will function as the wordclock master Note To transfer data at higher sampling frequencies 88 2 kHz or 96 kHz between the 01V96 and connected external devices you need to set the data transfer format For more infor mation see page 72 Tip If wordclock transfer is interrupted while the 01V96 being used as a slave unit is receiv ing
245. Processor 2 FX3 1 FX3 2 Inputs 1 amp 2 of Internal Effects Processor 3 FX4 1 FX4 2 Inputs 1 amp 2 of Internal Effects Processor 4 Press ENTER to confirm the change If you move the cursor to another parameter box or display another page before you press the ENTER button all settings on this page will be cancelled Move the cursor to the desired IN parameter box then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to select the inputs ADAT IN chan nels or slot input channels to be patched to the Insert In Refer to the explanation regarding the Input Patch for more information on the parameter values see page 122 Press ENTER to confirm the change Tip Move the cursor to an empty OUT or IN parameter box and press the ENTER button The Patch Select window appears Rotate the Parameter wheel or press the cursor buttons to select an item to be patched then press ENTER Move the cursor to the YES button then press ENTER The selected item is now patched To enable the specified Insert patch move the cursor to the ON OFF button in the INSERT section and press ENTER to turn it on or off 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Insert Patching 129 Viewing and Changing Insert In Patch You can view and also change the items patched to the Insert Ins of all Input Channels or all Output Channels This is useful when you wish to find out if multiple channels have the same patch
246. Q F LOW INPUT31 71 EQ F LOW INPUT32 72 EQ F LOW ST IN1 73 EQ F LOW ST IN2 74 EQ F LOW ST IN3 75 EQ F LOW ST IN4 76 NO ASSIGN 77 NO ASSIGN 78 NO ASSIGN 79 NO ASSIGN 80 NO ASSIGN 81 NO ASSIGN 82 NO ASSIGN 83 NO ASSIGN 84 NO ASSIGN 85 NO ASSIGN 86 NO ASSIGN 87 NO ASSIGN 88 NO ASSIGN 89 EQ Q LOW INPUT25 90 EQ Q LOW INPUT26 91 EQ Q LOW INPUT27 92 EQ Q LOW INPUT28 93 EQ Q LOW INPUT29 94 EQ Q LOW INPUT3O 95 EQ Q LOW INPUT31 102 EQ Q LOW INPUT32 103 EQ Q LOW ST IN1 104 EQ Q LOW ST IN2 105 EQ Q LOW ST IN3 106 EQ Q LOW ST IN4 107 NO ASSIGN 108 NO ASSIGN 109 NO ASSIGN 110 NO ASSIGN 111 NO ASSIGN 112 NO ASSIGN 113 NO ASSIGN 114 NO ASSIGN 115 NO ASSIGN 116 NO ASSIGN 117 NO ASSIGN 118 NO ASSIGN 119 NO ASSIGN 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual gt 5 o 2 a x 294 Appendix C MIDI High Mid Low 59 NO ASSIGN 60 NO ASSIGN 61 NO ASSIGN 62 NO ASSIGN 63 NO ASSIGN 64 EQ F LO MID INPUT1 65 EQ F LO MID INPUT2 66 EQ F LO MID INPUT3 67 EQ F LO MID INPUT4 68
247. RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio LO RATIO 0 1 2 4 Low frequency reverb time ratio om 00 ee DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density E R DLY 0 0 100 0 ms ee early reflections Balance of early reflections and E R BAL 0 100 reverb 0 all reverb 100 all early reflections HPF Mu scat kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF ae BZ Low pass filter cutoff frequency LVL OFF 60 to 0 dB Level at which gate kicks in ATTACK 0 120 ms Gate opening speed HOLD 1 Gate open time DECAY 2 Gate closing speed 1 0 02 ms 2 13 s fs 44 1 kHz 0 02 ms 1 96 s fs 48 kHz 0 01 ms 1 06 s fs 88 2 kHz 0 01 ms 981 ms fs 96 kHz 2 6 ms 46 0 s fs 44 1 kHz 5 ms 42 3 s fs 48 kHz 3 ms 23 0 s fs 88 2 kHz 3 ms 21 1 s fs 96 kHz One input two output early reflections Parameter Range Description S Hall L Hall Ran T f early reflecti imul TYPE dom Revers Plate M iis NSS ON Spring ROOMSIZE 0 1 20 0 Reflection spacing Early reflections decay character LIVENESS 1919 istics 0 dead 10 live INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DIFF 0 10 Reflection diffusion left right reflection spread DENSITY 0 100 Reflection density ER NUM 1 19 Number of early reflections FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio THRU HPF 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency 50 0 Hz 16
248. REA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd Tong Yang Securities Bldg 16F 23 8 Yoido dong Youngdungpo ku Seoul Korea Tel 02 3770 0660 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia Sdn Bhd Lot 8 Jalan Perbandaran 47301 Kelana Jaya Petaling Jaya Selangor Malaysia Tel 3 78030900 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music Asia Pte Ltd 03 11 A Z Building 140 Paya Lebor Road Singapore 409015 Tel 747 4374 TAIWAN Yamaha KHS Music Co Ltd 3F 6 Sec 2 Nan Jing E Rd Taipei Taiwan 104 R O C Tel 02 2511 8688 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co Ltd 891 1 Siam Motors Building 15 16 floor Rama 1 road Wangmai Pathumwan Bangkok 10330 Thailand Tel 02 215 2626 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation Asia Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa cho 10 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 81 53 460 2317 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty Ltd Level 1 99 Queensbridge Street Southbank Victoria 3006 Australia Tel 3 9693 5111 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation Asia Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa cho 10 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 81 53 460 2313 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation Pro Audio amp Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa cho 10 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 81 53 460 2441 YAMAHA Yamaha Manual Library http www yamaha co jp manual This document is printed on recycled U R G Pro Audio amp Digital Musical Instrument Division
249. S PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch Direct Out page appears The Direct Out page enables you to specify the output connectors or channels to which each Input Channel is directly patched Move the cursor to the parameter box for the Input Channels you want to route to Direct Outs then specify the output connectors or channels 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 54 Chapter 5 Tutorial 8 9 In this example Input Channel 9 12 signals are routed to ADAT OUT channels 5 8 PATCH Initial Data _ 511 51125113 5114 CHI CHI O G DIRECT OUT PRE ER PRE FADER 3 B 2TR OUT OUT NAME A OUT LIB Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PAN ROUTING button repeatedly until the Pan Route Rout1 16 page appears Move the cursor to the D button for the Input Channels you want to route to Direct Outs then press ENTER The Input Channels for which the D buttons are turned on are directly patched to the output connectors or channels specified in Step 7 Adjusting the Monitoring Level 1 You can monitor the recording signals by placing the digital MTR in record ready mode routing the signals sent to Tracks 1 8 of the digital MTR back to the 01V96 s Input Channels 17 24 then patching them to the MONITOR OUT connectors and the PHONES jack Arm the connected digital MTR s tracks for recording At this time set the monitor mode on the digital MTR accordingly so that you can monitor the i
250. S PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch Effect page appears This page enables you to patch all inputs and outputs of Effects processors 1 4 3 PATCH 1 Fee HOO initial Data a EFFECT mr PATCH EFFECTI REVERB HALL p EFFECT3 REUERB STRGE This page contains the following parameters DIN These parameter boxes select the signals to be fed to the effects processors 2 OUT These parameter boxes select the destination of the signals output from the effects pro cessors fJ button This button recalls the FX1 Edit FX4 Edit pages which enable you to adjust the effect parameters To select a signal to be input to the effects processor move the cursor to the desired In parameter box select a signal from the following options then press ENTER No assignment AUXI Bnei Aux Sends 1 8 INSCH1 32 Input Channel 1 32 Insert Out INS BUSI S Bus 1 8 Insert Out INS 1 8 Aux Send 1 8 Insert Out INSST U R Stereo Out Insert Out To use the internal effects processors via Aux Sends select Aux 1 8 in most cases You can patch a different signal to the other input of 2 in 2 out effect programs 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Using Effects Processors via Aux Sends 159 Tip You can patch a signal to multiple effect inputs Move the cursor to an IN parameter
251. S1 BUS8 AUX1 AUX8 ST L ST R The second four characters are the channel s Short name You can edit the channel s Short name if you desire see page 229 3 Current Scene This section indicates the number and title of the currently selected Scene memory see page 166 If the selected Scene is write protected a padlock icon appears 4 EDIT indicator This indicator appears when the current mix settings no longer match those of the Scene that was most currently recalled 5 MIDI indicator This indicator appears when the 01V96 is receiving MIDI data via the MIDIIN port USB port or an installed MY8 mLAN card 6 Surround mode indicator This indicator identifies the currently selected Surround mode ST stereo 3 1 5 1 or 6 1 see page 135 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 521524 Bumessdo w 28 Chapter 3 Operating Basics 7 Sampling rate indicator This indicator identifies the 01V96 s current sampling rate 44 1 kHz 44k 48 kHz 48k 88 2 kHz 88k or 96 kHz 96k ST IN channel levels These level controls indicate the level of ST IN channels 1 4 9 Page title This section indicates the title of the current page Channel name On certain pages this area displays the Long name of the currently selected channel 1 Page area This page area displays various page contents 12 Page tabs These tabs enable you to select a display page 3 Tab Scroll arrows These arrows indicate
252. SSIGN 90 EQ LPF ON INPUT26 32 NO ASSIGN 91 EQ LPF ON INPUT27 33 EQ ATTL INPUT25 92 EQ LPFON INPUT28 34 EQ ATTL INPUT26 93 EQ LPFON INPUT29 35 EQ ATTL INPUT27 94 EQ LPFON INPUT30 36 EQ ATTL INPUT28 95 EQ LPFON INPUT31 37 EQ ATTL INPUT29 102 EQ LPF ON INPUT32 38 ATT L INPUT30 103 EQ LPF ON ST IN1 39 EQ ATTL INPUT31 104 EQ LPF ON ST IN2 40 EQ ATTL INPUT32 105 EQ LPF ON ST IN3 41 EQ ATTL ST INIL 106 EQ LPF ON ST IN4 42 EQ ATT L ST INIR 107 NO ASSIGN 43 EQ ATTL ST IN2L 108 NO ASSIGN 44 EQ ATTL ST IN2R 109 NO ASSIGN 45 EQ ATTL ST IN3L 110 NO ASSIGN 46 EQ ATTL ST IN3R 111 NO ASSIGN 47 ATTL ST INAL 112 NO ASSIGN 48 EQ ATTL ST INAR 113 NO ASSIGN 49 NO ASSIGN 114 NO ASSIGN 50 NO ASSIGN 115 NO ASSIGN 51 NO ASSIGN 116 NO ASSIGN 52 NO ASSIGN 117 NO ASSIGN 53 NO ASSIGN 118 NO ASSIGN 54 NO ASSIGN 119 NO ASSIGN gt 55 NO ASSIGN 56 NO ASSIGN 2 57 NO ASSIGN 3 58 NO ASSIGN 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 302 Appendix C MIDI CHANNEL13 High Mid Low High Mid Low 0
253. Section SELECTED CHANNEL D a 85 CD PAN control This control adjusts the pan of the channel selected by the SEL button HIGH button 3 HIGH MID button LOW MID button 5 LOW button These buttons select the EQ band HIGH HIGH MID LOW MID LOW of the channel selected by the SEL button The corresponding button indicator of the currently selected band lights up 6 Q control This control adjusts the currently selected band Q FREQUENCY control This control adjusts the currently selected band frequency GAIN control This control adjusts the currently selected band gain 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Control Surface 21 SCENE MEMORY Section SCENE MEMORY STORE Y n RECALL CD STORE button This button enables you to store the current mix settings See page 165 for more informa tion on Scene Memories 2 Scene Up A Down Y buttons These buttons select a Scene to store or recall Pressing the Scene Up button increments the selection pressing the Scene Down V button decrements the selection Holding down either key increments or decrements the selection continuously 8 RECALL button This button recalls the Scene memory selected by the Scene Up A Down V buttons USER DEFINED KEYS Section rn USER DEFINED c c T Jz
254. T or e o 16 16 16 60 16 60 EZI GANEA EZI GAN EZJGAN EN EZI GAN ZA o e z E m E 3 8 16 60 16 0 16 0 16 EZI gt 4 GAIN GAN GAIN EI Q peak Q peak Q peak Q peak SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL i 15 PEKO o SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL D INPUT connectors INPUT A connectors are balanced XLR 3 31 type connectors that accept line level and microphone signals Each of the phantom 48V switches on the rear panel turns on or off the 48V phantom power feed to the corresponding input INPUT B connectors are bal anced TRS phone type connectors that accept line level and microphone signals The nom inal signal level of both types of connectors ranges from 60 dB to 4 dB Phantom power is not supplied to these connectors If you connect cables to INPUT A and INPUT B connectors of the same number only the signal from INPUT B is effective Tip hot VENTES 1 ground ale plug 3 cold 1 4 TRS phone plug Ring cold 2 hot Sleeve ground INPUT connectors 13 16 These balanced TRS phone type connectors accept line level signals The nominal signal level ranges from 26 dB to 4 dB INPUT 15 amp 16 connectors are available only when the AD 15 16 button is turn
255. TI3 STI4 CH1 CHI 0 Qo SLOT OUTPUT PATCH SLOT 4 7 1 By default as shown in this example the signals output from Bus Outs 1 8 are routed to the ADAT OUT connector Tracks 1 8 of the hard disk recorder in this example and to the slot output channels Tracks 9 16 of the hard disk recorder in this example If the Output Patch settings have been changed from the default settings recall Output Patch memory 00 from the Output Patch library page 175 Initial Track Recording This section explains how to make an initial recording to the hard disk recorder s tracks of a rhythm machine synthesizer bass guitar and microphone that are connected to INPUT connectors 1 12 Setting the Input Levels 1 Cue the musicians to play the musical instru ments connected to INPUT connectors 1 12 Si PAD switch while adjusting the corresponding PAD pa switches and GAIN controls so that the IE 2 pee PEAK indicators temporarily flash at the highest volumes GAIN EX PEAK indicator Tip The GAIN controls adjust the analog input sensitivity To make a high quality record ing with a wide dynamic range and little noise set the GAIN controls as high as possible while avoiding clipping 2 Press the LAYER 1 16 button Input Channel Layer 1 16 is now available for control from the channel strip section Tip Since the fader and ON button positi
256. TRIN 2 0 eo LeveL PHONES MONITOR PHONES OUT CD 2 IN OUT connectors These unbalanced RCA phono connectors input and output line level signals and are typ ically used to connect a master recorder When the AD15 16 selector in the AD Input section 8 is turned on pushed in the sig nals input at the 2TR IN connectors are routed to AD Input Channels 15 and 16 When the Monitor Source selector 2 is turned on pushed in you can monitor the 2TR IN signals from the MONITOR OUT connectors The 2TR OUT signals are always the same as the STEREO OUT signals Monitor Source selector This button selects the signals output from the MONITOR OUT connectors on the rear panel When this button is turned on pushed in you can monitor the signals input from the 2TR IN connectors When the button is turned off raised you can monitor the Stereo Out signals or soloed channel signals 3 MONITOR LEVEL control This control adjusts the monitoring level of the signals output from the MONITOR OUT connectors PHONES LEVEL control This control sets the level of the PHONES See page 131 for more information on moni toring through the headphones 5 PHONES jack You can connect a set of stereo headphones to this stereo phone jack The signals output from the MONITOR OUT connectors are also output from this jack 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 16 Chapter 2 Control Surface amp Rear Panel
257. Type amp Curve section The type and curve of the currently selected memory is displayed here Use the LAYER buttons to select layers then press the SEL buttons to select channels You can now store the selected channel comp settings and recall the compressor library memories to channels For details on storing and recalling memories see General Library Operation on page 175 Since ST IN Channels do not feature compressors if you select an ST IN Channel the message Stereo in has no Comp appears on the display 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 185 Using Libraries The following table lists the preset memories in the Compressor library Preset Name Type Description Compressor for reducing the overall volume level Use Comp COMP it on the stereo output during mixdown or with paired Input or Output Channels Expand EXPAND Expander template Compander H COMPAND H Hard kneed compressor template Compander 5 COMPAND S Soft kneed compressor template A Dr BD COMP Compressor for use with acoustic bass drum A Dr BD COMPAND H Hard kneed compander for use with acoustic bass drum A Dr SN COMP Compressor for use with acoustic snare drum A Dr SN EXPAND Expander for use with acoustic snare drum A Dr SN COMPAND S Soft kneed compander for use with acoustic snare drum Expander for use with acoustic tom toms whi
258. URROUND FR ST INAL 112 NO ASSIGN 48 SURROUND FR ST INAR 113 NO ASSIGN 49 NO ASSIGN 114 NO ASSIGN 50 NO ASSIGN 115 NO ASSIGN 51 NO ASSIGN 116 NO ASSIGN 52 NO ASSIGN 117 NO ASSIGN 53 NO ASSIGN 118 NO ASSIGN 54 NO ASSIGN 119 NO ASSIGN gt 55 NO ASSIGN 56 NO ASSIGN 2 57 NO ASSIGN 3 58 NO ASSIGN 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 306 Appendix C MIDI MIDI Data Format 1 DATA FORMAT 1 1 CHANNEL MESSAGE Command rx tx function 8n NOTE OFF TX Control the internal effects 9n NOTE ON TX Control the internal effects Bn CONTROL CHANGE rx tx Control parameters Cn PROGRAM CHANGE rx tx Switch scene memories 1 2 SYSTEM COMMON MESSAGE Command rx tx function F1 MIDI TIME CODE QUARTER TX MTC FRAME 1 3 SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE Command rx tx function F8 TIMING CLOCK TX MIDI clock FE ACTIVE SENSING TX Check MIDI cable connections FF RESET TX Clear running status 1 4 EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE 1 4 1 Real Time System Exclusive Command rx tx function FO 7F dd 06 F7 MMC tx COMMAND FO 7F dd 07 F7 MMC RESPONSE rx FO 7F dd 01 F7 MIDI TIME CODE rx MMC command MMC response MTC full message 1 4 2 System Exclusive Message 1 4 2 1 Bulk Dump Command rx tx function FO 43 On 7E F7 BULK DUMP BULK DUMP DATA DATA rx tx FO 43 2n 7E F7 BULK DUMP BULK DUMP REQUEST REQUEST rx tx The following data types of bulk
259. UT27 67 ON CHANNEL INPUT28 68 ON CHANNEL INPUT29 69 ON CHANNEL INPUT30 70 CHANNEL INPUT31 71 ON CHANNEL INPUT32 72 ON CHANNEL ST IN1 73 ON CHANNEL ST IN2 74 ON CHANNEL ST IN3 75 ON CHANNEL ST IN4 76 5 BUS1 77 ON MASTER BUS2 78 ON MASTER BUS3 79 ON MASTER BUS4 80 ON MASTER BUS5 81 ON MASTER BUS6 82 ON MASTER BUS7 83 ON MASTER BUS8 84 NO ASSIGN 85 NO ASSIGN 86 NO ASSIGN 87 NO ASSIGN 88 NO ASSIGN 89 PAN CHANNEL INPUT25 90 PAN CHANNEL INPUT26 91 PAN CHANNEL INPUT27 92 PAN CHANNEL INPUT28 93 PAN CHANNEL INPUT29 94 PAN CHANNEL INPUT30 95 PAN CHANNEL INPUT31 102 PAN CHANNEL INPUT32 103 PAN CHANNEL ST INIL 104 PAN CHANNEL ST INTR 105 PAN CHANNEL ST IN2L 106 PAN CHANNEL ST IN2R 107 PAN CHANNEL ST IN3L 108 PAN CHANNEL ST IN3R 109 PAN CHANNEL ST INAL 110 PAN CHANNEL ST INAR 111 ON MASTER AUX1 112 ON MASTER AUX2 113 ON MASTER AUX3 114 ON MASTER AUX4 115 ON MASTER AUXS 116 ON MASTER AUX6 117 ON MASTER AUX7 118 ON MASTER AUX8 119 NO ASSIGN 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual gt 5 o 2 a x 292 Appendix C MIDI
260. UT31 8 EQ GLOWH INPUT32 9 EQ GLOWH ST IN1 10 EQ GLOWH ST IN2 11 EQ G LOW H ST IN3 12 EQ G LOW H ST IN4 13 NO ASSIGN 14 NO ASSIGN 15 NO ASSIGN 16 NO ASSIGN 17 NO ASSIGN 18 NO ASSIGN 19 NO ASSIGN 20 NO ASSIGN 21 NO ASSIGN 22 NO ASSIGN 23 NO ASSIGN 24 NO ASSIGN 25 NO ASSIGN 26 NO ASSIGN 27 NO ASSIGN 28 NO ASSIGN 29 NO ASSIGN 30 NO ASSIGN 31 NO ASSIGN 32 NO ASSIGN 33 EQ G LOW L INPUT25 34 EQ G LOW L INPUT26 35 EQ G LOW L INPUT27 36 EQ GLOWL INPUT28 37 EQ GLOWL INPUT29 38 EQ GLOWL INPUT3O 39 EQ GLOWL INPUT31 40 EQ GLOWL INPUT32 41 EQ GLOWL ST IN1 42 EQ GLOWL ST IN2 43 EQ GLOWL ST IN3 44 EQ GLOWL ST IN4 45 NO ASSIGN 46 NO ASSIGN 47 NO ASSIGN 48 NO ASSIGN 49 NO ASSIGN 50 NO ASSIGN 51 NO ASSIGN 52 NO ASSIGN 53 NO ASSIGN 54 NO ASSIGN 55 NO ASSIGN 56 NO ASSIGN 57 NO ASSIGN 58 NO ASSIGN Initial Parameter to Control Change Table 293 High Mid Low 59 NO ASSIGN 60 NO ASSIGN 61 NO ASSIGN 62 NO ASSIGN 63 NO ASSIGN 64 EQ FLOW INPUT25 65 EQ F LOW INPUT26 66 EQ F LOW INPUT27 67 EQ F LOW INPUT28 68 EQ F LOW INPUT29 69 EQ F LOW INPUT30 70 E
261. W MONI STATUS DAW CREATE GROUP Pressing the key to which this function is assigned enables you to view the current monitoring mode and the channel strip type Pressing the key to which this function is assigned enables you to execute the function specified in the menu of the Pro Tools Group list DAW SUSPEND GROUP Suspends all mix groups temporarily Press the button again to undo suspen sion DAW WIN TRANSPORT Shows or hides the Transport window DAW WIN INSERT Shows or hides the Insert window DAW WIN MIX EDIT Toggles between the Mix window and Edit window Both windows are not displayed at the same time DAW WIN MEM LOC Shows or hides the Memory Locations window DAW WIN STATUS Shows or hides the Status window DAW UNDO Executes the Edit menu s Undo Redo command DAW SAVE Executes the Edit menu s Save command DAW EDIT MODE Pressing the button to which this function is assigned repeatedly selects Shuffle Slip Spot or Grid edit mode in this order DAW EDIT TOOL Pressing the button to which this function is assigned repeatedly selects one of seven edit tools Zoomer Trimmer Selector Grabber Smart Tool Scrubber and Pencil in this order 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Pro Tools Remote Layer 199 Parameter Function DAW SHIFT ADD Functions in the same way as Macintosh keyboard keys Shift Option Con
262. Yamaha Corporation 2004 Yamaha Corporation chlorine free ECF paper with soy ink WE05050 6041PAP2 3 06CO Printed in Japan
263. You can patch signals input from the INPUT connectors to any Input Channels See page 121 for information on patching input signals to Input Channels e INSERT I O connectors m These TRS type phone connectors are used to insert external as devices such as effects processors into AD Input Channels INSERT I O INSERT Phantom Power EHANTOM AN Inputs 1 through 12 feature switchable 48V phantom ne powering for use with condenser type microphones and direct boxes The phantom 48V switches on the rear panel turn on or off the 48V phantom power feed to the corresponding inputs e PAD switches Inputs 1 through 12 feature pad switches which attenuate input sig nals by 20 dB These switches are effective on both INPUT A and B signals 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual O I Je36iq 8 a 70 Chapter 6 Analog I O amp Digital I O GAIN controls Inputs 1 through 16 feature rotary gain controls that adjust input E FE sensitivity Input sensitivity for INPUT connectors 1 12 ranges from IX 16 dB to 60 dB when the Pad is off and from 4 dB to 40 dB e when the Pad is on Input sensitivity for INPUT connectors 13 16 ranges from 4 dB to 26 dB PEAK amp SIGNAL Indicators ps The SIGNAL indicator lights up when the input signal level at INPUTS 1 16 exceeds 34 dB The PEAK indicator lights up when the
264. a Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia Ciudad de Panam Panam Tel 4 507 269 5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM Yamaha Kemble Music U K Ltd Sherbourne Drive Tilbrook Milton Keynes MK7 8BL England Tel 01908 366700 GERMANY Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstra e 22 34 25462 Rellingen Germany Tel 04101 3030 SWITZERLAND LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Branch Switzerland Seefeldstrasse 94 8008 Ziirich Switzerland Tel 01 383 3990 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20 A 1100 Wien Austria Tel 01 60203900 CZECH REPUBLIC SLOVAKIA HUNGARY SLOVENIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Branch Austria CEE Department Schleiergasse 20 A 1100 Wien Austria Tel 01 602039025 PA13 Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgef hrten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragsh ndlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsl ndern erh ltlich Para detalles sobre productos contacte su tienda Yamaha m s cercana el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo POLAND Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Sp z o o Oddzial w Polsce ul 17 Stycznia 56 PL 02 146 Warszawa Poland Tel 022 868 07 57 THE NETHERLANDS BELGIUM LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Branch Benelux Clarissenhof 5 b 4133 AB Vianen The Netherlands Tel 0347 358 040 FRANCE Yamaha Musique France BP 70 77312 Marne la Vall e Cedex 2 France Tel 01 64 61
265. a bulk dump is received it is immediately written into the specified memory When a bulk dump request is received a bulk dump is immediately transmit ted Transmission This message is transmitted on the Tx CH by key operations in the MI DI BULK DUMP screen A bulk dump is transmitted on the Rx CH in response to a bulk dump request The data area is handled by converting seven words of 8 bit data into eight words of 7 bit data Conversion from actual data into bulk data d 0 6 actual data b 0 7 bulk data b 0 0 for I 0 I lt 7 1 if d 1 amp 0x80 b 0 1 lt lt 6 1 b I 1 d I amp Ox7F Restoration from bulk data into actual data d 0 6 actual data b 0 7 bulk data for I 0 I lt 7 1 b 0 lt lt 1 b I 1 0x80 amp b 0 2 8 2 1 Scene memory bulk dump format compress The 01V96 can transmit and receive scene memories in compressed form STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0000nnnn On n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump COUNT HIGH ch data count ch 128 cl COUNT LOW cl 01001100 4C U 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000011 43 00111001 39 9 00110011 33 3 DATA NAME 01101101 6D m Ommmmmmm mh m 0 99 256 8192 Scene0 99 EDIT BUFFER UNDO Ommmmmmm mi Rec
266. a single Pro Tools channel press the SEL button that corresponds to the desired channel To select multiple Pro Tools channels simultaneously while holding down one SEL but ton press the SEL buttons of the other channels you wish to add Press the SEL buttons again to cancel the selection Setting Channel Levels 1 Make sure that the FADER MODE HOME button indicator is lit steadily If the indicator is flashing press the HOME button to turn on the button indicator 0430u0 2 Operate the faders to set channel levels Press and hold down the AUX 6 button and press the desired SEL button to reset the corresponding channel fader level 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 200 Chapter 17 Remote Control Muting Channels To mute Pro Tools channels press the ON buttons The ON button indicators of muted channels turn off Grouped channels are muted together Press the ON buttons again to unmute channels The ON button indicators of unmuted channels light up There are two mute modes in Pro Tools Implicit mute and Explicit mute You can check the mute mode by viewing the ON button indicators Implicit mute This is a forced mute mode in which the channels are muted because other channels are soloed In this mode the ON but ton indicators flash Explicit mute In this mode the channels are turned off manually In this mode the ON button indicato
267. ade STEREO R CASSOLOL Cascade SOLO L CASSOLOL Cascade SOLO L CASSOLOR Cascade SOLO R CASSOLOR Cascade SOLO R 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Initial Output Patch Settings 255 Initial Output Patch Settings SLOT 17 NONE SLOTI 1 BUS1 18 NONE SLOTI 2 BUS2 19 NONE SLOTI 3 BUS3 20 NONE SLOTI 4 BUS4 21 NONE SLOTI 5 BUSS 22 NONE SLOTI 6 BUS6 23 NONE SLOTI 7 BUS7 24 NONE SLOTI 8 BUS8 25 NONE SLOT1 9 BUS1 26 NONE SLOT1 10 BUS2 27 NONE SLOT1 11 BUS3 28 NONE SLOT1 12 BUS4 29 NONE SLOT1 13 BUSS 30 NONE SLOT1 14 BUS 31 NONE SLOTI 15 BUS7 32 NONE Sed gt 2TR OUT Digital ADAT OUT 1L STL RS STR 2 BUS2 3 BUS3 CHANNEL NAME 4 BUS4 CHANNEL ID SHORT LONG 5 BUSS AUX1 6 BUS6 AUX2 7 BUS7 AUX3 8 BUS8 AUX4 AUXS OMNI OUT AUX6 1 AUX7 2 AUX2 AUX8 3 AUX3 BUS 4 AUX4 BUS2 BUS3 DIRECT OUT BUS4 BUS5 1 ADATI BUS6 BUS6 BUS6 BUS6 2 ADAT2 BUS7 BUS7 BUS7 BUS7 3 ADAT3 BUS8 BUS8 BUS8 BUS8 4 ADAT4 STEREO ST ST STEREO 5 ADAT5 6 ADAT6 7 ADAT7 8 ADATS 9 SLOT 1 10 SLOT 2 11 SLOT 3 12 SLOT 4 13 SLOT 5 3 14 SLOT 6 3 15 SLOT 7 x 16 SLOT 8 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 256
268. age to assign the input and output signals of Effects processors 1 4 5 Level meters These meters indicate the input or output levels of the currently selected Effects proces sor Select the IN button or OUT button to display the input levels or output levels respectively For details on storing and recalling programs see General Library Operation on page 175 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 181 Using Libraries The following tables list the preset effects programs in the Effects library Reverbs Preset Name Reverb Hall Type REVERB HALL Description Concert hall reverberation simulation with gate Reverb Room REVERB ROOM Room reverberation simulation with gate Reverb Stage REVERB STAGE Reverb designed for vocals with gate Reverb Plate REVERB PLATE Plate reverb simulation with gate Early Ref EARLY REF Early reflections without the subsequent reverb Gate Reverb GATE REVERB Gated early reflections Reverse Gate REVERSE GATE Gated reverse early reflections No Preset Name Type Description 8 Mono Delay MONO DELAY Simple mono delay 9 Stereo Delay STEREO DELAY Simple stereo delay 10 Mod delay MOD DELAY Simple repeat delay with modulation 11 Delay LCR DELAY LCR 3 tap left center right delay 12 Echo ECHO Stereo delay with crossed left right feedback
269. age 123 SLOT This slot allows you to install an optional mini YGDAI Yamaha General Digital Audio Interface I O card This card offers AD DA conversion and various analog I O options and digital I O interfaces in all the popular digital audio interconnect formats including AES EBU ADAT and Tascam You can patch signals input at these card connectors to any Input Channels or Insert Ins see page 122 You can patch the card outputs to Bus Outs or Input Channel Direct Outs see page 125 The following mini YGDAI I O cards are currently available Card Format In Out Resolution Sampling Rate Connectors MY8 AD 20 bit 44 1 48 kHz 8 Phone jack balanced x8 MY8 AD24 Analog in 24 bit 44 1 48 kHz MY4 AD 4 XLR 3 31 type balanced x4 MY8 AD96 8 24 bit 44 1 48 88 2 96 kHz D sub 25 pin MY4 DA 4 20 bit 44 1 48 kHz XLR 3 32 type balanced x4 Analog out MY8 DA96 8 D sub 25 pin 24 bit 44 1 48 88 2 96 kHz 8 96 Analog 8 Euroblock x4 in out MY8 AE 8 8 D sub 25 pin MY16 AE2 AES EBU I O 16 16 24 bit 44 1 48 kHz MY8 AEB 8 8 BNC connector x8 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual O I Je36iq 8 Bojeuy a 72 Chapter 6 Analog I O amp Digital I O Card Format In Out Resolution Sampling Rate Connectors MY8 AE96 AES EBU I O 8 8
270. alanced PHONES 108 8 Phones 4 mW 25 mW _ Stereo Bea TRS 40 Q Phones 12 mW 75 mW Unbalanced 1 XLR 3 32 type connectors are balanced 12GND 2 HOT 3 COLD 2 Phone jacks are balanced Tip HOT Ring COLD Sleeve GND 3 CH INSERT IN OUT phone jacks are unbalanced Tip OUTPUT Ring INPUT Sleeve GND 4 PHONES stereo phone jack is unbalanced Tip LEFT Ring RIGHT Sleeve GND In these specifications when dB represents a specific voltage 0 dB is referenced to 0 775 Vrms 2TR OUT L R levels 0 dBV is referenced to 1 00 Vrms All output DA converters are 24 bit 128 times oversampling fs 44 1 48 kHz 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Digital Input Spec 287 Digital Input Spec Input Format Data length Level Connector 2TR IN DIGITAL IEC 60958 24 bit 0 5 Vpp 75 RCA pin jack ADAT IN ADAT 24 bit OPTICAL 1 ALESIS proprietary multichannel optical digital interface format Digital Output Spec Output Format Data length Level Connector 1 2TR OUT DIGITAL IEC 60958 24 bit 0 5V pp 75 RCA pin jack Consumer use ADAT OUT ADAT 24 bit OPTICAL 1 Channel status of 2TR OUT DIGITAL Type linear PCM Category code Digital signal mixer Copy prohibit NO Emphasi
271. amp 3 when channels are not paired See page 92 for more information Viewing the Pan Fader and Aux Send Level Settings To display the View Fader page of a certain Input Channel use the corresponding SEL button to select the desired channel then press the DISPLAY ACCESS VIEW button repeatedly Move the cursor to a parameter you wish to change then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to modify the setting 00 00 Pos 5 6 00 00 Pos D PAN ON Fader section This control adjusts the currently selected Input Channel s Pan parameter Press the ENTER button to reset the Pan control to Center 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Setting the Input Channels from the Display 89 ON OFF button This button turns on or off the currently selected Input Chan nel This parameter sets the fader position of the currently selected Input Channel The fader knob is highlighted when the fader is set to 0 0 dB Press the ENTER button to reset the Fader to 0 0 dB 2 SURROUND PAN section SURROUND PAN The Surround pan parameters for the currently selected Input Channel are displayed only when a Surround mode is selected See page 135 for more information on Surround pan 8 BUS ROUTING FOLLOW PAN section BUS ROUTING This section enables you to select a destination Bus for the sel
272. annels 1 16 DLY 17 32 page This page enables you to set the Delay function for Input Channels 17 32 The parameters on these two pages and the procedure for setting them are the same INS DLY Initial Data 5112 5113 STI4 OO um mm INPUT CH1 16 DELAY DELAY SCALE D iussa erm rom ac i roz SE 3 34005 CE msec 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 samr e 9 MIX 100 1 100 100 1 100 100 100 FB GAIN i ex 9 10 11 12 15 14 i me Ger Gen en msecl 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 samr e e MIX 100 100 1 100 100 100 100 100 FB GAIN PHASE INSERT OLY 1 16 Q DELAY SCALE The following buttons determine the units of the delay value shown below the msec value metet nennen Units are set to meters Eee Units are set to feet Units are set to samples Units are set to beats frame Units are set to timecode frames 2 GANG button When this button is turned on highlighted the delay time for each channel in a chan nel pair can be set simultaneously When this option is turned off the delay time can be set for each channel in a channel pair individually 3 Channel section You can se
273. aracters and press the ENTER button to enter them into the title The cursor moves to the right automatically as each character is entered Use the Parameter wheel to move the cursor within the title Use the SHIFT LOCK button to select uppercase or lowercase characters and use the SPC button to enter a space To insert a space at the cursor position and move subsequent characters to the right move the cursor to the INS button and press ENTER To delete the character at the cursor position and move subsequent characters to the left move the cursor to the DEL button and press ENTER When you have finished move the cursor to the OK button then press ENTER to confirm the title To cancel the title entry move the cursor to the CANCEL button then press ENTER 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Selecting Layers 31 Selecting Layers Input Channels and Output Channels Bus Outs amp Aux Outs are arranged into layers as illustrated below There are four layers altogether Input Channel Layer 17 32 5225 22 soiseg w Master Layer lt 2 Remote Layer 227022004 The currently selected layer determines the function of the channel strip SEL buttons SOLO buttons ON buttons and faders Use the LAYER buttons to select a layer you wish to edit using the channel strip controls a 1 16 17 52 MASTER REMOTE The followin
274. arameter 1 you wish to change and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to modify the patching 3 Press ENTER to confirm the change Tip To restore the default patching recall Output Patch memory 00 see page 179 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual dnjas pue suondauu0D ES 46 Chapter 4 Connections and Setup 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Tutorial 47 5 Tutorial This chapter describes how to use the 01V96 for multitrack recording and mixdown using an example in which the 01V 96 is connected to a digital multitrack recorder A rhythm machine guitar bass and keyboard are recorded Connections and Setup 1 Connect a digital MTR musical instruments and a microphone to the 01V96 In this example a 16 track hard disk recorder is connected to the ADAT IN and OUT con nectors on the rear panel and the ADAT IN and OUT connectors on an installed MY8 AT card See page 38 for connection details Hard disk recorder Headphone amplifier Guitar or bass ADAT IN connector ADAT OUT connector
275. arameter then press ENTER to display the Library page for the selected effects processor button Move the cursor to this button then press ENTER to display the Patch Effect page which enables you to assign signals to the inputs and outputs of Effects processors 1 4 5 MIX BALANCE This parameter knob enables you to set the balance between wet and dry signals When the parameter is set to 0 only the dry signal is heard When set to 100 only the wet signal is heard Turn on the BYPASS button to bypass the currently selected effects pro cessor 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 53299 1 162 Chapter 14 Internal Effects 6 TEMPO This section enables you to set the tempo and interval of the selected effects and displays certain parameters only when certain effect types are selected Use the parameter control on the left side of this section to adjust the value between 25BPM and 300BPM When the MIDI CLK button is on the 01V96 updates the TEMPO data BPM based on the MIDI Clock information received at the MIDI IN port You can also specify the tempo by moving the cursor to the TAP TEMPO button and double clicking the ENTER button The 01V96 calculates the tempo based on the time interval between your two taps clicks on the ENTER button Tip If the Freeze effect is selected the TEMPO section displays the record and playback buttons for using the effect the recording data condition an
276. arameter no Channel no End of exclusive Setup memory System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel MODEL ID digital mixer 01V96 Setup data Element no If ee is 0 ee is expanded to two bytes Parameter no Channel no data EOX 11110111 F7 2 8 3 7 Parameter request STATUS 11110000 FO ID No 01000011 43 SUB STATUS 0O0011nnnn GROUP ID 00111110 3E MODEL ID 00001101 OD ADDRESS 00000011 03 ee PP ccccece ec EOX 11110111 F7 2 8 3 8 Parameter change STATUS 11110000 FO ID No 01000011 43 SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n GROUP ID 00111110 3E MODEL ID 00001101 OD ADDRESS 00000100 04 0eeeeeee ee Oppppppp pp cc DATA Oddddddd dd EOX 11110111 F7 2 8 3 9 Parameter request STATUS 11110000 FO ID No 01000011 43 SUB STATUS 0O0011nnnn GROUP ID 00111110 3E MODEL ID 00001101 OD ADDRESS 00000100 04 ee cccceec cc EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive Setup memory System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel MODEL ID digital mixer 01V96 Setup data Element no If ee is 0 ee is expanded to two bytes Parameter no Channel no End of exclusive Backup memory System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel MODEL ID
277. arameters The dynamics effects for each channel strip include a Gate section only for Input Chan nels and a Comp section The Gate section includes Gate and Ducking types The Comp section includes Compressor Expander Compander Hard COMP H and Compander Soft COMP S types 275 Dynamics Parameters GATE Section Only for Input Channels GATE A gate attenuates signals below a set THRESHOLD level by a specified amount RANGE Parameter THRESHOLD dB Range 54 0 to 0 0 541 points Description This determines the level at which the gate effect is applied RANGE dB 70 to 0 71 points This determines the amount of attenuation when the gate closes ATTACK ms 0 120 121 points This determines how fast the gate opens when the signal exceeds the threshold level HOLD ms 44 1kHz 0 02 ms 2 13 sec 48kHz 0 02 ms 1 96 sec 88 2kHz 0 01 ms 1 06 sec 96kHz 0 01 ms 981 ms 160 points This determines how long the gate stays open once the trigger signal has fallen below the thresh old DECAY ms 44 1kHz 6 ms 46 0 sec 48kHz 5 ms 42 3 sec 88 2kHz 3 ms 23 0 sec 96kHz 3 ms 21 1 sec 160 points This determines how fast the gate closes once the hold time has expired The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB 1 O Characteristics THRESHOLD LA S
278. ard Release ms 250 Threshold dB 9 Ratio 1 2 5 Attack ms 17 Out gain dB 1 0 Knee hard Release ms 238 Threshold dB 18 Ratio 1 3 5 Attack ms 7 Out gain dB 6 0 Knee 2 Release ms 174 Threshold dB 8 Ratio 1 3 5 Attack ms 7 Out gain dB 2 5 Knee 4 Release ms 261 Threshold dB 10 Ratio 1 2 5 Attack ms 5 Out gain dB 1 5 Knee 2 Release ms 238 Threshold dB 11 Ratio 1 2 Attack ms 33 Out gain dB 1 5 Knee 2 Release ms 749 Threshold dB 12 Ratio 1 1 5 Attack ms 93 Out gain dB 1 5 Knee 4 Release ms 1 35 5 gt 5 o 2 2 274 Appendix A Parameter Lists 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Title Type Parameter Value Threshold dB 17 Ratio 1 1 5 21 Strings3 COMP Attack ms 76 Out gain dB 2 5 Knee 2 Release ms 186 Threshold dB 18 Ratio 1 1 7 22 BrassSection COMP Attack ns 2 Out gain dB 4 0 Knee 1 Release ms 226 Threshold dB 13 Ratio 1 2 23 Syn Pad COMP Attack ms E Out gain dB 2 0 Knee 1 Release ms 238 Threshold dB 18 Ratio 1 1 7 Attack ms 8 24 SamplingPerc COMPAND S Out gain dB 2 5 Width dB 18 Release ms 238 Threshold dB 14 Ratio 1 2 d Attack ms 2 25 Sampling BD COMP i Out gain dB 3 5 Knee 4 Rele
279. are available for the Automation mode setting pressing the SEL buttons will cause the Fader Touch or Untouch command to be transmitted to Pro Tools This is useful for Automation punch in and out recording transmitted Note Operating a fader also causes the Fader Touch command to be transmitted Also when ever the transport mode changes such as Play and Stop the Fader Untouch command is Depending on the currently selected Automation mode the channel SEL button indica tors operate as follows User Defined Keys Pro Tools Automation SEL Button Indicators Function Mode DAW AUTO WRITE Auto write DAW AUTO TOUTCH ato touch Flashing red Record Ready Red Recording DAW AUTO LATCH Auto latch DAW AUTO READ Auto read Illuminated steadily DAW AUTO OFF Auto off Off 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 0430u0 206 Chapter 17 Remote Control Nuendo Cubase SX Remote Layer You can remotely control Nuendo and Cubase SX using the Remote Layer Configuring Computers 1 Connect the 01V96 to your computer using a USB cable and install the required USB driver included on the 01V96 CD ROM Refer to the Studio Manager installation guide for more information on installing the driver 2 Launch Nuendo Cubase SX select the Device Setup menu and set up Nuendo Cubase SX so that the 01V96 can communicate with the software Refer to the Nuendo Cubase SX Use
280. are not synching to each other the 01V96 displays the message Sync Error If this happens check the ADAT IN and OUT connections digital I O card connection and the sampling frequency setting on each device 3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch In Patch page appears On this page make sure that the Input Patch settings remain set to default values as shown below PATCH Initial Data CHi CHi INPUT PATCH INPUT 5 1L IR ZL 2R SL 4 IN PATCH FL INPUT INS AR EFFECT ARCHSCHDE gt iy By default as shown in this example the signals input at INPUT connectors 1 16 are routed to Input Channels 1 16 The signals input at the ADAT IN connector the Track 1 8 signals from the hard disk recorder in this example are routed to Input Channels 17 24 and the signals input from the slot the Track 9 16 signals from the hard disk recorder are routed to Input Channels 25 32 If the Input Patch settings have been changed from the default settings recall Input Patch memory 00 from the Input Patch library page 175 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Initial Track Recording 49 4 Press the PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch Out Patch page appears On this page make sure that the Output Patch settings remain set to default values as shown below PATCH Initial Data 8 5111 5112 S
281. aries depending on the zoom setting in the Pro Tools Edit window 6 To cancel the Scrub or Shuttle function press the User Defined button or DAW SHUTTLE to which you assigned the DAW SCRUB parameter in Step 1 Alternatively you can cancel the Scrub or Shuttle function by pressing the User Defined button to which the DAW STOP parameter is assigned The Scrub function is automatically cancelled if you commence playback or fast forward Note The Scrub Shuttle operation might be stopped unexpectedly by Pro Tools Therefore whenever you use the Scrub or Shuttle function make sure that the PWHEEL MODE param eter indicates SCRUB or SHUTTLE You can check the Scrub Shuttle function status by viewing the corresponding User Defined button indicator Automation If you assign a parameter that controls Pro Tools Automation mode such as DAW Auto Read DAW Auto Touch etc to one of the User Defined buttons you can control the Auto mation settings for each channel by using that User Defined button See page 235 for more information on assigning parameters to User Defined buttons Press the STEREO OUT channel SEL button The button indicator lights up and the Channel 1 16 SEL buttons become available for the Automation mode setting Press the desired channel SEL buttons while pressing the programmed User Defined but ton to switch the corresponding channels Automation settings While the channel SEL buttons
282. ase ms 35 Threshold dB 18 Ratio 1 4 26 Sampling SN COMP m Out gain dB 8 0 Knee hard Release ms 354 Threshold dB 23 Ratio 1 20 Attack ms 15 27 Hip Comp COMPAND S Out gain dB 0 0 Width dB 15 Release ms 163 Threshold dB 20 Ratio 1 2 5 28 Solo Vocall COMP Atacs ms Out gain dB 2 0 Knee 1 Release ms 342 Threshold dB 8 Ratio 1 2 5 29 Solo Vocal2 COMP ms 28 Out gain dB 1 5 Knee 3 Release ms 331 Threshold dB 9 Ratio 1 1 7 30 Chorus COMP Aitac ms ud Out gain dB 2 5 Knee 2 Release ms 226 36 Title Click Erase Announcer Limiter1 Limiter2 Total Comp1 Total Comp2 Type EXPAND COMPAND H COMPAND S COMP COMP COMP Parameter Value Threshold dB 33 Ratio 1 2 Attack ms 1 Out gain dB 2 0 Knee 2 Release ms 284 Threshold dB 14 Ratio 1 2 5 Attack ms 1 Out gain dB 2 5 Width dB 18 Release ms 180 Threshold dB 9 Ratio 1 3 Attack ms 20 Out gain dB 3 0 Width dB 90 Release ms 3 905 Threshold dB 0 Ratio 1 Attack ms 0 Out gain dB 0 0 Knee hard Release ms 319 Threshold dB 18 Ratio 1 3 5 Attack ms 94 Out gain dB 2 5 Knee hard Release ms 447 Threshold dB 16 Ratio 1 6 Attack ms 11 Out gain dB 6 0 Knee 1 Release ms 180 Dynamics P
283. ays the currently patched signal path PATCH Initial Data CH1 CH1 OO ai SLOT OUTPUT PATCH CD SLOT 1 16 These parameter boxes set the routing of Slot Channel 1 16 signals 2 ADAT 1 8 These parameter boxes set the routing of ADAT OUT connector output channel 1 8 sig nals 8 OMNI 1 4 These parameter boxes set the routing of OMNI OUT connector 1 4 signals The parameter indicators are explained below Parameter value Description No assignment BUS1 BUS8 Bus Out 1 8 signal AUX1 AUX8 Aux Out 1 8 signal STL R Stereo Out signal INS CH1 INS CH32 Input Channel 1 32 Insert Out INS BUS1 INS BUS8 amp Bus Out 1 8 Insert Out INS AUX1 INS AUX8 Aux Out 1 8 Insert Out INS ST L ST R Stereo Out Insert Out CAS BUS1 BUS8 Bus 1 8 Cascade Outs CAS AUX1 AUX8 Aux Bus 1 8 Cascade Outs CAS ST L ST R Stereo Bus Cascade Outs CASSOLOL CASSOLOR Solo Bus Cascade Outs Move the cursor to a patch parameter you wish to change then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to modify the patching Press ENTER to confirm the change Tip You can store the Output Patch settings to the Output Patch library Refer to Chapter 16 for more information 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Patching Direct Outs 125 Patching the 2TR Digital Outputs Follow the steps below to change the signal path patched to the 2TR OUT DIGITAL con nector 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS
284. bration operation The 01V96 will start in normal mode 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual suonounj Jou1O 246 Chapter 19 Other Functions 11 If there is any problem with the calibration result the 01V96 displays the following window Also the channel SEL button indicator of a problematic fader flashes 81V96 FADER CALIBRATION Calibration Data is Not Correct CONTINUE 2 START FROM THE BEGINNING 3 QUIT ANYWAY Press ENTER to Execute Use the cursor buttons to select one of the following three options then press ENTER e CONTINUE eere While the SEL button indicator of a problem atic fader is flashing the calibration process returns to Step 5 START FROM THE BEGINNING The calibration process returns to Step 2 QUIT ANYWAY The 01V96 cancels the calibration operation and starts in normal mode The standard setting will be applied to problematic faders If this window appears after you try the calibration process several times consult your near est Yamaha dealer If the calibration data has some problems the 01V96 displays the following window when it starts up In this case calibrate the position of the faders specified in the window MESSAGE Fader calibration data error Channel 4 LOK 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual USER DEFINED KEYS Appendix A Parameter Lists 247
285. button to reset the currently selected Pan control to center 2 MODE The MODE parameter determines how paired Input Channels are panned There are three Pan modes as follows INDIVIDUAL In Individual mode paired Input Channel 1 w 2 pan controls operate independently 5 CENTER CENTER GANG kunst In Gang mode paired Input Channel pan controls operate in unison maintaining the A N current pan range R14 INV In Inverse Gang mode paired Input Channel 19 2 pan controls operate in unison but move in opposite directions Lei Rei 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 86 Chapter 7 Input Channels Tip You can adjust the pan setting for the ST IN Channels L amp R separately You can also adjust the pan setting for the Input Channels using the PAN control in the SELECTED CHANNEL section Surround Pan is available when the 01V96 is in Surround mode Refer to Chapter 12 for more information on Surround Pan Routing Input Channels You can route each Input Channel to the Stereo Bus Bus 1 8 or its own Direct Out With the default setting signals are routed only to the Stereo Bus However you can patch signals to a single or multiple destinations if necessary 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PAN ROUTING button repeatedly until the page listed below that contains the desired channels appears ROUT1 16 page This page enables you to cha
286. buttons USER DEFINE SELECT USER DEFINED 1 ASSIGN SCENE XX Recall Channel Lib Effect Byrass 5 No Assign 1 Recall 1 Recall 4 Movethe cursor to the left column then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to select a function you wish to assign A function is selected when it appears inside the dotted box See page 247 for a complete list of assignable functions 5 Inthe same way set the center and right column The items that appear in the center and right columns vary depending on the function selected in Step 4 6 To close the window move the cursor to the YES button then press ENTER When the window closes the specified function is assigned to the selected User Defined button To cancel the assignment move the cursor to the CANCEL button then press ENTER 7 If you assigned functions that require numbers such as recalling a Scene or library memory move the cursor to the extra parameter box shown on the right and specify the number Tip You can store User Defined Keys banks to a computer hard disk using the included Studio Manager software Be sure to back up important data Youcan also store the assignment data to an external device such as a MIDI data filer by using MIDI Bulk Dump see page 226 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Using Operation Lock 237 Using Operation Lock The 01V96 features an Operation Lock function that prevents uni
287. by assigning the surround parameters to MIDI Control Changes see page 220 6 To link the surround pan settings of two channels displayed on the page turn on the ST LINK button Use the PATTERN parameter box below the ST LINK button to specify how you want the linked surround pan to move 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 146 Chapter 12 Surround Pan The following table shows how the sound images on two linked channels move when dif ferent trajectory patterns and stereo link patterns are combined A solid line indicates the movement of the selected channel and a dotted line indicates the movement of the linked partner 7 list multiple channel surround pan settings press the PAN ROUTING button repeatedly until the Pan Route Surr1 16 Surr17 32 or Surr ST IN page appears These pages display and enable you to edit the surround pan settings for 16 channels PAN ROUTE Initial Data 5112 sais 5114 CHT CHI 0 nm INPUT CH1 16 SURROUND 1 Surround pan graphs These graphs display the trajectory patterns and the current pan positions for the Input Channels 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Surround Panning 147 2 parameter box This parameter box enables you to move the surround pan setting of the selected chan nel left and right 3 parameter box This parameter box enables you to move the surround pan setting of the selected chan nel front an
288. cators IE L GAIN control temporarily flash at the highest volumes can ES PEAK indicator Press the LAYER 1 16 button Input Channel Layer 1 16 is now available for control from the channel strip section Press the DISPLAY ACCESS HOME button then press the F1 button to dis play the Meter CH1 32 page METER Initial Data a SH 571257135714 CHS CH8 0 oO o POSITION PEAK HOLD nn n DD og DD OD DD OD co co co 123 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 2 AST TW A MASTER AR EFFECT Make sure that ON button indicators for the channels to which the instru ments or microphone are connected are lit then raise the corresponding faders to OdB Turn off the ON buttons for the channels not in use While the musicians play the musical instruments check the input channel levels using the level meters on the display 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Overdubbing to Other Tracks 61 Routing Signals Follow the steps below to route the Input Channel 1 and 2 signals to Slot Channels 1 and 2 directly so that the signals will be recorded to Tracks 9 and 10 on the digital MTR 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch Direct Out page appears 2 Move the cursor to the parameter box for the Input
289. ce D Broadcast Digital broadcast reception Instruments A D Conv Musical instrument microphone and sources that generate string signals A D converter without copyright information A D Conv with C A D converter with copyright information Solid Memory Solid memory device Experimental Experimental device Unknown Unknown Note AES EBU appears in the Category row when you are monitoring IEC958 Part 3 AES EBU Professional format signals that do not include Category Code Bit 6 COPY Indicates the status of copy protection information included in the IEC958 Part2 S PDIF Consumer format signals OK appears if copying is allowed Prohibit appears if copy protected 3 If you select the SLOT button for a slot that has an MY 16 AE card installed use the 01 08 and 09 16 but tons located in the lower right corner of the screen to select a channel group you wish to display Dithering Digital Outputs When digital audio is transferred to lower resolution systems truncated bits may generate unpleasant noise To cancel the audible effect of this noise a small complement of noise is intentionally added to the digital outputs This process is called dithering On the 01V96 you can dither the 2TR Digital Outputs and Slot Outputs For example you can apply dithering to the 01V96 stereo mix data and record to a 16 bit DAT
290. ch Input Channel for the currently selected Aux Send Move the cursor to the FIXED or VARIABLE button in the MODE section for the currently selected Aux Send to select a mode Fixed Mode In this mode Aux Send levels are fixed at nominal 0 0 dB Also channel ON OFF buttons appear instead of the Send level rotary controls and PRE POST buttons AUXI Initial Data a STI2 STI3 STI4 CHi CHi x EDIT mnl Auxt SEND MODE ana 1 2 4 5 6 8 En Eg Gm gn 9 1 11 12 13 14 15 16 OFF OFF OFF OFF EN 0 eee ST Inf 17 16 19 26 21 22 23 24 1 z OFF GFF Ger 25 26 27 28 29 31 32 3 4 OFF GFF OFF OFF ER SEND A VIEW INA 16 POST 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Setting Aux Send Levels 115 e Variable Mode In this mode Aux Send levels are variable and the signal source point can be either pre fader or post fader Channel Send level rotary controls and PRE POST buttons appear on the screen SEND Tip You can select Variable or Fixed mode individually for each of the eight Aux Note In Fixed mode all ON OFF buttons are turned OFF When you switch to Variable mode the signal source points are set to post fader PRE POST buttons are set to POST and Send level rotary controls are reset to sno xny 4 Ifyou switched to Fixed mode in
291. ch auto A Dr Tom EXPAND matically reduces the volume when the tom toms are not played improving mic separation Soft kneed compander for emphasizing the attack and A Dr OverTop COMPAND S ambience of cymbals recorded with overhead mics It automatically reduces the volume when the cymbals are not played improving mic separation E B Finger COMP Compressor for leveling the attack and volume of a fin ger picked electric bass guitar E B Slap COMP Compressor for leveling the attack and volume of a slapped electric bass guitar Syn Bass COMP Compressor for controlling or emphasizing the level of a synth bass 1 Compressor for brightening the tonal color of a piano 16 Piano2 COMP A variation on preset 15 using a deep threshold to change the overall attack and level Compressor for electric guitar cutting or arpeg 17 E Guitar COMP gio style backing The sound color can be varied by playing different styles 18 A Guitar COMP Compressor for acoustic guitar stroke or arpeg gio style backing 19 Strings COMP Compressor for use with strings 20 Strings2 COMP A variation on preset 19 intended for violas or cellos A variation on preset 20 intended for string instru 21 Strings3 COMP ments with a very low range such as cellos or contra bass 22 BrassSection COMP Compressor for brass sounds with a fast and strong attack Compressor for musical instruments that feature gentle Svn Pad sounds which dep
292. ction pair copy 18 12 TX Function effect 19 13 tx rx Sort table 20 14 tx rx Function attribute link 32 20 TX ey remote 33 21 tx rx Remote meter 34 22 tx rx Remote time counter tx indicates that the data can be transmitted from the 01V96 and rx indicates that the data can be received by the 01V96 2 Format Details 2 1 NOTE OFF 8n Reception If OTHER ECHO is ON these message are echoed from MIDI OUT Ifthe Rx CH matches these messages are received and used to control effects STATUS 1000nnnn 8n Note off message DATA Onnnnnnn nn Note number Ovvvvvvv vv Velocity ignored 2 2 NOTE ON 9n Reception If OTHER ECHO is ON these messages are echoed from MIDI OUT Ifthe Rx CH matches these messages are received and used to control effects STATUS 1001nnnn 9n Note on message DATA Onnnnnnn nn Note number Ovvvvvvv Velocity 1 127 on 0 off 2 3 CONTROL CHANGE Bn Reception If Control Change ECHO is ON these messages are echoed from MIDI OUT If TABLE is selected these message are received if Control Change Rx is ON and will control parameters according to the Control assign table settings The parameters that can be set are defined in the Control Change Assign Pa rameter List If NRPN is selected these messages are received if Control Change Rx is ON and the Rx CH matches and will control the parameter that is specified by the four messages NRPN contro
293. cuz cuz mamo 0 O 0 EQUALIZER EDIT LIBRARYA IN ATT M OUT ATI 7 4 Make sure that the EQ ON button in the upper left corner is turned ON The EQ ON OFF button turns the currently selected Input Channel s EQ on or off If the button is off press the ENTER button to turn it on 5 While a musician plays the musical instrument adjust the EQ parameters To do so move the cursor to the parameters in the lower half of the page then rotate the Parameter wheel to change the values You can adjust the following parameters for the LOW L MID H MID and HIGH bands individually 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Initial Track Recording 57 e Q This parameter control specifies the Q slope for cut boost of the center frequency set via the F parameter control The setting range is between 10 and 0 10 The higher the value the steeper the slope becomes This parameter control also selects the type of EQ for the LOW and HIGH band F Frequency This parameter control specifies the center frequency for cut boost with a setting range of 21 2 Hz to 20 0 kHz G Gain This parameter control specifies the cut boost amount in the range of 18 0 dB to 18 0 dB The LOW and HIGH GAIN controls function as filter on off controls when Q is set to HPF and LPF respectively u You can also press the buttons HIGH HIGH MID SELECTED CHANNEL LOW MID LOW in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to
294. d mode Bus Outs 1 4 are available In 5 1 Surround mode Bus Outs 1 6 are available and in 6 1 Surround mode Bus Outs 1 7 are available 8 Depending on the selected Surround mode or applications patch the Bus Out signals to the outputs ADAT OUT channels or slot output channels Connect a playback device or MTR to the output connectors 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual ued punong Fy 140 Chapter 12 Surround Pan Surround Pan Recording To record surround pan movement to a digital MTR route the Bus Outs to the ADAT OUT channels or slot output channels that are connected to the digital MTR The following diagram illustrates an example of recording 5 1 Surround mode signals to a digital MTR 01V96 search SURROUND ECEELE PAN nt Input Channel 1 uU LFE LEVEL C U SURROUND N Input Channel 2 U Fl LFE LEVEL C U SURROUND PN Input Channel 3 Q LFE LEVEL s uA Track 1 t Channel 1 gt 4 Track 2 Channel 2 gt Track 3 Channel 3 gt i Track 4 mmm 4 Ti k 5 d i 8 TRACK DIGITAL i rac Channel 5 gt Digital MTR Track 6 t Channel 6 gt MY8 TD etc 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Setting Up and S
295. d a progress bar that indicates the current status 7 Meters These meters indicate the input or output levels of the currently selected effects proces sor Select the IN button or OUT button to display the input levels or output levels respectively Tip You can also view the input and output levels of the effects processors on the Meter Effect 1 4 pages see page 34 Move the cursor to a parameter you wish to change and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to adjust the setting You can store the edited settings as a new program in the Effects library see page 179 Note You cannot change the effects type on this page To change the effects type recall a program that uses the desired effects type from the Effects library About Add On Effects Installing optional Add On Effects packages enables you to expand your effects selection beyond the internal effects Add On Effects will be stored in and recalled from preset 45 and the subsequent preset programs You can also store edited effects in user program 54 and the subsequent user programs For more information on Add On Effects refer to the installation guide that is included in your Add On Effects packages EFFECT CHi CHi EFFECT NAME Eaual izer681 TYPE EQUAL ZER681 ZIN ZOUT Initial Data EDIT Ei MIX_BALANCE TYPE Q 100 BYPASS CLEAN Q y rript SW 1 59
296. d at the Slot or 2TR Digital Inputs MIDI Warning If this check box is on a warning message appears when any errors are detected in the incoming MIDI messages 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual suonounj Jou1O 232 Chapter 19 Other Functions Initial Data Nominal If this check box is on Input Channel faders and ST IN Channel level controls are set to nominal 0 dB when you recall Scene 0 If this check box is off they are set to gt Scene MEM Auto Update If this check box is on you can use the Scene Memory Auto Update function see page 169 Cascade COMM Link If this check box is on various functions and parameters are linked between cascaded 01V96s See page 238 for more information on cascade connection When the check box is off only the Solo function is linked Auto Direct Out On If this check box is on and you change the channel Direct Out destination from to any other output the channel Direct Out is automatically enabled If you change the channel Direct Out destination from an output to the channel Direct Out is automatically dis abled Routing ST Pair Link When this check box is checked paired channels routing to the Stereo Bus will be linked Prefer2 page The Prefer2 page enables you to name the channel indicated on the display and adjust the display brightness DIO SETUP Initial Data STI2 5113 5714 CHI CHI DD Short Name Channel ID
297. d bulk dump data Tip If you selected ALL in the parameter box all data selected by the corresponding button is transmitted as bulk dump data 6 To start transmitting bulk data move the cursor to the TRANSMIT button then press ENTER Bulk Dump is executed During the operation the Bulk Dump window appears indicating the current bulk dump status To abort the bulk dump operation move the cursor to the CANCEL button in the window then press ENTER Tip To transmit bulk dump request messages move the cursor to the REQUEST button then press ENTER If you set up the 01V96 so that it will transmit and receive MIDI messages to and from another 01V 96 the other 01V96 will respond to the bulk dump request and transmit the bulk dump data to the 01V96 you are operating 7 To receive bulk data press the DISPLAY ACCESS MIDI button again to dis play the MIDI Setup page then turn on the Rx ON OFF button the BULK row 9 Now when the 01V96 receives bulk data the corresponding internal data is updated 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 228 Chapter 18 MIDI 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Other Functions 229 19 Other Functions This chapter describes the 01V96 s miscellaneous functions Changing the Input and Output Channel Names You can change the default name of the input channels Input Channels 1 32 ST IN Chan nels 1 4 and output channels Aux Outs 1 8 Bu
298. d rear 8 To move the sound image of each channel on these pages move the cursor to the desired channel then rotate the Parameter wheel The pan setting of the channel changes along the trajectory pattern Press ENTER to dis play the currently selected channel s CH Edit page ued punong Fy 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 148 Chapter 12 Surround Pan 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Grouping Channels amp Linking Parameters 149 13 Grouping Channels amp Linking Parameters This chapter describes how to group faders or ON buttons for multiple channels and link the EQ or compressor parameters for simultaneous operation Grouping amp Linking On the 01V 96 you can group faders or ON buttons for multiple Input Channels Input Channels 1 32 ST IN Channels 1 4 or multiple Output Channels Bus Outs 1 8 Aux Outs 1 8 Stereo Out and link the EQ or compressor parameters The following elements can be grouped or linked within Input Channels or Output Chan nels Fader group Input Channel or Output Channel faders or level controls can be grouped There are eight Input Channel Fader groups and four Output Channel Fader groups When channel faders or level controls are grouped operating any one of them enables you to control the level of the other grouped faders or level controls while maintaining the relative level differences Also the 01V 96 features a Fader Group Master function that enables
299. d values are available HIGH MID LOW NO ASSIGN CHANNEL INPUT1 32 ST IN1 4 MASTER BUS1 8 AUX1 8 STEREO AUX1 SEND AUX2 SEND AUX3 SEND FADER H AUX4 SEND AUXS SEND AUX6 SEND AUX7 SEND AUX8 SEND BUS TO ST BUS1 8 CHANNEL INPUT1 32 ST IN1 4 MASTER BUS1 8 AUX1 8 STEREO AUX1 SEND AUX2 SEND AUX3 SEND FADERL AUX4 SEND AUXS SEND AUX6 SEND AUX7 SEND AUX8 SEND BUS TO ST BUS1 8 INPUT1 32 ST IN1 4 9 1 32 5 1 4 01 96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 222 Chapter 18 MIDI HIGH ON PHASE MID CHANNEL LOW INPUT1 32 ST IN1 4 MASTER BUS1 8 AUX1 8 STEREO AUX1 SEND AUX2 SEND AUX3 SEND AUX4 SEND AUXS SEND AUX6 SEND AUX7 SEND AUX8 SEND INPUT1 32 ST IN1 4 BUS TO ST CHANNEL BUS1 8 INPUT1 32 ST IN1L 4R INSERT ON CHANNEL INPUT1 32 MASTER BUS1 8 AUX1 8 STEREO PRE POST AUX1 SEND AUX2 SEND AUX3 SEND AUX4 SEND AUXS SEND AUX6 SEND AUX7 SEND AUX8 SEND INPUT1 32 ST IN1 4 IN DELAY ON TIME HIGH TIME MID TIME LOW INPUT1 32 MIX HIGH MIX LOW FB GAIN H FB GAIN L OUT DELAY ON TIME HIGH TIME MID TIME LOW BUS1 8 AUX1 8 STEREO L R 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Assigning Parameters to Control Changes for Real time Co
300. dclocks are signals that enable digital audio processing circuits to synchronize with each other In a typical digital audio system one device operates as the wordclock master trans mitting wordclock signals and the other devices operate as wordclock slaves synchronizing to the wordclock master If you are digitally connecting the 01V96 to other equipment you must decide which device to use as the wordclock master and which devices to use as slaves then set up all the devices accordingly The 01V96 can be used as the wordclock master running at either 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 88 2 kHz or 96 kHz or slaved to an external wordclock source Wordclock Connections To establish wordclock synchronization between the 01V96 and external devices you can distribute wordclock signals independently via dedicated cables or you can use clock infor mation derived from digital audio connections The WORD CLOCK IN and OUT connectors transmit and receive wordclock signals inde pendently on the 01V96 The following examples show two ways in which wordclock sig nals can be distributed and received via the WORD CLOCK IN and OUT connectors Daisy Chain Distribution In this example the wordclock signal is distributed in a daisy chain fashion with each device feeding the wordclock signal from the wordclock out connector on to the wordclock in connector of the next device This method of distribution is not recommended for larger systems Wordclock master
301. descriptions in this owner s manual are for information purposes only Yamaha Corp reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice Since specifications equipment or options may not be the same in every locale please check with your Yamaha dealer European Models Purchaser User Information specified in EN55103 1 and EN55103 2 Inrush Current 20 A Conforms to Environments El E2 E3 and E4 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Scene Memory to Program Change Table 289 Appendix C MIDI Scene Memory to Program Change Table Program Initial User Program Initial User Program Initial User Change Scene Scene Change Scene Scene Change Scene Scene 1 44 44 87 87 2 45 45 88 88 3 46 46 89 89 4 47 47 90 90 5 48 48 91 91 6 49 49 92 92 7 50 50 93 93 8 51 51 94 94 9 52 52 95 95 10 53 53 96 96 11 54 54 97 97 12 55 55 98 98 13 56 56 99 99 14 57 57 100 00 15 58 58 101 16 59 59 102 17 60 60 103 18 61 61 104 19 62 62 105 20 63 63 106 21 64 64 107 22 65 65 108 23 66 66 109 24 67 67 110 25 68 68 111 26 69 69 112 27 70 70 113 28 71 71 114 29 72 72 115
302. dicates Prm USER DEFINED KEYS section 1 8 buttons You can assign one of 194 parameters to each of these buttons In particular if you assign any of 54 Remote Control parameters to these buttons you can operate the transport sec tion and select various Pro Tools modes from the 01V96 top panel See page 235 for more information on assigning the parameters to the buttons Parameter Function DAW REC Places Pro Tools in Record Enabled mode The button indicator flashes while the transport section is stopped The indicator lights up when recording starts DAW PLAY Starts playback from the current cursor position DAW STOP Stops playback and recording DAW FF Fast forwards the cursor position DAW REW Fast rewinds the cursor position DAW SHUTTLE Switches the Wheel mode to Shuttle DAW SCRUB Switches the Wheel mode to Scrub Jog DAW AUDITION You can audition the pre roll post roll in point area or out point area by holding down the button to which this function is assigned and pressing a button to which DAW PRE DAW POST DAW IN or DAW OUT is assigned 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 0430u0 198 Chapter 17 Remote Control Parameter Function DAW PRE Plays back from the pre roll point up to the beginning of the selected area DAW IN Plays back from the beginning of the selected area for a duration specified as the
303. ding Pro Tools channel see page 202 HOME button This button turns Flip mode see page 201 on or off Flip mode enables you to adjust the Aux Send parameters using the faders ON buttons and the PAN control 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Pro Tools Remote Layer 197 DISPLAY ACCESS section PAIR GROUP button Press this button while a Channel Display mode or Meter Display mode page is selected to display a Group ID to which each channel belongs EFFECT button Press this button to display or hide the Insert window in Pro Tools Display section F1 button Press this button to reset the Clipping and Peak Hold indicators on Meter Display mode pages Tab Scroll buttons gt These buttons switch the INSERT ASSIGN EDIT parameter settings on Insert Display mode pages Data Entry section ENTER button This button switches the on off status of the buttons on the display Left Right Up Down gt V cursor buttons These buttons move the cursor on the display INC amp DEC buttons The INC button works the same as the Enter key on your computer keyboard The DEC button works the same as the Esc key on your computer keyboard Parameter wheel The Parameter wheel enables you to adjust the currently selected parameter or execute the shuttle and scrub operation By default it adjusts the value of the currently selected param eter The P WHEEL MODE parameter in
304. dump are used on the 01V96 Data name tx rx function m tx rx Scene Memory amp Request compressed data S tx rx Setup Memory amp Request tx rx User defined MIDI remote amp Request tx rx User defined keys amp Request u tx rx User assignable layer amp Request tx rx Control change table amp Request tx rx Program change table amp Request tx rx Equalizer library amp Request uv tx rx Compressor library amp Request tx rx Gate library amp Request E tx rx Effect library amp Request tx rx Channel library amp Request R tx rx Input patch library amp Request Oo tx rx Output patch library amp Request tx rx Plug in Effect Card Data amp Request 1 4 2 2 PARAMTER CHANGE Command rx tx function FO 43 1n 3E OD F7 RARAMETER rx tx 01V96 specific parameter change CHANGE FO 43 3n 3E OD F7 PARAMETER rx tx 01V96 specific parameter change REQUEST FO 43 In 7F F7 PARAMETER rx tx General purpose digital mixer CHANGE parameter change FO 43 7F F7 PARAMETER rx tx General purpose digital mixer REQUEST parameter request The following data types of parameter change are used by the 01V96 Type HEX tx rx function 1 01 tx rx Edit buffer 2 02 tx rx Patch data 3 03 tx rx Setup data 4 04 tx rx Backup data 16 10 tx rx Function recall store title clear 17 11 TX Fun
305. e 88 2 kHz or 96 kHz Select this mode if the devices that support the higher sampling rates transmit or receive data Note You can select this setting only for slots in which a digital I O card that inputs outputs double speed digital audio data e g MY8 AE96 MY8 AE96S is installed SINGLE In Single mode digital audio data is received and transmitted at a sampling rate that is half 44 1 48 kHz the current higher sampling rate of the 01V96 For example this is useful when you wish to send 44 1 kHz digital signals from an external HDR to the 01V96 running at 88 2 kHz Note You cannot select this setting for slots in which a digital I O card that inputs outputs double speed digital audio data e g MY8 AE96 MY8 AE96S is installed Tip The parameter fields display if the slot contains no I O card or if an AD DA card or other I O card that does not allow you to set the transfer format has been installed 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Input Channels 77 7 Input Channels This chapter describes how to adjust the 01V96 s Input Channel parameters About Input Channels The input Channel section enables you to adjust the level and tone of the signals input to the 01V96 and the signals output from the internal Effects processors 1 4 and route the signals to Buses 1 8 the Stereo Bus and Aux Sends 1 8 There are two types of Input Chan nels each featuring sligh
306. e 01V96 will switch Scenes when it receives Program Changes Control Changes If you assign the 01V96 s parameters to Control Change numbers the 01V96 transmits the assigned Control Changes when the parameter values change Also the 01V96 changes cer tain parameter values when it receives the corresponding Control Changes e System Exclusive Messages The 01V96 transmits System Exclusive Parameter Changes in real time when the parameter values change Also the 01V96 notifies certain parameter values when it receives assigned Parameter Changes MMC MIDI Machine Control MMC is used for external machine control MIDI Note On Off These messages are used to adjust the Freeze effect Bulk Dump Messages These messages enable you to store the 01V96 s internal data to a sequencer or MIDI filer When the 01V96 receives these messages they overwrite the 01V96 data The 01V96 features the following interface for transmitting and receiving MIDI data MIDI IN THRU OUT ports These ports transmit and receive MIDI data to and from standard MIDI devices Each port is a single port interface that transmits and receives single port data 16 channels x 1 ports The MIDI THRU port outputs MIDI messages received at the MIDIIN port without mod ification as is USB port This port is used to connect a computer and transfer MIDI messages This is a multiport interface that transmits and receives up to eight port data 16 channels x
307. e Layer If you set the Remote Layer target to USER ASSIGNABLE you can create a custom layer by combining any 01V96 channels excluding the Stereo Out This custom layer is called User Assignable layer Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the DIO Setup Remote pa ge appears Set the TARGET parameter to USER ASSIGNABLE then press ENTER A confirmation window appears Move the cursor to the YES button then press ENTER The 01V96 displays the page shown below REMOTE TARGET DIO SETUPI Initial Data 815717 5112 5113 STI4 CH1 CHI Q2 Select the channels you wish to assign to the User Assignable layer using the 1 16 parameter boxes CD You can store up to four 16 channel setups in four banks by switching Banks 1 4 via the BANK 1 4 buttons If you press ENTER before selecting the channels to assign you will still be able to select the channels you wish to assign in the User CH Select window pressing ENTER Tip You can reset the assignment to default by moving the cursor to the CLEAR button and Use the LAYER REMOTE button to assign or recall the User Assignable layer You can use the faders and ON buttons to control the assigned channels 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual suonounj Jou1O 234 Chapter 19 Other Functions Using the Oscillator The 01V96 features an Oscillator you can use for sound checks Follow the
308. e Setup Prefer1 page see page 230 enables you to specify whether Input Channel faders are set to either 0 dB or dB when Scene memory 0 is recalled Scene memory Ud is a special read only memory that contains the mix settings in effect immediately before the most recently recalled or stored Scene To undo or redo Scene memory recall and store operations recall Scene memory U When you adjust parameters after recalling a Scene the Edit indicators appear EDIT at the top of the display indicating that the mix settings no longer match those of the Scene that was most recently recalled The contents of the Edit Buffer where the current mix set tings are stored are retained while the 01V96 is turned off This allows the 01V96 to restore the edited mix settings when you turn on the power i02 uut Display 102 Eni mm 57 Edit indicator The contents of recalled Scene memory The parameters of recalled Scene memory 2 2 match the current settings on the were edited Therefore the Edit indicators 01V96 and the Edit indicator remains off appear indicating that the current settings on the 01V96 do not match Scene memory 2 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Storing and Recalling Scenes 167 Storing and Recalling Scenes You can store and recall Scenes by pressing the buttons on the top panel or using the dedi cated Scene memory page on the display Note When you store Scenes make sure that there a
309. e aug eve sess ergo es 231 Changing names 229 DELAY gt REV eee 208 AUTO PAN xiii eee 263 Channel Copy Parameter preference Digital VO section u 24 Auto PAN Display preference 231 232 Digital inputs amp outputs am 71 Auto SOLO Display preference 231 Channel fader aan 16 Dimensions 4 4 288 Auto update function voices 169 Channel ID Channel preference T 232 DIO Warning preference teen 231 Auto WORD CLOCK Display Channel library e DIO Setup Cascade page 241 preference 231 Channel strip section DIO Setup Format page 74 75 AUX 1 AUX 8 buttons 44 2 Aus DIO Setup Insert page 193 AUX OUES Lesser tenentes 109 CLEAR button ann DIO Setup Machine page 213 Aux send mode 114 118 Compressor library DIO Setup Meter page 195 Aux sends esce et 113 even Lit DIO Setup MIDI Host page Attenuating 22222222 110 Compressors 82 100 III 192 212 216 241 Comp settings esee 111 Compressor link DIO Setup Monitor page 132 Copying channel fader positions Dinking de Na DIO Setup Output Att page 106 120 parameter table
310. e device to rain use it near water or in damp or wet conditions or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings e Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands If you notice any abnormality e f the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the device or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it immediately turn off the power switch disconnect the electric plug from the outlet and have the device inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel e If this device should be dropped or damaged immediately turn off the power switch disconnect the electric plug from the outlet and have the device inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others or damage to the device or other property These precautions include but are not limited to the following Power supply Power cord Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the device is not to be used for extended periods of time or during electrical storms e When removing the electric plug from the device or an outlet always hold the plug itself and not the cord Pulling by the cord can damage it Before moving the device remove all connected cables Avoid setting all equalizer controls and faders to their maximum Depending on he condition of
311. e metering posi tion ST IN Channels 1 4 These stereo channels enable you to process stereo signals using the phase effect attenuator and EQ The following diagram illustrates the ST IN Channel 1 4 signal flow TO OLOR STEREOL STEREOR SOLOL AUX1 AUX8 ST IN 1 4 METER ON o 4BAND ho ATTE PAN Stereo Configuration INPUT PATCH ST IN Channels 1 4 feature the following parameters e Phase e ATT Attenuator 4 BAND EQ 4 band equalizer ON On Off e LEVEL PAN e AUX Aux Send level METER 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Setting the Input Channels from the Display 79 Refer to the description of Input Channels for more information on these parameters page 77 Tip You can store these channel parameter settings in the Channel library You can also store the Gate Compressor and EQ parameter settings to the corresponding libraries Setting the Input Channels from the Display To set the Input Channel parameters you can either move the cursor to the desired param eter on the display and change the value or operate the desired button or control on the top panel to directly change the setting This section explains how to set the parameters via the display Switching the Si
312. e re Er Tere dos De du Selecting ee m Re Re e Re Rc Selecting Fader Modes Metering oo noes Br a hha eters UR BL MT VUE Connections and Setup Connections EP DES na Rena UU es Wordclock Connections and Input and Output Patching Tutorial Cao a ent Connections and Setup Ye ECPepwPCV OU EUREN EUNDI Initial Track Recording nenn bee Overdubbing to Other Tracks Mixing Recorded Tracks into Stereo Mixdown Analog 1 0 amp Digital 1 0 Analog Inputs 6 Digital Inputs amp Outputs eres seri eek Converting Sampling Rates of Signals Received at I O Card Inputs Monitoring Digital Input Channel Status Dithering Digital Outputs Setting the Transfer Format for Higher Sampling Input Channels About Inp t Ch nnels ar ae ee lead Setting the Input Channels from the Setting the Input Channels from the Control Pairing Input Cha
313. e selected Scene memory 8 STORE This button stores the current Scene to the selected Scene memory By default a confir mation window appears before you store the Scene 4 CLEAR This button deletes the contents of the selected Scene memory 5 PROTECT ON OFF This button switches on and off the write protection of the contents of the selected Scene memory A padlock icon amp appears next to the title of a Scene memory that is write protected 6 Library list Scene memories 01 99 are listed in the library memory title list The titles of stored Scenes are indicated in the title column The message No Data appears in the title col umn of empty library memories The selected memory appears inside the dotted box between the and 4 marks 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Auto Scene Memory Update 169 7 PATCH LINK INPUT This indicates the Input Patch library number that is linked to each scene When you store a scene the number of the input patch that was most recently recalled or stored will automatically be linked with that scene When you recall that scene this library number will also be automatically recalled You can also move the cursor to the param eter boxes and change the library numbers PATCH LINK OUTPUT This indicates the Output Patch library number that is linked to each scene When you store a scene the number of the output patch that was most recently recalled or stored will automaticall
314. e to receive any message for an interval of 400 ms or longer will cause MIDI transmission to be initialized such as by clearing the Running Status STATUS 11111110 FE Active sensing 2 7 SYSTEM RESET FF Reception When this message is received MIDI communications will be cleared e g by clearing the Running Status STATUS 11111111 FF System reset 2 8 SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE FO 2 8 1 MIDI MACHINE CONTROL MMC These messages are transmitted when the Machine Control section of the 01V96 is operated For details refer to the MMC specification MIDI Data Format 307 2 8 2 BULK DUMP This message sends or receives the contents of various memories stored within the 01V96 The basic format is as follows For DUMP DATA FO 43 7E cc cc Model ID tt mm mm Data cs F7 For DUMP REQUEST F0 43 2n 7E Model ID tt mm mm F7 n Device Number cc cc DATA COUNT the number of bytes that follow this ending before the checksum 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 33 tt DATA TYPE mm mm DATA NUMBER cs CHECK SUM A unique header Model ID is used to determine whether the device is a 01V96 CHECK SUM is obtained by adding the bytes that follow BYTE COUNT LOW and end before CHECK SUM taking the binary compliment of this sum and then setting bit 7 to 0 CHECK SUM sum amp 0x7F Reception This message is received if Bulk RX is ON and the Rx CH matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS When
315. e tracing an With this pattern you can also fine tune the radius and shape of the arc using the WIDTH DEPTH OFFSET and OFFSET parameters Ed L40 2 48 e R44 44 eL20 F32 28 2 56 32 F24 01 96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Surround Panning 145 COM ee The sound image moves between front and rear while tracing an arc With this pattern you can also fine tune the radius and shape of the arc using the WIDTH DEPTH OFFSET f and OFFSET parameters L40 48 e R44 44 20 F 32 L28 F56 132 F 24 2 A The sound image moves while tracing a circle or oval With this pat tern you can also fine tune the radius and shape of the circle or oval using the WIDTH DEPTH OFFSET t and OFFSET param eters L44 F48 932 F24 24 R24 R60 2 40 eRs52 2 40 4 If necessary fine tune the trajectory by editing the WIDTH DEPTH OFFSET 2 and OFFSET parameter values ued punong Fy 5 To move the sound image move the cursor to anywhere outside the param eter boxes then rotate the Parameter wheel The sound image of the selected channel moves along the selected trajectory pattern Tip You can also adjust the front and rear or left and right movement the trajectory pattern and other parameters from an external MIDI device
316. e trigger signal level drops below the threshold The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB OUT GAIN dB 0 0 to 418 0 180 points This sets the compressor s output signal level KNEE Hard 1 5 6 points This determines how compression is applied at the threshold For higher knee settings compression is applied gradually as the signal exceeds the speci fied threshold creating a more natural sound 1 O Characteristics KNEE hard OUT GAIN 0 0dB Output Level Time Series Analysis RATIO 1 Input signal Output Signal THRESHOLD 3 i ATTACK RELEASE A 5 2 i nario 2 8 c 3 n T d Dd E THRESHOLD e ox d i i i Input Level Time Time 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual gt 5 o 2 2 x 278 EXPAND Appendix A Parameter Lists An expander attenuates signals below a specified THRESHOLD by a specified RATIO Parameter THRESHOLD dB Range 54 0 to 0 0 541 points Description This determines the level of input signal required to trigger the expander RATIO 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 5 1 1 7 1 2 0 1 2 5 1 3 0 1 3 5 1 4 0 1 5 0 1 6 0 1 8 0 1 10 1 20 1 1 16 points This determines the amount of expansion ATTACK ms 0 120 121 points This determines how soon the expander returns to its normal gain once the t
317. ecall No XX Fx3 LibXXX RCL 66 Output Fader Group Assign X OutFader Assign X 13 Effect 4 Lib Recall 1 Fx4 Lib 1 Recall 67 Output Mute Group Assign X Out Mute Assign X 14 Effect 4 Lib Recall 1 Fx4 Lib 1 Recall 68 Output EQ Group Assign X Out EQ Assign x 15 Effect 4 Lib Recall No XX Fx4 LibXXX RCL 69 Output COMP Group Assign X Out COMP Assign x 16 Effect 1 Bypass On Off Fx1 Bypass 70 Input Mute Group Master X In Mute Master X 17 Effect 2 Bypass On Off Fx2 Bypass 71 Output MUTE Group Master X Out Mute Master X 18 Effect 3 Bypass On Off Fx3 Bypass 72 PEAK HOLD On Off Peak Hold 19 Effect 4 Bypass On Off Fx4 Bypass 73 OSCILLATOR On Off OSC ON OFF 20 Channel Lib Recall 1 CH Lib 1 Recall 74 SOLO Enable SOLO ENABLE 21 Channel Lib Recall 1 CH Lib 1 Recall 75 612179 RELEASE Mode FaderSolo RELEASE 22 Channel Lib Recall No XX CH LibXXX Recall nof 23 GATE Lib Recall 1 Gate Lib 1 RCL 76 Control Room Monitor MONO C R MONO 24 GATE Lib Recall 1 Gate Lib 1 RCL 77 Pan Surround Link PAN SURR LINK 25 GATE Lib Recall No XX Gate LibXXX RCL 78 CHID Short 26 COMP Lib Recall 1 Comp Lib 1 RCL 79 Channel Copy Channel Copy 27 COMP Lib Recall 1 Comp Lib 1 RCL 80 Channel Paste Channel Paste 28 COMP Lib Recall No XX Comp LibXXX RCL 81 Display Back Display Back 29 EQ Lib Recall 1 EQ Lib 1 Recall 82 Display Forward Display Forward 30 EQ Lib Recall 1 EQ Lib 1 Reca
318. ected channel When the D button is turned on the channel signal is patched to the Direct Out selected in the parameter box below the button The D button is unavailable for the ST IN Channels FOLLOW PAN This button determines whether the Input Channel s Pan set ting is applied to the paired Bus Outs Follow Pan function When the button is turned off the Follow Pan function is dis abled and an identical signal is sent to the paired Bus Outs In surround mode it also determines whether the Surround Pan setting is applied to the Bus Outs 4 AUX section s AUK nen These controls set the currently selected Input Channel s Aux Send 1 8 levels and positions See page 109 for more informa tion on Aux Sends 5 Meter section These meters indicate the levels of the currently selected Input Channel PRE EQ PRE FADER POST FADER The metering position is displayed below the meters 6 GROUP section e FADER MUTE EQ COMP These buttons indicate which Fader Mute EQ or Comp group if any the currently selected Input Channel is in If the channel is in a group the group number appears If the channel is not in a group appears The compressor is unavailable for the ST IN Channels 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Sjouueu ndu N 90 Chapter 7 Input Channels Setting the Input Channels from the Control Surface You ca
319. ecuted and then the result of execution will be transmitted as a parameter re sponse Transmission In response to a request this is transmitted with the device number set to the Tx CH When the title is changed on the 01V96 this message will be transmitted with the device number set to Tx CH STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID 01111111 7F Universal ADDRESS 00010000 10 Function call O100ffff 4f title Ommmmmmm mh number High Ommmmmmm ml number Low DATA Oddddddd dd title 1 Oddddddd dd title x depend on the library EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive function number size SCENE LIB TITLE 0x40 0 99 256 0 response only 16 EQ LIB TITLE 0x41 1 200 1 40 response only 16 GATE LIB TITLE 0x42 1 128 1 4 response only 16 COMP LIB TITLE 0x43 1 128 1 36 response only 16 EFF LIB TITLE 0x44 1 128 1 xx 1 response only 16 CHANNEL LIB TITLE 0x46 0 128 0 response only 16 INPATCH LIB TITLE 0x47 0 32 0 response only 16 OUTPATCH LIB TITLE 0x48 0 32 0 response only 16 1 Varies with the firmware version 2 8 3 12 Parameter request Function call title Reception When this is received a parameter change will be transmitted with the device number set to Rx CH Refer to the above table for the Functions and Numbers STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive m
320. ed off page 15 8 INSERT I O connectors These unbalanced TRS phone type connectors are used for channel insert ins and outs Use a split cable to insert an external effects processor to AD input channels Tip send 1 4 phone plug n Tip send Ring return 1 4 phone plug Sleeve To processor s input ground Tip return Sleeve ground 1 4 phone plug Connect to INSERT jack Sleeve ground From processor s output 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Control Surface 15 PAD switches These switches turn on or off the 20 dB pad attenuator for each AD Input 5 GAIN controls These controls adjust input sensitivity for each AD Input Input sensitivity is 16 dB to 60 dB when the Pad is off and 4 dB to 40 dB when the Pad is on PEAK indicators These indicators light up when the input signal level is 3 dB below clipping Adjust the Pad switch and GAIN control so that the indicator rarely lights up at signal peak SIGNAL indicators These indicators light up when the input signal level exceeds 34 dB AD15 16 selector This button selects AD Input Channel 15 and 16 signals When the button is turned on pushed in the 2TR IN signals page 24 are selected When the button is turned off raised the INPUT 15 and 16 signals are selected jPuUed 8 DLNS IN Monitor Out amp Headphones Section 2 4 10dBV UNBAL MONITOR 2
321. ed to the selected Scene memory 5 To recall a Scene press the SCENE MEMORY Up A or Down Y buttons to select a Scene memory number then press the SCENE MEMORY RECALL button Tip If you turn the Recall Confirmation parameter to On on the DIO Setup Prefer1 page a Scene recall confirmation window for Scene recalls appears before the Scene is recalled see page 230 SalJOUJ9 A SU9IS 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 168 Chapter 15 Scene Memories Storing and Recalling Scenes Using the Scene Memory Page On the Scene Memory page you can store recall write protect delete and edit the titles of Scenes 1 Adjust the mix parameters on the 01V96 to the conditions you wish to store as a Scene 2 Pressthe DISPLAY ACCESS SCENE button repeatedly until the Scene Scene page appears SCENE Initial Data a SL 571257135714 CHI CHI 0 DD DO DD SCENE MEMORY Free 99 PATCH LINK TITLE INPUT U No Data No Data No Data No Data No Data No Data No Data Extra Mix Endins Mix 2nd Mix Vocal off Intro Mix E INN COL Co 3 Rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to select a Scene memory move the cursor to one of the following buttons then press ENTER D TITLE EDIT Select this button to display the Title Edit window which enables you to edit a selected Scene title 2 RECALL This button recalls the contents of th
322. eive is effective 1 99 256 8192 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual gt 5 2 amp x 308 Appendix C MIDI BLOCK INFO Ottttttt tt total block number minimum number is 0 Obbbbbbb bb current block number 0 total block number DATA Oddddddd ds Scene data of block bb Oddddddd de CHECK SUM Oeeeeeee ee ee Invert L de 1 amp 0x7F EOX 11110111 F7 End ofexclusive 2 8 2 2 Scene memory bulk dump request format compress The second and third bytes ofthe DATA NAME indicate the scene number that is being requested If this is 256 the data of the Edit Buffer will be bulk dumped If this is 8192 the data of the Undo Buffer will be bulk dumped STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump 01001100 4c 1 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000011 43 00111001 39 9 00110011 33 3 DATA NAME 01101101 6D m Ommmmmmm mh m 0 99 256 8192 Scene0 99 EDIT BUFFER UNDO Ommmmmmm ml EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 2 8 2 3 Setup memory bulk dump format Of the setup memory of the 01V96 this bulk dumps data other than the User Define MIDI Remote User Defined Keys User Assignable Layer Control Change Table and Program Change Table STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Man
323. elays modulation based effects and com bination effects designed especially for use with surround sound Note When the 01V96 operates at a high sampling frequency 88 2 kHz or 96 kHz you can use only Effects processors 1 and 2 Processor inputs and outputs can be patched to various sources For example effects pro cessor inputs can be fed from the Aux Sends and output to ST IN Channels effects send return Effects processors can also be inserted into Input Channels Bus Outs Aux Outs or the Stereo Out Effects processors 1 through 4 create 1 in 2 out or 2 in 2 out effects a LE Y 1 28 EFFECTI zs bees o INSERT OUT I Ex 15 5 1 ES amp EFFECT2 EE LU 15 5 1 e 8 12 EFFECT3 Z Q 15 21 1 EFFECT4 Ej The 01V96 also features the Effects library which contains 53 preset programs including Add On Effects and 75 user programs spayF 1 01 96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Chapter 14 Internal Effects Using Effects Processors via Aux Sends You can use effects processors via Aux Sends by patching effects processor inputs to Aux Outs and effects processor outputs to STIN Channels Recall an effect program you wish to use Refer to page 179 for more information on recalling effect programs Press the DISPLAY ACCES
324. electing Surround Pan Modes 141 Surround Pan Monitoring To monitor surround pan movement patch the Bus Outs to the analog outputs to which a monitoring system is connected The following diagram illustrates an example in which Bus Out 1 amp 2 left and right front channel signals are output from the STEREO OUT L amp R connectors and Bus Out 3 6 sig nals are output from the OMNI OUT 1 4 connectors in 5 1 Surround mode 01V96 zx SEIESS 523025905 a FRI Subwoofer PAN mt Input Channel 1 Lu LFE LEVEL SURROUND PAN mt Input Channel 2 LFE LEVEL SURROUND PAN b Input Channel 3 LFE LEVEL STEREO OUT L STEREO OUTR OMNI OUT 1 OMNIOUT2 A Multi channel 1 Shouts amplifier MNI OUT 4 f ued punong Fy Tip To output left and right front signals of the surround channels from the STEREO OUT L amp R connectors turn on the Surround LR to Stereo checkbox on the Surr Bus page 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 142 Chapter 12 Surround Pan Surround Panning You can set the surround pan parameters for each Input Channel Make sure that the 01V96 is in any Surround mode except Stereo then press the SEL button of the channel for which you want to set surround pan Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PAN ROUTING button repea
325. els press the SOLO buttons of the desired channels Grouped channels are soloed together and other channels are muted Press the SOLO buttons again to unsolo the channels Configuring Sends A E as Pre or Post You can set Pro Tools channels for the selected Sends A E to pre or post 1 Press the F3 button to select Channel Display mode 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Pro Tools Remote Layer 201 2 Pressthe FADER MODE AUX 1 AUX 5 buttons to select the desired Sends A E 3 toggle between pre and post move the cursor to the parameter control on the display then press ENTER Pressing ENTER repeatedly toggles between pre and post Setting Send Levels You can adjust Pro Tools Send A E send levels as follows 1 Press the F3 button to select Channel Display mode 2 Press the AUX SELECT AUX 1 AUX 5 buttons to select the desired Sends A 3 Movethe cursor to the parameter control of the channel for which you want to adjust the Send level then rotate the Parameter wheel You can set Send levels by operating the faders if faders ON buttons and the PAN con trol are in Flip mode Refer to Flip Mode for more information Muting Sends A E You can mute Sends by pressing the ON buttons if faders ON buttons and the PAN control are in Flip mode Refer to Flip Mode for more information Panning Sends A E You can pan channel signals sent to stereo Aux Sends by rotatin
326. ending on the tones could diffuse 23 gt COME such as synth pad Intended to prevent diffusion of the sound 24 SamplingPerc COMPAND S Compressor for making sampled percussion sound like real acoustic percussion 25 Sampling BD COMP A variation on preset 24 intended for sampled bass drum sounds 26 Sampling SN COMP A variation on preset 25 intended for sampled snare drum sounds 27 Hip Comp COMPAND S A variation on preset 26 intended for sampled loops and phrases 28 Solo Vocall COMP Compressor for use with main vocals 29 Solo Vocal2 COMP A variation on preset 28 30 Chorus COMP A variation on preset 28 intended for choruses 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual S v a 186 Chapter 16 Libraries No Preset Name Type Description 31 Click Erase EXPAND Expander for removing a click track that may bleed through from a musician s headphones 32 Announcer COMPAND H Hard kneed compander for reducing the level of the music when an announcer speaks 33 Limiter1 COMPAND S A soft kneed compander with a slow release 34 Limiter2 COMP A peak stop compressor Compressor for reducing the overall volume level Use 35 Total Comp1 COMP it on the stereo output during mixdown or with paired Input or Output Channels 36 Total Comp2 COMP A variation on preset 35 but with more compression EQ Library This library enables you to store and recal
327. ep Compressor Attack 0 ms 120 ms 1 ms step 5 ms 42 3 s 160 points 48 kHz Release 6 ms 46 0 s 160 points 44 1 kHz 3 ms 21 1 s 160 points 96 kHz 3 ms 23 0 s 160 points 88 2 kHz Threshold 54 dB to 0 dB 0 1 dB step Ratio x 1 x 1 1 1 1 3 1 5 1 7 2 2 5 3 3 5 4 5 6 8 10 20 16 points Out gain O dB to 18 dB 0 1 dB step Knee Hard 1 2 3 4 5 6 points Expander Attack 0 ms 120 ms 1 ms step 5 5 42 3 s 160 points 48 kHz Release 6 ms 46 0 s 160 points 44 1 kHz 3 ms 21 1 s 160 points 96 kHz 3 ms 23 0 s 160 points 88 2 kHz 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Libraries 285 Threshold 54 dB to 0 dB 0 1 dB step Ratio x 1 x 1 1 1 1 3 1 5 1 7 2 2 5 3 3 5 4 5 6 8 10 20 15 points Out gain 18 dB to 0 dB 0 1 dB step Width 1 dB 90 dB 1 dB step Gompanden H Attack 0 ms 120 ms 1 ms step 5 ms 42 3 s 160 points 48 kHz lt 6 ms 46 0 s 160 points 44 1 kHz 3 ms 21 1 s 160 points 96 kHz 3 ms 23 0 s 160 points 88 2 kHz Threshold 54 dB to 0 dB 0 1 dB step Ratio x 1 x 1 1 1 1 3 1 5 1 7 2 2 5 3 3 5 4 5 6 8 10 20 15 points Out gain 18 dB to 0 dB 0 1 dB step Width 1 dB 90 dB 1 dB step Compander S Attack 0 ms 120 ms 1 ms step 5 ms 42 3 s 160 points 48 kHz Bel 6 ms 46 0 s 160 points 44 1 kHz 3 ms 21 1 s 160 points 96 kHz 3 ms 23 0 s 160 p
328. ers excluding the Solo function turn on the Cascade COMM Link check box on the Setup Prefer1 page see page 230 The Solo function is always linked regardless of the status of the Cascade COMM Link check box The Fader Mode will not be linked if the Master layer is selected 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Cascading Consoles 239 The following paragraphs explain how to make a cascade connection using two 01V 96s and the inputs and outputs of the digital I O card installed in the slot of each 01V96 1 Install digital 1 O cards into the slot on each of two 01V96s 2 Connect two 01V96s as follows Connect the digital I O card output on the transmitting 01V96 slave to the digital I O card input on the receiving 01V96 master Connect the ADAT IN connector on the master unit to the ADAT OUT connector on the slave unit Connect the MIDI IN port on the master unit to the MIDI OUT port on the slave unit using a MIDI cable Connect the MIDI OUT port on the master unit to the MIDI IN port on the slave unit using a MIDI cable MIDI IN OUT connector ADAT IN connector MIDI IN OUT connector ADAT OUT connector les Ai ths 22 2 is 1 X f aon 200 OO all
329. ertOut CH1 ADAT3 IN Slot CH11 IN InsertOut CH1 NS CH2 InsertOut CH2 ADAT4 IN Slot CH12 IN InsertOut CH2 NS CH3 InsertOut CH3 ADATS IN Slot CH13 IN InsertOut CH3 NS CH4 InsertOut CH4 ADAT6 IN Slot CH14 IN InsertOut CH4 NS CH5 InsertOut CH5 IN Slot CH15 IN InsertOut CH5 NS CH6 InsertOut CH6 ADATS8 IN Slot CH16 IN InsertOut CH6 NS CH7 InsertOut CH7 Slot CH1 IN OMNI OUT 1 InsertOut CH7 NS CH8 InsertOut CH8 Slot CH2 IN OMNI OUT 2 InsertOut CH8 NS CH9 InsertOut CH9 Slot CH3 IN OMNI OUT 3 InsertOut CH9 INS CH10 InsertOut CH10 Slot CH4 IN OMNI OUT 4 InsertOut CH10 INS CH11 InsertOut CH11 Slot CH5 IN 2TR OUT Dig L InsertOut CH11 INS CH12 InsertOut CH12 Slot CH6 IN 2TR OUT Dig R InsertOut CH12 INS CH13 InsertOut CH13 Slot CH7 IN InsertOut CH1 3 INS CH14 InsertOut CH14 Slot CH8 IN InsertOut CH14 INS CH15 InsertOut CH15 Slot CH9 IN InsertOut CH15 INS CH16 InsertOut CH16 Slot CH10 IN InsertOut CH16 INS CH17 InsertOut CH17 Slot CH11 IN InsertOut CH1 7 INS CH18 InsertOut CH18 Slot CH12 IN InsertOut CH18 INS CH19 InsertOut CH19 Slot CH13 IN InsertOut CH19 INS CH20 InsertOut CH20 Slot CH14 IN InsertOut CH20 INS CH21 InsertOut CH21 Slot CH15 IN InsertOut CH21 INS CH22 InsertOut CH22 Slot CH16 IN InsertOut CH22 INS 23 InsertOut CH23 Effect OUT 1 InsertOut CH23 INS 24 InsertOut CH24 Effect1 OUT 2 I
330. erters 20 Hz through 40 kHz frequency response at 96 kHz sampling rate 106 dB typical dynamic range 32 bit internal signal processing 58 bit accumulator Inputs and Outputs 12 mic line inputs with switchable 48 V phantom power and 4 line inputs 12 analog inserts Any Bus Outs or Channel Inserts can be routed to four Omni Outs Individual outputs for Stereo Out and Monitor Out Analog 2TR In and Out for use with Tape In and Out signals Anoptional card installed in the slot permits a maximum of 16 inputs outputs Digital 2TR In and Out for consumer format digital audio signals Double Channel support for recording and playing at 88 2 96 kHz on 44 1 48 kHz leg acy multi track digital recorders You can cascade two 01V96s while remaining in the digital domain Input patches enable assignment of input signals to desired signal paths Output patches enable assignment of Bus Out signals and Input Channel Direct Outs to desired output jacks 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 12 Chapter 1 Welcome Channel Configuration 32 Input Channels and four ST IN channels can be mixed at a time Group multiple channels and pair channels for stereo Eight Bus Outs and eight Aux Sends Bus Outs 1 8 can be routed to Stereo Buses for use as Group Buses Channel library for storing and recalling the channel settings for each Input Channel and Output Channel Four band on each channel
331. espectively METER MODE PEAK HOLD 1 2 45 6 7 8 9 16 11 12 13 14 15 16 LL INPUT c0 00 00 co co co co co co 00 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 es m 32 A ST IN Ai MASTER JA EFFECT fF I 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Metering 35 STIN page This page displays the left and right ST IN Channel 1 4 levels separately METER 0 Initial Data CHi CHi METER MODE LEVEL co 00 00 00 00 co iL IR 2L ZR SL SR 4L 4R u STEREO NPUT 521524 Bumessdo cHi 32_ A FO nBsTER EFFECT Hr Master page This section displays the Output Channel Aux Out 1 8 Bus Out 1 8 Stereo Out levels altogether METER Initial Data a SH 571257135714 chi enr U oO POSITION COMP GR on op oo 1234 56768 Effect page This page displays the internal effects processor 1 4 input and output levels altogether 1 2 3 4 LL EFFECT 1 2 3 4 LLLEFFECT OUT 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 36 Chapter 3 Operating Basics Stereo page This page displays the Stereo Out output level METER Initial Data CH1 CH1 QO k TEE 32 8 et 8 E POSITION If you selected the CH1 32 page or the Master page use the MASTER MODE parameter to select one
332. ess the SEL button of the Input Channel or Output Channel into which you want to insert the selected effects Tip Repeatedly pressing the STEREO SEL button toggles between the left and right Stereo Bus channels Press the DISPLAY ACCESS INSERT DELAY button repeatedly until the Ins Dly Insert page appears INS DLY Initial Data 571257135714 CHE cue 10 0 oO me Rin 4 POST ON FRDER FRDER o ON OFF Select the effect insertion position using the INSERT button in the POSITION section Move the cursor to the OUT parameter box in the INSERT section then select the inputs of the effects processor selected in Step 1 FXI 1 amp EXI2 Inputs 1 amp 2 of Internal Effects Processor 1 2 1 2 2 Inputs 1 amp 2 of Internal Effects Processor 2 FX3 1 amp 2 Inputs 1 amp 2 of Internal Effects Processor 3 FX4 1 amp 4 2 Inputs 1 amp 2 of Internal Effects Processor 4 Press ENTER to confirm the setting Move the cursor to the IN parameter box in the INSERT section select the outputs of the effects processor selected in Step 1 then press ENTER to confirm the setting Move the cursor to the ON OFF button in the INSERT section then press ENTER to turn on the button Effect insertion is now enabled 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Editing Effects 161 Editing Tip After insertin
333. essage ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0011nnnn n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID 01111111 7F Universal MIDI Data Format 315 ADDRESS 00010000 10 Function call O100ffff 4f Ommmmmmm mh number High Ommmmmmm ml number Low EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 2 8 3 13 Parameter change Function call Scene Library Clear Reception When this is received the specified memory library will be cleared If this is re ceived from Studio Manager or Cascade Link the operation will be executed and then the result of execution will be transmitted as a parameter response Transmission When a memory or library is cleared on the 01V96 this message will be trans mitted with the device number set to Tx CH STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID 01111111 7F Universal ADDRESS 00010000 10 Function call 0110 6f clear function Ommmmmmm mh number High Ommmmmmm ml number Low EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive function number SCENE LIB CLEAR 0x60 1 99 EQ LIB CLEAR 0x61 41 200 GATE LIB CLEAR 0x62 5 128 COMP LIB CLEAR 0x63 37 128 EFF LIB CLEAR 0x64 xx 128 1 CHANNEL LIB CLEAR 0x66 1 128 INPATCH LIB CLEAR 0x67 1 32 OUTPATCH LIB CLEAR 0x68 1 32 1 Varie
334. estination channel H Oddddddd dl Destination channel L EOX 11110111 F7 End ofexclusive function channel PAIR ON with COPY 0x00 1 PAIR ON with RESET BOTH 0x01 1 PAIR OFF 0x02 1 1 0 CH1 31 CH32 128 BUS1 135 BUS8 256 AUX1 263 AUX8 512 STEREO Effect is O Effect 1 3 Effect 4 Inthe case of PAIR you must specify channels for which pairing is pos sible In the case of PAIR ON with COPY you must specify Source Channel as the copy source and Destination Channel as the copy destination 2 8 3 19 Parameter change Function call Event Effect Reception This is received if Parameter change RX is ON and the Rx CH matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS This is echoed if Parameter change ECHO is ON When this is received the corresponding effect s function activates depending on the effect type STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0O0001nnnn in n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID 01111111 7F Universal ADDRESS 00010010 12 Function call Effect Event 0000 Of function 00000000 00 Oppppppp pp Release 0 Press 1 DATA 00000000 00 ee Effect number 0 1 3 Effect4 EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive function channel Freeze Play button 0x00 O Effect1 3 Effect4 Freeze Record button 0x01 O Effect1 3 Effect4 This does not activate when t
335. et a delay time that synchronizes to the song tempo Gating Input Channels To set the Input Channel gates use the SEL buttons to select the desired Input Channel then press the DISPLAY ACCESS DYNAMICS button then press the F1 button The Dynamics Gate Edit page appears DYNAMICS CHi CHi GATE EDIT DON A e THRESHOLD RANGE 26 8dB 5 DECAY i HOLD 384ms i 2 35ms RTTRCK Ems AGATE LIBE A COMP EDIT A COMP LIB 1 KEYIN SOURCE Select one of the following buttons to determine the trigger source for the cur rently selected Input Channel s gate The selected channel s own input signal is the trigger source CHANNEL Another Channel s input signal is the trigger source Select the desired channel in the parameter box below the CHANNEL button 2 AUX Lcid An Aux Send signal is the trigger source Select the desired bus in the parameter box below the AUX button 2 STEREO LINK This parameter s ON OFF button enables you to pair gates for stereo operation even when the Input Channels are not paired 8 CURVE This area displays the current gate curve 4 TYPE This area displays the current gate type GATE or DUCKING Note You cannot change the gate type on this page To change the gate type recall a program that uses the desired gate type from the Gate library 01V96 Ve
336. everb 100 all chorus THRU ee FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed REV FLG 0 100 Reverb and flange balance 0 all reverb 100 all AM DEPTH 0 100 Amplitude modulation depth PM DEPTH 0 100 Pitch modulation depth FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed m 0 i MOD DLY 0 0 500 0ms Modulation delay time DESAI 0 100 WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation SSH time SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off rn Values for Used in conjunction with GAIN 99 to 99 1 J values for reverse phase feed TEMPO to determine FREQ back 1 BR EIR KA 102 2 1 de d d a WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ 1 REIT 5 0 102 20 41 4 4 deo m 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual gt 5 o 2 2 266 Appendix A Parameter Lists REV gt FLANGE REV gt SYMPHO One input two output reverb and flanger effects in One input two outputreverb and symphonic effects series in series Parameter Range Description Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0 3 99 0 s Reverb time REV TIME 0 3 99 0 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before r
337. everb begins INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Spread DIFF 0 10 Spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density HPF Pi pM kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency HPF kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF ie 6 0 khiz Low pass filter cutoff frequency LPF Low pass filter cutoff frequency Reverb and flanged reverb bal Reverb and symphonic reverb REV BAL 0 100 ance 0 all flanged reverb REV BAL 0 100 balance 0 all symphonic 100 all reverb reverb 100 all reverb FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time Feedback gain plus values for WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform GAIN 99 to 99 normal phase feedback minus SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off values for reverse phase feed bac p UM WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off 1 4823 422 5 2 12 0 1 de 4 4 nore REV gt PAN L PRIR RAP S d dud des c One input two output reverb and autopan effects in parallel REV SYMPHO a J Parameter Range Description One input two output reverb and symphonic effects TE BRIERE ee parallel INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms
338. exclusive DATA NAME 01010101 55 U 2 8 2 8 User Defined Keys bulk dump request format a The second and third bytes ofthe DATA NAME indicate the bank number RU n CE is 11110111 F7 End of exclusive STATUS 1 0000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA 2 8 2 11 Control change table bulk dump format SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message FORMAT No 0 110 7E Universal bulk dump ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA 01001100 ac SUB STATUS 0000nnnn On n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel 01001101 4D Bd FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump 00100000 20 E COUNT HIGH ch data count ch 128 cl 00100000 20 as COUNT LOW cl 00111000 38 b 01001100 4C 4 01000011 43 S 01001101 4D M 00111001 39 9 00100000 20 00110011 33 3 m 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000011 43 C 00111001 39 9 00110011 33 3 DATA NAME 01000011 43 00000010 02 00000000 00 No 256 Current BLOCK INFO Ottttttt tt totalblock number minimum number is 0 Obbbbbbb bb current block number 0 total block number DATA NAME 01010110 56 00000000 00 Obbbbbbb bb b 0 7 bank no A H EOX 1 0111 F7 End of exclusive 2 8 2 9 User Assignable Layer bulk dump format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number Be aware that the state of the transmission destination wi
339. f channels available on the digital I O card is limited only Aux Sends 1 4 are cascaded in this example Using a 16 channel digital I O card such as MY16 AT enables you to cascade all buses 5 Onthe master unit press the DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch Cascade In page appears 6 Select the Input Channels on the master unit to which the Bus signals are input from the Slave unit The following display page is an example of receiving the slave unit s Bus 1 8 Aux Send 1 4 Stereo Bus and Solo Bus signals via the ADAT IN and OUT connectors and two 8 channel digital I O cards such as MY8 AT PRTCH 0 Initial Data CHi CHi ST p STEREO 4 r 350L0 34 LLLA ATTENUAT LON PATCH INPUT INS A EFFECT Note Be sure to patch the slave Bus signals to the same Buses on the master unit Incorrect patching will result in an incorrect cascade connection 7 On the master unit press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeat edly until the DIO Setup Cascade page appears then adjust the Attenua tors using the parameter controls The DIO Setup Cascade page enables you to adjust the level of signals input to the Cascade Bus using the dedicated attenuators You can also turn the Cascade Buses on or off using the buttons below the parameter controls 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Cascading Consoles 241
340. following MODE buttons determine which Safe channel parameters will remain unaffected by Scene recalls The MODE buttons correspond to the following parame ters All essen All parameters FADER Channel faders or level controls EE eM Channel On Off parameters PAN Sastre Channel Pan parameters Stereo Out balance EQ saisie Channel EQ parameters cete Channel Comp parameters GATE Channel Gate parameters AUX een Channel Aux Send levels Pre Post Aux Send On Off parameters DELAY nu Channel Delay parameters ROUTING W Channel Routing parameters Tip The ALL button is mutually exclusive of the other buttons 4 RECALL SAFE CHANNEL section This section enables you to select which channels will remain unaffected by Scene recalls including Input Channels 1 32 ST IN Channels 1 4 Bus Outs 1 8 Aux Outs 1 8 Stereo Out internal effects USER DEFINED Remote layers and plug in effects The Recall Safe function is effective on channels and functions for which the buttons are turned on 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Sorting Scenes 173 Sorting Scenes You can sort Scenes in Scene memories 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS SCENE button repeatedly until the Scene Sort page appears SCENE EXTRA MIX STI STI2 STIS 5 4 tid cha OD amO 9 9 9 SCENE MEMORY SORT SOURCE DESTINATION No Data 1 EXTRA MIX TENDING MIX
341. for reverse phase feedback SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Right to left channel feedback NOTE 1 Es 15 LFBG 99101909 gan plas values for or us val ues for reverse phase feedback 1 SP OE PPMP Md ded dcs HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio HPF ee 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency SYM PHON IC Two input two output symphonic effect LPF re Low pass filter cutoff frequency Parameter Range Description SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed NOTE L 1 Used in conjunction with DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth TEMPO to determine DELAY L MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time NOTER 1 MD 12 N R WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform wre Used in conjunction with LSH F 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Low Shelving filter frequency TEMPO to determine FB DLY L LSH G 12 0 to 12 0 dB Low shelving filter gain NOTE FBR Used in conjunction with EQF 100 Hz 8 00 kHz EQ peaking type frequency TEMPO to determine FB DLY R EQ G 12 0 to 12 0 dB EQ peaking type gain 1 J HS kJ 145 2 21 4 d Jd 5 EQQ 10 0 0 10 EQ peaking type bandwidth Maximum value depends on the tempo setting HSH 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G 12 0 to 12 0 dB High shelving filter gain CHORUS SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Two input two output chorus effect NOTE 1 EE as Parameter Range Description 1 BP RTT Be dD ddd MI ded deo FREQ
342. g effects to channels adjust the MIX BALANCE parameter for the effects according to the purpose and effects type Move the cursor to an empty IN or OUT parameter box and press the ENTER button The Patch Select window appears which enables you to quickly select available signal paths Effects To edit effect programs recalled to the internal Effects processors 1 4 press the DISPLAY ACCESS EFFECT button repeatedly until the Edit page for the effects processor you wish to edit appears Effects processors 1 4 correspond to the following pages Effects Processor 1 FX1 Edit page Effects Processor 2 FX2 Edit page Effects Processor 3 FX3 Edit page Effects Processor 4 FX4 Edit page These Edit pages contain the following effect parameters EFFECT Initial Data 8 5112 STI3 ST 4 CH5 rm OO Ein EFFECT NAME el g 3 4nono DELAY am 2 TEMPO kd LEYPAS2 120 spm TEMPO DE FB GAIN HI RATIO 5o ens Io HPF NOTE Thru OS 10 0kHz_ O A FxZ EDIT fi rxs EDIT f xd EDIT fis D EFFECT NAME This parameter displays the name of the effect program currently used by the effects processor 2 TYPE This parameter displays the type of effect program currently used by the effects proces sor The I O configuration of the effect program is displayed below this parameter button Move the cursor to this p
343. g table shows the layers that you can access using the LAYER buttons and the parameters you can control using the channel strips on each layer Channel Strips LAYER buttons Layers 1 8 9 16 1 16 button Input Channel Layer 1 16 Input Channels 1 16 17 32 button Input Channel Layer 17 32 Input Channels 17 32 Operation depends on the selected REMOTE butt button Remote Layer target see page 189 MASTER button Master Layer z Send masters a Out masters Tip The function of each channel strip fader depends on the currently selected Fader mode see page 33 The STEREO SEL button ON button and STEREO fader always control the Stereo Out signal regardless of the Layer settings The ST IN SEL buttons SOLO buttons ON buttons and level control knobs always adjust the ST IN channels selected via the ST IN button regardless of the Layer settings 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 32 Chapter 3 Operating Basics Selecting Channels To select a channel on the 01V96 press the corresponding SEL button To adjust the Pan and EQ settings use the rotary controls SELECTED CHANNEL in the SELECTED CHANNEL section To select a channel on pages that cover multiple channels press the corresponding SEL but ton N EQUALIZER 1 Press the corresponding LAYER button to select a layer that includes the desired channel see page 31 To select ST IN channel
344. g the SELECTED CHAN NEL PAN control if faders ON buttons and the PAN control are in Flip mode Refer to the next section for more information Flip Mode In Flip mode you can use the faders ON buttons and the PAN control to control send levels pre post positions and mute settings as shown in the following table Control Normal mode Flip Mode Faders Channel level AUX Send level ON buttons Channel mute AUX Send mute PAN control Channel pan AUX Send pan 1 Press the FADER MODE HOME button repeatedly so that the button indi cator flashes The SELECT ASSIGN parameter on the display indicates FLIP 2 Press the FADER MODE AUX 1 AUX 5 buttons to select the desired Aux Sends A E The button indicator of the selected send lights up 3 Use the faders ON buttons and the PAN control to control the cur rently selected Aux send For stereo Aux input channels you can set the left and right panpots individually To do this press the FADER MODE AUX 7 button repeatedly When the button indicator is lit con tinuously you can set the left panpot When the button indicator is flashing you can set the right panpot 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 0430u0 202 Chapter 17 Remote Control Assigning Plug ins to Pro Tools Channels You can assign plug ins to five inserts available for Pro Tools channel strips as follows 1 Press the F2 button to select In
345. ger In theleft parameter box select MIDI USB or SLOT as the port used by the included Studio Manager software In the two small parameter boxes on the right specify a port number if you selected USB and an ID number DAW Select USB or SLOT as a port for use with a DAW Specify in the right parameter box a port number pair 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 REMOTE This parameter indicates the target currently selected for Remote Layer If the target is set to USER DEFINED you can select a MIDI message destination port CASCADE LINK This parameter determines whether MIDI messages are trans mitted between two cascaded 01V96s If you select MIDI MIDI messages will be transferred between two cascaded units If you select no MIDI messages are transferred The TRANSMIT and REQUEST buttons are used to synchro nize all parameters that are cascade linked The TRANSMIT button synchronizes the connected 01V96 s parameters to your primary 01V96 s parameters The REQUEST button synchro nizes your 01V96 parameters to the connected 01V96 s param eters lt 9 01 96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 218 Chapter 18 MIDI Selecting MIDI Messages for Transmission and Reception You can select MIDI messages to be transmitted or received at a specified port To do so press the DISPLAY ACCESS MIDI button then press the F1 button to display the MIDI Setup page
346. gnal Phase To switch the phase of each Input Channel press the INSERT DELAY button repeat edly until the following INS DLY Phase page appears Move the cursor to the NOR REV button of the channel for which you want to change the phase then press the ENTER or INC DEC buttons to change the setting INS DLY Initial Data CH1 CH1 Sjouueu ndu N 4 16 16 26 _ iR 2L 2R SL 4L 4R 9 12 25 iL CD NOR REV These buttons switch the corresponding Input Channel phase NOR buttons indicate normal phase and REV buttons indicate reversed phase 2 GLOBAL The GLOBAL NOR REV buttons allow you to set the phase for all Input Channels simultaneously Tip The name of the currently selected channel is indicated in the upper right corner of the screen You can set the phase separately for each of the ST IN Channels or for each channel in a channel pair If you selected the desired ST IN Channel using the corresponding SEL but ton pressing the same SEL button repeatedly will toggle between channels L and R 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 80 Chapter 7 Input Channels Delaying Input Channels To set the delay for each channel press the INSERT DELAY button repeatedly until the page listed below that contains the desired channels appears DLY 1 16 page This page enables you to set the Delay function for Input Ch
347. h HSH F 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G 12 0 to 12 0 dB High shelving filter gain 1 6 ms 46 0 s fs 44 1 kHz 5 ms 42 3 s fs 48 kHz 3 ms 23 0 s fs 88 2 kHz 3 ms 21 1 s fs 96 kHz 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Effects Parameters 265 DYNA PHASER REV gt CHORUS Two input two output dynamically controlled One input two output reverb and chorus effects in phaser series Parameter Range Description Parameter Range Description SOURCE INPUT MIDI nn a u nel or REV TIME 0 3 99 0 s Reverb time OLE IYS OCI INI DIY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins SENSE 0 100 Sensitivity RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIR UP DOWN fre DIFF 0 10 Spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density DECAY 1 Decay speed TARO eh HPF High pass filter cutoff frequency Lowest phase shifted frequency 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz OFFSET 0 100 offset LPF 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz filt toff f Feedback gain plus values for THRU OW pass ner cutortTrequency FB GAIN 99 to 49996 Eu Reverb and chorused reverb bal back p REV BAL 0 100 ance 0 all chorused reverb 100 all reverb STAGE 2 8 10 12 Number of phase shift stages FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed LS LSH F 21 2 Hz 8 00
348. h 16 20 24 bit Output patch STEREO BUS1 8 AUX 1 8 DIRECT OUT 1 32 INSERT OUT CH 1 32 BUS 1 8 AUX 1 8 STEREO CASCADE OUT BUS 1 8 AUX 1 8 STEREO SOLO ADAT Output Dither On off Word length 16 20 24 bit Output patch STEREO BUS1 8 AUX 1 8 DIRECT OUT 1 32 INSERT OUT CH 1 32 BUS 1 8 AUX 1 8 STEREO CASCADE OUT BUS 1 8 AUX 1 8 STEREO SOLO Option Output SLOT Available card Optional digital interface card MY16 MY8 MYA series Dither On off Word length 16 20 24 bit Output patch STEREO BUS1 8 AUX 1 8 DIRECT OUT 1 32 INSERT OUT CH 1 32 BUS 1 8 AUX 1 8 STEREO CASCADE OUT BUS 1 8 AUX 1 8 STEREO SOLO On off Comp type Pre fader post fader Attenuator 96 0 to 12 0 dB 0 1 dB step EQ 4 band PEQ On off On off 100 mm motorized Balance 127 positions Left 1 63 Center Right 1 63 Delay 0 29100 samples Displayed on LCD Metering Peak hold on off 12 elements x2 LED meters 4 On off Comp type Pre EQ pre fader post fader Attenuator 96 0 to 12 0 dB 0 1 dB step EQ 4 band PEQ On off On off BUS1 8 Fader 100 mm motorized Delay 0 29100 samples Bus to stereo Level 138 dB O dB On off Pan 127 positions Left 1 63 Center Right 1 63 Metering Displayed on LCD Peak hold on off 01V96 Ve
349. hannel modulation phase degrees difference 1 6 ms 46 0 s fs 44 1 kHz 5 ms 42 3 s fs 48 kHz 3 ms 23 0 s fs 88 2 kHz 3 ms 21 1 s fs 96 kHz TYPE LPF HPE Filter type low pass high pass band pass OFFSET 0 100 Filter frequency offset DYNA FLANGE RESO 0 20 Filter resonance Two input two output dynamically controlled LEVEL 0 100 Output level flanger SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off i i i i Parameter Range Description NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with g P TEMPO to determine FREQ 1 AP 20 4 1 4 des m One input two output distortion effect Parameter Range Description DSTI DST2 m DST OVDI OVD2 PUE type DoT 5 AOL CRUNCH DRIVE 0 100 Distortion drive MASTER 0 100 Master volume TONE 10 to 10 Tone N GATE 0 20 Noise reduction Control source input signal or MIDI Note On velocity SENSE 0 100 Sensitivity Upward or downward fre SOURCE INPUT MIDI DIR UP DOWN quency change DECAY 1 Decay speed OFFSET 0 100 Delay time offset Feedback gain plus values for normal phase feedback minus FB GAIN 99 to 99 values for reverse phase feed back LSH F 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G 12 0 to 12 0 dB Low shelving filter gain EQF 100 Hz 8 00 kHz EQ peaking type frequency EQG 12 0 to 12 0 dB EQ peaking type gain EQQ 10 0 0 10 EQ peaking type bandwidt
350. he effect type is different 2 8 3 20 Parameter change Sort Table When scene memory sort is executed on the 01V96 the memory sort table will be transmitted to Studio Manager Studio Manager will sort the memories according to this data If Studio Manager performs a scene memory sort it will transmit this data to the 01V96 STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS O0001nnnn 1n n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODELID digital mixer MODEL ID 00001101 OD 01V96 ADDRESS 00010011 13 Library sort table 0000 Of Library type DATA Oddddddd ds Data Oddddddd de Data EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 8 7 conversion is performed on the data area in the same way as for bulk 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 2 8 3 21 Parameter request Sort Table When the 01V96 receives this data it will transmit Sort Table Data STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0011lnnnn 3n n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID 00001101 OD 01 96 ADDRESS 00010011 13 Library sort table 0000 Of Library type EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 2 8 3 22 Parameter change Key remote Reception This is received if Parameter change RX is ON and the Rx CH matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS This
351. his case the DELAY or FREQ value is calculated as follows DELAY or FREQ NOTE x4 x 60 TEMPO If you edit TEMPO DELAY or FREQ will be set In this case the DELAY or FREQ value is calculated as follows DELAY or FREQ original DELAY or FREQ x previous TEMPO new TEMPO Example 1 When SYNC ON DELAY 250 ms TEMPO 120 you change NOTE from 8th note to quarter note DELAY new NOTE x4 x 60 TEMPO 1 4 x 4 x 60 120 0 5 sec 500 ms Thus the DELAY will change from 250 ms to 500 ms Example 2 When SYNC ON DELAY 250 ms NOTE 8th note you change TEMPO from 120 to 121 DELAY original DELAY x previous TEMPO new TEMPO 250 x 120 121 247 9 ms Thus the TEMPO will change from 250 ms to 247 9 ms a Rounded values are used for the calculation results Ranges of the NOTE and TEMPO values The ranges of the NOTE and TEMPO values are limited by the ranges of the DELAY or FREQ values You cannot set NOTE or TEMPO values that would cause DELAY or FREQ to exceed their maximum possible values when synchronized to tempo This limitation also applies even when SYNC is OFE Special characteristics of the TEMPO parameter The TEMPO parameter has the following characteristics that are unlike other parameters Itisa common value shared by all effects You cannot stored it to or recall it from the Effects Library You can store it to and recall it from a Scene This means that the TEMPO value may not necessarily
352. how to adjust the 01V96 s Stereo Out and Bus Out 1 8 parameters About Stereo Out The Stereo Out section receives Input Channel and Bus Out 1 8 signals mixes them into two channels processes them using on board EQ compressor etc then routes them to the STEREO OUT and 2TR OUT connectors The following diagram illustrates the Stereo Out signal flow Gain Reduction Out Meter METER METER L it 4 m 10dBV 2TR OUT R 54 METER INSERT METER INSERT INSERT METER ON LEVEL BAL 4BAND ll a OUTPUT Same as stereo master L VV OUTPUT PATCH STEREOL STEREOR da L 4dBu STEREO OUT R W 7 2 sno sng INSERT This section enables you to route the Stereo Out signals to external devices via the on board connectors or I O card or insert internal effects processors e ATT Attenuator This section enables you to attenuate or amplify the level of signals to be input to the EQ The attenuator prevents post EQ signals from clipping or corrects signal levels that are too low 4 BAND EQ 4 band equalizer This parametric EQ features four bands HIGH HIGH MID LOW MID and LOW e COMP Compressor This dynamics processor can be used as compressor expander or limiter The processor can be located pre EQ pre STEREO fader or post STEREO fader ON On Off This button turns the S
353. hreshold and width 44 1kHz 6 ms 46 0 sec 48kHz 5 ms 42 3 sec RELEASE ms 88 2kHz 3 ms 23 0 sec 96kHz 3 ms 21 1 sec 160 points WIDTH dB 0 90 91 points gt 5 2 2 01 96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 280 Appendix B Specifications Appendix B Specifications General Spec Number of scene memories 99 Internal 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 88 2 kHz 96 kHz Sampling Frequency External Normal rate 44 1 kHz 10 to 48 kHz 6 Double rate 88 2 2 10 to 96 kHz 6 fs 48 kHz Less than 1 6 ms CH INPUT to STEREO OUT Signal Delay fs 96 kHz Less than 0 8 ms CH INPUT to STEREO OUT Fader 100 mm motorized x 17 Fader Resolution 10 to 138 dB input faders 0 to 138 e dB master faders stereo fader 1 fs 48 kHz Less than 0 05 20 Hz 20 kHz 14 dB into 600 Q Total Harmonic Distortion Less than 0 01 1 kHz 24 dB into 600 Q CH INPUT to STEREO OUT B Input fs 96 kHz Less than 0 05 20 Hz 40 kHz 14 dB into 600 Q Less than 0 01 1 kHz 24 dB into 600 Q Frequency Response fs 48 kHz 20 Hz 20 kHz 0 5 1 5 dB 4 dB into 600 Q CH INPUT to STEREO OUT 96 kHz 20 Hz 40 kHz 0 5 1 5 dB 4 dB into 600 Q Dynamic Range maximum level to noise level 110 dB typ DA Converter STEREO OUT 105 dB typ AD DA to STEREO OUT fs 48 kHz 105 dB typ AD DA to STEREO OUT fs 96 kHz
354. ically turns off and the HOME button indicator lights up 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual soiseg Huneiodo w 34 Chapter 3 Operating Basics Metering This section describes how to check Input and Output Channel levels using the Meter pages 1 Press the FADER MODE HOME button repeatedly until the Meter Position page appears This page enables you to set the metering position for Input and Output Channels METERING POSITION PRE PRE FADER POST FADER IN oo oo ON FRDER GATE EG DELAY o PRE EG PRE FADER POST FADER oo ON FADER oo OUT o EG DELRY ESI STEREO POSITION CD INPUT section This section enables you to select the metering position for Input Channel and ST IN Channel signals 2 OUTPUT section This section enables you to select the metering position for Output Channel Aux Out 1 8 Bus Out 1 8 Stereo Out signals 2 Move the cursor to the desired parameter button in the INPUT or OUTPUT section then press ENTER You can select one of the following three positions in each section Immediately before EQ PREFADER Immediately before the fader POST FADER Immediately after the fader 3 Press the FADER MODE HOME button repeatedly until the page listed below that contains the desired channels appears CH1 32 page This page displays the Input Channel 1 32 levels r
355. icians to start playing the musical instruments while monitoring the recorded tracks During recording display the Meter CH1 32 page and confirm that the Input Channel levels are not clipping 2 When the musicians finish playing stop the digital MTR 3 To check the recording play the digital MTR from the beginning 4 If you are satisfied with the recording stop the playback and disarm Tracks 9 and 10 on the recorder 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Mixing Mixing Recorded Tracks into Stereo Mixdown 63 Recorded Tracks into Stereo Mixdown Mixdown is the process of mixing recorded tracks into stereo and recording the stereo sig nal to an external master recorder This section describes how to mix signals recorded on Tracks 1 16 into a stereo signal then apply the 01V96 s internal effects to the signal then record it to an external master recorder Connecting and Setting Up the Master Recorder Follow the steps below to connect a DAT recorder MD recorder CD recorder or other mas ter recorder to the 01V96 Change the 01V 96 s internal patch so that you can monitor the playback signal on the master recorder through ST IN Channel 2 Connect a master recorder to the 01V96 In the following example the 01V96 2TR OUT DIGITAL connector is connected to the master recorder s digital input and the 01V96 2TR IN DIGITAL connector is connected to the master recorder s digital output mE u
356. ies see General Library Operation 3 on page 175 The following table lists the preset memories in the Gate library No Preset Name Type Description 1 Gate GATE Gate template 2 Ducking DUCKING Ducking template 3 A Dr BD GATE Gate preset for use with acoustic bass drums 4 A Dr SN GATE Gate preset for use with acoustic snare drums 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 184 Chapter 16 Libraries Compressor Library This library enables you to store and recall settings for the compressors on Input Channels Bus Outs 1 8 Aux Outs 1 8 and Stereo Out The library contains 36 preset memories and 92 user readable amp writable memories Follow the steps below to use the Compressor library Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DYNAMICS button then press the F4 button The Dynamics Comp Lib page appears DYNAMICS Initial Data CHi CHi CURRENT TYPE COMP LIBRARY TITLE A Dr BO R Dr BD Compander 5 Compander CURRENT CURVE Cr c o 1 CURRENT TYPE This parameter displays the currently selected channel comp type Compressor Expander Compander Soft Compander Hard 2 CURRENT CURVE This graph displays the current compressor curve 3 GR meters These meters indicate the amount of gain reduction being applied by the compressor and the post comp levels of the currently selected channel and its available pair partner 4
357. imal is output When the ON buttons are turned off 00 0 in decimal is output ES Up This variable is selectable only in the DATA parameter boxes of the FADER section When you operate the faders continuously 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual MIDI Remote Layer 211 changing values in the range of 00 to 7F 0 127 in decimal are output Tip If SW is not assigned in the DATA parameter boxes of the ON section the current MIDI messages are output FAD is assigned fader operation is ignored Note Be sure to set one of the DATA parameter boxes of the FADER section to FAD If no 9 Move the cursor to the LATCH UNLATCH button then press ENTER to select LATCH or UNLATCH depending on how you want the ON buttons to function enne Pressing the ON buttons repeatedly transmits alternating On and Off messages e UNLATCH Pressing and holding down the ON buttons transmits On messages and releasing the ON buttons transmits Off mes sages Tip Refer to the diagrams below for information on how the ON buttons behave when Latch or Unlatch is selected When SW is assigned LATCH MIDI data transmission MIDI data transmission id SW 00 f x1 gt i gt E gt i gt UNLATCH MIDI data transmission MIDI data transmission SW 7F SW 00 f Off Illuminated Off ox gt
358. in 3E 0 02 7 FO 43 3n 3E 0 02 cc F7 2 8 3 6 Parameter change STATUS ID No SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS DATA 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00001101 00000011 0eeeeeee 0 Oddddddd FO 43 in 3E 0 03 Edit buffer System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel MODEL ID digital mixer Universal Edit Buffer Element no If ee is 0 ee is expanded to two bytes Parameter no Channel no data End of exclusive Edit buffer System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel MODEL ID digital mixer Universal Edit Buffer Element no If ee is 0 ee is expanded to two bytes Parameter no Channel no End of exclusive Patch data System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel MODEL ID digital mixer 01V96 Patch data Element no If ee is 0 ee is expanded to two bytes Parameter no Channel no data End of exclusive Patch data System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel MODEL ID digital mixer 01V96 Patch data Element no If ee is 0 ee is expanded to two bytes P
359. internal Effects processor 1 is different from the above use the Parameter wheel or INC DEC buttons and the ENTER button to change the patch 2 Make sure that the ON button for ST IN Channel 1 in the ST IN section is turned on 3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS EFFECT button repeatedly until the Effect FX1 Lib page appears EFFECT O Initial Data CH1 CHi EI EFFECT NAME Reverb Hall TYPE REVERB HALL TITLE EDIT No o LIBRARY TITLE 6 Gate Reverb 5 Early Ref 4 Reverb Plate EFFECT TYPE 3 Reuerb Stage REVERB HALL 11IN ZOLIT B FX2 LIB M FXS LIB fy LIB The Effect FX1 Lib page enables you to recall effect programs to be used by Effects proces sor 1 from the Effects library and store the current effects settings of Effects processor 1 to the Effects library Select from the list in the center column a program memory to which you wish to store the effects settings or a program memory that you wish to recall The selected program appears inside the dotted box 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Mixing Recorded Tracks into Stereo Mixdown 67 4 Rotate the Parameter wheel and select 2 Reverb Room For purposes of this tutorial select this room reverb program un LIBRARY TITLE 6 Gate Reverb 5 Early Ref EFFECT TYPE Reuverb Plate REVERB ROOM Reverb Hall No Data B I IR Fx I
360. ion DELAYL 0 0 1000 0 ms Left channel delay time DELAYR 0 0 1000 0 ms Right channel delay time FB DLY 0 0 1000 0 ms Feedback delay time Feedback gain plus values for FAN 991049900 romare nase feedback mins back DELAY HI 0 1 1 0 E high frequency feedback HPF aan kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF A ONE Low pass filter cutoff frequency DABAN 1 0100 all delay 10096 al reverb REV TIME 0 3 99 0s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins REV HI 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Used in conjunction with NOTE L 1 TEMPO to determine left chan nel DELAY L Used in conjunction with NOTE R 1 TEMPO to determine right chan nel DELAY R worm a 1 RR RAS 02 05 212 4 de Maximum value depends on the tempo setting DELAY REV One input two output delay and reverb effects in series Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0 0 1000 0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0 0 1000 0 ms Right channel delay time FB DLY 0 0 1000 0 ms Feedback delay time Feedback gain plus values for 99103990 haalpase feedback mins back DELAY HI 0 1 1 0 high frequency feedback HPF ns kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF ere INT Low pass filter cutoff frequency Delay and delayed reverb bal DLY BAL 0 100 ance 0 all delayed reverb 100 all delay
361. ions Do not use this apparatus near water Clean only with dry cloth Do not block any ventilation openings Install in accordance with the manufacturer s instruc tions 8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators heat registers stoves or other appa ratus including amplifiers that produce heat 9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polar ized or grounding type plug A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety If the pro vided plug does not fit into your outlet consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet NO oR WD WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE 10 11 12 13 14 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs convenience receptacles and the point where they exit from the apparatus Only use attachments accessories specified by the manufacturer Use only with the cart stand tripod bracket or table spec ified by the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus e When a cart is used use cau tion when moving the cart was apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip over Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time Refer all servicing to qua
362. ired for the level to change by 6 dB 160 points 3 9e 9y 9 09 1 O Characteristics Time Series Analysis Input Signal Output Signal E 9 HOLD 9 THRESHOLD 5 5 DECAY 4 LA A 5 5 3 ig amp a 5 THRESHOLD Input Level Time 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual COMP Section COMP Dynamics Parameters The COMP processor attenuates signals above a specified THRESHOLD by a specified RATIO The COMP processor can also be used as a limiter which with a RATIO of 1 reduces the level to the threshold This means that the limiter s output level never actually exceeds the threshold 277 Parameter THRESHOLD dB Range 54 0 to 0 0 541 points Description This determines the level of input signal required to trigger the compressor RATIO 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 5 1 1 7 1 2 0 1 2 5 1 3 0 1 3 5 1 4 0 1 5 0 1 6 0 1 8 0 1 10 1 20 1 1 16 points This determines the amount of compression that is the change in output signal level relative to change in input signal level ATTACK ms RELEASE ms 0 120 121 points 44 1kHz 6 ms 46 0 sec 48kHz 5 ms 42 3 sec 88 2kHz 3 ms 23 0 sec 96kHz 3 ms 21 1 sec 160 points This determines how soon the signal will be com pressed once the compressor has been triggered This determines how soon the compressor returns to its normal gain once th
363. is button resets the master levels for all Fader groups to nom inal e This turns each Input Fader group on or off This function works like a VCA mute on an analog mixing console Bader ime These faders adjust the master levels of the Fader groups Fader knobs are highlighted when faders are set to 0 0 dB Press the ENTER button to set the currently selected fader to 0 0 dB You can also control the parameters from the channel strips on the control surface as described below by using the User Assignable Layer of the Remote Layers See page 233for information on the User Assignable Layer SEL buttons These buttons move the cursor on the In Master page or Out Master page SOLO buttons These buttons turn the Solo function of each Fader group on and off You can monitor all the channels in each Fader group Channel Faders The channel faders enable you to set the master level for each Fader group Using Mute Group Master In addition to the Mute Group function that links the operation of channel ON buttons the 01V96 features a Mute Group Master function that enables you to mute grouped chan nels using the Master Mute buttons in a manner similar to using a mute group on an analog mixing console While this function is enabled the ON buttons for grouped channels will not be linked 1 After you perform Step 5 in Using Fader Groups and Mute Groups
364. is echoed if Parameter change ECHO is ON When this is received the same processing that is executed when the key speci fied by Address is pressed released Transmission If Parameter Change ECHO is ON this message is retransmitted without change STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID 00001101 OD 01 96 ADDRESS 00100000 20 Key remote Okkkkkkk kk Key address Okkkkkkk kk Key address M Okkkkkkk kk Key address L DATA Oppppppp pp Release 0 Press EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 2 8 3 23 Parameter change Remote Meter When transmission is enabled by receiving a Request of Remote meter the specified meter information is transmitted every 50 msec for 10 seconds When you want to transmit meter information continuously a Request must be trans mitted continuously within every 10 seconds Reception This is echoed if Parameter change ECHO is ON Transmission When transmission has been enabled by a Request the parameter specified by Address will be transmitted on the Rx CH channel at 50 msec intervals for a duration of 10 seconds Transmission will be disabled if the power is turned off and on again or if the PORT setting is changed If Parameter Change ECHO is ON this message is retransmitted without change STATUS 11110000 FO System e
365. ital Clipping Level Nominal Output 4dBu 20 10 Nominal nput GAIN MIN V PAD ON 1 STEREO OUT OMNI OUT MONITOR OUT Max Input 40dBu GAIN MAX PAD OFF OdBFS Full Scale DSP Noise Floor 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 For details of products please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below Pour plus de d tails sur les produits veuillez vous adresser 4 Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd 135 Milner Avenue Scarborough Ontario MIS 3RI Canada Tel 416 298 1311 U S A Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave Buena Park Calif 90620 U S A Tel 714 522 9011 CENTRAL amp SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de M xico S A de C V Calz Javier Rojo G mez 1149 Col Guadalupe del Moral C P 09300 M xico D F M xico Tel 55 5804 0600 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda Av Reboucas 2636 Pinheiros CEP 05402 400 Sao Paulo SP Brasil Tel 011 3085 1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America S A Sucursal de Argentina Viamonte 1145 Piso2 B 1053 Buenos Aires Argentina Tel 1 4371 7021 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America S A Torre Banco General Piso 7 Urbanizaci n Marbell
366. itted if a valid plug in effect card is not installed STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0000nnnn On n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump COUNT HIGH ch data count ch 128 cl COUNT LOW cl 01001100 4c 1 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000011 43 C 09011200138 00110011 33 3 DATA NAME 01001110 4E N Ommmmmmm mh m 0 SLOT 1 Ommmmmmm ml BLOCK INFO Obbbbbbb bh current block number 0 total block number Obbbbbbb bl Ottttttt th total block number minimum number is 0 Ottttttt tl 00001111 01 Developer id High 00001111 01 Developer id Low 00003332 0j Product id High 00003333 03 Product id Low DATA Oddddddd ds Plug in Effect card memory data of block bb Oddddddd de CHECK SUM ee ee Invert L de 1 amp 0x7F EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 2 8 2 30 Plug in effect card bulk dump request format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the slot number See above STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump 01001100 4c 1 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000011 43 00111001 39 9 00110011
367. kHz Low shelving filter frequency C1000 Amplitude modulation depth 0 i i LSH G 12 0 to 12 0 dB Low shelving filter gain PM DEPTH 01006 Pitch modulation depth HSH F 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz High shelving filter frequency MOD DLY at ms MIROR delay time HSHG 12 0 to 412 0 dB High shelving filter gain WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off 1 6 ms 46 0 s fs 44 1 kHz 5 ms 42 3 s fs 48 kHz 3 ms 23 0 s Used in conjunction with fs 88 2 kHz 3 ms 21 1 s fs 96 kHz NOTE 1 TEMPO to Bremen FREQ 10 2 1 4 4 4 9 REV CHORUS One input two output reverb and chorus effects in REV FLANGE arallel 7 One input two output reverb and flanger effects in Parameter Range Description parallel REV TIME 0 3 99 0 s Reverb time E BecHen INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins iind ange tassi riu HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio REV EIME Oise 208 Reverb ome DIFF 0 10 Spread INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms initial delay before reverb begins DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio THRU DIFF 0 10 Spread HPF 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz THRU LPF THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency HPF 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency Reverb and chorus balance 096 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz 9 Low filt toff fi BENCH 1101009 all r
368. l EQ settings for Input Channels Bus Outs 1 8 Aux Outs 1 8 and Stereo Out The library contains 40 preset memories and 160 user read able amp writable memories Follow the steps below to use the EQ library 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS EQ button then press the F2 button The EQ EQ Library page appears EQ Initial Data Ema 2 CHI EQUALIZER LIBRARY CURRENT CURVE D CURRENT TYPE TYPE I 100 LOK 1K TITLE No LIBRARY TITLE Cymbal Tom tom 1 Snare Drum 2 Snare Drum 1 Bass Drum 2 1 CURRENT TYPE This parameter displays the currently selected channel EQ type TYPE I or II 2 CURRENT CURVE This graph displays the current EQ curve 3 Level meters These meters indicate the post EQ levels of the currently selected channel and its avail able pair partner 4 Type amp Curve section The type and curve of the currently selected EQ program are displayed here 2 Usethe LAYER buttons to select layers then press the SEL buttons to select channels You can now store the selected channel EQ settings or recall the EQ library memories to channels For details on storing and recalling memories see General Library Operation on page 175 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 187 Using Libraries The following table lists the preset memories in the EQ library Preset Name Bass Drum 1 Description Emphasizes the low range of a bass drum and
369. l SM CTRL Surround 136 DAW SHUTTLE DAW SHUTTLE 191 Studio Manager Window Control SM CTRL Effect 137 DAW SCRUB DAW SCRUB Effect Editor 138 DAW AUDITION DAW AUDITION 192 Se Manager Window Control SM CTRL Meter 139 DAW PRE DAW PRE 140 DAWIN DAW IN 193 uns Manager Window Control SM CTRL Layer TAY DAW OUT DAW OUT 194 Studio Manager Window Control SM CTRL Master 142 DAW POST DAW POST Master 143 DAW RTZ DAW RTZ 144 DAW END DAW END 145 DAW ONLINE DAW ONLINE 146 DAW LOOP DAW LOOP 147 DAW QUICKPUNCH DAW QUICKPUNCH 148 DAW GROUP STATUS DAW GROUP STATUS 149 DAW AUTO FADER DAW AUTO FADER 150 DAW AUTO MUTE DAW AUTO MUTE 151 DAW AUTO PAN DAW AUTO PAN 152 DAW AUTO SEND DAW AUTO SEND 153 DAW AUTO PLUGIN DAW AUTO PLUGIN 154 DAW AUTO SEND MUTE DAW AUTO SENDMUTE 155 DAW AUTO READ DAW AUTO READ 156 DAW AUTO TOUCH DAW AUTO TOUCH 157 DAW AUTO LATCH DAW AUTO LATCH 158 DAW AUTO WRITE DAW AUTO WRITE 159 DAW AUTO TRIM DAW AUTO TRIM 160 DAW AUTO OFF DAW AUTO OFF 161 DAW AUTO SUSPEND DAW AUTO SUSPEND 162 DAW AUTO STATUS DAW AUTO STATUS 163 DAW MONITOR STATUS DAW MONI STATUS 164 DAW CREATE GROUP DAW CREATE GROUP 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual USER DEFINED KEYS Initial Assignments 249 USER DEFINED KEYS Initial Assignments
370. l number 62h 63h and Data Entry control num ber 06h 26h Parameter settings are defined in the Control Change Assign Pa rameter List Transmission If TABLE is selected operating a parameter specified in the Control assign ta ble will cause these messages to be transmitted if Control Change Tx is ON The parameters that can be specified are defined in the Control Change Assign Parameter List If NRPN is selected operating a specified parameter will cause data to be transmitted on the Tx CH if Control Change Tx is ON using the four mes sages NRPN control number 62h 63h and Data Entry control number 06h 26h Parameter settings are defined in the Control Change Assign Parameter List This data cannot be transmitted via control change to Studio Manager since there is no guarantee that the contents of the tables will match Parameter Change messages will always be used 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual If TABLE is selected STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control change DATA Onnnnnnn nn Control number 0 95 102 119 Ovvvvvvv vw Control Value 0 127 If NRPN is selected STATUS Ollnnnn Bn Control change DATA 01100010 62 NRPNLSB Ovvvvvvv LSB of parameter number STATUS Olinnnn Bn Control change 1 DATA 01100011 63 NRPN MSB Ovvvvvvv vv MSB of parameter number STATUS Ollnnnn Bn Control change 1 DATA 00000110 06 MSB of data entry Ovvvvvvv vw MSB of parameter data STATUS Olinnnn Bn Control change
371. l reaches 3 dB below clipping at dig ital domain Signal indicator LED green turns on when post HA level reaches 20 dB below nominal at digital domain AD converter 24 bit linear 128 times oversampling fs 44 1 48 kHz 64 times over sampling fs 88 2 96 kHz Input selector CH15 16 2TR IN for CH15 16 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual General Spec 281 Digital Input 2TR IN DIGITAL ADAT input Option Input SLOT Available cards Optional digital interface cards MY16 MY8 MY4 series Input Channel CH1 32 Stereo Input Channel CH1 4 Input patch Phase Normal reverse 3 On off Gate type Key in 12 ch Group 1 12 13 24 25 32 AUX1 8 On off Comp type Key in self Stereo Link Pre EQ pre fader post fader Attenuator 96 0 to 12 0 dB 0 1 dB step EQ 4 band PEQ 1 5 On off Delay 0 43400 samples On off Fader 100 mm motorized INPUT AUX1 8 Aux send On off AUX1 8 pre fader post fader Solo On off Pre fader after pan Pan 127 positions Left 1 63 Center Right 1 63 Surround pan 127 x 127 positions Left 1 63 Center Right 1 63 x Front 1 63 Center Rear 1 63 LFE level co 96 dB to 10 dB 256 step Routing STEREO BUS1 8 DIRECT OUT Direct out Pre EQ pre fader post fader Metering Displayed on LCD Input patch L R Peak hold on off Phase L R Normal rever
372. lified service person nel Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way such as power supply cord or plug is damaged liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus the apparatus has been exposed to rain or mois ture does not operate normally or has been dropped PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference AN WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock short circuiting damages fire or other hazards These precautions include but are not limited to the following Power supply Power cord Only use the voltage specified as correct for the device The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the device Use only the specified power code Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord place heavy objects on it or place it in a position where anyone could walk on trip over or roll anything over it Do not open Do not open the device or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way The device contains no user serviceable parts If it should appear to be malfunctioning discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel N CAUTION Do not expose th
373. ll in some cases change if the same bank is being used STATUS 1 0000 FO System exclusive message DATA Oddddddd ds Control change table data of block bb ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA 0 15 Devi ber MIDI Channel f SUB STATUS 0000nnnn On m Device number annel ddae FORMAT No 0 110 7E Universal bulk dump CHECK SUM ee ee lnvert L de 1 amp 0x7F COUNT HIGH ch data count ch 128 cl FOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive COUNT LOW cl 01001100 ac L 2 8 2 12 Control change table bulk dump request format 01001101 4D M aa AD OOO ie STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message nn e Yi ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SER OPES eU SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump 01000011 43 C 01001100 4c 4 00111001 39 9 01001101 4D M 00110011 33 3 00100000 20 DATA NAME 01010101 55 U 00100000 20 00000000 00 00111000 38 8 Obbbbbbb bb b 0 3 bank no 1 4 01000011 43 BLOCK INFO Ottttttt tt totalblock number minimum number is 0 00111001 39 9 Obbbbbbb bb current block number 0 total block number 00110011 33 3 DATA Oddddddd ds User assignable layer data of block bb DATA NAME 01000011 43 C D 00000010 02 Oddddddd de 00000000 00 No 256 Current CHECK SUM Oeeeeeee ee ee Invert L 4 de 41 amp O0x7F EOX 11110111 F7 End
374. ll 83 UDEF KEYS BANK 1 UDEF KEYS BANK 1 31 EQ Lib Recall No XX EQ LibXXX Recall 84 UDEF KEYS BANK 1 UDEF KEYS BANK 32 Input Patch Lib Recall 1 IN Patch Lib 1 85 UDEF KEYS BANK X DERKEYS BANK x Input Patch Lib Recall 1 IN Patch Lib 1 86 REMOTE USER DEFINE BANK 1 RMT UDEF BANK 1 34 Input Patch Lib Recall No XX IN Patch LibXX 87 REMOTE USER DEFINE BANK 1 RMT UDER BANK 1 35 Output Patch Lib Recall 1 Out Patch Lib 1 88 REMOTE USER DEFINE BANK X RMT UDEF BANK X 36 Output Patch Lib Recall 1 Out Patch Lib 1 89 REMOTE USER ASS LAYER BANK 1 USR LAYER BANK 1 37 Output Patch Lib Recall No XX Out Patch LibXX 90 REMOTE USER ASS LAYER BANK 1 USR LAYER BANK 1 38 Input Fader Group Enable IN Fader Group A 91 REMOTE USER ASS LAYER BANK X USR LAYER BANK X 39 Input Fader Group Enable IN Fader Group B 92 MIDI NOTE No XX MIDI NOTE 40 Input Fader Group Enable C IN Fader Group C 93 MIDI Program change No XX MIDI PGM XXX 41 Input Fader Group Enable D IN Fader Group D 94 MIDI Control Change No XX MIDI CC XXX 42 Input Fader Group Enable E IN Fader Group E 95 Machine REC Machine REC 43 Input Fader Group Enable IN Fader Group F 96 Machine PLAY Machine PLAY 44 Input Fader Group EnableG IN Fader Group G 97 Machine STOP Machine STOP 45 Input Fader Group Enable IN Fader Group H 98 Machine FF Machine FF 46 Input MUTE Group Enable IN Mute Group 99 Machine REW Machine REW 47
375. lly copied to the Short name On the other hand a newly entered Short name is automatically added to the beginning of the Long name You can reset all port names to their default names by moving the cursor to the INITIALIZE button then pressing ENTER Changing the Output Channel Names To change output channel names press the DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch Out Name page appears ESL ADIRECT OUTA ZTR QUT PRTCH Initial Data als SHZ SHS 5714 CH1 CH1 GI ST E Name Input Auto Cory ID SHORT LONG AUX CAUX gt RUX gt AUXG CAUXG gt lt AUXB gt lt AUXG gt AUXS CAUXS gt RUXS lt AUXS gt RUX4 CAUX4 gt RUX4 lt AUX4 gt AUXS CAUXS gt lt AUX3 gt lt AUXS gt RUX2 CAUX2 gt RUX2 lt gt gt eux 3 INITIRLIZE A OUT LIE The procedure for editing the names and using the Name Input Auto Copy check box and the INITIALIZE button is the same as on the In Name page Setting Preferences You can change the default settings and environmental settings of the 01V96 by using the DIO Setup Prefer1 and Prefer2 pages To locate one of the Preferences page press the DIS PLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly Preferl page This page enables you to set the 01V96 so that when you press a button on the top panel the 01V96 displays the corresponding display page and shows or hides confirmation and alarm mes
376. loed Channels 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Rear Panel 23 Rear Panel PHANTOM 48V p 23 AD Output Section Digital I O Section MIDI Control Section p 23 p 24 p 25 4 on fT oe on rere m ym SEO OUT WORD CLOCK En AUN MIDI TO HOST MONITOR OUT OMNI QUT o Ol 4dB BAL IN Man Buenas H 4015 ACIN AN a POWER Power Section p 25 PHANTOM 48V CH9 12 on orF D CH1 4 ON OFF switch 2 CH5 8 ON OFF switch 3 CH9 12 ON OFF switch Each of these switches turns on or off the 48V phantom power feed to four corresponding inputs When the switches are on 48V phantom power is supplied to the INPUT A con nectors AD Output Section MONITOR OUT 4dB BAL OUT COAXIAL COAXIAL LL SLOT Section p 25 PHANTOM 48V CH5 8 CH1 4 ON OMNI OUT 4dB BAL d SLOT STEREO OUT 4dB BAL TIT D MONITOR OUT connectors L R These balanced TRS phone type con nectors output monitoring signals or 2TR IN signals The nominal signal level is 4 dB You can select signals using the Mon itor Source selector 1 4 TRS phone plug Tip hot Ring cold 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Sleeve ground pued Jeay 8 e ejing IN 24 Chapter 2 Control Surface amp Rear Panel
377. low the threshold and width Functions as an expander The hard compander has an expansion ratio of 5 1 while the soft compander has an expan sion ratio of 1 5 1 The expander is essentially turned off when the width is set to maximum The compressor has a fixed knee setting of 2 The gain is automatically adjusted according to the ratio and threshold values and can be increased by up to 18 dB The OUT GAIN parameter enables you to compensate for the overall level change caused by the compression and expansion processes Parameter Range Description This determines the level at which compression is applied THRESHOLD dB 54 0 to 0 0 541 points 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 5 1 1 7 1 2 0 1 2 5 1 3 0 1 3 5 1 4 0 1 5 0 1 6 0 1 8 0 1 10 1 20 1 15 points RATIO This determines the amount of compression This determines how soon the signal is com ATTACK ms 0 120 121 points pressed or expanded once the compander has been triggered This determines how soon the compressor or expander returns to the normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below or exceeds the threshold respectively The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB OUT GAIN dB 18 0 to 0 0 180 points This sets the compander s output signal level This determines how far below the threshold expansion will be applied The expander is acti vated when the level drops below the t
378. ls since they do not feature com pressors 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Buu 8 sjauueyD BurdnosyH 150 Chapter 13 Grouping Channels amp Linking Parameters Using Fader Groups and Mute Groups Follow the steps below to group faders or ON buttons for Input Channels or Output Channels 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PAIR GROUP button repeatedly until one ofthe pages that contains the desired group and channels appears InFader page This page enables you to set Fader groups A H for Input Channels 1 32 and STIN Channels 1 4 Out Fader page This page enables you to set Fader groups Q T for Bus Outs 1 8 Aux Outs 1 8 and Stereo Out In Mute page In Fader page PAIR GRUP Initial Data 815711 5112 5113 5114 CHI CHI Q 1234 IOnmoomm 12 4 MUTE This page enables you to set Mute groups I P for Input Channels 1 32 and ST IN Channels 1 4 respectively Out Mute page This page enables you to set Mute groups U X for Bus Outs 1 8 Aux Outs 1 8 and Stereo Out In Mute page PAIR GRUP Initial Data 5112 STI3 5714 ERO 9 Qu INPUT MUTE GROUP amp INPUT MUTE MASTER 1238 s67 101112 13 14 15 16 1 2 ENABLE MASTER inn te xb Heb REN diu dne i i y E ciii MEM mM Em Em Em Em 5 DOZZTARCL
379. m ml 256 259 Effect1 4 current 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 11110111 F7 End of exclusive EOX 2 8 2 23 Channel library bulk dump format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number O Library no 0 128 Library no 128 256 287 CH32 288 STEREO 1L 295 STEREO 4R 384 BUS1 391 058 512 AUX1 519 AUX8 768 STEREO 8192 UNDO 256 and following are data for the corresponding channel of the edit buffer For reception by the 01V96 only the user area is valid 2 128 256 STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0000nnnn On nz0 15 Device number MIDI Channel FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump COUNT HIGH ch data count ch 128 cl COUNT LOW cl 01001100 4C U 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual gt 5 o 2 Q x 312 Appendix C MIDI 01000011 00111001 00110011 01001000 Ommmmmmm DATA NAME Ommmmmmm Ottttttt Obbbbbbb Oddddddd BLOCK INFO DATA Oddddddd 0eeeeeee 11110111 CHECK SUM EOX 43 39 33 48 mh ml tt bb ds de ee F7 0 128 Channel Library no 0 128 256 Current data total block number minimum number is 0 current block number 0 total block number Channel Library data of block bb ee Invert L de 1 amp 0x7F End of excl
380. meter wheel see page 197 5 INSERT ASSIGN EDIT section This section enables you to insert plug ins into Pro Tools channels and adjust plug in settings Use the left and right Tab Scroll buttons to change the parameters displayed in this section INSERT ASSIGN EDIT ASSIGN COMPARE BYPASS INSERT iPress a channel strir s INSERT switch ito assign edit an insert eie O O O O Clo Clo ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER merc 1 mm Turn on this button to insert plug ins into Pro Tools channels If you are using the TDM system you can also assign outboard effects processors You can compare your edits with the original settings by turn ing on this button This button works in unison with the Com pare button in the Pro Tools Inserts and Sends windows s BYPASS aaa Turning on this button bypasses the plug ins see page 204 INSERT PARAM Switching this button to INSERT enables you to assign plug ins using four rotary controls on the page Switching this button to PARAM enables you to adjust the plug in parameters using the four rotary controls see page 203 Information box This box displays plug in parameter names values alarm mes sages from Pr
381. mmmmmmm mm ADDRESS UL Ommmmmmm mm ADDRESS LU Ommmmmmm mm ADDRESS LL ch CountH cl CountL EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 2 8 3 25 Parameter change Remote Time Counter When transmission is enabled by receiving a Request of Remote Time Counter the Time Counter data is transmitted every 50 msec for 10 seconds When you want to transmit Counter information continuously a Request must be trans mitted within every 10 seconds Reception This is echoed if Parameter change ECHO is ON Transmission When transmission is enabled by receiving a Request the Time Counter infor mation is transmitted on RxCH channel every 50 msec for 10 seconds Transmission will be disabled if the power is turned off and on again or if the PORT setting is changed If Parameter Change ECHO is ON this message is retransmitted without change STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 3E MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID 00001101 OD 01 96 ADDRESS 00100010 22 Remote Time counter 0000tttt Ot O Time code 1 Measure Beat Clock Oddddddd dd Hour Measure H Oddddddd dd Minute Measure L DATA Oddddddd dd Second Beat Oddddddd dd Frame Clock EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 2 8 3 26 Parameter request Remote Time Counter Reception This is received if Parameter change RX is ON a
382. n 85 ee Effect FX4 Edit page Gate library see 183 Sn pends 158 Effect FX4 Lib page GATE REVERB 4 260 ER Effect P In Edit page een nie 8 PH p od EFFECT button 18 KEYIN SOURCE nn m e into channels nn T Effects eters nen 5 EL ee 161 Internal effects une 137 Galerien esse 149 Ir 12 parameter tables ne 260 Fader groups necer 150 a 2 Plupins maina en RRN 163 150 INV GAN Q cadat eee tenete 85 Effects library 179 Preset caede nee em 181 H K programs neeneeeeeeenenenenenenennenenenennnn 181 KEYIN SOURCE eee 81 EMPHASIS ea jj Hee ENTER button 22 Recording systern L Pater titles HIGH button Ti 254 Higher sampling rates LAST SOLO itle edit window 30 LATCH Bone 84 100 104 111 113 HIGH MID button eee MR dS HOME button LAYER section Di HOME button indicator Layers Mn je rines m HORIZONTAL dieto 93 E 1 Settings 1 84 100 111 aes i Level controls 00 17 a 1 Levels Me 104 113 see 143 pe ae NORDEN 1 Libraries zu 175 186 Installing 82 28 26 Channel library ums 177 AM a 197 JIEEEI394 72 OMA EC OM 184 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 321 Index Effects library s 179 EQlibr ty
383. n use the faders SEL buttons and various buttons and controls in the SELECTED CHANNEL section on the top panel to directly control most parameters for Input Chan nels Setting Input Channel Levels and Panning the Channels Input Channels 1 32 1 Press the LAYER 1 16 or 17 32 button to select a layer 2 Press the SEL button of the channel for which you want to adjust the input level and or pan settings Use the faders to set the Input Channel levels 4 Rotate the SELECTED CHANNEL PAN control to adjust the pan settings When you rotate the PAN control the Pan Route Pan page is displayed automatically TOL PRN ROUTE Initial Data 571257135714 CHI CHT O 0 oO aff OO OOO Lea CENT R CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER L53 R63 1 12 13 14 15 16 CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER R53 17 15 19 26 21 22 23 24 SL 3R OO ODIO OO qt CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER L53 R53 ST IN Channels 1 4 1 Use the ST IN ST IN button to select the desired ST IN Channels The indicators next to the ST IN button display the ST IN Channels currently selected for control by the ST IN section 2 Press the SEL button for the channel for which you want to adjust the level and or pan settings 3 Rotate the level control of the desired channel to set the level You can always view the current channel level at the top of the
384. nd the Rx CH matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS This is echoed if Parameter change ECHO is ON When this is received the Time Counter information is transmitted on the Rx CH channel every 50 msec for 10 seconds When the second byte of Address is received on 0x7F data transmission will be halted immediately disable Transmission If Parameter Change ECHO is ON this message is retransmitted without change STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0011 n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID 00001101 OD 01 96 ADDRESS 00100010 22 Remote Time counter Oddddddd dd 0 Transmission request 0x7F Transmission stop request EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual gt 5 o 2 318 Appendix D Options Appendix D Options Rack Mounting the 01V96 Using RK1 Rack Mount Kit You can rack mount the 01V96 using an optional RK1 Rack Mount Kit 1 Hold one of the brackets against one side of the 01V96 so that the bracket ear projects to the side and align three holes on the bracket with the holes on the side of the 01V96 as shown in the illustration below 2 Affix the bracket using three screws included in the RK1 package 3 Attach the other bracket to the other side of the 01V96 in the same way 01V96 Version 2 Owner
385. ned 01V96 parameter is set accordingly Also when you adjust a parameter on the 01V96 the 01V96 transmits the assigned Control Change message Tip You can store a Parameter to Control Change assignment table to an external device by using MIDI Bulk Dump or the included Studio Manager software 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the DIO Setup MIDI Host page appears then specify ports for transmission and reception of MIDI messages see page 216 2 Make connections using the ports selected in Step 1 so that the 01V96 can transfer MIDI messages to and from the external device 3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS MIDI button then press the F3 button The MIDI Ctl Asgn page appears This page enables you to assign 01V96 parameters to Control Changes MIDI OO Initial Data MPA 5712 5713 zt CH1 CH1 27 27 MZ Cc CONTROL CHANGE ASSIGN TABLES Cer D PARAMETER 6 1 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT 6 5 1 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT 5 4 1 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT 4 1 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT 3 2 lt 1 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT 2 1 1 FADER CHANNEL ANPUT 1 L o 551 reed INITIALIZE SETUP PGM_ASGN 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Assigning Parameters to Control Changes for Real time Control 221 Tip See page 290 for information on the default Parameter to Control Change assignments 4
386. ng initialized suonounj Jou1O 01 96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 244 Chapter 19 Other Functions Calibrating the Faders The 01V 96 motorized fader positions may shift over time depending on the operating con ditions and environment You can correct the shifted faders using the Calibration function Make sure that the power to the 01V96 is turned off Press and hold down the ENTER button then turn on the POWER ON OFF switch After a while the following calibration window appears 81V96 FADER CALIBRATION FADER MOVE amp FADER POSITION 2 FADER ONLY 3 FADER POSITION ONLY 4 QUIT Select Menu bs Usins Cursor Kess Press ENTER to Start Calibration Make sure that 1 FADER MOVE amp FADER POSITION is selected then press ENTER To adjust only the motor fader movement use the cursor buttons to select 2 FADER MOVE ONLY then press ENTER To adjust only the fader position use the cursor buttons to select 3 FADER POSITION ONLY then press ENTER Proceed to Step 5 To cancel the calibration operation use the cursor buttons to select 4 QUIT then press ENTER The 01V96 starts in normal mode The calibration operation begins adjusting the motor fader movement and the 01V96 displays a message that indicates the calibration operation is in progress The calibration operation takes about two minutes DO NOT touch the faders during the operation 01V
387. ng will not respond In this case a warning message appears spayF 1 01 96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 164 Chapter 14 Internal Effects 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Scene Memories 165 15 Scene Memories This chapter describes Scene memories which store 01V96 mix and effects settings About Scene Memories Scene memories enable you to store a snapshot of 01V96 channel mix settings and internal effects processor settings as a Scene in a special memory area There are 99 Scene memories and you can recall any Scene using the display pages or the controls on the top panel Tip page 219 page 226 You can recall Scenes by transmitting Program Changes from external MIDI devices see You can back up Scene memories to external MIDI devices by using MIDI Bulk Dump see What is Stored in a Scene The following parameter settings are stored in a Scene Scene Mix parameters Parameters All channel faders and level controls Channel to Aux Out 1 8 Send levels Aux Out 1 8 amp Bus Out 1 8 levels All channel ON button settings All channel Phase settings All channel Attenuator settings All channel Delay settings excluding ST IN Channels All channel Compressor settings excluding ST IN Channels Input channel Gate settings excluding ST IN Channels All channel EQ settings All channel Pan settings
388. nge the routing for Input Channels 1 16 ROUT17 ST1 page This page enables you to change the routing for Input Channels 17 32 and ST IN Chan nels 1 4 The parameters on these two pages and the procedure for setting them are the same PAN ROUTE Initial Data CH1 CH1 48k ALL BUS ALL CLEAR 7 ALL STEREO 0 80 80 80 B sunnouwo MODE STEREO gL PAN ROUTI IO fAROUTIT STI ABUS TO ST Abi D PAN buttons These buttons determine whether the channel s Pan setting is applied to the Bus outs In surround mode they also determine whether the Surround Pan setting is applied to the Bus Outs 2 Bus buttons 1 8 These buttons route the currently selected Input Channel to the Bus Outs If the 01V96 isin Surround mode the button indicators change as follows depending on the selected Surround mode Bus buttons 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Surround mode 3 1 L R iG S 5 6 7 8 Surround mode 5 1 L R Ls Rs C E 7 8 Surround mode 6 1 L R Ls Rs 8 L Left R Right C Center S Surround Ls Left Surround Rs Right Surround E Low Frequency Effect Bs Back Surround The above table shows the default assignment The actual assignment may vary depend ing on the settings on the DIO Setup Surround Bus Setup page 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Setting the Input Channels from the Display 87 95 When this button is turned on the c
389. ngs in the current scene can be copied and pasted into other scenes page 173 You can select additional parameters for the Recall Safe function page 172 Remote Control Cubase SX has been added as a target of the Remote layer page 189 Yamaha s proprietary Advanced DAW protocol has been added to Nuendo Cubase SX and General DAW This enables you to control these devices using the 01V96 s SELECTED CHANNEL section Controllable functions vary depending on the DAW software and ver sion you are using Other Functions You can set the Routing ST Pair Link so that the routing from paired channels to the Stereo Bus is linked page 232 You can assign the selected channels to a Fader or Mute group using the USER DEFINED KEYS page 247 You can switch the windows of the included Studio Manager software application using the USER DEFINED KEYS page 247 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Contents Contents Welcome Ben Bs Control Surface amp Rear Panel Control Surface be as Ser echa Rear Panel es erkenne Installing an Optional Card Operating Basics About the Display rest eee anes ns Selecting Display Display Interface ea ee Selecting Layers ston
390. ngs on the device vents etc If this happens turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet Then have the device inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel uncomfortable you experience Do not use headphones for a long period of time at a high o volume level since this can cause permanent hearing loss I any hearing loss or ringing in the ears consult a physician Do not apply oil grease or contact cleaner to the faders Doing so may cause problems with electrical contact or fader motion Do not rest your weight on the device or place heavy objects on it and avoid use excessive force on the buttons switches or connectors This device has a rear panel slot for installing mini YGDAI cards For technical reasons certain card combinations are not supported Before installing any cards check the Yamaha web site see page 6 to see whether your card is compatible Installing cards that are not endorsed by Yamaha may cause electrical shock fire or damage to the unit Backup battery e This device has a built in backup battery When you unplug the power cord from the AC outlet the internal data is retained However if the backup battery fully discharges this data will be lost If the backup battery is running low when you turn on the device the display indicates WARNING Low Battery In this case immediately save the data to an external media u
391. nnels aan oS regu Naming Input Channels eese sur er sn Bus Outs 2 2424 ew ERR En Ce Se ES en About Stereo Out naar ehe ECT Die baie ts Dus Out 28 cece tas aaa ae ne ash Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1 8 from the Display Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1 8 from the Control Surface Pairing Buses Aux Sends Attenuating Output Signals Naming the Stereo Out and Bus Outs AuxOuts 52 240220 RV ae ees Stee es Aug Out 1 82 ee Basen Setting Aux Out 1 8 from the Display Viewing Aux Out Settings una eese EH HE Ede PE e Setting Aux Out 1 8 from the Control Surface 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Contents 9 Setting Aux Send Levels 72 113 Viewing Aux Send Settings for Multiple Channels 117 Panning Aux Sends iier UN re Ud err DUU UA e d are irte eode 119 Copying Channel Fader Positions to Aux Sends 120 10 Input amp Output Patching 121 Input Ratching Bags Ue enia eie e de 121 Output Patching sus eost cre yd eet ov eese viievvs 123 Patching Direct Outs es cet petet e E Re Ce
392. nput Channel signals are panned within and across the stereo field About Surround Pan The Surround Pan function places a sound image within a two dimensional field using a multi channel playback system and pans the image to the front rear left and right in rela tion to the listening position To pan the stereo image you can use the Parameter wheel or INC DEC buttons If each channel s follow pan see page 89 is turned off you can route the signals to the cor responding Bus Outs regardless of the Surround Pan setting This is convenient when you wish to assign the surround source or surround effect returns to the Buses If Nominal Pan see page 231 in the Preferl page is checked the level of the Input Chan nels that are panned hard left or right will be used as the nominal level If the check box is not checked the nominal level will be 3dB Note If you save a scene with the Follow Pan function turned off while using a 01V96 that runs firmware older than Version 2 0 the surround settings of the scene may not be played back correctly You can also store the surround pan settings in a Scene In addition to a normal Stereo mode the 01V96 features the following three Surround modes e 3 1 Front L This mode uses four channels that include front left front right front center and rear ued punong Fy e 5 1 This mode uses six channels that include front left front right rear left rear right front cen
393. nput signals on the armed tracks Refer to the owner s manual for the digital MTR for more information In this way signals sent to Tracks 1 8 of the digital MTR are returned to the 01V96 s Input Channels 17 24 Press the LAYER 17 32 button Input Channel Layer 17 32 is now available for control from the channel strip section Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PAN ROUTING button repeatedly until the Pan Route Rout17 STI page appears 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Initial Track Recording 55 INPUT 17 32 ROUTING CHI ALL STEREO a 4511 iz du JE BYE 2a 2a da 5060 60 RROUND MODE STEREO REIS TO STERN 4 sure that the 5 buttons for Input Channels 17 24 are turned and the 1 8 buttons are turned off then use the PAN control to pan the moni toring signal Tip Controlling Input Channel 17 32 Pan settings faders and the ON buttons will affect the monitoring signal but will not affect the signal recorded to the digital MTR 5 Pressthe DISPLAY ACCESS HOME button then press the F1 button to dis play the Meter CH1 32 page 6 Make sure that ON button indicators 1 8 are steadily lit then raise the STE REO fader to O dB METER Initial Data _ 5711 5112 SUS 5714 iO _ 6 DD POSITION OO OO OO OO OO OO OO 00 OD c g
394. ns to control the MIDI device Assigning MIDI Messages to Channel Controls You can quickly use the MIDI Remote function if you use the factory presets in the banks However you can also assign the desired MIDI messages to the faders or ON buttons This section describes how to assign MIDI messages to the channel controls using the example of assigning Hold On Off messages Control Change 64 Values 127 amp 0 to the Channel 1 ON button 1 Connect the 01V96 s MIDI IN port to the MIDI OUT port of a MIDI keyboard to which a Hold On Off controllable foot switch is connected Enable the MIDI Remote function on the 01V96 MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI IN BB oooooo oo000000 22 3 2 o ct x 2 SEREI SEER Foot switch 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 210 Chapter 17 Remote Control 2 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the DIO Setup Remote page appears then set the TARGET parameter to USER DEFINED You can now use the MIDI Remote function Refer to the previous section for more infor mation on using the MIDI Remote function 3 Move the cursor to the desired bank button BANK parameter buttons 1 4 then press ENTER 4 Press the SEL buttons for the
395. nsertOut CH24 INS CH25 InsertOut CH25 Effect2 OUT 1 InsertOut CH25 INS CH26 InsertOut CH26 Effect2 OUT 2 InsertOut CH26 INS CH27 InsertOut CH27 Effect3 OUT 1 InsertOut CH27 INS CH28 InsertOut CH28 Effect3 OUT 2 InsertOut CH28 gt INS CH29 InsertOut CH29 FX4 1 Effect4 OUT 1 INS CH29 InsertOut CH29 5 INS CH30 InsertOut CH30 FX4 2 Effect4 OUT 2 INS CH30 InsertOut CH30 S INS CH31 InsertOut CH31 2TD L 2TR IN Dig L INS CH31 InsertOut CH31 INS CH32 InsertOut CH32 2TD R 2TR IN Dig R INS CH32 InsertOut CH32 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 254 Appendix A Parameter Lists SLOT ADAT OMNI INSERT IN DIRECT OUT 2TR OUT Digital Source Description Source Description Source Description Source Description INS BUS1 InsertOut BUS1 INS BUS1 InsertOut BUS1 INS BUS2 InsertOut BUS2 INS BUS2 InsertOut BUS2 INS BUS3 InsertOut BUS3 INS BUS3 InsertOut BUS3 INS BUS4 InsertOut BUS4 INS BUS4 InsertOut BUSA INS BUSS InsertOut BUS5 INS BUS5 InsertOut BUS5 INS BUS6 InsertOut BUS6 INS BUS6 InsertOut BUS6 INS BUS7 InsertOut BUS7 INS BUS7 InsertOut BUS7 INS BUS8 InsertOut BUS8 INS BUS8 InsertOut BUS8 INS AUX1 InsertOut AUX1 INS AUX1 InsertOut AUX 1 INS AUX2 InsertOut AUX2 INS AUX2 InsertOut AUX2 INS AUX3 InsertOut AUX3 INS AUX3
396. ntentional edits and restricts access to panel operation with a password To use the Operation Lock function press the UTILITY button repeatedly to display the Utility Lock page UTILITY Initial Data SH1 571257135714 100 9 oO EDIT OPERATION LOCK 4 _ OPERAT10N_LOCK OPERATION LOCK SAFE Ce PASSWORD j This page contains the following parameters D OPERATION LOCK This button enables or cancels Operation Lock When you turn on this button the Pass word window appears PASSWORD USE SEL1 SEL14 Enter a four letter password using the Channel 1 10 SEL buttons Channel 10 SEL button enters 0 The password characters are represented by asterisks Move the cursor to the OK button then press ENTER to enable Operation Lock The factory default password is 1234 To cancel Operation Lock press ENTER The Password window appears again Enter the password and select the OK button Operation Lock is cancelled Note If you forget the password you cannot cancel Operation Lock Be sure to write down the password 2 OPERATION LOCK SAFE section This section enables you to select certain controls on the panel to exclude from Opera tion Lock To cancel all safe buttons simultaneously move the cursor to the CLEAR ALL button then press ENTER suonounj Jou1O 01 96 Version 2 Owner s Man
397. ntrol 223 HIGH MID ON Q LOW F LOW G LOW H GLOWL Q LO MID F LO MID G LO MID H G LO MID L Q HI MID F HI MID G HI MID H G HI MID L Q HIGH F HIGH G HIGH H G HIGH L ATT H ATT L HPF ON LPF ON INPUT1 32 ST IN 1 4 BUS1 8 AUX1 8 STEREO LOW GATE ON ATTACK THRESH H THRESH L RANGE HOLD H HOLD L DECAY H DECAY L 1 32 ON ATTACK THRESH H THRESH L RELEASE H RELEASE L RATIO GAIN H GAIN L KNEE INPUT1 32 BUS1 8 AUX1 8 STEREO PAN CHANNEL AUX1 2 AUX3 4 AUX5 6 AUX7 8 INPUT1 32 ST INTL 4R BUS TO ST BUS1 8 BALANCE MASTER STEREO 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual lt 9 224 Chapter 18 MIDI HIGH MID LOW LFE H LFE L DIV F DIV R SURROUND INPUT1 32 ST INTL 4R WIDTH DEPTH OFS LR OFS FR BYPASS MIX PARAM EFFECT PARAM L EFFECT1 4 PARAM32 H PARAM32 L Parameters that feature a setting range of more than 128 steps such as Fader and Delay Time parameters require two or more Control Change messages to specify the values For example if you wish to control Fader parameters on certain channels using Control Changes you must assign the same channel to two C
398. o Setu mm that came with OMS for more 00 Chs 1 16 information on configuring Studio Patches cha the OMS Studio Setup menu USB MIDI 1 OMS recognizes the 01 96 as 1 4 a USB MIDI interface that fea U ri tures eight ports 2 P 01 96 Port 3 01 96 Port 4 ze E 01 96 Port 5 En 01 96 Port 6 e gt 01 96 Port 7 ES 01 96 Port 8 ge QuickTime Music 6 Choose Peripherals from the Setups menu to open the Peripherals window Double click the MIDI Controllers tab 8 Refer to the screen below to set the Type Receive From Send To and Ch s parameters The 01V96 can emulate up to two MIDI controllers Peripherals B Peripherals Synchronization Machine Control MIDI Controllers Ethernet Controllers Mic Preamps Synchronization Machine Contro MIDI Controllers Ethernet Controllers 2 Receive Fi Send T 5 Type Receive From Send To Ch s eceive From end To onset Lower ng Yamanaus 4 vamanaus I 8 A o1v96 2 1 6 2 2 Hm vamanaus2 YAMAHAUS2 1 B none none E m none J none 4 none 4 Cancel t 9 3 1 Tip To control Pro Tools remotely you need one port for every eight audio channels 9 When you finish setting the parameters close the window 22 3
399. o Tools etc Rotary controls 1 4 These controls enable you to select plug ins or adjust the selected plug in parameters 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Pro Tools Remote Layer 195 Channel Display mode F3 button Press the F3 button to select this display mode in which the parameter controls for tracks 1 16 are displayed DIO SETUP Initial Data 5111 STI2 STI3 STI4 EDIT e c ce SERIE En O TIME CODE ne FEET a ears OOO 1 1000 mi 09990099 o o o o o o o Ruda Adi Adil Adi2 Adi3 Rdi4 415 Adi Parameter controls 1 16 Channel parameter controls such as channel 1 16 panpots Send A E send levels etc are dis played Meter Display mode F4 button Press the F4 button to select this display mode in which the level meters for tracks 1 16 are displayed DIO SETUP Initial Data peL 8112 5113 5114 STIL STI1 00 EDIT e c ec e Bm g TIME CODE FEET amp ears OOO 1000 Audi Aud2 Rud3 Aud4 AudS Aud Rud Auds Channels 1 16 The channel 1 16 levels or Send levels are displayed 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual o 3u05 e1ouj8y J 196 Chapter 17 Remote Control Control Surface Operation When the Pro Tools Remote layer is selected the 01V96 controls on the top panel engage the following functions Channel Strip section SEL buttons These buttons select Pro Tools
400. of exclusive EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive gt 5 2 amp x 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 310 Appendix C MIDI 2 8 2 13 Program change table bulk dump format STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0000nnnn On n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump COUNT HIGH ch datacount ch 128 cl COUNT LOW Occecece cl 01001100 4C 1 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000011 43 00111001 39 9 00110011 33 3 01010000 50 P 00000010 02 00000000 00 No 256 Current BLOCK INFO 0ttttttt tt total block number minimum number is 0 Obbbbbbb bb current block number 0 total block number DATA NAME DATA Oddddddd ds Program change table data of block bb Oddddddd de CHECK SUM 0O0eeeeeee ee ee Invert L 4 de 1 amp Ox7F EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 2 8 2 14 Program change table bulk dump request format STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump 01001100 4C 1 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 00100000 20 00 000 38 8 01000011 43 00 001 39 97 00110011 33 3 DATA NAME 01010000 50 00000010 02 00000000 00 No 256 Current EOX 11110111 F7 End
401. of the following three metering signal types The amount of gain reduction for the gate only for CH1 32 COMP The amount of gain reduction for the compressor 3EEVEL es Input Channel input level or Output Channel output level Tip These pages also allow you to change the metering position using the POSITION param eter This parameter setting operates in unison with the Meter Position page setting 4 To activate the Peak Hold function move the cursor to the PEAK HOLD but ton then press ENTER The PEAK HOLD button turns on and the peak level is held on the meters on the page To cancel the Peak Hold function turn the PEAK HOLD button off 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Connections and Setup 37 4 Connections and Setup This chapter explains how to connect and set up your 01V96 Connections The following section explains three typical ways to connect the 01V96 to external equip ment although there are numerous others Configuring an analog 24 channel mixing system Synthesizer Synthesizer Master recorder Effects processor gm
402. of two Input Channels that are currently displayed on the page Stereo Link function You can link the surround pan parameters of two channels regardless of whether they are paired 9 PATTERN When Input Channels are linked by the Stereo Link function the seven patterns select able here determine how the linked surround pan moves via the Parameter wheel and the INC DEC buttons Select one of seven trajectory patterns by turning on the corresponding tra jectory pattern button The following patterns are available s baad The sound image moves between left and right E L36 F40 5640 656 01 96 Version 2 Owner s Manual ued punong Fy 144 Chapter 12 Surround Pan ll Ess The sound image moves between front and rear E Ed Ed 36 40 R40 856 The sound image moves from front left to rear right With this pattern you can also fine tune the trajectory by using the WIDTH DEPTH OFFSET and OFFSET parameters bed L36 R36 936 F 12 R TF 8 A 44 16 L20 tF16 The sound image moves from front right to rear left With this pattern you can also fine tune the trajectory using the WIDTH DEPTH OFFSET and OFFSET parameters 836 12 R 8 8 eR44 F 16 L20 16 The sound image moves between left and right whil
403. ofexclusive 2 8 2 15 Equalizer library bulk dump format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number O Library no 1 199 Library no 200 256 CH1 287 CH32 288 STEREO 1L 295 STEREO 4R 384 BUS1 391 BUSS8 512 AUX1 519 AUX8 768 STEREO 8192 UNDO 256 and following are data for the corresponding channel of the edit buffer For reception by the 01V96 only the user area is valid 40 199 256 STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0000nnnn On n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump COUNT HIGH ch datacount ch 128 cl COUNT LOW cl 01001100 4c 1 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000011 43 00111001 39 9 00110011 33 3 01010001 51 Q Ommmmmmm mh 0 199 Library no 1 200 Ommmmmmm ml 256 Channel current data DATA NAME BLOCK INFO Ottttttt tt total block number minimum number is 0 Obbbbbbb bb current block number 0 total block number DATA Oddddddd ds EQ Library data of block bb Oddddddd de CHECK SUM ee ee Invert L de 1 amp 0x7F EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 2 8 2 16 Equalizer library bulk dump request format The second and third bytes ofthe DATA NAME indicate the bank number See above STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No
404. oints 88 2 kHz Libraries Effect library EFFECT 1 4 Presets 53 User memories 75 Compressor library Presets 36 User memories 92 Gate library Presets 4 User memories 124 EQ library Presets 40 User memories 160 Channel library Presets 2 User memories 127 Input patch library Presets 1 User memories 32 i Presets 1 Output patch library User memories 32 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual gt o 2 2 x 286 Appendix B Specifications Analog Input Spec i d Input level Input PAD GAIN de i inl Max Connector Sensitivity Nominal crore clip VEG 70 dB 60 dB 40 dB 3 0 245 mV 0 775 mV 7 75 mV A XLR 3 31 type INPUT A B A wann 22648 16dB x4 dB Balanced 1 12 EHE Linde 38 8 mV 123 mV 1 23 Phone jack 20 6 dB 4 dB 424 dB TRS Balanced 338 mv 123V 1228 V idi 36 dB 26 dB 6 dB INPUT 13 16 m 3066 ETT NS 12 3 mV 38 8 mV 388 mV Phone 8650185 4 dB 6 dB 4 dB 24 dB Balanced 388 mV 123V 12 28 V CH INSERT IN 12 dB 2 dB 18 dB Phone jack TRS 1 12 loko 009Un 95 616mV 616V Kunbalanced 10 10 dBV 10 RCA pin jack 2TR IN L R gt L R TOR 600 Lines em B16mV 316 Unbalanced 1 Sensitivity is the lowest level that will produce an
405. on Paired bus and Aux Send linked parameters and non linked parameters that are available for independent controls are listed below Linked parameters SEL buttons Non linked parameters Output Patching Fader Channel on off Insert Patching Delay on off Insert on off Delay time Solo on off Bus to Stereo Comp settings Attenuators Comp insert position You can set this parameter for each channel independent EQ settings ly if the GANG button is turned off on the INS DLY Fader group DLY page Mute group You can set this parameter for each channel independent Fade ti ly on the EQ ATT page but the paired channel settings HORS are linked on the EQ Edit and View pages Recall safe Bus to Stereo on off Bus to Stereo fader Parameters marked with an asterisk are available only for Bus Outs sno sng 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PAIR GROUP button repeatedly until the Pair Grup Output page appears PAIR GRUP Initial Data 5211 5112 STIS STI4 BUST eusi OO CENA OUTPUT PAIR SURROUND MODE BUS 1 2 394 5 9 6 785 D R Ls Rs LFE AUX 167 2 3074 5 78595 MEA L R Ls Rs Bs LFE 5 FOLLOW SURROUND INPUT A OUTPUT A IN FADER A IN MUTE 251 The parameters on this page are described below D STEREO MONOx2 These buttons turn Bu
406. on 2 Owner s Manual 208 Chapter 17 Remote Control 2 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the DIO Setup MIDI Host page appears MIDI TO HOST SETUP Rx PORT Tx PORT DIO SETUF N Initial Dota STIL STIT EH miseri STIZ 5713 STI4 c cct StudioManager DAW REMOTE CASCADE LINK LSvnc TRansn T DEVICE ID e REQUEST MACHINE CONTROL TYPE PORT 4 4 MIDI HOST AA MONITOR REMOTE fi MACHINE 2913 3 Move the cursor to the REMOTE parameter box 1 in the SPECIAL FUNC TIONS section rotate the Parameter wheel to select MIDI then press ENTER If the MIDI port is already in use a window confirming the assignment change appears Move the cursor to the YES button then press ENTER Tip Ifthe REMOTE parameter box is grayed out proceed to Steps 4 and 5 to set the TARGET parameter then return to Steps 2 and 3 4 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the DIO Setup Remote page appears 5 Move the cursor to the TARGET parameter box rotate the Parameter wheel to select USER DEFINED then press ENTER The confirmation window for changing the setting appears Move the cursor to the YES button then press ENTER The display changes as follows DIO SEIUPIO Initial Data 5 STI2 STI3 STI4 STIL S STI Epi ae mecza U 79 BT 1 f 1 LESER LERRH D TRANS
407. on off wr p 204 de d d 8 lt lt Effects Parameters HQ PITCH One input two output high quality pitch shifter Available for internal effects 1 and 2 263 Parameter Range Description PITCH 1210 12 semi Pitch shift tones FINE 50t0 50 cents Pitch shift fine DELAY 0 0 1000 0 ms Delay time Feedback gain plus values for FB _99 to 99 normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feed back MODE 1 10 Pitch shift precision SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off Used in conjunction with 1 NOTE TEMPO to determine DELAY 1 FP FP RIS 00 2 2 1 4 4 Maximum value depends on the tempo setting Two input two output pitch shifter Parameter Range Description PITCH 1 22400 24 semi Channel 1 pitch shift tones FINE 1 50 to 50 cents Channel 1 pitch shift fine Channel 1 level plus values for LEVEL 1 100 to 100 normal phase minus values for reverse phase PAN 1 L63 to R63 Channel 1 pan DELAY 1 0 0 1000 0 ms Channel 1 delay time Channel 1 feedback gain plus 1 _99 to 49996 values for normal phase feed back minus values for reverse phase feedback PITCH2 22410 24 Channel 2 pitch shift tones FINE 2 50 to 50 cents Channel 2 pitch shift fine Channel 2 level plus values for LEVEL 2 100 to 100
408. one of the 01V96s you can monitor the soloed signals via the Monitor outputs suonounj Jou1O 01 96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 242 Chapter 19 Other Functions Checking the Battery and the System Version The Utility Battery page enables you to check the condition of the internal mem ory backup battery and the system version number To locate this page press the DISPLAY ACCESS UTILITY button repeatedly UTILITY Initial Data BIS 5112 5113 STI4 CHI CHI 0 O 0 BATTERY CHECK 1 Status Okay Yes l m Fine SC ILLATORS CH STATUS D Status If the Status is Okay the battery has sufficient voltage for operation If the Status is Voltage Low ask your Yamaha dealer or authorized Yamaha service center to replace the battery as soon as possible Failure to replace a low battery may result in data loss Note Do not attempt to replace the battery yourself as a malfunction may occur 2 Ver X XX X XX represents the version number This indicator identifies the system version number Check the current system version number before you update the firmware Visit the following website to check the latest system version number http www yamahaproaudio com 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Initializing the 01V96 243 Initializing the 01V96 You can delete all currently recorded settings and restore the factory preset
409. ons of each layer are memorized those positions for the corresponding layer are restored when you switch to that layer 3 Press the FADER MODE HOME button then press the F1 button to display the Meter CH1 32 page Meter pages are the start point for mixing and recording They display channel input and output levels and compressor and gate gain reduction amounts 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual mE u 50 Chapter 5 Tutorial The CH1 32 page enables you to view Input Channel 1 32 levels and compressor and gate gain reduction amounts 12 3 4 565 6 7 8 9 16 11 12 14 15 16 a PUT M OO co co co co co co co 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 25 29 30 31 32 ET ST IN MASTER EFFECT 2 Make sure that the LEVEL button 1 is turned on in the METER MODE sec tion The METER MODE section enables you to select the type of signals displayed on the meters If any button other than the LEVEL button is turned on move the cursor to the LEVEL button then press ENTER Move the cursor to the POSITION parameter box 2 to the right of the LEVEL button rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to select POST FADER then press ENTER The POSITION parameter indicates the metering position When POST FADER is selected the meters indicate the post fader signal
410. ontrol Change numbers and select FADER and FADER for the Control Changes in the parameter boxes in the first PARAMETER column 5512 n vL rini 5 2 12 1 1 FADER CHRNNEL INPUT 1 1 NO ASSIGN If you wish to control Delay Time parameters on certain channels using Control Changes you must assign the same channel Delay parameter to three Control Change numbers and select TIME LOW TIME MID and TIME HIGH for the Control Changes in the parameter boxes in the second middle PARAMETER column DIE m UMS UENTE gt 00 a an le nn ana idee ayi IR HIGHICINPUT 59 lt 2 IN DELAY TIME MID INPUT 1 58 2 IN DELAY TIME LOW INPUT 1 7 ASSIGN Note Parameters that feature a setting range in excess of 128 steps require an appropriate combination of range parameters for successful MIDI Control Change Tip You can initialize the Parameter to Control Change assignment table by moving the cur sor to the INITIALIZE button then pressing ENTER 7 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS MIDI button then press the F1 button to dis play the MIDI Setup page then specify MIDI Transmit and Receive Chan nels 8 Turn on the CONTROL CHANGE Tx ON OFF and Rx ON OFF buttons 01V96 parameters will now be set accordingly when the 01V96 receives corresponding Control Changes Also when you adjust parameters on the 01V96 the 01V
411. or F 106Hz 710Hz 2 50 kHz 10 0 kHz Q 4 7 0 63 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Preset Gate Parameters fs 44 1 kHz Title Gate Ducking A Dr BD A Dr SN Type GATE DUCKING GATE GATE Parameter Value Threshold dB 26 Range dB 56 Attack ms 0 Hold ms 2 56 Decay ms 331 Threshold dB 19 Range dB 22 Attack ms 93 Hold ms 1 205 Decay ms 6 325 Threshold dB 11 Range dB 53 Attack ms 0 Hold ms 1 93 Decay ms 400 Threshold dB 8 Range dB 23 Attack ms 1 Hold ms 0 63 Decay ms 238 Preset Compressor Parameters fs 44 1 kHz Preset Compressor Parameters fs 44 1 kHz Title Type Parameter Value Threshold dB 8 Ratio 1 2 5 Attack ms 60 1 Comp Out gain dB 0 0 Knee 2 Release ms 250 Threshold dB 23 Ratio 1 1 7 Attack ms 1 2 Expand EXPAND Out gain dB 3 5 Knee 2 Release ms 70 Threshold dB 10 Ratio 1 3 5 Attack 1 Compander COMPAND H un H Out gain dB 0 0 Width dB 6 Release ms 250 Threshold dB 8 Ratio 1 4 Attack 25 4 Compander COMPAND S ack ms S Out gain dB 0 0 Width dB 24 Release ms 180 Threshold dB 24 Ratio 1 3 Attack ms 9 5 A Dr BD COMP Out gain dB 5 5 Knee 2 Release ms 58 Threshold dB 11 Ratio 1 3 5 Attack ms 1 6 A Dr BD C
412. or buttons to move the cursor to a parameter box then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to select the setting You may need to press the ENTER button to confirm a change in certain parameter boxes If you edit a value in this type of parameter box the value flashes Press the ENTER button to confirm the change and the flashing stops If you move the cursor to other parameters while the edited value is flashing the edit is cancelled 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 521524 Bumessdo w 30 Chapter 3 Operating Basics Confirmation Messages For certain functions the 01V96 prompts you for confirmation before executing the func tions as shown here CONF RMAT ON Recall Scene 1 Move the cursor to YES and press ENTER to execute the function or move the cursor to NO and press ENTER to cancel If you take no action for awhile the confirmation window closes automatically and the function is not executed Title Edit Window The Title Edit window enables you to enter titles for Scene and library memories You can enter 4 12 or 16 characters depending on the item The figure on the left shows uppercase characters and various punctuation marks The fig ure on the right shows lowercase characters and numbers TITLE EDIT TITLE EDIT Initial Data llitial Data PRESS OK TO STORE Lok PRESS STORE Use the cursor buttons to select ch
413. or down using the Parameter wheel to select the desired output or slot channel for which you want to adjust attenuation The following outputs and slot channels can be selected STEREO STEREO OUT L amp R channels MONITOR MONITOR OUT L amp channels 4 2222 2 2 OMNI OUT connectors 1 4 SLOT OUT 1 1 through 1 16 Slot channels 1 16 8 ADAT OUT channels 1 8 2TROUT DIGITAL L R 2TR OUT DIGITAL L amp R channels 3 Move the cursor to the parameter value in the right column then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to set the amount of attenuation The amount of attenuation can be set from 0 dB to 9 dB Tip To reset the attenuation amount of all Output Channels to 0 dB move the cursor to the INITIALIZE button then press ENTER 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Naming the Stereo Out and Bus Outs 107 Naming the Stereo Out and Bus Outs You can change the default Bus names BUS1 AUX4 STEREO etc It may be convenient to name the buses Monitor Out or Effect Send for example so that you can easily iden tify the signal type 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch Out Name page appears PATCH Initial lata 8 5111 5112 SIS STI
414. or to the desired parameter then rotate the Parameter wheel to change the value Tip The EQ settings for the ST IN Channels L amp R are linked to each other You can also press the buttons in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to select the desired band and use the rotary controls to directly edit the Q E and G parameters see page 91 Youcan store the EQ settings in the EQ library which features preset programs that can be used for various applications see page 271 Panning Input Channels 7 Input Channels can be panned in the range of L63 through CENTER to R63 To pan each channel press the PAN ROUTING button repeatedly until the Pan Route Pan page appears PAN ROUTE Initial Data gen 5112 5713 STI4 CHI CHT IO 0 DD 2 mone E INPUT D Sjouueu ndu inc z 3 4 5 6 7 5 1L 1R CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER L63 R53 1 11 4 15 6 21 2R CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER L63 17 15 19 2 21 22 23 24 SL 3R CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER L63 R63 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 TER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER L63 R53 um PAN fi ROUTI 16 JAROUTIT7 STI AA BUS TO ST F 3 Move the cursor to the desired Pan control then rotate the Parameter wheel to set the value D Pan controls These knobs adjust the channel pan settings Press the ENTER
415. oring signal flow STEREO STEREO R SOLOL SOLOR SOLOTRIM SOLO L SOLOR 2TR IN 2 RCA R SOLO LOGIC MONITOR MONITOR OUT OUTPUT SOLO Um IN LEVEL BUSI B 5 1 F d PES AUX1 8 amp i ny i o P MONITOR OUT A di oto ty a Bu PHONES i LEVEL 4 PS PHONES e SOLO bus This special bus routes soloed Input Channels to the Monitor outputs bypassing Bus 1 8 and the Stereo Bus OUTPUT SOLO This section routes soloed Output Channels Aux Out 1 8 Bus Out 1 8 to the Monitor outputs Note Input and Output Channels cannot be solo monitored simultaneously The solo func tion for the most recently soloed channels is enabled MONITOR TRIM This section adjusts the monitoring signal level in the digital domain MONITOR OUT LEVEL Use the MONITOR MONITOR OUT control on the top panel to adjust the monitoring signal level in the analog domain e MONITOR 2TR IN As a monitoring signal you can select either the 01V96 internal signals or 2TR IN digital inputs e PHONES The Monitor signal is also fed to the PHONES jack You can set the level independently 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 132 Chapter 11 Monitoring Monitor and Solo Setup For monitoring and solo setup press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeat edly until the DIO Set
416. ors always output the Stereo Bus signals The MONITOR OUT connectors output monitor signals or the 2TR IN signals depending on the Monitor Source selector setting Follow the steps below to view or change the patching 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the following page appears PRTCH 0 Initial Data CHi CH1 46k SLOT OUTPUT PATCH SLOT Signals that are currently assigned to the output connectors are shown in the parameter boxes 1 underneath the connector numbers The parameter indicators are explained below A E No assignment BUSI BUSS Bus Out 1 8 signals 8 22 1 1 Aux Out 1 8 Signals eite mene Stereo Out signals INS CH1 INS CH22 Input Channels 1 32 Insert Outs INS BUSI INS 058 Bus Out 1 8 Insert Outs INS AUXI INS 8 Aux Out 1 8 Insert Outs 55 1 5 Stereo Out Insert Outs CAS BUSI BUSS Bus Out 1 8 Cascade Outs Aux Out 1 8 Cascade Outs 1 8 Stereo Out Cascade Outs CASSOLOL CASSOLOR Solo Channel Cascade Outs 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Input and Output Patching 45 2 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to a patch p
417. oup operate one of the faders or level controls for the grouped channels Note Ifyou wish to change the relative level balance between the grouped channels while this page is displayed first turn off the Enable button or remove the channels for which you want to change the level from the group If other pages are displayed press and hold down the SEL button for the desired channels to temporarily remove them from the group then change the level balance 7 Touse a mute group press one of the ON buttons for the grouped chan nels All channels in the group switch their on off status Note While a mute group is enabled you cannot turn a subset of the grouped channels on or off Ifyou wish to turn a subset of the grouped channels on or off first turn off the Enable button or remove the channels you wish to turn on or off from the group 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual s19joujeJeg x sjauueyD BurdnosyH 152 Chapter 13 Grouping Channels amp Linking Parameters Using Fader Group Master The 01V96 features a Fader Group Master function that enables you to control the level of all channels using the Group Master level while maintaining the relative balance between chan nels much like a VCA group on an analog mixing console While this function is enabled channel fader operation does not affect channel levels in the corresponding Fader group 1 After you perform Step
418. output of 4 dB 1 23 V or the nominal output level when the unit is set to maximum gain All faders and level controls are maximum position 2 XLR 3 31 type connectors are balanced 1 GND 2 HOT 3 COLD 3 Phone jacks are balanced Ring2 COLD Sleeve GND 4 INSERT IN OUT phone jacks are unbalanced Tip OUTPUT Ring INPUT Sleeve GND In these specifications when dB represents a specific voltage 0 dB is referenced to 0 775 Vrms For 2TR IN levels O dBV is referenced to 1 00 Vrms All input AD converters CH INPUT 1 16 are 24 bit linear 128 times oversampling fs 44 1 48 kHz 48 V DC phantom power is supplied to CH INPUT 1 12 XLR type connectors Three PHANTOM 48V switches CH1 4 5 8 9 12 turn on the phantom power for inputs 1 4 5 8 9 12 respectively Analog Output Specs Output level petal For Use With P Output Source Nominal Max Connector Impedance Nominal before clip STEREO OUT L R i a 1 L R 1500 600 Q Lines 1 23 V 12 28 V XLR 3 32 type Balanced 4 dB 24 dB OMNI OUT 1 4 1500 10k Q Lines 1 23 V 12 28 V Phone jack TRS Balanced 4 dB 24 dB i MONITOR OUT L R 1500 10k Q Lines 1 23V 12 28 V Phone jack TRS Balanced 2 18 Phone jack TRS Unbal CH INSERT OUT 1 12 600 Q 10k Q Lines 616 mV 6 16 V diced 10 dBV 10 dBV 2TR OUT L R i i L R 600 Q 10k Q Lines 316 mV 3 16 V RCA Pin Jack Unb
419. p Se DA Re se 125 Insert Patching xe n it none 127 11 Monitoring 131 Monitot og iine ee BN UR RING CR EI e ed eR OS dee 131 Monitor and Solo Setup 132 Using th Monitors chen cerei uriest eed tee n er bnEUeR TAE deed 133 Using the Solo Function i was centem detects ceci e acr eld e 134 12 Surround Pan 135 About Surround 2 135 Setting Up and Selecting Surround Pan Modes 136 Surround Panning oie iad Bitte beetle E arial asain 142 13 Grouping Channels amp Linking Parameters 149 Grouping amp Linking usa sid hee nh awed eevee Pa ee 149 Using Fader Groups and Mute 150 Using Fader Group Master anne es Oe Gua ans 152 Using Mute Group Master ic siete ER aree be er 153 Linking EQ and Compressor Parameters 154 14 Internal Effects 157 About the Internal Effects nessa ln a 157 Using Effects Processors via Aux 158 Inserting the Internal Effects into Channels 160 Editing Effects cos a ak wird okie edo nnper vetere ey ee 161 About Add On Effects 162 About Plug Ins CER
420. pre roll DAW OUT Plays back to the end of the selected area for a duration specified as the post roll DAW POST Plays back from the end of the selected area for a duration specified as the post roll DAW RTZ Moves the playback cursor to the beginning of the session DAW END Moves the playback cursor to the end of the session DAW ONLINE Toggles between on line and off line DAW LOOP Toggles Loop Playback on and off DAW QUICKPUNCH Toggles QuickPunch on and off DAW AUTO FADER DAW AUTO MUTE DAW AUTO PAN DAW AUTO SEND DAW AUTO PLUGIN DAW AUTO SENDMUTE DAW AUTO READ DAW AUTO TOUCH DAW AUTO LATCH DAW AUTO WRITE DAW AUTO TRIM DAW AUTO OFF Correspond to the Automation Overwrite Auto Enable functions Select Automation modes DAW AUTO SUSPEND Cancels Automation recording and playback for all channels When Automa tion is interrupted the LED flashes and channel strip controls maintain the current settings DAW AUTO STATUS Displays the channel Automation mode Read Tch Ltch Wrt or Off The mode setting appears at the bottom of each channel on a Channel or Meter Display page when you press and hold the button to which this function is assigned DAW GROUP STATUS Displays a Group ID to which each channel belongs below each channel number on a Channel or Meter Display page in all caps for a main group and in lowercase letters for a sub group DA
421. put Channels see page 84 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 112 Chapter 9 Aux Outs Viewing Aux Out Settings You can view and adjust the parameter settings for the currently selected Aux Out on the View Parameter and Fader pages Viewing the Compressor and EQ Settings To display the View Parameter page use the corresponding SEL button to select the desired Aux Out 1 8 then press the DISPLAY ACCESS VIEW button then press the F1 button VIEH Initial Data alsT STI2 STI3 STI4 RUX1 RUXI GO INSERT LOW L MID H MID HIGH 40 OMP THRES RATIO L SHELF G 7G 7 H SHELF 8 0dB 2 5 1 1 OOk 4 00k 16 0k zi U ATTACK RELEASE 125 190k 4 00k 10 0 2 0 229 OFF OUTGAIN KNEE G COMP G GdB Z TYPED ARAMETER F DER LIERREY AA 1 16 Aux The parameters on this page and the procedure for setting them the same as for Input Channels except that this page does not include the Gate and Phase parameters see page 87 Viewing Faders and On Off Parameters To display the View Fader page use the corresponding SEL button to select the desired Aux Out 1 8 then press the DISPLAY ACCESS VIEW button then press the F2 but ton VIEW 1 pm OO lit This button turns the currently selected Aux Out 1 8 on or off I
422. r parameters with a data size of 2 or more data for that size will be transmitted 2 8 3 1 2 Parameter Change basic format Universal format STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001 1n n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 3E MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID 01111111 7F Universal ADDRESS Ottttttt tt Data type ee Element no If ee is 0 ee is expanded to two bytes Oppppppp pp Parameter no cc Channel DATA Oddddddd dd data EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive For parameters with a data size of 2 or more data for that size will be transmitted 2 8 3 1 3 Parameter request basic format STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0011nnnn n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 3E MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID 00001101 OD 01 96 ADDRESS Ottttttt tt Datatype ee Element no If ee is 0 ee is expanded to two bytes Oppppppp pp Parameter no cc Channel EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 2 8 3 1 4 Parameter request basic format Universal format STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0011 n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID digital
423. r s Manual for more information on setting up the soft Ware Configuring the 01V96 1 Refer to page 192 to configure the DIO Setup MIDI HOST page 2 Press the LAYER REMOTE button to set the TARGET parameter to Nuendo Cubase SX You can now remotely control Nuendo Cubase SX using the Remote Layer Other DAW Remote Layer You can remotely control DAW software that supports the Pro Tools protocol Configuring Computers 1 Connect the 01V96 to your computer using a USB cable and install the required USB driver included on the 01V96 CD ROM Refer to the Studio Manager installation guide for more information on installing the driver 2 Launch and set up the DAW software so that the 01V96 communicates with the software Refer to the DAW software s user s manual for more information on setting up the software Configuring the 01V96 1 Refer to page 192 to configure the DIO Setup MIDI HOST page 2 Press the LAYER REMOTE button to set the TARGET parameter to General DAW You can now remotely control the DAW software using the Remote Layer 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual MIDI Remote Layer 207 MIDI Remote Layer If you select USER DEFINED as the target for the Remote Layer you can remotely control the parameters of external MIDI devices such as synthesizers and tone generators by oper ating the channel ON buttons and faders to output various MIDI messages This is called MIDI Remote function
424. r to control both stereo channels 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Sjouueu ndu N 94 Chapter 7 Input Channels When you switch the Pair Mode the combinations of channel numbers displayed on the page also change Note When Pair mode is switched only the channel numbers change The mix parameters of the paired partners do not change For example if you change Pair mode from Horizontal to Vertical the Input Channel 2 indication changes to Input Channel 17 However its parameters do not change If Chan nels 1 and 2 have been paired switching the mode will pair Channels 1 and 17 3 Move the cursor to the desired channel s MONOx2 button 2 then press ENTER The channels are paired 4 To cancel a pair move the cursor to the desired channel s STEREO button then press ENTER Tip You can also create or cancel a pair of Output Channels in the same way on the Pair Grup Output page see page 105 Naming Input Channels By default Input Channels are named CH1 CH2 etc You can change these names if desired For example it may be helpful for mixdown if you name a particular Input Chan nel with the type of musical instrument connected to the corresponding input jack 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch IN Name page appears PATCH Initial Data 8 511257135714 CHI CHI GO E Name Input Auto Cory
425. r to record the 01V96 operation to or play it back from a sequencer select the HIGH button When the LOW button is selected the fader resolution switches to 256 steps Assigning Scenes to Program Changes for Remote Recall You can assign 01V96 Scenes to MIDI Program Changes for remote recall When you recall a Scene on the 01V96 the unit transmits the assigned Program Change to the connected MIDI device When the 01V96 receives a Program Change the assigned Scene is recalled Initially Scenes 1 through 99 are assigned sequentially to Program Changes 1 through 99 and Scene 0 is assigned to Program Change 100 although you can change these assign ments Tip You can store a Scene to Program Change assignment table to an external device by using MIDI Bulk Dump or the included Studio Manager software 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the DIO Setup MIDI Host page appears then specify ports for transmission and reception of MIDI messages see page 216 2 Make connections using the ports selected in Step 1 so that the 01V96 can transfer MIDI messages to and from the external device 3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS MIDI button then press the F2 button The MIDI Pgm Asgn page appears HIDI Initial rr Bp SU srs cies OO uni ux O O PROGRAM CHANGE ASSIGN PGM SCENE NO TITLE I No Data 1 Data 1 5 5 1 No Data 1 lt 4 4 No Data
426. re no settings in the Edit Buffer that you do not want to store Make sure that no settings especially faders have been adjusted uninten tionally f you are not sure of the Edit Buffer s contents recall the last Scene make the adjustments you want then store the Scene You may wish to store the current Scene to an unused Scene memory just in case Storing and Recalling Scenes Using the SCENE MEMORY Buttons You can use the SCENE MEMORY buttons to store and recall Scenes 1 Adjust the mix parameters on the 01V96 to the conditions you wish to store as a Scene 2 Press the SCENE MEMORY Up A or Down Y buttons to select a Scene memory number If you select a Scene memory other than the currently recalled Scene its number flashes at the to of the display Scene memories U Ud and 0 00 are special read only memories to which you cannot store Scenes Also you cannot store Scenes to write protected Scene memories see page 168 3 Press the SCENE MEMORY STORE button The Title Edit window appears which enables you to name the Scene to be stored Tip You can disable this window by turning the Store Confirmation parameter to Off on the DIO Setup Prefer1 page see page 230 In this case the stored Scene will hve the same name as the one recalled most recently 4 Enter the title move the cursor to the OK button then press ENTER The Title Edit window closes and the current Scene is stor
427. recorder 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the DIO Setup Format page appears The dithering settings are displayed at the bottom of the page DIO SETUP Initial Data Bn nM cui en JOO Kan 00 00 00 0 HIGHER SAMPLE RATE DATA TEE FORMAT ppg a re ZTR OUT 01 96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Setting the Transfer Format for Higher Sampling Rates 75 2 Move the cursor to the output or channel to which you want to apply dith ering then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to select the value that matches the resolution of the receiving device Note You cannot apply dithering to outputs or channels that are set to OFE Dithering is effective only when the resolution of the receiving device is lower than that of the 01V 96 Tip To copy the currently selected setting to all channels double click the ENTER button The copy confirmation window is displayed Setting the Transfer Format for Higher Sampling Rates To operate the 01V96 at higher sampling frequencies 88 2 kHz or 96 kHz and transfer dig ital audio signals to and from connected external devices you must set the data transfer for mat in accordance with the sampling frequencies supported by the external devices 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the DIO Setup Word Clock page appears 2 Select
428. ressor and EQ Settings To display the View Parameter page use the corresponding SEL button to select the desired bus then press the DISPLAY ACCESS VIEW button then press the F1 button VIEH Initial Data 2111 5712 STI3 5714 BUS1 BUST meen INSERT LOW L MID H MID HIGH 40 THRES RATIO L SHELF 0 70 0 70 H SHELF 4 ee 125 1 GGk 4 GGk 10 0k En c T Q 228m G G OFF OUTGAIN KNEE EH G 9 9 2 PARAMETER A FADER M LIBRARY A 1 16 AUX E l3 The parameters on this page and the procedure for setting them are the same as for Input Channels except for the following items The Stereo Out and Bus Out 1 8 Parameter pages do not contain the Gate and Phase parameters The Stereo Out Parameter page does not contain the Pair parameter Viewing Faders and Other Parameters To display the View Fader page use the corresponding SEL button to select the desired bus then press the DISPLAY ACCESS VIEW button then press the F2 button The Fader page layouts for Stereo Out and Bus Out 1 8 are slightly different e Stereo Out Fader page VIEH Initial Data 5711 8112 5113 5114 ST R ST 400 OO BAL CENTER 5 m POST FADER FADER LIBRARY 1 16 AUX D BAL This control adjusts the level balance between the L and R channels of the Stereo Out 2 ON OFF This button t
429. rigger signal level exceeds the threshold RELEASE ms 44 1kHz 6 ms 46 0 sec 48kHz 5 ms 42 3 sec 88 2kHz 3 ms 23 0 sec 96kHz 3 ms 21 1 sec 160 points This determines how soon the signal is expanded once the signal level drops below the threshold The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 aB OUT GAIN dB 0 0 to 18 0 180 points This sets the expander s output signal level KNEE Hard 1 5 6 points This determines how expansion is applied at the threshold For higher knee settings expansion is applied gradually as the signal falls below the spec ified threshold creating a more natural sound 1 O Characteristics KNEE hard OUT GAIN 0 0dB 3 8 THRESHOLD A gt 5 gt RATIO Input Level 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual THRESHOLD Time Series Analysis RATIO 1 Input Signal Input Level Output Signal ATTACK RELEASE Output Level Time Time Dynamics Parameters 279 COMPANDER HARD H COMPANDER SOFT S The hard and soft companders combine the effects ofthe compressor expander and limiter Output Level gt Input Level WIDTH The companders function differently at the following levels C 0 dB and higher serie Functions as a limiter 2 Exceeding the threshold Functions as a compressor 3 Be
430. rs turn off Panning Channels You can adjust the Pro Tools channel pan settings 1 Press the FADER MODE AUX 7 button The button indicator lights up 2 Press the F3 button to select Channel Display mode On a Channel Display mode page parameter controls 1 16 indicate the pan settings 3 Press the SEL button of the channel for which you want to adjust the pan setting To adjust the stereo channel panpots press the STEREO SEL button then press the AUX 7 button to select the L or R channel Pressing the AUX 7 button repeatedly toggles between the left and right channels When the left channel is selected the AUX 7 button indicator lights up and the SELECT ASSIGN parameter on the display indicates Pan When the right channel is selected the AUX 7 button indicator flashes and the SELECT ASSIGN parameter indicates Note Before you adjust monaural channel panpots first be sure the AUX 7 button indicator is illuminated steadily If the indicator is flashing operating the PAN control will be inef fective 4 Adjust the selected channel panpot using the SELECTED CHANNEL PAN control 5 Toreset the corresponding channel panpot to center move the cursor to the parameter control on the display then press and hold down the AUX 6 button and press ENTER You can reset the pan settings only when the AUX 7 button indicator is lit steadily Soloing Channels To solo Pro Tools chann
431. rsion 2 Owner s Manual 283 General Spec 4 On off Comp type Pre EQ pre fader post fader Attenuator 96 0 to 12 0 dB 0 1 dB step EQ 4 band PEQ On off AUX1 8 On off Fader 100 mm motorized Delay 0 29100 samples Metering Displayed on LCD Peak hold on off Number of 4 44 1kHz 48kHz effects 2 88 2kHz 96kHz INTERNAL EFFECTS Bypass On off EFFECT 1 4 In out 2 in 2 out Effect in from AUX1 8 INSERT OUT Effect out to Input patch U S Canada 120 V 60 Hz 90 W Power Requirements Other 220 240 V 50 60 Hz 90 W Dimensions Hx Dx W 150 x 548 x 436 mm Net weight 15 kg Operating free air temperature range 10 35 C Storage temperature range 20 60 C AC Cable Supplied Accessories CD ROM Studio Manager Owner s Manual Studio Manager Installation Guide Options Digital interface card MY16 MY8 MY4 series RACK MOUNT KIT RK1 Total harmonic distortion is measured with a 6 dB octave filter 80 kHz 2 Hum amp Noise are measured with a 6 dB octave filter 12 7 kHz equivalent to a 20 kHz filter with infinite dB octave attenuation 3 See Gate Parameters on page 284 See Comp Parameters on page 284 gt 5 See EQ Parameters on page 283 EQ Parameters LOW HPF L MID H MID HIGH LPF 0 1 10 0 0 1 10 0 Q 41 points 0 1 10 0 41 points low shelving 41 points high shelving HPF LPF F 2
432. rsion 2 Owner s Manual Sjouueu ndu N 82 Chapter 7 Input Channels 5 Meters These meters indicate the levels of the post gate signals and the amount of gain reduc tion 6 ON OFF The ON OFF button turns the currently selected Input Channel s gate on or off 7 PARAMETER These controls enable you to set the gate parameters See page 272 for more informa tion on the parameters Tip This function is unavailable for the ST IN Channels Youcan store the gate settings in the Gate library which features preset programs that can be used for various applications see page 183 Compressing Input Channels To set the Input Channel compressors use the SEL buttons to select the desired Input Channel then press the DISPLAY ACCESS DYNAMICS button then press the F3 but ton to display the Dynamics Comp Edit page DYNAMICS Initial Data 8 5111 51125113 5114 CH1 CH1 lOO zi QOO COMP EDIT penne 3 THRESHOLD RATIO ATTACK 8 8dB 2 5 1 RELEASE OUT GAIN i KNEE 229ms D i 2 1 POSITION Use the Parameter wheel or the INC DEC buttons to select the position of the com pressor within the channel from the following options Immediately before EQ default PREFADER Immediately before the fader POST FADER Immediately after the fader 2 STEREO LINK Thi
433. s NO Clock accuracy Level II 1000 ppm Sampling rate depends on the internal configuration 2 ALESIS proprietary multichannel optical digital interface format 3 Dither word length 16 20 24 bit I O SLOT Spec Each I O SLOT accepts a Digital interface card SLOT1 has a serial interface The Maker Model Function INPUT OUTPUT Format Resolution Frequency Note cards MYS AT ADAT MY16 AT 16 16 MY8 TD 8 8 Can handle TASCAM 24 bit 96 kHz by MY16 TD 16 16 44 1 48 kHz double channel mode MY8 AE Digital 1 0 8 8 24 bit MY8 AEB MY16 AE 16 16 AES EBU MY8 AE96S Sampling Rate Con 8 8 44 1 48 88 2 96 kHz verter for input MY8 AE96 Yamaha MY4 AD 4 MY8 AD 44 1 48 kHz ANALOG IN MY8 AD24 8 1 MY8 AD96 44 1 48 88 2 96 kHz MY4 DA 44 1 48 kHz ANALOG OUT MY8 DA96 MY8 24bit 44 1 48 88 2 96 kHz ADDA96 ANALOG 8 8 MY8 mLAN 8 8 MY16 mLAN Interface IEEE1394 24 bit 44 1 48 kHz Maximum 5 nodes 16 16 mLAN Y56K 44 1 48 kHz Waves Effect amp I O 8 8 ADAT 24 bit Y96K 44 1 48 88 2 96 kHz gt AP8AD ANALOG IN 8 5 24 bit 44 1 48 88 2 96 kHz Ach fs 88 2 96 kHz AP8DA ANALOG OUT 8 amp 1 Selectable from STEREO BUS AUX DIRECT OUT INSERT OUT CASCADE OUT STEREO BUS1 8 AUX1 8 SOLO Details depend on each interface card 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 288 Appendix B Specifications CONTROL 1 0 Spec 1 O Port Format Level Connector in Console TO H
434. s press the ST IN ST IN button 2 Usethe corresponding SEL button to select the desired channel FREQUENCY Lo The channel is selected and the SEL button indicator lights up The Channel s ID and Short name appear in the upper left corner e of the display If the currently displayed page contains a relevant BAN channel parameter the cursor moves to that parameter automati cally If the currently displayed page contains no such parameter a page that does contain such a parameter is selected automatically Tip For paired Input or Output Channels the channel for which you pressed the SEL button is selected and its indicator lights up The SEL button indicator of the paired partner flashes 3 To select the Stereo Out press the STEREO SEL button Repeatedly pressing the STEREO SEL button toggles between the Stereo Out left and Ste reo Out right channels If the currently displayed page contains a relevant Stereo Out parameter the cursor moves to that parameter automatically If the currently displayed page contains no such parame ter a page that does contain such a parameter is selected automatically 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Selecting Fader Modes The function of channel faders 1 16 depends on the selected Layer and Fader mode Selecting Fader Modes 33 1 Select a layer that includes the desired channel see page 31
435. s Manual Index 319 d Del ying a 110 Confirmation messages 30 n e X EQ settings 22222222 111 113 Connections 2 0 000 0 37 Fixed mode ss 114 Configuring a recording system that S b Pannitig noci erem 119 uses DAW 39 ymbols Setting from the control surface Configuring a recording system with o INS DLY DLY 1 16 page rites 113 a hard disk recorder 38 o INS DLY DLY 17 32 page 80 Setting from the display 110 113 Configuring an analog 24 channel o INS DLY Insert page 127 160 Setting levels 113 mixing system 37 9 INS DLY Out Dly page 99 110 Variable mode 115 Contrast control ess 19 9 INS DLY Phase page 79 Viewing settings 112 Control changes 215 220 o INSERT DELAY button 18 Viewing settings for multiple Control surface see 13 48V ON OFF switches 23 channels AD input section 14 Auxl View1 16 page Channel strip section 16 Numerics Aux View17 STI page Data entry section 2 22 1 16 17 32 buttons 19 AUXI AUXGS button indicators 33 DISPLAY ACCESS section 2 18 1 8 buttons 21 Display
436. s ON OFF button enables you to pair compressors for stereo operation even when channels are not paired 3 CURVE This area displays the current compressor curve 4 TYPE This field indicates the compressor type used by the currently selected channel s com pressor COMP EXPAND COMP H COMP S Note You cannot change the Compressor type on this page To change the compressor type recall a program that uses the desired compressor type from the compressor library 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Setting the Input Channels from the Display 83 5 Meters These meters indicate the levels of the post compressor signals and the amount of gain reduction 6 ON OFF The ON OFF button turns the currently selected Input Channel s compressor on or off 7 PARAMETER section These controls enable you to set the compressor parameters See page 273 for more information on the parameters of each compressor type Tip This function is unavailable for the ST IN Channels You can store the compressor settings in the compressor library which features preset pro grams that can be used for various applications see page 185 Attenuating Input Channels To set the attenuator for each Input Channel press the DISPLAY ACCESS EQ button then press the F3 button to display the EQ In Att page OO Initial Datum INPUT ATTENUATOR a Q Q Gis ar
437. s Outs 1 8 Stereo Out if you desire Changing the Input Channel Names 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PATCH button repeatedly until the Patch In Name page appears PATCH Initial Data 571257135714 ci eur Bim o 0 O 0 0 Name Input Auto Cory 10 _8 _ LONG CH CCH gt CH gt CH gt CHE CH6 gt CH6 gt lt CH6 gt CHS CCHS gt lt 5 gt lt CHS gt CH4 CCH4 gt lt CH4 gt lt CH4 gt CH3 CH3 gt lt CH3 gt lt CH3 gt CH2 CH2 I SCHZ gt CH2 2 CHI CHI gt BET oo IHITIRLIZE Channel IDs Short names and Long names are listed from left to right on the page You can specify Short names in the parameter boxes 1 in the center column and Long names in the parameter boxes 2 in the right column 2 Move the cursor to the desired parameter box then use the Parameter wheel or the INC DEC buttons to select a port for which you want to change the name 3 Press ENTER The Title Edit window appears which enables you to edit the name 4 Edit the name move the cursor to the OK button then press ENTER The new name is now effective suonounj Jou1O edited name is stored in the Input Patch library 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 230 Chapter 19 Other Functions When the Name Input Auto Copy check box 3 is on the first four characters of a newly entered Long name are automatica
438. s coloured GREEN and YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter E or by the safety earth symbol or colored GREEN or GREEN and YELLOW The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the termi nal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Kemble Music U K Ltd lithium disposal 3 wires CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR BACK NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL The above warning is located on the side of the unit Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and mainte nance servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the product IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Read these instructions Keep these instructions Heed all warnings Follow all instruct
439. s ee 253 Initial Output Patch Settings sn ee ero Ene 255 User Defined Remote Layer Initial Bank Settings 256 EHects Param tersi Ev sales PLA oe OEUVRES ET INIMICI RU DIC Ded 260 Effects and tempo synchronization 270 preset EQ Parameters 4 iu ves oce re en Beil 271 Preset Gate Parameters fs 44 1 KHZ 272 Preset Compressor Parameters fs 44 1 2 273 Dynamics Parameters cases st eee a bu 275 Appendix B Specifications 280 General Spec as satay an Mee nn Merde cow re tenet ere en p dee atentos 280 Libraries do So obra MUS I EU cans 285 Analog Inp t Spectral Des REX ODIT 286 Analog Output Specs isnt Ar ni 286 Digital Input Spec i Peewee leor Re rer ves ann 287 Digital Output Spec ur sand sa PUES REL EUIS 287 TO SLOT Speer hehe naher bush VERRE ORES 287 CONTROLI O Speer Bra 288 Dimensions GU 288 Appendix 1 289 Scene Memory to Program Change Table 289 Initial Parameter to Control Change Table 290 MIDI Data Format 2 6 belli dA T ERA UN ETE adn 306 Appendix D Options 318 ee en we el ee STD MIDI Implementation Chart
440. s or Aux Send pairs on or off FS This button determines whether Aux Sends follow the Input Channel Surround Pan when the 01V96 is in any Surround mode other than Stereo When this button is turned on Aux Sends follow the Input Channel Surround Pan This is useful for feeding Surround signals to external Surround effects processors Move the cursor to the MONOx2 button for the desired Bus or Aux Send then press ENTER The buses or Aux Sends are paired 3 To cancel a pair move the cursor to the STEREO button for the desired Bus or Aux Send then press ENTER 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 106 Chapter 8 Bus Outs Attenuating Output Signals To attenuate the 01V96 s output signals display the EQ Out Att page and adjust the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1 8 attenuators individually If necessary you can also select Output and I O card channels and specify the amount of attenuation This technique is convenient when you want to attenuate output signals quickly regardless of the source signal patching 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the DIO Setup Output Att page appears DIOZSETUP Initial Data 51257135714 BUS1 Bus HJ fet 0 OUTPUT PORT ATTENUATOR PORT LEVEL OMNI OUT 3 dB OMNI OUT 2 dB OMNI OUT 1 dB MONITOR OUT R 6dB MONITOR OUT L ESA SURR BUS A CASCADE OUTPUT 2 Move the cursor in the left column 1 then scroll the list up
441. s with the firmware version 2 8 3 14 Parameter change Function call attribute Reception This is received if Parameter change RX is ON and the Rx CH matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS This is echoed if Parameter change ECHO is ON When this is received the attribute of the specified memory library will be changed Transmission In response to a request a Parameter Change message will be transmitted on the Rx CH If Parameter change ECHO is ON this message will be retransmitted without change STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID 01111111 7F Universal ADDRESS 00010100 14 Function call Of attribute Ommmmmmm mh number High Ommmmmmm ml number Low DATA Ottttttt tt attribute protect 0x0001 normal 0x0000 ttttttt tt EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive function number SCENE LIB ATTRIBUTE 0x00 0 99 0 response only 2 8 3 15 Parameter request Function call attribute Reception This is received if Parameter change RX is ON and the Rx CH matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS This is echoed if Parameter change ECHO is ON When this is received a Parameter Change message will be transmitted on the Rx CH 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual gt 5 2 amp x
442. sages DIQ SETUP EXTRA Hix CH4 CHa PREFERENCES 1 E Auto PAN Disrlas E Auto EQUALIZER Disrlas Auto SOLO Disrlay Auto WORD CLOCK Disrlay Auto Channel Select E Store Confirmation Recall Confirmation Patch Confirmation Pair Confirmation Nominal Pan Fast Meter Fall Time E DIO Warnings WORD CLOCKZA FORMAT STI1 STI2 STI3 STI4 Sk E MIDI Warnins Initial Data Nominal O Scene Auto Update E Cascade COMM Link Auto Direct Out On Routins ST Pair Link PREFERZ 2 13 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Setting Preferences 231 This page contains the following parameters These parameters are explained in the order from the top of the left column to the bottom of the right column Auto PAN Display If this check box is on the Pan Route pages appear automatically when you operate the PAN control in the SELECTED CHANNEL section In Stereo Surround mode operating the PAN control enables you to adjust the left and right Pan setting Otherwise it enables you to adjust the Surround Pan settings Auto EQUALIZER Display If this check box is on the EQ EQ Edit page appears automatically when you press an EQ related button in the SELECTED CHANNEL section Auto SOLO Display If this check box is on the DIO Setup Monitor page appears automatically when you solo an Input Channel Auto WORD CLOCK Display If this check box is on
443. se Attenuator L R 96 0 to 12 0 dB 0 1 dB step Equalizer Aband PEQ TYPE1 On off 100 mm motorized Fader INPUT AUX1 8 send Aux send On off AUX1 8 pre fader post fader Solo On off Pre fader after pan Pan L R 127 positions Left 1 63 Center Right 1 63 Surround pan L R 127 x 127 positions Left 1 63 Center Right 1 63 x Front 1 63 Center Rear 1 63 LFE level L R eo 96 dB to 10 dB 256 step Routing STEREO BUS1 8 DIRECT OUT Metering Displayed on LCD Peak hold on off Level to 96 dB 1 dB step On off OSCILLATOR Waveform Sine 100 Hz sine 1 kHz sine 10 kHz pink noise burst noise Routing BUS1 8 AUX1 8 STEREO L R STEREO OUT DA converter 24 bit linear 128 times oversampling fs 44 1 48 kHz 64 times over sampling fs 88 2 96 kHz 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual gt 5 o 2 2 x 282 Appendix B Specifications 24 bit linear 128 times oversampling fs 44 1 48 kHz 64 times over MONITOR OUT DA converter sampling fs 88 2 96 kHz STEREO BUS1 8 AUX1 8 DIRECT OUT 1 32 INSERT OUT CH1 32 Output patch BUS1 8 AUX1 8 STEREO CASCADE OUT 051 8 AUX 1 8 STEREO OMNI OUT 1 4 SOLO DA converter 24 bit linear 128 times oversampling fs 44 1 48 kHz 64 times over sampling fs 88 2 96 kHz 2TR OUT DIGITAL Dither On off Word lengt
444. se on virheellisesti asennettu Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin H vit k ytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti lithium caution NEDERLAND THE NETHERLANDS Dit apparaat bevat een lithium batterij voor geheugen back up This apparatus contains a lithium battery for memory back up Raadpleeg uw leverancier over de verwijdering van de batterij op het moment dat u het apparaat ann het einde van de levensduur afdankt of de volgende Yamaha Service Afdeiing Yamaha Music Nederland Service Afdeiing Kanaalweg 18 G 3526 KL UTRECHT Tel 030 2828425 For the removal of the battery at the moment of the disposal at the end of the service life please consult your retailer or Yamaha Service Center as follows Yamaha Music Nederland Service Center Address Kanaalweg 18 G 3526 KL UTRECHT Tel 030 2828425 Gooi de batterij niet weg maar lever hem in als KCA Do not throw away the battery Instead hand it in as small chemical waste IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord WARNING THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED IMPORTANT The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code GREEN AND YELLOW EARTH BLUE NEUTRAL BROWN LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows The wire which i
445. se parameters enable you to set the Fade Time for Input Fader Group Master A H 5 OUTPUT MASTER Q T These parameters enable you to set the Fade Time for Output Fader Group Master Q T Tip You can copy the currently selected Output Channel Fade Time setting to all Output Channels by double clicking the ENTER button SalJOUJ9 A SU9IS 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 172 Chapter 15 Scene Memories Recalling Scenes Safely When a Scene is recalled all mix parameters are set accordingly However in some situa tions you can retain the current settings of certain parameters on certain channels by using the Recall Safe function You can set the Recall Safe function parameters for each Scene individually or for all Scenes globally To set the Recall Safe function press the DISPLAY ACCESS SCENE button repeatedly until the Scene Rcl Safe page appears SCENE Initial Data GeL STI2 5113 ST 4 CH4 En EDIT 9 09 09 gt Global Recall Safe ENABLED ALL CLEAR J ane 2 OTHERS serere COMP PLUG IN SETE Su ALL FADER DELAY 5 ROUTING STEREO SCENE IN_FADE OUT FADE BU ON CD Global Recall Safe When this check box is checked Recall Safe settings stored in Scene memories are ignored and the current settings are retained 2 SAFE This parameter enables or disables the Recall Safe function 3 MODE The
446. section 2419 ZTR IN connectors 15 70 B FADER MODE section 217 2TR IN DIGITAL COAXIAL 24 Balancing unseren 104 LAYER section 19 2TR IN DIGITAL connector Zl Baker cod 242 Monitor out amp Headphones section QTR Dice aa es 42 Bulk dump tannins 226 RR ete eset 15 2TR OUT connectors 15 70 Messages nosses 215 SCENE MEMORY section 21 BTR OUT DIGITAL COAXIAL o Mi oe ae 97 SELECTED CHANNEL section 20 2TR OUT DIGITAL connector 71 Attenuating 99 SOLO section 22 QIU RD u essen sterne 42 Compressing 22222 100 ST IN section sieni 17 Delaying sse 99 STEREO section en 16 A HOP ln ck 100 USER DEFINED KEYS section 21 About the display 27 EQ ing and Balancing ERBEN 104 ERU 74 AG TN conneitor set 25 Naming 107 Cursor buttons nennen 22 AD inputs iste ERE 14 Pairing eee 105 D AD output section sene 23 Routing signals to the stereo bus AD15 16 selector B 2 ie 101 Daisy chain distribution 40 ot 42 Setting from the control surface Data entry section 4222 I O card 00 000004 0 104 DAW 206 ADAT IN OUT connector 24 71 Setting from the display
447. select the desired band and use the rotary controls Q FRE PAN QUENCY GAIN to directly edit the F and G parameters Tip wEQuALZER _ ip Turn the Q parameter control for the LOW band clockwise all the way to set the LOW band EQ to L SHELF low shelving and a counter clockwise all the way to set it to HPF high pass filter Turn the Q parameter control for the HIGH band clockwise all 6 the way to set the HIGH band EQ to H SHELF high shelv ing and counter clockwise all the way to set it to LPF low pass LU o I 0 o I 5 FREQUENCY NI 5 o filter By default the LOW band is set to L SHELE and the HIGH band is set to SHELE GAIN Low 6 Inthe same way adjust the EQ for the other channels Tip The meters in the upper right corner of the page indicate the post EQ signal levels of the currently selected Input Channel If these meters reach the OVER position lower the pre EQ signal level using the ATT parameter control located in the upper left on the page You can also apply EQ to the Input Channel signals returned from the recorder In this way you can process only the monitoring signals without affecting the signals being recorded to the recorder You can use the EQ settings programs in the provided EQ library for various applications and instruments Compressing the Inp
448. sert Display mode 2 Press the FADER MODE AUX 8 button The AUX 8 button indicator flashes You can now select a channel to which you want to insert plug ins Press the SEL button of each desired channel 4 Make sure that the INSERT PARAM button 1 is selected in the INSERT ASSIGN EDIT section If the PARAM button is selected instead move the cursor to the button then press ENTER to select INSERT INSERT RSSIGN EDIT 5 H ASSIGN COMPARE BYPASS INSERT 1 i Insert 1 4 kick i D Verb ms Insert Mo Insert Insert a oY oD ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER Tr THONNFI MFTFD 1 mem 5 Move the cursor to the ASSIGN button 2 then press ENTER to turn on the button You can now select plug ins If you press another channel s SEL button after you turn on the ASSIGN button the button turns off If you wish to assign plug ins to other channels turn on the ASSIGN button again 6 Move the cursor to one of the four parameter controls then rotate the Parameter wheel to select a plug in By default the parameter controls enable you to select plug ins to be assigned to channel inserts 1 4 To assign a plug in to insert 5 press the Tab Scroll button amp to change the indication in the INSERT ASSIGN EDIT section If you are using the TDM system you can also assign outboard effects processors DIU SETUPIDO Initial Data ET STIL STIT EDIT REMOTE 7 po i T
449. sing MIDI Bulk Dump then have qualified Yamaha service personnel replace the backup battery e Using a mobile telephone near this unit may induce noise If noise occurs use the telephone away from the unit The digital circuits of this unit may induce a slight noise into nearby radios and TVs If noise occurs relocate the affected equipment When you change the wordclock settings on any device in your digital audio system some devices may output noise so turn down your power amps beforehand otherwise your speakers may be damaged XLR type connectors are wired as follows IEC60268 standard pin 1 ground pin 2 hot and pin 3 cold Insert TRS phone jacks are wired as follows sleeve ground tip send and ring return Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the device or data that is lost or destroyed Always turn the power off when the device is not in use The performance of components with moving contacts such as switches volume controls and connectors deteriorates over time Consult qualified Yamaha service personnel about replacing defective components The illustrations and screen displays as shown in this Owner s Manual are for instructional purposes only and may be different from the ones on your device The company names and product names in this Owner s Manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies 5 1 2
450. sion 2 Owner s Manual i ui g 120 Chapter 9 Aux Outs Copying Channel Fader Positions to Aux Sends While Aux Sends are in Variable mode you can copy all Input Channel fader positions on one layer to the corresponding Aux Sends This is convenient when you wish to send to the musicians monitor signals that have the same balance setting as the Stereo Out signals 1 Press and hold down the copy source layer LAYER 1 16 or 17 32 button Note Ifyou release the button in the LAYER section before you proceed to Step 2 you will be unable to complete the Copy operation 2 Press one ofthe FADER MODE AUX 1 AUX 8 buttons to select the desired Aux Send copy destination The confirmation window for the Copy operation appears CONFIRMATION 1 16 Level Cors to AUX 1 SEND 3 execute the Copy operation move the cursor to the YES button then press ENTER To cancel the Copy operation move the cursor to the NO button then press ENTER Tip If the copy destination Input Channel has been paired with a vertical partner in another Layer the fader position will be copied to the partner s Aux Send 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Input amp Output Patching 121 10 Input amp Output Patching This chapter describes how to patch assign signal paths within the 01V96 to its inputs outputs and slot channels Input Patching Signals input at INPUT connectors 1 16 AD
451. ssignment e 1 16 INPUT connectors 1 16 ADATI ADATS ADAT IN channels 1 8 SL 01 SL 16 Slot channels 1 16 1 1 1 2 Outputs 1 2 of Internal Effects Processor 1 2 1 2 2 Outputs 1 2 of Internal Effects Processor 2 e 1 3 2 Outputs 1 2 of Internal Effects Processor 3 e 4 1 4 2 Outputs 1 2 of Internal Effects Processor 4 e DLR 2 282 2TR IN DIGITAL L R connectors Follow the steps below to view or change the patching 2 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to a patch parameter 1 for which you want to change the assignment and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons to modify the patching 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual dnjas pue suondauu0D ES 44 Chapter 4 Connections and Setup 3 Press ENTER to confirm the change Tip To restore the default patching recall Input Patch memory 00 see page 178 Patching Omni Outs By default the output connectors are patched as follows OMNI OUT connectors 1 4 Aux Out 1 4 ADAT OUT channels 1 8 Bus Out 1 8 Slot channels 1 8 Bus Out 1 8 Slot channels 9 16 Bus Out 1 8 ZTR DIGITAL connectors Stereo Out amp Tip The STEREO OUT connect
452. t co co co 125 45 6 7 5 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 7 While the musicians play the musical instruments adjust faders 1 8 MON ITOR OUT control and PHONES control to set the appropriate monitoring level Now you can monitor via the monitoring system and headphones the signals sent from Input Channels 17 24 to the Stereo Bus Note If the L amp R level meters reach the OVER position lower the STEREO fader 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual u 56 Chapter 5 Tutorial METER Initial Data STI2 8 5 14 mG O PEAK HOLD OO 04 00 00 00 09 09 DB DB co co co 50 123 4 5 6 7 8 9 1611 12 13 14 15 16 LM NPUT i17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 es m cH 32 FST IN A MASTER M EFFECT 913 EQ ing the Input Signals The 01V96 s Input Channels feature 4 band full parametric EQ This section describes how to apply EQ to the signals before they are recorded to the tracks 1 Press the LAYER 1 16 button Input Channel Layer 1 16 is now available for control from the channel strip section 2 Press the SEL button for the Input Channel to which you want to apply EQ 3 Press the EQ button then the F1 button to display the EQ EQ Edit page The EQ Edit page enables you to adjust the EQ parameters for the currently selected chan nel Initial Data BIS 5112 5113 8714
453. t Tab Scroll Right Tab Scroll and F1 4 buttons below the display In order to simplify explanations the pro cedures reference only the DISPLAY button method See Selecting Display Pages on page 28 for details on all the ways in which you can select pages 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual New Functions in 01V96 Version 2 7 New Functions in 01V96 Version 2 The following functions have been added to the 01V96 as part of the upgrade of the firm ware from version 1 0 to version 2 0 Aux Sends If an Aux Send is set to pre fader you can set the Pre point before or after channel mute page 114 Monitor You can select whether the Input Channel s Pan setting is used when the Input Channel Solo signal is set to Pre Fader page 132 Raising the channel faders for soloed Channels from ee can unsolo the Channels page 132 Surround Pan on off status of the Follow Pan button is reflected in the pan and Surround Pan settings page 135 Group Link The Fader Group Master function enables you to control the overall level of the Fader group channels simultaneously while maintaining the relative level balance of each channel page 152 The Mute Group Master function enables you to mute all channels in a Mute group simultaneously page 153 Internal Effects You can add optional Add On Effects to the preset effects page 162 Scene Memory Any channel or parameter setti
454. t individual delay parameters here The delay parameters include the follow ing items ON OFF een This button switches the corresponding channel delay on or off SUSE This parameter sets the delay time in milliseconds meter feet sample beat frame The delay time can be set using units of meters feet samples beats or frames which you select by using the DELAY SCALE buttons SAMEN ceste eres This parameter sets the mix balance of dry Input Channel and wet delayed signals This parameter sets the amount of delay feedback 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 81 Setting the Input Channels from the Display Tip This function is unavailable for the ST IN Channels The delay time range depends on the sampling rate at which the 01V96 is operating For example at 44 1 kHz the range is 0 through 984 1 msec If you select the DELAY SCALE meter or feet button the distance value can be converted to the delay time based on sonic speeds about 340 m sec at 15 degrees Celsius This option is useful if you wish to correct the timing difference between two sound sources that are far apart If you select the DELAY SCALE beat button a parameter box for setting a note that repre sents the beat and a parameter box for a tempo BPM setting appear below the DELAY SCALE parameter Setting the note and BPM settings in these parameter boxes enables you to s
455. t links with the corresponding ON 1 8 button in the Master layer This fader sets the currently selected Aux Out 1 8 level It links with the corresponding fader 1 8 in the Master layer The fader knob is highlighted when the fader is set to 0 0 dB 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Setting Aux Out 1 8 from the Control Surface 113 Setting Aux Out 1 8 from the Control Surface You can use the faders SEL buttons and various buttons and controls in the SELECTED CHANNEL section on the top panel to directly control certain parameters for Aux Out 1 8 Setting Levels To set Aux Out 1 8 levels press the MASTER button in the LAYER section to select the Master layer then move faders 1 8 At this time you can turn Aux Out 1 8 on or off using the corresponding ON 1 8 buttons EQ settings To control Aux Out 1 8 EQ parameters select the desired Aux Out 1 8 using the corre sponding SEL button or fader then use the buttons and controls in the SELECTED CHANNEL section The parameters on this page and the procedure for setting them are the same as for Input Channels see page 83 Setting Aux Send Levels You can adjust the level of signals routed from Input Channels to the corresponding Aux Out 1 8 Setting Send Levels from the Display You can view multiple channels Aux Send levels on the screen and adjust them individually 1 Press the FADER MODE AUX 1 AUX 8 buttons
456. tedly until the Pan Route Ch Edit page appears The Ch Edit page displays the selected Input Channel and its surround pan setting and available pair partner The following display page is an example in 6 1 Surround mode PAN ROUTE tial Data 5112 5113 5114 OO us c c 6 ce HCCC C pass LFE DIY Ling m F 100 E i Oel The following parameters are available on this page 1 Surround pan graph This graph indicates the pan positions in a two dimensional field with the listening position in the center A small diamond 4 indicates the current surround pan posi tion You can move the current surround pan position J directly to one of the speaker icons by selecting its icon then pressing ENTER 2 Trajectory patterns These buttons represent seven trajectory patterns that determine how the surround pan moves when you operate the Parameter wheel or the INC DEC buttons 3 FAST Turning on this button increases the speed of sound images panned via the Parameter wheel 4 Trajectory pattern parameters These parameters fine tune the surround pan trajectory pattern WIDTH This parameter sets the left to right width of the selected tra jectory pattern DEPTH This parameter sets the front to rear width of the selected tra jectory pattern OFFSET This parameter offsets the left
457. ter and subwoofer Front L Subwoofer 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 136 6 1 Chapter 12 Surround Pan This mode uses seven channels that include six channels of 5 1 mode plus rear center When you select one of these Surround modes Subwoofer J each surround channel signal is output as the Bus Out signal specified on the DIO Setup Surr Bus page see page 139 The following table shows the factory default Surround Channel to Bus Out assignment in each Surround mode ns BUS2 BUS3 BUS4 BUSS BUS6 BUS7 3 1 R 5 Et Front left Front right Center Surround 51 L R Ls Rs LFE Front left Front right Rearleft Rear right Center Subwoofer 61 L R Ls Rs LFE Front left Front right Rearleft Rear right Center Rear center Subwoofer Tip You can set the surround pan either independently of normal panpots or in unison with them Setting Up and Selecting Surround Pan Modes To configure the surround environment select 3 1 5 1 or 6 1 Surround mode on the 01V96 and connect a digital MTR or multi channel monitoring system to the 01V96 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PAN ROUTING button repeatedly until the Pan Route Surr Mode page appears PRN ROUTE 0 CHI CHI SURROUND 5 11 5 1 Initial Data SURR BUS SETUP 3 Ei SURR MODE 01V96 Version 2 Owner s
458. tereo Out on or off e LEVEL The STEREO fader adjusts the Stereo Out output levels Balance This section enables you to adjust the level balance between the L and R channels of the Ste reo Out e OUTPUT DELAY Output delay This section delays the output signals It is mainly used to fine tune the signal timing 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 98 Chapter 8 Bus Outs METER This section enables you to switch the metering position of signal levels that are displayed on the Meter page or by the stereo meter to the right of the screen See page 34 for more information on selecting the metering position Note You can also patch the Stereo Out signals to other output connectors or the I O card by using the Patch Out Patch pages Bus Out 1 8 STEREOL The Bus Out 1 8 section mixes signals routed from Input Channels to the specified buses processes them using on board EQ compressor etc then routes them to the specified out put connectors or I O card The following diagram illustrates the Bus Out signal flow Gain Reduction Out Meter METER METER a STEREO R ON LEVEL 8 METER INSERT INSERT a INSERT METER ON LEVEL BUS 1 8 BAND om EU f PAN d BUS to STEREO OUTPUT INSERT ATT Attenuator 4 BAND EQ 4 band equalizer COMP Compressor ON
459. that more pages are available Selecting Display Pages To select a display page Press the corresponding button on the top panel to select the desired page group Display pages are grouped by function To select a page group press the desired button in the DISPLAY ACCESS section You can select pages that have currently displayed tabs by pressing the F1 F4 buttons If the selected display page group contains multiple pages press the F1 F4 buttons below the corresponding tab to select a specific page To select a page for which a tab is not currently displayed press either the Left or Right gt Tab Scroll button depending on where the page is located to display the page tab then press the corresponding F1 F4 but ton If display page groups contain more than four pages either the left or right arrow appears To display the currently hidden tabs press the Right or Left Tab Scroll button You can also select a page from a page group as follows Selecting the next page in a page group Press the button you selected in Step 1 repeatedly This enables you to select a page that has a hidden tab To select the previous page in a page group Press and hold down the button you selected in Step 1 The screen steps back through the pages one by one Release the button when the desired page is displayed This enables you to select a page that has a hidden tab To select the first page in the group
460. tings to and from the library you must locate the corresponding Effects processor s page To access the Effects library press the DISPLAY ACCESS EFFECT button repeatedly until the library page for the desired Effects processor appears Each Effects processor features the library pages listed below 5 Internal Effects Processor 1 Library FX1 Lib page 2 Internal Effects Processor 2 Library FX2 Lib page Internal Effects Processor 3 Library FX3 Lib page Internal Effects Processor 4 Library FX4 Lib page 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 180 Chapter 16 Libraries EFFECT Initial Data a CHi CHi Eid CES EFFECT NAME Reverb Hall 1 N ZOUT No LIBRARY TITLE 6 Gate Reverb 5 Early Ref 4 Reverb Plate EFFECT TYPE 3 Reverb Stage REVERB HALL 1IN ZOLIT D EFFECT NAME This parameter displays the name of the Effects program currently selected by the Effects processor 2 TYPE This parameter displays the effects type currently used by the Effects processor The number of input and output channels for the currently used effects appears below the TYPE parameter CT Move the cursor to this button then press ENTER to display the Effect FX1 Edit FX2 Edit FX3 Edit or FX4 Edit page to adjust the Effects parameters CERTES Move the cursor to this button then press ENTER to display the In Patch Effect p
461. tly different functions monaural Input Channels 1 32 and stereo ST IN Channels 1 4 Input Channels 1 32 Each of these monaural Input Channels features a phase effect gate compressor attenua tor and EQ for signal processing The following diagram illustrates the Input Channel 1 32 signal flow 89 az 58338858 GH dg kx er 202222222 0053 INPUT 1 32 v i tion 3 METER Out Meter METER INSERT a TE Mi ABAND INPUT or HHGATE n EQ DELAY 12ch Group 1 12 13 24 AUX 1 8 Gain Reduction Out Meter METER METER i 4 7 9 0 o compL o 2077 1 d 080 Keyin o Self or Stereo Link So DIRECT OUT 1 32 Input Channels 1 32 feature the following parameters e Phase This section switches the phase of input signals e This dynamics processor can be used as a gate or for ducking e COMP Compressor This dynamics processor can be used as compressor expander or limiter The compressor can be pre EQ pre fader or post fader e ATT Attenuator This section enables you to attenuate or amplify the level of signals that will be input to the EQ The attenuator enables you to prevent post EQ signals from clipping and to correct sig nal
462. to right direction of the selected trajectory pattern OFFSET This parameter offsets the front to rear direction of the selected trajectory pattern 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Surround Panning 143 6 LFE This parameter control sets the level of the LFE Low Frequency Effects Channel signal routed to the subwoofer and appears only in 5 1 and 6 1 Surround modes F R In 6 1 Surround mode F and R parameter controls appear The F parameter control determines how the Front Center signal is fed to the Left and Right channels and the R parameter control determines how the rear surround signal is fed to the Left and Right surround channels 6 DIV This parameter control instead of the F R parameter control appears in 3 1 or 5 1 Sur round mode and determines how the Center signal is fed to the Left Right and Center channels It is expressed as a percentage ranging from 0 to 100 When you set the parameter to 100 the Center signal is fed to only the Center channel When you set the parameter to 0 the Center signal is fed to only the Left and Right channels When you set the parameter to 50 the Center signal is fed equally to the Left Right and Center channels LINK This button is available only in 6 1 Surround mode When you turn on this button the F and R controls are set to the same value and linked together 8 ST LINK Turning on this button links the surround pan parameters
463. total block number DATA Oddddddd ds COMP Library data of block bb Oddddddd de CHECK SUM ee ee Invert L de 1 amp 0x7F EOX 11110111 F7 End ofexclusive 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 2 8 2 18 Compressor library bulk dump request format The second and third bytes ofthe DATA NAME indicate the bank number See above STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump 01001100 4c 1 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 00100000 20 00 000 38 8 01000011 43 00 001 39 9 00110011 33 3 DATA NAME 01011001 59 Y Ommmmmmm mh 0 127 COMP Library no 1 128 Ommmmmmm ml 256 Channel current data EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 2 8 2 19 Gate library bulk dump format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number 0 Library no 1 127 Library no 128 256 CH1 287 CH32 8192 UNDO 256 and following are data for the corresponding channel of the edit buffer For reception by the 01V96 only the user area is valid 4 127 256 STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0000nnnn On n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump COUNT HIGH ch data count ch 128 cl COUNT LOW cl 01001100 4c
464. trol from the channel strip section 3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS PAN ROUTING button repeatedly until the Pan Route Rout17 STI page appears 4 Make sure that the S buttons for Input Channels 25 and 26 are turned on and the 1 8 buttons are turned off 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 62 Chapter 5 Tutorial 5 Press the F1 button to display the Pan Route Pan page then use the PAN parameter controls on the page to pan channel signals PAN ROUTE Initial Data 8 5 STI2 5713 514 om amu 0 O 7 FIR INPUT Do E 5 CENTER CENTER 113 CENTER 131 R10 R47 REJ L63 R63 16 9 18 11 12 13 14 15 CO D 00 DOC D CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER L53 R53 SL SR L63 LE3 RB3 L23 ROB Reo 110 L63 RBS 26 27 28 29 31 32 4L 4R Q LES RiP CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER L63 PAN E ROUTI 16 AROuT17 STI A BUS TO ST rja 6 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS HOME button then press the F1 button to dis play the Meter CH1 32 page 7 Make sure that ON button indicators 9 and 10 are steadily lit 8 While the musicians play the musical instruments raise faders 9 and 10 to set the appropriate monitoring level If necessary play back the recording on the digital MTR and adjust the volume balance between the recorded and recording signals Recording 1 Start recording on the digital MTR and cue the mus
465. ttenuate the Bus Out 1 8 Aux Out 1 8 and Stereo Out signals E 2 E E to Em H D EH Initial Data CHi CHI 0 ask o OUTPUT ATTENUATOR BUS1 BUS 4 5 5 1 2 3 7 8 GdB GdB GdB GdB GdB de GdB AUX 4 5 5 1 2 3 8 UJ 90090100 5 dB GdB de de de de de O STEREO EG EDIT LIBRARY ZA ATT f OUT RTT The parameters on this page and the procedure for setting them are the same as for Input Channels see page 83 Delaying the Stereo Out and Bus Outs To delay the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1 8 signals press the INSERT DELAY button repeatedly until the INS DLY Out Dly page appears 67 INS DLY Initial Data 815717 5112 5113 STI4 1 1 Oo 9 DELAY SCALE sampe Em BUS 1 2 3 4 15 16 7 1 8 0 9 0 0 0 0 e e e msec samr e AUX 12 31 i 8 1 7 8 tiga Ger GE EE Ger 55 msecl 08 0 0 0 0 0 Isamriel ei ei ei ei ei ei ei e STEREO GEF msec 0 0 Isamriel parameters on this page and the procedure for setting them the same as for Input Channels except that this page does not include the MIX FB GAIN parameters see Tip You can also display the Out Dly page by pressing the
466. tton to display the Gate Edit page which enables you to adjust gate parameters Recording When you finish setting up each channel you can start recording on the digital MTR as fol lows 1 Start recording on the digital MTR and cue the musicians to start playing the musical instruments During recording press the HOME button to display the Meter CH1 32 page or the Master page and check to confirm that the Input Channel levels and Bus 1 8 output levels are not clipping 2 When you finish playing stop the digital MTR To check the recording play the digital MTR from the beginning 4 If you are satisfied with the recording stop the playback and disarm Tracks 1 8 on the recorder Tip If the digital MTR supports MMC MIDI Machine Control commands you can use the 01 96 Machine Control function to select tracks or locate a position on the recorder from the 01V96 see page 212 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 60 Chapter 5 Tutorial Overdubbing to Other Tracks This section describes how to overdub the musical instruments or microphone connected to the INPUT connectors 1 and 2 to the digital MTR s Tracks 9 and 10 while listening to the performance recorded on Tracks 1 8 Setting the Input Levels 1 Connect the musical instruments to INPUT connectors 1 and 2 and adjust the corre sponding PAD switches GAIN PAD switch trols so that the PEAK indi
467. ual 238 Chapter 19 Other Functions 3 PASSWORD This button enables you to change the current password Move the cursor to the PASS WORD button then press ENTER The Set Password window appears enabling you to change the password SET PASSWORD USE SEL1 SEL1 PASSWORD mM PASSWORD REENTRY Enter the current password in the PASSWORD field and a new password in the NEW PASSWORD field The factory default password is 1234 Enter the new password again in the REENTRY field located below the NEW PASSWORD field Move the cursor to the OK button then press ENTER to change the password Tip To clear the registered password move the cursor to the CLEAR button then press ENTER If you forget the password initialize the password setting see page 243 Cascading Consoles The 01V96 features a Cascade Bus that enables cascade connection You can connect two 01V96s in cascade using the digital inputs and outputs or the OMNI IN and OMNI OUT connectors In this way two consoles work just like one big console integrating each unit s Buses 1 8 Aux Sends 1 8 Stereo Bus and Solo Bus The following functions are linked between two cascaded 01V96s via the MIDI IN and OUT ports Display page selection Aux selection Solo function Fader Mode e Metering Position Peak Hold On Off Meter Fast Fall on off Scene Store Recall and Title Edit Tip To link functions and paramet
468. ufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0000nnnn On n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump COUNT HIGH ch data count ch 128 cl COUNT LOW cl 01001100 4c 1 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000011 43 00111001 39 9 00110011 33 3 01010011 53 S 00000010 02 00000000 00 No 256 Current BLOCK INFO Ottttttt tt total block number minimum number is 0 DATA NAME Obbbbbbb bb current block number 0 total block number DATA Oddddddd ds Setup data of block bb Oddddddd de CHECK SUM ee Invert L de 1 amp 0x7F EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 2 8 2 4 Setup memory bulk dump request format STATUS 1 ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump 01001100 4c 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 10000 FO System exclusive message 01000011 43 00111001 39 9 00110011 33 3 DATA NAME 01010011 53 5 00000010 02 00000000 00 No 256 Current EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 2 8 2 5 User Defined MIDI Remote bulk dump format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number Be aware that the state of the transmission destination will in some cases change if the same bank is being
469. up Monitor page appears DIOZSETUP Iniilial Data 3 8113 STIZ 51 3 STI4 CHI CHI 0 Emm C9 MONITOR SOLO ENABLED 0 PRE FADER SOLO TRIN SOLO TRIM FADER SOLO RELEASE 5 AFTER PAN INPUT CH This page contains the following parameters D SOLO This parameter turns the Solo function on or off By default it is set to Enabled 2 MODE This parameter determines how the Solo function works There are two options The setting affects only Input Channels RECORDING In Recording Solo mode soloed Input Channel signals are fed to the Solo bus and output via the Monitor outputs Other buses Stereo bus and Bus 1 8 are unaffected by this mode MIXDOWN In Mixdown Solo mode soloed Input Channel signals are fed to the Stereo bus and output via the Monitor outputs Unso loed Input Channels are not fed to the Stereo bus while the Solo function is enabled Tip Recording Solo mode is convenient when you wish to monitor certain Input Channels while recording since the Stereo bus and Bus 1 8 signals are unaffected Mixdown Solo mode is useful when you wish to mute unsoloed Input Channels and feed soloed Input Channel signals to the Stereo bus during mixdown 8 SEL MODE This parameter determines how the Input Channels will be soloed when you press the SOLO button of each Channel There are two options
470. urce for the system Follow the steps below Note When you change the wordclock settings on any device in your digital audio system some devices may output noise due to being out of synchronization Be sure to turn down your monitoring device before changing wordclock settings 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the DIO Setup Word Clock page appears On this page you can view the current synchronization status of input signals at each slot and connector DIO SETUP Initial Data STI2 5113 5714 cien VO 0 oO CLOCK SELECT ORD CLOCK FORMAT PREFER MA PREFER E l3 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 42 Chapter 4 Connections and Setup The source select button indicators are explained below 54 4 H X lt A usable wordclock signal is present at this input and it is in sync with the current 01V96 internal clock No wordclock signal is present at this input A usable wordclock signal is present at this input but it is out of sync with the current 01V96 internal clock This input is the currently selected wordclock source This input was selected as the wordclock source but no usable signal was received Fither this input is not receiving wordclock or else it cannot be used with the cur rently installed I O card Tip The FS box displays the sampling frequency at which the 01V96 is currently operating The SLOT TY
471. urns the Stereo Out on or off and links with the ON button in the STE REO section 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1 8 from the Display 103 3 Fader This fader adjusts the Stereo Out output levels and links with the STEREO fader The fader knob is highlighted when the fader is set to 0 0 dB e Bus Out 1 8 Fader page gusi eus OO O en CD ON OFF This button turns the currently selected Bus Out 1 8 on or off and links with the ON 9 16 button in the Master layer 2 Fader This fader sets the currently selected Bus Out 1 8 level and links with the fader 9 16 in the Master layer The fader knob is highlighted when the fader is set to 0 0 dB 3 TO ST PAN This control sets the Bus Out to Stereo Out Pan position for the currently selected Bus Out 1 8 4 TO ST ON OFF This button turns on or off the Bus Out to Stereo Out signal for the currently selected Bus Out 1 8 6 TO ST Fader This fader sets the Bus Out to Stereo Out signal level for the currently selected Bus Out 1 8 sno sng The TO ST PAN ON OFF and TO ST Fader parameters also appear on the Pan Route Bus to St page 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 104 Chapter 8 Bus Outs Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1 8 from the Control Surface You can use the faders SEL buttons and various buttons and controls in the SELECTED CHAN
472. urrently selected Input Channel is routed to the Stereo Bus When this button is turned on the currently selected Input Channel is routed to its Direct Out See page 125 for more information on the Direct Out 5 ALL STEREO This button turns on the S button for all channels on the page 8 ALL BUS This button turns on the Bus buttons 1 8 for all channels on the page 7 ALL CLEAR This button clears all routing assignments on the page SURROUND MODE This field displays the current Surround mode Tip The routings of the ST IN Channels L amp R are linked The D button is unavailable for the ST IN Channels Viewing Input Channel Settings You can view and adjust parameter settings for the currently selected Input Channel on the View Parameter or Fader pages Viewing the Gate Compressor and EQ Settings To display the View Parameter page for a specific Input Channel use the corresponding SEL button to select the desired channel then press the DISPLAY ACCESS VIEW but ton repeatedly Move the cursor to a parameter you wish to change then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the INC DEC buttons or ENTER button to modify the setting INSERT 40 E KNEE come amp GdB 2 PARAMETER VIEH Initial Datla miseri STI2 STIS STI4 CHI CHI DO sin 0 o V V com LOW L MID H MID HIGH L SHELF 0 70 0 70 H SHELF 2 4 En
473. usive 2 8 2 24 Channel library bulk dump request format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number See above STATUS 11110000 ID No 01000011 SUB STATUS 00 FORMAT No 0111 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110011 01001000 Ommmmmmm Onnnn 110 DATA NAME Ommmmmmm EOX 11110111 FO 43 2n 7E 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 33 48 mh ml F7 System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel Universal bulk dump 0 128 Channel Library no 0 128 256 Current data End of exclusive 2 8 2 25 Input patch library bulk dump format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number 0 Library no 0 32 Library no 32 256 current input patch data 8192 UNDO For reception by the 01V96 only the user area is valid 1 32 256 8192 STATUS 11110000 ID No 01000011 SUB STATUS 0000nnnn FORMAT No 01111110 COUNT HIGH COUNT LOW 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110011 DATA 01010010 Ommmmmmm Ommmmmmm BLOCK INFO Ottttttt Obbbbbbb DATA Oddddddd Oddddddd CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee EOX 11110111 FO 43 On 7E ch 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 33 52 mh ml tt bb ds de ee T System exclusive message Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel Universal bulk dump data count
474. ut Signals The 01V96 s Input Channels 1 32 feature individual channel compressors This section describes how to compress the signals before they are recorded to the tracks 1 Press the LAYER 1 16 button Input Channel Layer 1 16 is now available for control from the channel strip section 2 Pressthe SEL button of the Input Channel to which you want to apply com pression 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 58 Chapter 5 Tutorial 3 Press the DYNAMICS button then press the F4 button The Dynamics Comp Lib page appears This page enables you to store compressor settings programs to the Compressor library and recall compressor programs from the library This example uses one of the compressor programs 1 36 from the Compressor library DYNAMICS 0 Initial Data a CH8 CH8 COMP LIBRARY CURRENT CURVE CURRENT TYPE COMP LIBRARY TITLE A Dr ED R Dr BD Compander 5 CompPandert Rotate the Parameter wheel to scroll the library title list and select a pro gram that you want to recall The selected program appears inside the dotted box LIBRARY TITLE B Finser Dr verTop Move the cursor to the RECALL button located to the left of the library title list then press ENTER The selected program is recalled Press the F3 button The 01V96 displays the Dynamics Comp Edit page which enables you to adjust compres sor parameters 01V96 Version 2
475. ut basic stereo delay Effects Parameters DELAY LCR 261 One input two output 3 tap delay left center Parameter Range Description right DELAYL 0 0 1350 0 ms Left channel delay time Parameter Range Description DELAYR 0 0 1350 0 ms Right channel delay time DELAYL 0 0 2730 0 ms Left channel delay time on Teedback plus Vd DELAY C 0 0 2730 0 ms Center channel delay time ues for normal phase feedback FB GL 99 to 99 minus values for reverse phase DELAY R 0 0 2730 0 ms Right channel delay time feedback FB DLY 0 0 2730 0 ms Feedback delay time Right channel feedback plus val LEVEL L 100 to 100 Left channel delay level FB GR 299 to 49996 ues for normal phase feedback LEVEL C 100 to 100 Center channel delay level minus values for reverse phase feedback LEVEL R 100 to 100 Right channel delay level HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio acea d 4 THRU High fil ff f GAIN er 21 2 Hz 8 00 kHz igh pass filter cutoff frequency Back LPF a 6 0 kHz Low pass filter cutoff frequency HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio THRU SYNC OFF ON Tempo parameter sync on off HPF 212 Hz 8 00 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency Used in conjunction with 50 0 Hz 16 0 kHz NOTEL 1 TEMPO to determine left chan LPF THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency nel DELAY
476. ut the paired channel settings are linked on the EQ Edit and View pages Note You cannot pair an ST IN channel 1 4 with an Input Channel To pair channels or to cancel channel pairs you can use the SEL buttons on the top panel or access the Pair Grup pages Pairing Channels by Using the SEL Buttons 1 While pressing and holding down the SEL button for one of the channels you wish to pair press the SEL button for the adjacent channel The paired channel numbers should be odd and even in this order When the Pair Confirmation check box is on the Channel Pairing window appears CHANNEL PAIRING Make Pair CANCEL CHI gt 2 CHZ gt 1 Note You can pair only channels that adjacent odd even inthisorder channels Pressing the SEL button for a non adjacent channel will be ignored You cannot create or cancel a pair of vertical partners 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual You can set this parameter for each channel independent ly if the GANG button is turned off on the INS DLY 93 Pairing Input Channels Move the cursor to the desired button in the Channel Pairing window then press ENTER The following buttons are available in this window CANCEL Cancels the operation CHx gt y Copies the odd channel parameter values to the even channel CHy gt x Copies the even channel parameter values to the odd channel R
477. uttons to select the copy source channel The number of the source channel is highlighted You can also select Group Masters internal Effects and a User Defined Remote layer as copy sources Use the cursor buttons or Parameter wheel to select the copy source param eter then press the ENTER button Press the DISPLAY ACCESS SCENE button repeatedly until the Paste DST page appears SCENE EXTRA MIM STI1 STI2 STI3 STI4 mG Q9 C9 GLOBAL PASTE DESTINATION SCENE 3t ETRA NIS Ma N FROM INTRO x AT PASTE 05 Use the Parameter wheel or INC DEC buttons to select the destination scene s Scenes specified between FROM and TO inclusive become the paste destination You can paste up to 10 scenes at a time Use the cursor buttons to select the PASTE button then use the ENTER but ton to paste the settings You cannot paste the settings to write protected scenes To restore the previous settings that existed before the paste operation click the UNDO button then press Enter However if the settings in the scene are changed after the paste operation such as by saving clearing or sorting the scene or receiving scene data via MIDI Bulk Dump the UNDO function is disabled Also note that you will not be able to undo the operation after you turn off the power to the console 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Libraries 175 16 Libraries This chapter describes the
478. values and reset the Operation Lock password to its initial setting Follow the steps below Note Ifyou initialize the 01V96 to the factory preset values all Scene library and other data you stored previously will be erased Proceed with caution If you want to keep the current internal data be sure to first back up the data using the included Studio Manager software Tip You can also store the data to an external MIDI device such as a MIDI data filer by using MIDI Bulk Dump see page 226 1 Make sure that the power to the 01V96 is turned off 2 While holding down the SCENE MEMORY STORE button turn on the POWER ON OFF switch After a moment the 01V96 displays the following confirmation window CONF RMAT I ON Initialize or Password Reset CRHNCEL I LINITIALIZE PASSWORD 3 To reset the 01V96 to factory default settings move the cursor to the INI TIALIZE button then press ENTER To cancel the initialization operation move the cursor to the CANCEL button then press ENTER When the internal data is thoroughly overwritten the 01V96 restarts using the factory set tings 4 To reset the Operation Lock password to its initial setting in Step 2 move the cursor to the PASSWORD button then press ENTER The password is reset to 1234 If you do not take any action after the confirmation window appears the window automat ically closes and the 01V96 restarts without bei
479. witches its indicator to not assigned 5 Adjust the level of Aux Sends patched to the effects processor Refer to 9 Aux Outs on page 109 for information on setting the Aux Sends Note Do not raise the level of the Aux Sends patched to the effects processor s input on the effects return channels Otherwise the signal will return to the same channel creating a signal loop and possibly damaging your speakers j29Jj3 1 Tip Use the Master layer fader to adjust the final Aux Send output level At this time you can view the level on the Meter Master page see page 35 6 Adjust the level pan and EQ of the Input Channels patched to the effect outputs Tip To mix the effects sound returned via the Aux sends with the original dry sound set the effect s MIX BALANCE parameter to 100 only the effects sound will be output 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 160 Chapter 14 Internal Effects Inserting the Internal Effects into Channels You can insert the internal effects into certain Input Channels or Output Channels Bus 1 8 Aux Bus 1 8 or the Stereo Bus Note You cannot use Insert In and Out for ST IN Channels If effects are inserted in channels you cannot use those effects via Aux Sends or insert them into other channels Select an internal Effects processor 1 4 then recall the desired effect pro grams Pr
480. xclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 3E MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID 00001101 OD 01 96 ADDRESS 00100001 21 Remote meter Ommmmmmm mm ADDRESS UL Ommmmmmm mm ADDRESS LU Ommmmmmm mm ADDRESS LL DATA Oddddddd dd Datal H Oddddddd Datal L EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive Meter data uses the unmodified DECAY value of the DSP The inter pretation of the data will depend on the parameter 2 8 3 24 Parameter request Remote Meter Reception This is received if Parameter change RX is ON and the Rx CH matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS This is echoed if Parameter change ECHO is ON When this is received data of the specified address is transmitted on the Rx MIDI Data Format 317 CH at intervals of 50 msec as a rule although this may not be the case if the port is being used by other communication for a period of 10 seconds If Address UL 0x7F is received transmission of all meter data will be halted immediately disable Transmission If Parameter Change ECHO is ON this message is retransmitted without change STATUS 11110000 FO System exclusive message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacture s ID number YAMAHA SUB STATUS O001innnn n 0 15 Device number MIDI Channel GROUP ID 00111110 3E MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID 00001101 OD 01 96 ADDRESS 00100001 21 Remote meter O
481. y be linked with that scene When you recall that scene this library number will also be automatically recalled You can also move the cursor to the param eter boxes and change the library numbers Auto Scene Memory Update If the Scene MEM Auto Update check box on the Setup 1 page see page 230 is turned on parameter edits are stored automatically in a Shadow memory which is avail able for each Scene This is called the Auto Update function If the Auto Update function is enabled parameter edits made after the Scene was recalled are stored in the Scene s Shadow memory When you again recall the Scene the contents of the Original and Shadow memories are recalled alternately Therefore even after you recall the Original Scene memory you can recall the edited version from Shadow memory to restore the most recent edits If the EDIT indicator appears at the top of the display the edited version from Shadow memory has been recalled i02 My scene Display i02 My scene 0257 Edit indicator Original Scene Shadow memory If a Shadow memory is recalled the edited version is stored when you store the Scene The contents of the Original and Shadow memories then become identical SalJOUJ9 A SU9IS 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual 170 Chapter 15 Scene Memories Fading Scenes You can specify the time it takes the Input and Output Channel faders or level controls to move
482. ype used on legacy Yamaha 02R series digital mixing consoles TYPE II is a newly developed algorithm 3 ATT Determines the amount of pre EQ signal attenuation in dB It is the same Attenuator parameter that appears on the EQ ATT In page 4 CURVE This area displays the current EQ curve 5 Meters These meters indicate the post EQ signal levels of the currently selected Input Channel and its available pair partner 6 LOW L MID H MID HIGH sections These sections contain the Q Frequency F and Gain G parameters for the four bands These parameter values range as follows Parameter LOW LOW MID HIGH MID HIGH HPF 10 0 to 0 10 LPF 10 0 to 0 10 Q 41 steps L SHELF 10 0 te CNOA Steps 41 steps H SHELF Frequency 21 2 Hz to 20 0 kHz 120 steps per 1 12 octave Gain 18 0 dB to 18 0 dB 0 1 dB steps 1 The LOW and HIGH GAIN controls function as filter on off controls when Q is set to HPF or LPF respectively 01V96 Version 2 Owner s Manual Setting the Input Channels from the Display 85 Tip The LOW band EQ functions as a high pass filter when the parameter in the LOW section is set to HPF It functions as a shelving type EQ when the parameter is set to L SHELF The HIGH band EQ functions as a low pass filter when the parameter in the HIGH sec tion is set to LPF It functions as a shelving type EQ when the parameter is set to H SHELF 3 Move the curs

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Model 450 Gaussmeter User`s Manual, 2002  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file